Manual GS3

*DCY*
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display

*OMPFP13946*
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display
OMPFP13946 ISSUE J3 (ENGLISH)
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents

are known to the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects, and other reproductive harm.
If this product contains a gasoline engine:
WARNING
The engine exhaust from this product contains

chemicals known to the State of California to cause
*OMPFP13946*
cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm.
The State of California requires the above two warnings.

Additional Proposition 65 Warnings can be found in this manual.
John Deere Ag Management Solutions

PRINTED IN U.S.A.
Introduction
www.StellarSupport.com
NOTE: Product functionality may not be fully represented in this document due to product changes occurring after the time of printing. Read the
latest Operator's Manual and Quick Reference Guide prior to operation. To obtain a copy, see your dealer or visit www.StellarSupport.com
OUO6050,0000FB1 -19-10AUG10-1/1
Read This Manual on vehicles equipped with a cab. Improper

use may void warranty.
Before operating display/software, familiarize yourself
with components and procedures required for safe • Original GreenStar Display and Mobile
and proper operation. Processor
IMPORTANT: The following GreenStar components
• GreenStar Displays
are not weather-proof and should only be used
• AutoTrac Universal Steering Kit
JS56696,0000491 -19-04JUN10-1/1
103113
PN=2
Contents
Page
Page
Safety
Recognize Safety Information ............................05-1
Understand Signal Words...................................05-1 Display Setup
Follow Safety Instructions...................................05-1 Display Software Activations ..............................35-1
Practice Safe Maintenance.................................05-2 Obtaining Activation Code & Activating
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly ..................05-2 Software on Display .......................................35-1
Handle Electronic Components and Managing Activations .........................................35-2
Brackets Safely ..............................................05-3 Display
Operate Guidance Systems Safely ....................05-3 Display Soft-key (F)........................................35-3
Use Seat Belt Properly .......................................05-3 Display Brightness Control .................................35-5
Read Operator Manuals for ISOBUS Settings Soft-key (G)......................................35-6
Implements.....................................................05-4 Diagnostics Soft-key (I) ..................................35-7
Avoid Backover Accidents ..................................05-4 Calculator ...........................................................35-8
Safety Signs Layout Manager

Implement Detected Warning .............................10-1 Layout Manager..................................................40-1
Automatic Guidance System Detected...............10-1 Configure Multiple RUN pages ...........................40-5
Auxiliary Control Safety Signs ............................10-1
GreenStar General
Getting Started License Agreement ............................................45-1
Theory of Operation............................................15-1 GREENSTAR 3 PRO Softkey.............................45-1
Front of Display ..................................................15-2 Setup Wizard ......................................................45-2
Back of Display...................................................15-3 EQUIPMENT softkey..........................................45-3
USB Drive...........................................................15-3 MACHINE and IMPLEMENT Tabs .....................45-4
Capturing Screenshots .......................................15-4 Machine Setup....................................................45-5
Screen Layout ....................................................15-5 Implement Setup ................................................45-8
Resources Softkey ...........................................45-14
Fields ................................................................45-14
Installation
Field Locator.....................................................45-15
Installation in Most GreenStar Ready
Mapping Softkey...............................................45-15
Machines........................................................20-1
MAPS tab .........................................................45-16
Power Up............................................................20-2
Boundaries Tab.................................................45-21
Installation in a John Deere Vehicle
Delete and Rename Boundaries ......................45-23
with an ISOBUS Display ................................20-3
Driven Headland Offset Boundary....................45-24
Moving ISO Implement Applications
Top And Bottom Offsets Boundary ...................45-26
between Two ISOBUS Displays.....................20-4
Constant Offset Boundary ................................45-29
View Multiple Display Settings............................20-4
FLAGS tab........................................................45-30
Managing User Access
Managing User Access—Theory of Operation ...25-1
Guidance
Read This Manual ..............................................50-1
Guidance Systems .............................................50-1
Display Navigation GUIDANCE Softkey............................................50-2
Input Fields .........................................................30-1 VIEW Tab............................................................50-3
Display Secondary Navigation............................30-2 Tracking Mode Identifiers ...................................50-5
Display Control ...................................................30-2 Moving Map view and Perspective View ............50-7
Full Screen Mapping...........................................50-8
GUIDANCE SETTINGS Tab...............................50-9
Continued on next page
Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this

manual are based on the latest information available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
COPYRIGHT © 2013
DEERE & COMPANY
Moline, Illinois
All rights reserved.
A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION ® Manual
i 103113
PN=1
Contents
Page Page
Turning View.....................................................50-10 DOCUMENTATION softkey................................65-3

Turn Predictor...................................................50-10 Field and Task Notes ..........................................65-4
Recording Turn Points......................................50-10 Operations ..........................................................65-5
Predicting Turn Points ...................................... 50-11 Controllers ..........................................................65-6
Lead Compensation .........................................50-13 Remove, Disable, and Enable Operations .........65-6
Vehicle Heading Arrow .....................................50-13 Using Documentation with Planters....................65-7
Shift Track Settings ..........................................50-15 Using Documentation with Seeder/Air Carts ....65-15
StarFire Signal Monitoring System ...................50-17 Seeding Product Details—Europe Only ...........65-18
Row Finder Mode .............................................50-18 Using Documentation with a Dry
Straight Track Mode .........................................50-18 Box/SpreadStar............................................65-21
Adaptive Curve Mode .......................................50-26 Product Application Product
AB Curve Mode ................................................50-39 Details—Europe Only...................................65-23
Circle Track Mode ............................................50-47 Tank Mixes........................................................65-24
Swap Track Mode.............................................50-51 Viewing Locked Tank Mixes .............................65-27
Tram Lines........................................................50-54 Harvest Documentation ....................................65-28
AutoTrac Setup.................................................50-57 Harvest Documentation Setup..........................65-29
AutoTrac System Accuracy ..............................50-74 Harvest Monitor Setup......................................65-32
AutoTrac Tractors .............................................50-76 Harvest Machine Setup ....................................65-36
AutoTrac Sprayers............................................50-78 Harvest Monitor Yield Calibration .....................65-39
AutoTrac Combines..........................................50-79 Harvest Monitor Moisture Correction................65-42
AutoTrac™ Windrowers ...................................50-80 Harvest Monitor Cotton Setup ..........................65-45
AutoTrac Cotton Harvester...............................50-81 Harvest Monitor Cotton Calibration ..................65-49
AutoTrac Self-Propelled Forage Harvesters.....50-82 Tillage Operation ..............................................65-52
AutoTrac Sugar Cane Harvester ......................50-83 Map Based Prescriptions..................................65-53
AutoTrac Universal ...........................................50-83 Shapefile Converter..........................................65-55
Connecting 3rd-Party Controllers .....................65-58
Original GreenStar Monitor Simultaneous Documentation and
Compatible Systems...........................................55-1 Prescriptions with John Deere and
Operating Original GreenStar Monitor................55-1 3rd-Party Controllers ....................................65-59
Other Operation................................................65-59
Surface Water Management.............................65-59
Performance Monitor
Performance Monitor ..........................................60-1
Performance Monitor Setup................................60-1 Totals
UPM (UNIVERSAL PERFORMANCE TOTALS Softkey.................................................70-1
MONITOR) Functionality ................................60-2 Harvest Totals.....................................................70-2
Recording Sources for UPM...............................60-5 General Overview...............................................70-2
Recording Sources for APM ...............................60-6 Set Up Totals on Home Page .............................70-3
Performance Monitor ..........................................60-7 Configuring Totals...............................................70-3
PERFORMANCE MONITOR CALIBRATIONS ..60-8 Viewing Current Harvest Data ............................70-6
Configuring Tractor For DIRECT GPS Crop Season.......................................................70-6
or Ground Based Radar Feed Overlap Control ..................................................70-7
(CAN-Based Vehicles ONLY) .........................60-9 Recording Load Data..........................................70-7
Dual Beam Radar Sensor Only Adding to an Existing Load.................................70-9
(Automatic Calibration)...................................60-9 Additional Load Tips ...........................................70-9
Calibrating Dual Beam Radar...........................60-10 Viewing Current Totals Reports ..........................70-9
RADAR CONNECTION SIGNAL Viewing Filtered Totals Reports ........................ 70-11
VALIDATION (UPM MODE ONLY)...............60-10
PERFORMANCE MONITOR TOTALS John Deere Section Control
SCREEN ......................................................60-12 Theory of Operation............................................75-1
ADVANCED PERFORMANCE Compatibility .......................................................75-1
MONITOR (APM) .........................................60-15 Boundaries .........................................................75-1
Additional Functions Available in APM Mode ...60-17 Coverage Map ....................................................75-1
Accuracy.............................................................75-1
Documentation Limitations of Section Control.............................75-2
No GPS Documentation .....................................65-1 Required Setup...................................................75-3
Turning Documentation ON and OFF.................65-1 Section Control Softkey ......................................75-3
How Documentation Organizes Data .................65-2 Summary ............................................................75-4
ii 103113
PN=2
Contents
Page Page
Section Status Bar..............................................75-4 Auxiliary Control Softkey .............................. 110-7

View by Operation ..............................................75-5 Auxiliary Controls Page—Implement
Rates and Sections ............................................75-5 Function Mapping......................................... 110-8
Settings...............................................................75-6 Auxiliary Controls—Assignment Error
Overlap Settings .................................................75-7 Messages................................................... 110-12
Turn on and Turn off Settings .............................75-8 Auxiliary Controls—Preferred Assignments ... 110-14
Section Control Map Settings .............................75-9 Auxiliary Controls—Conflicts and
Enabling............................................................75-10 Disabled Functions..................................... 110-15
Understand Section Control Turn On
and Turn Off Settings ................................... 75-11 COM Port Assignment
Diagnostic Readings.........................................75-13 Why Assign the COM Port?.............................. 115-1
Section Control Settings Quick Sheet—Metric ..75-15 Setup COM Port ............................................... 115-2
Section Control Settings Quick Sheet—SAE....75-17 Com Port Settings ............................................ 115-3
COM Port Settings—3rd Party Control Units.... 115-4
CANBUS COM Port Setting Review................................. 115-6
CANBUS Theory of Operation............................80-1 Deactivate COM Port........................................ 115-7
ISOBUS Virtual Terminal and Virtual Com Port Settings ............................................ 115-8
Implement Theory of Operation .....................80-8
YARA N-Sensor
ISO Implements YARA N-Sensor................................................120-1
Implement Detected Warning .............................85-1
Operating ISO Implement...................................85-1 GreenSeeker®
ISO Implements..................................................85-2 GPS Settings ....................................................125-1
Multiple ISO Implements ....................................85-4 GreenSeeker ....................................................125-2
Softkeys..............................................................85-5
Data Cleanup......................................................85-5
Central Insecticide System
Central Insecticide System ...............................130-1
John Deere Implement Detection
Theory of Operation............................................90-1
Implement Detection...........................................90-1
Connecting RS-232 GPS Receivers
GreenStar Equipment Settings...........................90-2 Connecting RS-232 GPS Receivers.................135-1
Implement Offsets and Widths ...........................90-6 RS232 Harness kit............................................135-2
Implement Detection and APEX .........................90-7
Video
Video Application..............................................140-1
Remote Display Access
Installing Video .................................................140-1
Theory of Operation............................................95-1
Video Settings ..................................................140-1
Requirements .....................................................95-1
Video Viewing...................................................140-3
Remote Display Access Session........................95-2
Adjusting Video Image Quality .........................140-3
Troubleshooting..................................................95-4
Additional Information.........................................95-5
Data Management
Theory of Operation..........................................145-1
Wireless Data Transfer
Data Transfer Options ......................................145-1
Theory of Operation..........................................100-1
Exporting Data from the Display.......................145-2
Requirements ...................................................100-1
Importing Data to the Display ...........................145-2
Transfer Log .....................................................100-2
Importing Global or Shapefile Prescriptions .....145-3
Troubleshooting................................................100-5
Example 1 – Importing and Exporting
Documentation Data ....................................145-4
Service ADVISOR Remote Example 2 – Backup Documentation Data.......145-4
Overview...........................................................105-1 Example 3 – Transferring Guidance Lines .......145-5
Vehicle Reprogramming ...................................105-1 Example 4 – Importing Global
Troubleshooting - Reprogramming...................105-5 Prescriptions and Shapefiles........................145-5
Example 5 – Modifying a Profile .......................145-5
Auxiliary Controls Transferring Data between Two Displays.........145-5
Auxiliary Control Safety Signs .......................... 110-1 Delete Data Options .........................................145-6
Auxiliary Control Alerts ..................................... 110-2 Data Type Details .............................................145-7
iii 103113
PN=3
Contents
Page
USB Troubleshooting Tips................................145-7

Alarm – GreenStar Setup Data Invalid .............145-8
Alarm - GreenStar Setup Information Corrupt ..145-9
Updating Software
Downloading Software Updates .......................150-1
Determining Software Version on Display ........150-1
Updating Display and System Components .....150-2
Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Message Center ...............................................155-1
Viewing Basic Diagnostic Readings .................155-6
Resetting Display..............................................155-6
Pre-Season Checklist for Seeding....................155-7
Pre-Season Checklist for Guidance .................155-7
Pre-Season Section Control for
Planters Checklist ........................................155-8
Frequently Asked Questions ............................155-9
Reprogramming Error Codes .........................155-12
Alarm Screens ................................................155-13
Task Controller Alarms ...................................155-14
Diagnostic Addresses.....................................155-17
Diagnostic Trouble Codes ..............................155-19
Trouble Code Pop-Up Boxes—Platform
Core Software ............................................155-20
Trouble Code Pop-Up Boxes—Docu-
mentation Software ....................................155-22
GreenStar Diagnostics ...................................155-23
Repeat Mode ..................................................155-23
Guidance Alarms ............................................155-24
Trouble Code Pop-Up Boxes—Guid-
ance Software ............................................155-25
AutoTrac Deactivation Messages...................155-26
Specifications
Device Name, Source Address, and
File Directory ................................................160-1
GreenStar Sytem Component Pinout ...............160-2
26 pin Display (V1) Pinout ................................160-2
EC Declaration of Conformity ...........................160-3
Toxic or Hazardous Substances or
Elements Disclosure ....................................160-4
Identify Date Code............................................160-4
Customs Union–EAC........................................160-5
Glossary
Glossary of Terms.............................................165-1
iv 103113
PN=4
Safety
Recognize Safety Information
This is a safety-alert symbol. When you see this symbol
on your machine or in this manual, be alert to the potential
for personal injury.
Follow recommended precautions and safe operating
T81389 —UN—28JUN13
practices.
DX,ALERT -19-29SEP98-1/1
Understand Signal Words

A signal word—DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION—is
used with the safety-alert symbol. DANGER identifies the
most serious hazards.
DANGER or WARNING safety signs are located near
specific hazards. General precautions are listed on
TS187 —19—30SEP88
CAUTION safety signs. CAUTION also calls attention to
safety messages in this manual.
DX,SIGNAL -19-03MAR93-1/1
Follow Safety Instructions

Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and on
your machine safety signs. Keep safety signs in good
condition. Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Be
sure new equipment components and repair parts include
the current safety signs. Replacement safety signs are
TS201 —UN—15APR13
available from your John Deere dealer.
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not
reproduced in this operator's manual.
Learn how to operate the machine and how to use controls
properly. Do not let anyone operate without instruction.
Keep your machine in proper working condition.
If you do not understand any part of this manual and need
Unauthorized modifications to the machine may impair the
assistance, contact your John Deere dealer.
function and/or safety and affect machine life.
DX,READ -19-16JUN09-1/1
05-1 103113
PN=7
Safety
Practice Safe Maintenance

Understand service procedure before doing work. Keep
area clean and dry.
Never lubricate, service, or adjust machine while it is
moving. Keep hands, feet , and clothing from power-driven
parts. Disengage all power and operate controls to relieve
pressure. Lower equipment to the ground. Stop the
engine. Remove the key. Allow machine to cool.
Securely support any machine elements that must be
raised for service work.
Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed.
Fix damage immediately. Replace worn or broken parts.
Remove any buildup of grease, oil, or debris.
On self-propelled equipment, disconnect battery ground
cable (-) before making adjustments on electrical systems
or welding on machine.
On towed implements, disconnect wiring harnesses from
tractor before servicing electrical system components or
welding on machine.
TS218 —UN—23AUG88
DX,SERV -19-17FEB99-1/1
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly

Prevent falls by facing the machine when getting on and
T133468 —UN—15APR13
off. Maintain 3-point contact with steps, handholds, and
handrails.
Use extra care when mud, snow, or moisture present
slippery conditions. Keep steps clean and free of grease
or oil. Never jump when exiting machine. Never mount or
dismount a moving machine.
DX,WW,MOUNT -19-12OCT11-1/1
05-2 103113
PN=8
Safety
Handle Electronic Components and Brackets

Safely
Falling while installing or removing electronic components
mounted on equipment can cause serious injury. Use a
ladder or platform to easily reach each mounting location.
Use sturdy and secure footholds and handholds. Do not
install or remove components in wet or icy conditions.
If installing or servicing a RTK base station on a tower or
other tall structure, use a certified climber.
If installing or servicing a global positioning receiver mast
used on an implement, use proper lifting techniques and
wear proper protective equipment. The mast is heavy and
can be awkward to handle. Two people are required when
mounting locations are not accessible from the ground
or from a service platform.
DX,WW,RECEIVER -19-24AUG10-1/1
Operate Guidance Systems Safely • Never get on or off a moving vehicle.

Do not use guidance systems on roadways. Always turn
• Verify the machine, implement, and guidance system
are set up correctly. If using iTEC Pro, verify accurate
off (disable) guidance systems before entering a roadway. boundaries have been defined.
Do not attempt to turn on (activate) a guidance system • Remain alert and pay attention to the surrounding
while transporting on a roadway. environment.
Guidance systems are intended to aid the operator in • Take control of the steering wheel, when necessary, to
performing field operations more efficiently. The operator avoid field hazards, bystanders, equipment, or other
is always responsible for the machine path. obstacles.
• Stop operation if poor visibility conditions impair your
Guidance Systems include any application that automates ability to operate the machine or identify people or
vehicle steering. This includes, but may not be limited to, obstacles in the machine path.
AutoTrac, iGuide, iTEC Pro, ATU, and RowSense. • Consider field conditions, visibility, and vehicle
configuration when selecting vehicle speed.
To prevent injury to the operator and bystanders:
JS56696,0000970 -19-10MAY11-1/1
Use Seat Belt Properly

Avoid crushing injury or death during rollover.
This machine is equipped with a rollover protective
structure (ROPS). USE a seat belt when you operate with
a ROPS.
TS1729 —UN—24MAY13
• Hold the latch and pull the seat belt across the body.
• Insert the latch into the buckle. Listen for a click.
• Tug on the seat belt latch to make sure that the belt
is securely fastened.
• Snug the seat belt across the hips.
Replace entire seat belt if mounting hardware, buckle,
belt, or retractor show signs of damage.
discoloration, or abrasion. Replace only with replacement
Inspect seat belt and mounting hardware at least
parts approved for your machine. See your John Deere
once a year. Look for signs of loose hardware or belt
dealer.
damage, such as cuts, fraying, extreme or unusual wear,
DX,ROPS1 -19-22AUG13-1/1
05-3 103113
PN=9
Safety
Read Operator Manuals for ISOBUS Implements
In addition to GreenStar Applications, this display can these implement functions could provide a hazard either
be used as a display device for any implement that to the Operator or a bystander. Read the operator manual
meets ISO 11783 standard. This includes capability to provided by the implement manufacturer and observe all
control ISOBUS implements. When used in this manner, safety messages in manual and on implement prior to use.
information and implement control functions placed on
the display are provided by the implement and are the NOTE: ISOBUS refers to the ISO Standard 11783
responsibility of the implement manufacturer. Some of
DX,WW,ISOBUS -19-19AUG09-1/1
Avoid Backover Accidents

Before moving machine, be sure that all persons are clear
of machine path. Turn around and look directly for best
visibility. Use a signal person when backing if view is
PC10857XW —UN—15APR13
obstructed or when in close quarters.
Do not rely on a camera to determine if personnel or
obstacles are behind the machine. The system can be
limited by many factors including maintenance practices,
environmental conditions, and operating range.
DX,AVOID,BACKOVER,ACCIDENTS -19-30AUG10-1/1
05-4 103113
PN=10
Safety Signs
Implement Detected Warning
This message occurs when the system detects an
ISOBUS implement. For more information, see READ
OPERATOR MANUALS FOR ISOBUS IMPLEMENTS in
the Safety section.
PC13149 —19—17FEB11
RN38933,0000134 -19-21SEP11-1/1
Automatic Guidance System Detected

This message occurs during startup on vehicles with an
Automatic Guidance System installed.
PC13157 —19—17FEB11
RN38933,0000135 -19-21SEP11-1/1
Auxiliary Control Safety Signs

Auxiliary Control Detected
Auxiliary Control. Press “Enter” key F to navigate to the
home page. Go to the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing
the “Controls” key G to review or change the Auxiliary
Control assignments.
If “Disable” is selected (default), all Auxiliary Controls will
PC13154 —19—17FEB11
be disabled.
If “Enable” is selected, all Auxiliary Controls will be
enabled.
Continued on next page RN38933,0000136 -19-21SEP11-1/4
10-1 103113
PN=11
Safety Signs
Auxiliary Control Configuration Changed

This message occurs when the system detects an Auxiliary
Control and that configuration has been modified during
run time (e.g. additional input and/or implement added).
Press “Enter” key F to navigate to the home page. Go to
the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the “Controls” key
G to review or change the Auxiliary Control assignments.
PC13155 —19—17FEB11
RN38933,0000136 -19-21SEP11-2/4
Auxiliary Control Enabled

This message occurs when the operator enables the
Auxiliary Control manually. Press “Enter” key F to navigate
to the home page. Go to the Auxiliary Controls page by
pressing the “Controls” key G to review or change the
Auxiliary Control assignments.
PC13146 —19—17FEB11
RN38933,0000136 -19-21SEP11-3/4

This message occurs when Auxiliary Control has been
enabled manually, however, not all assignments have
been completed successfully. Press “Enter” key F to
navigate to the home page. Go to the Auxiliary Controls
page by pressing the “Controls” key G to review or change
the Auxiliary Control assignments.
IMPORTANT: If the “Enter” key F is selected, the
implement only follows the assignments which
PC13153 —19—17FEB11
have been completed successfully, however,

there are still assignments which are not
complete. It is necessary to review the Auxiliary
Controls mapping screen by pressing the
“Controls” key G and complete all assignments
before enabling Auxiliary Controls.
RN38933,0000136 -19-21SEP11-4/4
10-2 103113
PN=12
Getting Started
Theory of Operation
IMPORTANT: It is important to follow proper data is collected on the display memory and can be
use guidelines with the touchscreen on unloaded using a USB drive into desktop software to
the 2630 GS3 display. Do not contact the produce maps and reports of field activities.
touchscreen with an object harder or sharper
than a fingertip (pen, pencil point, or any NOTE: 3rd-Party control units are control units using
metal objects). Heavy pressure can also RS232 connection (Field Doc Connect) and
damage underlying components and void ISOBUS compliant control units supporting
the touchscreen warranty. Light amounts Task Controller functionality.
of pressure, if exerted continuously, can
degrade touchscreen reliability. On-screen mapping uses GPS, and a recording source
to create real-time maps of field activities. Operators are
The display is primarily used as an operator interface for able to see the areas or the as applied maps of the field
guidance and documentation applications. they have covered.
The primary navigational point of the display is the Original GreenStar Monitor function can be used to
touchscreen which allows the operator to input information operate selected John Deere implements as they would
by touching the screen. The 2630 can also use the display normally be used with the original GreenStar display.
control which allows use of input buttons and thumb wheel. The 2630 is also mounted in tandem with an original
GreenStar display.
GreenStar Basics Software
The 2630 display has an integrated performance monitor
The display comes standard with a basic software feature that can be used to record area and other data based on
set: implement width and ground speed.
• Manual Guidance Display can also be used for machines and systems
• Documentation (field and harvest) that conform to implementation level 2 of International
• On-Screen Mapping Organization for Standardization ISO 11783. The purpose
• Prescriptions of ISO 11783 is to enable electronic units to communicate
• ISOBUS VT functionality with each other providing a standardized system that is
easy to read and understand. The operator can use the
When connected to a GPS receiver, the system allows display as a tractor performance monitor and a monitor for
the operator to drive vehicle with the aid of GPS. When an ISO 11783 compliant implement.
combined with an optional AutoTrac activation, and
vehicle steering kit, system can automatically guide Software updates are published at www.StellarSup-
machine though the field. port.com. Each display also comes with a GreenStar Live
Update CD. Live Update can be installed on an internet
Documentation can be used to record data tied to GPS connected PC and alert the user when updates to the dis-
coordinates. On some machines, rates, yield, implement play are available. Live Update guides the user through the
width, or other information is recorded from the vehicle downloading process. The download is stored on a USB
CAN Bus. The displays can also be connected to certain drive, and inserted into the display to complete the update.
3rd-Party control units to record rate information. This
CZ76372,0000285 -19-12JAN11-1/1
15-1 103113
PN=13
Getting Started
Front of Display
LED (B) indicates power mode of display:
Cold boot progress bar is black with a yellow background.
Cold boot-up occurs when the GS3 display has been
powered down for over 6 hours or loses unswitched
power. It takes 60-80 seconds to power up.
Warm boot progress bar is yellow with a black
background.
PC12701 —UN—20JUL10
Warm boot-up occurs when the GS3 display has been
operating in the last 6 hours and has NOT lost unswitched
power during that time. It takes 20-30 seconds to power
up.
Shutting Down or Standby mode LED is orange.
display
IMPORTANT: If LED is FLASHING ORANGE and the
screen is blank, an out of range temperature
condition is detected. Turn unit off to prevent A—Display C—USB Connections
damage to the display. B—LED (Power Light)
Operating Temperature Range

-20° to 70° C (-4° to 158° F)
Storage Temperature
To clean display, power down and wipe screen with a soft
cloth sprayed with a non-ammonia based cleaner such as
-40° to 85° C (-40° to 185° F)
John Deere glass or multipurpose cleaner.
Status of the LED is green when display is on, orange USB connection used to transfer data to and from display
when display is starting up and shutting down. If the LED and also updating software. Most USB drives will work
is RED, the unit is not operational. Turn unit off. The with the display.
display has encountered an error or issue and is working NOTE: The display has two USB connections for
to recover. redundancy in case one was to fail. Only one
IMPORTANT: Always clean screen display with power USB drive may be inserted at a time. The
off. Cleaning screen while operating could USB connections are meant for data transfer
result in unintended button selections. and reprogramming only.
CZ76372,0000283 -19-12JAN11-1/1
15-2 103113
PN=14
Getting Started
Back of Display
Backside of Display contains:
• Display Mounting Holes—attach to bracket on machine.
• Secondary Navigational Point—provides backup
navigation with display.
• Display Connector—connects vehicle wiring harness
plugs with display for system power and communication.
• Video Connector—connects video source to display.
• USB Connections—holds USB drive used for data
collection and saving selected display and implement
PC12702 —UN—20JUL10
settings.
NOTE: It is recommended to use John Deere USB
drives purchased from a John Deere dealer.
Other USB drives may not be compatible.
• Ethernet Connector—With an adapter, an Ethernet

cable can be used in the future.
• USB Connector—With an adapter, a USB cable can
be used in the future. A—Display mounting holes E—USB Connections
B—Secondary navigation F— Ethernet Connector (Future
NOTE: Backside of display will have label containing C—Primary Display connector Use)
display model and serial number. D—Video Connector G—USB Connector (Future
Use)
DK01672,00001A6 -19-30NOV11-1/1
USB Drive • Connectivity - USB 2.0

USB Drive Requirements for John Deere Displays
• Maximum Dimensions - 9.2 mm thick by 21.7 mm wide
Best Practices
Only John Deere branded USB drives purchased from
John Deere dealers are recommended. Other drives may • Wait 10 seconds, because large USB drives may take
not be compatible. time to be recognized.
Note the following USB drive requirements:
• Use a USB drive that is 4GB or larger, so multiple
Backups can be stored.
• Format - Windows FAT or FAT32. This display will not • Clean all files off the USB drive that are not associated
recognize NTFS format. with John Deere displays.
• Capacity - There are no specific limits to the memory
capacity of the drive
CZ76372,000039A -19-07DEC11-1/1
15-3 103113
PN=15
Getting Started
Capturing Screenshots
DISPLAY RESET button (A) can be used to capture
screenshots from the 2630 display. Press the DISPLAY
RESET button (A) for approximately one second.
A successful screen capture is indicated by the front LED
(power light) changing to color red and back to green
again.
Screenshots captured on the display will be stored on the
display’s internal memory until they are transferred to a
USB flash drive.
NOTE: To transfer screenshots to a USB flash drive,
please see DATA TRANSFER OPTIONS and
PC13808 —UN—13JUN11
EXPORTING DATA FROM THE DISPLAY
sections in this manual.
A—Display Reset
Display Secondary Navigation
JS56696,0000A28 -19-13JUN11-1/1
15-4 103113
PN=16
Getting Started
Screen Layout
PC8577 —UN—02NOV05
Screen Layout
A—Home D—softkeys
B—Menu E—Application Info Area
C—Message Center
NOTE: Display screen illustrated on following pages are • Menu selection—allows operator to view a list of
provided for reference only. Actual screens may available applications.
appear differently due to connection of optional • Message Center selection—allows operator to view
devices and/or software versions. alarm messages and diagnostic information. (See
SETUP MESSAGE CENTER in Display Message
Home (A), Menu (B) and Message Center (C) selections Center section.)
will be available on most screens.
Selecting one of the softkeys (D) will cause a new page
• Home selection—allows operator to view Home Page. to appear or a process to be started.
CZ76372,0000297 -19-12JAN11-1/1
15-5 103113
PN=17
Installation
Installation in Most GreenStar Ready 4. Attach harness to the corner post connector (C) and
Machines the lower connector on the back of the display (D).
A—Corner Post Mounts 5. Position the display so that it is comfortable to reach
B—Wing Nuts (2 Used) and does not obstruct your view.
C—Vehicle Display Connector IMPORTANT: Display must be connected to

SWITCHED and CONSTANT power. This allows
D—Connector on Display the display to shutdown properly and save data.
When the key is switched off, a ’Saving Settings’
1. Turn OFF vehicle. message should appear on the screen.
2. Attach bracket to corner post mounts (A).
NOTE: Bracket and harness are sold separately. Uses
3. Attach display to bracket using the wing nuts (B) the same brackets and harnesses as GS2 displays.
(provided with display).
OUO6050,000128E -19-19JUL10-1/1
20-1 103113
PN=18
Installation
Power Up
During power up of display, a start-up screen will show a

status bar that indicates display is powering up. Once the
display has powered up, if no implement is connected, a
default performance monitor screen will be shown. If an
ISO implement is connected, that implement's information
will be shown in application info area along with ten
softkeys.
A—Stop C—Run
B—Accessories D—Start
PC16120 —UN—25OCT12
Ignition Switch
Display Power Up/Power Down

Current Next Key Switch Position Engine Action Display and Tractor Description
Key Switch Controllers
Position
STOP ACCESSORIES No Start No Start Display and engine do not start, but can be used to
run other machine accessories.
STOP RUN No Start Start It is acceptable to start the display in this manner
ONLY IF operator turns the key back to STOP position
to turn off the display and let it fully power down and
save settings before starting the engine.
STOP START Start Start Proper way to start the display if operator plans on
starting the engine.
RUN START Start Potentially Have Issues Do not follow this scenario with machine and display
or data loss can occur. If display is already powered
up when the key is turned to the START position,
it could create issues with display memory and
connectivity with controllers. Starting the engine
causes a drop in current, which can restart controllers
in the wrong order as well as cause sudden data loss
on the display. ALWAYS allow the display to shut
down properly by turning the key to the STOP position
before starting the engine.
RUN STOP Turn Off, if Running Turn Off Proper way to turn off the engine and display OR for
allowing the display to power down properly if the
engine was not running and you plan to start it.
START RUN Running Stay On The key switch only remains in START position as
long as the operator is turning it.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove 12 V power from display engine off), turn key to STOP position for
until the LED light is black. Prematurely 20 seconds BEFORE starting the vehicle.
removing power (green or orange light status) This ensures the setup data is saved to the
may cause loss of data and/or the display internal memory before operating.
to lose functionality. It may take up to 20
seconds after removing key power for the If the vehicle is running during setup and
LED light to completely go black. programming, turn the vehicle off with key
in the STOP position and wait 30 seconds
IMPORTANT: The display must always be allowed before restarting. This ensures that all data
to completely power down (LED light turns is saved to the internal memory.
off) whenever the key is placed in the STOP DO NOT turn the key to the start position
position. Failure to do so can result in lost or directly from the accessory position. The
corrupted data when power is restored. reduction in voltage during the starting phase
When setting up the display with vehicle could result in a loss of all setup data.
key in the accessory position (power on, Continued on next page RW00482,00000B8 -19-26NOV12-1/2
20-2 PN=19
103113
Installation
IMPORTANT: If changes are made while machine is in power light to turn off before starting the ignition.
This allows display to shut down and save data.
auxiliary mode, turn key off and wait for display’s
RW00482,00000B8 -19-26NOV12-2/2
Installation in a John Deere Vehicle with an 4. Restart the vehicle so that both displays can reboot.
ISOBUS Display
When both displays power up, some applications will
One John Deere ISOBUS display may be installed on be set to ON or OFF on each display, as shown in the
corner post of a John Deere machine with ISOBUS table below. If the armrest display MODE, found on the
display compatible armrest. Compatible John Deere Multiple Display Settings page is set to CUSTOM and the
machines with CommandCenters are: applications are not set as desired, select RESTORE TO
DEFAULT SETTINGS on the Multiple Display Settings on
• 6R Tractors the armrest display.
• 7R Tractors
• 8R Tractors Application Corner Post Display Armrest Display
• 9R Tractors GreenStar ON OFF
• S Series Combines Original GreenStar ON OFF
Display Emulator
John Deere ISOBUS displays that can be installed on
corner post include: Implement BUS ON OFF
Controller ON OFF
• GS2 1800 Programming
• GS2 2100 Task Controller ON OFF
• GS2 2600 Default Multiple Display Configuration
• GS3 2630
Implement BUS is the only application that can be user
Some applications on armrest display will automatically configured to be ON or OFF on armrest display. Uncheck
turn OFF because they cannot run on two displays on the implement BUS to disable VT. If VT is disabled, user
same CANBUS. The implement BUS (Virtual Terminal interface for implement will be displayed on secondary
functionality) may be turned ON or OFF on armrest display, implement.
depending on user preference. Virtual Terminal (VT) is
part of the software that displays graphic user interfaces Check implement BUS to enable VT. If VT is enabled, user
of John Deere planters or other ISOBUS implements. can decide on which display the graphic user interface of
the implement should be displayed.
Installation
NOTE: Armrest display may not function properly if
1. Turn OFF vehicle a third-party display is connected to Implement
2. Attach the display harness to the corner post BUS. It is recommended that a second CANBUS
connector and the 26-pin display connector on the be installed if problems occur. See CANBUS
back of the display. section of this operator's manual for more
information about CANBUS.
3. Turn ON the vehicle. The armrest display may display
a message stating that another John Deere display See View Multiple Display Settings section on next
has been detected. If it does not, see the vehicle page to find out how to access these values.
Operator Manual to check that the Multiple Display
settings are set correctly on the armrest display.
RW00482,0000165 -19-14JUN13-1/1
20-3 103113
PN=20
Installation
Moving ISO Implement Applications between This function is sometimes called NEXT VT. Read the
Two ISOBUS Displays implement operator manual to determine whether it has
this functionality and how to use it.
When display is installed on newer John Deere vehicles
that have an ISOBUS compatible display installed on Each time the vehicle is started, other ISO implements
armrest, ISO implements can appear on either display. that boot up first will appear on the display. If user prefers
Select Menu on each display to find the implement icons that these implements always appear on corner post
for any ISO implements that are connected, such as display, turn OFF the VT on armrest display by unchecking
SeedStar2, StarFire receiver, or GS Rate Controller. implement BUS. Read the vehicle operator manual to
There are two possible ways to move ISO implement learn how to turn OFF implement BUS on the armrest
applications to the other display. display. The setting is found in the display settings on
the armrest display.
Some ISO implements are designed to remember which
display they were on last and return to that display each NOTE: The corner post display must always have
time the vehicle is started. These implements can be Implement BUS turned ON for GreenStar
moved from one display to the next using a button found applications to work properly.
within the settings pages of the implement application.
RW00482,0000166 -19-01MAY13-1/1
View Multiple Display Settings

1. Menu
2. Display
3. Display Diagnostics softkey
4. Multiple Displays tab
View the Multiple Display settings page to determine
the current on/off status for GreenStar Apps, Original
GreenStar Monitor, and Implement BUS VT.
Implement BUS Turned Off
PC16887CC —19—24OCT13
The GS3 CommandCenter on a tractor can access both
implement BUS and Vehicle BUS. In tractors, the 2630 on
corner post can only access Implement BUS.
If user turns off VT by unchecking implement BUS on the
2630, the SDUA will fall into Single Display Mode. Single
Display mode means, GreenStar application will appear
on a GS3 CommandCenter. Autotrac can be run on GS3
Multiple Display Settings
CommandCenter.
RW00482,0000167 -19-24OCT13-1/1
20-4 103113
PN=21
Managing User Access
Managing User Access—Theory of Operation Dual Display Operation
Access Manager is used to manage user access to almost The GS3 2630 display maybe installed on the corner
any function on the display. Functions can be locked for post of a John Deere vehicle that also has a display on
the operator to simplify the user experience and reduce the armrest running Access Manager. In this case, the
accidental settings changes. Once functions are locked for Access Manager settings and Mode are NOT transferred
“Operator Mode”, a password is required to enter “Owner automatically between the displays and must be set on
Mode” and access those functions. The current password each display individually.
can be retrieved using Message Center. It is stored in
Diagnostic Address 62. See the Troubleshooting and
Diagnostics section for how to view Diagnostic Addresses.
CZ76372,0000167 -19-16SEP10-1/1
25-1 103113
PN=22
Display Navigation
PC8845 —UN—30OCT05
Input Fields
Input Fields
There are a variety of input fields and buttons that allow
the operator to navigate through the screens on the
display and input values:
• Drop-down Box
• Input Box
• Check Box
• Button
PC8846 —UN—30OCT05
Fields are selected by touching screen. Keypad will
appear to input alpha/numeric data.
Drop-down Box
A drop-down box has a border with a numeric or text value
and up/down arrows on the right side that allow operator
to select a pre-populated item in a list.
To open, highlight drop-down box and press ENTER
To close the drop-down box without making a selection,
button. List will appear. Rotating thumb wheel will allow
press CANCEL button. List will close and original value
operator to move highlight focus through list to desired
will remain.
input value. Pressing ENTER button will select new value.
RW00482,00000BA -19-26NOV12-1/4
PC8847 —UN—30OCT05
Input Box
An input box has a border with a numeric value or text. This
allows the operator to select and enter new values or text.
To change a value, highlight Input box and press ENTER
button. To cancel out of an input box, press CANCEL
button to keep the original value.
Display uses a pop-up keyboard to enter values.
A numeric keypad will appear, allowing selection of each
digit.
RW00482,00000BA -19-26NOV12-2/4
PC8686 —UN—09AUG05
Check Box
A check box is a square with a border. A check mark in
the box indicates that the box is activated.
To activate a check box, highlight empty check box and
press ENTER button. A check will appear inside box
activating item. To deactivate a check box, highlight check
box and press ENTER button to remove the check.
RW00482,00000BA -19-26NOV12-3/4
PC8649 —UN—01NOV05 PC8650 —UN—01NOV05

Button
A button is an icon or text with a border. Activating a
button will perform that icon's function.
To activate a function, highlight the button and press enter. ENTER GOTO
RW00482,00000BA -19-26NOV12-4/4
30-1 103113
PN=23
Display Navigation

Secondary display controls consist of five buttons located
on backside of display. They provide backup navigation
in the event that the primary display controls are not
communicating with display.
ENTER button (A) and CANCEL button (D) operate the
same as they do on the primary display controls.
Up Arrow (B) and Down Arrow (C) simulate thumb wheel
operation on display control.
DISPLAY RESET button (E) resets display without cycling
power on vehicle. Hold for 3 seconds to reboot.
PC8580 —UN—17AUG05
A—Enter D—Cancel
B—Up arrow E—Display reset
C—Down arrow
OUO6050,000229E -19-20NOV06-1/1
Display Control
CAUTION: Do not mount display control on

the side of dual displays (2630 and Original
GreenStar Dispaly). This blocks the operator’s
view and overloads the bracket. Mount the
display control elsewhere.
The display control is the secondary navigational point

on the GreenStar Display.
PC8864 —UN—09JAN06
The display control contains 10 available short-cut
softkeys A-J, Thumb Wheel (A), ENTER button (B),
CANCEL button (C), and MENU button (D).
A—Thumb Wheel C—CANCEL button

B—ENTER button D—MENU button
Display Control
CZ76372,000012E -19-13AUG10-1/1
30-2 103113
PN=24
Display Setup
Display Software Activations
The display comes preloaded and activated with 4. Visit StellarSupport.Deere.com to obtain a 26-digit
GreenStar Basics Software which includes: activation code.
• Guidance Current Purchased Software Activation options are as
- Parallel Tracking follows:
• Documentation
• SF1 AutoTrac — +/- 33 cm (+/- 13 in.) at receiver
- Harvest Doc
- Map Based Prescriptions • SF2 AutoTrac — +/- 10 cm (+/- 4 in.) at receiver
- Field Doc including (Field Doc Sprayer, Field Doc • SF1 to SF2 AutoTrac upgrade
Planter, Field Doc Air Cart, and Field Doc Connect) • Pivot Pro (AutoTrac Circle operation for center pivots,
requires an AutoTrac activation first)
Software activations are required to operate AutoTrac and • John Deere Section Control
can be purchased from your local John Deere Dealer.
The display software activations (Pro-Modules) are
Items REQUIRED to Activate AutoTrac 26-digit pin numbers that are separate from the StarFire
24-digit GPS activation number. The display software is
1. Display Serial Number (Found in display) only activated once for the life of the display and requires
2. Display Challenge Code (Found in display) no other fees.
3. Comar order number (from dealer once order is placed)
BA31779,00002CD -19-07DEC11-1/1
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Obtaining Activation Code & Activating
Software on Display
NOTE: The display Serial Number and Challenge Code
are found at MENU button > GREENSTAR 3 PRO MENU button
button > GS3 button > ACTIVATIONS tab PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
Get the 6-digit Comar order number from your dealer for
the GS3 Pro package you have purchased (AutoTrac,
PivotPro, John Deere Section Control).
Get the serial number and challenge code from the display.
Go to www.StellarSupport.com and select ACTIVATIONS
AND SUBSCRIPTIONS. GREENSTAR 3 PRO button
PC17335 —UN—23OCT13
Select GREENSTAR 3 > ACTIVATE AUTOTRAC, then
follow the GreenStar 3 Software Activation prompts to
obtain the 26-digit code.
On the display, go to: MENU > GREENSTAR 3 PRO
button > GREENSTAR 3 PRO button > ACTIVATIONS tab
Input the activation code.
Display shows as Activated in the Pro Module area. GREENSTAR 3 PRO softkey
The Display Software Activation Process is completed.

Keep in mind if you have purchased SF2 level AutoTrac, an SF2 level. The StarFire is a separate 24-digit activation
you are required to also activate the StarFire receiver to for SF2 and RTK.
BA31779,00002CE -19-24OCT13-1/1
35-1 103113
PN=25
Display Setup
Managing Activations
The buttons and functions corresponding to each
GreenStar Pro Module activation may be shown or hidden
by checking the ON / OFF checkbox for each activation.
The box must be checked to use the corresponding Pro
Module. By turning OFF activations that are not being
used, the corresponding buttons and functions will be
hidden, making the display simpler to navigate.
Demo Activations are available to try out each Pro Module
for 15 hours of use. The AutoTrac Demo is turned on
by default. To try another Demo, such as John Deere
Section Control, turn it on and the Section Control buttons
and functions will show up on the display if an implement
PC12929CC —19—24OCT13
controller capable of that Pro Module is connected.
Go to GreenStar Main >> Settings >> Activations
IMPORTANT: Turning a Demo Activation OFF will
not stop the activation time from counting
down if the corresponding function has
been setup and started. It will simply hide
the corresponding buttons.
BA31779,00002CF -19-24OCT13-1/1
35-2 103113
PN=26
Display Setup
DISPLAY softkey
PC12697CC —19—24OCT13
Display - Main
When display is initially installed in a vehicle, it will have a settings are changed, they will be saved and retained
default setting for all features. Operators have the ability through each power cycle.
to change these settings to fit their needs. Once these
Continued on next page CZ76372,0000059 -19-24OCT13-1/6
35-3 103113
PN=27
Display Setup
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Go to MENU >> DISPLAY button >> DISPLAY softkey
MENU button
PC11392CC —19—24OCT13
DISPLAY button
PC11393CC —19—24OCT13
DISPLAY softkey
CZ76372,0000059 -19-24OCT13-2/6
PC11440 —UN—28OCT08
BRIGHTNESS button can be changed by selecting PLUS
or MINUS button.
BRIGHTNESS button
CZ76372,0000059 -19-24OCT13-3/6
PC8686 —UN—09AUG05
NOTE: Sync with Cab feature only functions on

selected vehicles.
Sync with Cab check box, when activated, allows the Sync With Cab Check box
GreenStar display to control the brightness of other
displays within the vehicle cab. Deselecting the check box
will allow only display lighting to change with no effect on
other cab displays and lights. If deactivated, the brightness
controls will only influence the GreenStar display.
CZ76372,0000059 -19-24OCT13-4/6
PC11438CC —19—24OCT13
Volume can be changed by selecting either + or - button.
VOLUME button
35-4 103113
PN=28
Display Setup
PC8686 —UN—09AUG05
NOTE: Highlight color is defaulted to red at initial
power-up of display.
Highlight/Focus Color can be changed by selecting

desired color (red, blue, green).
Highlight/Focus Color
CZ76372,0000059 -19-24OCT13-6/6
Display Brightness Control
PC12698CC —19—25OCT13
PC12942CC —19—29OCT13
Display - Main Page - Synchronization with Cab Enabled Display - Main Page - Synchronization with Cab Disabled
There are three modes that the display backlighting can

be in. The Display - Main page layout will change slightly
based on the display's mode.
• Standalone—Display backlight is controlled
independently.
• Sync with Cab—Display backlight can be controlled in
sync with the master backlight switch of a compatible
vehicle system. In certain John Deere cabs, the display
PC12700CC —19—24OCT13
will also be capable of controlling the cab backlighting
when adjustments are made.
• Sync with Cab disabled—It behaves like Standalone
Mode but status description changes to reflect the Sync
with Cab capabilities are available.
Display - Main Page - Standalone Mode (No Network)
Continued on next page CZ76372,00001B0 -19-24OCT13-1/2
35-5 103113
PN=29
Display Setup
The Advance Display Settings button, found on Display

- Main page, will open the Advanced Backlighting
Settings page. The Advanced Backlighting Settings
page allows the operator to enable synchronization with
cab backlighting using a check box. When backlight
is synchronized with cab, the operator can adjust the
balance between the cab's backlight and the display's
backlight using the sliding scale.
PC10363CC —19—24OCT13
PC10364 —UN—30SEP07
Advanced Backlighting Settings Button
CZ76372,00001B0 -19-24OCT13-2/2
SETTINGS softkey
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
The Settings screen contains three tabs:
REGIONAL tab
Country, Language, Numeric Format and Units can be
selected. Use drop-down boxes and select desired MENU button
measurements to be displayed on screen. PC11392CC —19—24OCT13
IMPORTANT: If language file does not load properly

when changing the language, reload software
to USB drive and update display.
TIME AND DATE tab

NOTE: If vehicle loses battery power or if display
is disconnected from vehicle Time and Date DISPLAY button
Settings will have to be reset. PC8690CC —19—24OCT13
Date and time can be changed, as well as time format.

GPS Sync can be selected to automatically set the time
using the time data coming from GPS receiver. When
this is selected, user should choose proper time offset,
which adjusted the GPS time data to correspond to your
time zone, to ensure correct local time. Time Sync will not
occur until GPS signal is acquired. SETTINGS softkey
UNITS OF MEASURE tab
Users can customize units for a mix of metric and imperial
units.
CZ76372,00001BA -19-24OCT13-1/1
35-6 103113
PN=30
Display Setup
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
DIAGNOSTICS softkey
The Diagnostics screen contains three tabs:
• READINGS tab
• TESTS tab PC11392CC —19—24OCT13
MENU button
• ABOUT tab
READINGS tab
This tab will display operating voltages, part numbers,
and hours of operation.
TESTS tab
This tab will allow the user to perform 3 different screen
DISPLAY button
calibrations—Color Test, Touchscreen Test, Touchscreen PC8669CC —19—29OCT13
Calibration.
The main function under the tests tab will be Touchscreen
calibration. Touchscreen calibration will be required when
the screen icon does not align with the area depressed.
This may be caused by normal wear and tear, age, certain
weather conditions, and contaminants on the screen
(chemicals, solvents, etc.).
DIAGNOSTICS softkey
Touchscreen Calibration:
1. Under the Touchscreen Calibration button a new
screen will appear with an X in the upper right corner. Under the Test button, select the Touchscreen Test. This
test will allow the user to identify a pixel problem on the
2. Press the screen at the X and continue to follow the screen.
X’s around the screen. Always press the screen
directly at the center of the X. 1. As you touch the screen, a sighting target will show
up on the area touched.
Reset Touchscreen calibration will abort any saved
calibrations and allow the user to start over and perform a 2. Continue to touch the screen around the area of
new calibration. suspected pixel malfunction and see if the sighting
target appears.
Color Test:
If sighting target does not appear, contact your John
Under the Test button, select the color test. The color Deere Dealer.
test will display 3 distinct colors on the display for
approximately 5 seconds. If you do not see 3 distinct ABOUT tab
colors, contact your John Deere Dealer for service.
This tab is basic display background information.
Touchscreen Test:
OUO6050,00022AE -19-24OCT13-1/1
35-7 103113
PN=31
Display Setup
Calculator
The display has a standard calculator that can perform
addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. Select
Menu > Calculator.
PC13244CC —19—24OCT13
Calculator
CZ76372,00002D2 -19-24OCT13-1/1
35-8 103113
PN=32
Layout Manager
Layout Manager
PC9033 —UN—17APR06
The Layout Manager provides the operator the ability to
display user-defined screens in the home page layout.
Once these screens are configured, the display will return
to the configuration anytime the Home softkey is pressed.
NOTE: Original GreenStar Monitor Mode is only available Home softkey
in layout manager option A and F. Advanced
Performance Monitor or ISOBUS is only available
in layout manager option A.
CZ76372,0000160 -19-24OCT13-1/5
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Select Menu then select Softkey J which is the Layout
Manager Option.
MENU button
PC12869CC —19—24OCT13
LAYOUT MANAGER button
40-1 103113
PN=33
Layout Manager
Press softkey A, then press the large red area in main

screen, this will bring you to the selection of programs to
operate in that defined red area. You will see that Layout
Manager A and F will have the largest selection of choices
and layouts available. If you select GreenStar 3 Pro, you
will then be taken to the confirmation screen seen below.
PC8870 —UN—17NOV05
40-2 103113
PN=34
Layout Manager
PC8649 —UN—01NOV05 PC8582 —UN—01NOV05

If you are satisfied with the selection, press the ENTER
button. If the selection is not what was intended, press
the large block area again or press the CANCEL button
to start over.
Layout Manager Options with Example Layouts ENTER button CLEAR button
PC9034CC —19—24OCT13
PC12852CC —19—24OCT13
Layout Manager Option A
PC9036CC —19—24OCT13 Example of Layout Option A
PC9037CC —19—24OCT13
Layout Manager Option F Example of Layout Option F
PC11396CC —19—24OCT13
PC9038CC —19—24OCT13
Layout Manager Option G Example of Layout Option G
40-3 103113
PN=35
Layout Manager
PC11397CC —19—24OCT13
PC9040CC —19—24OCT13
Layout Manager Option H Example of Layout Option H
PC11398CC —19—24OCT13
PC9042CC —19—24OCT13
Layout Manager Option I Example of Layout Option I
PC11399CC —19—24OCT13
PC9044CC —19—24OCT13
Layout Manager Option J Example of Layout Option J
IMPORTANT: When setting up the display with in the OFF position and wait 30 seconds
vehicle key in the accessory position (power before restarting. This ensures that all data
on, engine off), turn key to OFF position for 20 is saved to the internal memory.
seconds BEFORE starting the vehicle. This
will ensure the setup data is saved to the DO NOT turn the key to the start position
internal memory prior to operating. directly from the accessory position. The
reduction in voltage during the starting phase
If the vehicle is running during setup and could result in a loss of all setup data.
programming, turn the vehicle off with key
CZ76372,0000160 -19-24OCT13-5/5
40-4 103113
PN=36
Layout Manager
Configure Multiple RUN pages
PC10358CC —19—24OCT13
PC10359CC —19—24OCT13
A—Include page in Home Page B—Page Number list box
Collection checkbox
Multiple RUN pages allow the user to monitor the status 3. Put check in “Include page in Home Page Collection”
of multiple applications in an easy way without navigating checkbox
through several pages. The operator can configure five
RUN pages on the HOME page. To view Multiple RUN pages click the HOME button on
the menu bar of the display. Each time the HOME button
To set up Multiple RUN pages: is clicked the screen will advance to the next RUN page.
1. In Layout Manager, select page number using the list When the last RUN page is being displayed on the screen,
box (B). clicking the HOME button will bring up the first RUN page.
2. Configured the page with the applications to be

displayed.
OUO6050,0000E57 -19-24OCT13-1/1
40-5 103113
PN=37
GreenStar General
License Agreement
The first time you access the GreenStar tab on the display
menu a license agreement will appear. If you are the
purchaser of the display, read the agreement fully, check
the box next to “I am the purchaser of this display”, and
Accept agreement if you agree to the terms.
The License Agreement can be obtained from
your local John Deere dealer or can be viewed at
www.StellarSupport.com.
PC17333CC —19—24OCT13
License Agreement
OUO6050,00011FC -19-24OCT13-1/1
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
GREENSTAR 3 PRO Softkey
The GREENSTAR 3 PRO - MAIN screen contains four
tabs:
SETUP tab MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
Simplifies initial setup and configuration of GS3
applications.
Summary tab
Shows operational summaries.
ACTIVATIONS tab
View available software and enter code to activate. GREENSTAR 3 PRO button
PC17335 —UN—23OCT13
MEMORY tab
Bar graph shows amount of memory used.
GREENSTAR 3 PRO softkey

CZ76372,0000138 -19-24OCT13-1/1
45-1 103113
PN=38
GreenStar General
Setup Wizard
The Setup Tab is intended to simplify initial setup and
configuration of the GS3 applications while also helping
the operator become familiar with where the setup and
configuration settings are located and which settings are
required for full functionality. After using the Advanced
Setup feature, the operator can start and run their desired
operation and also know where to go to change settings.
PC12738CC —19—24OCT13
The Advanced Setup feature can also be used to change
individual settings as the operator progresses through
their day-to-day operations.
While using Advanced Setup, select which functionality
to configure.
• Resources GreenStar 3 Pro - Main
• Machine
• Implement
• Documentation
• Guidance
• Boundaries
• iTEC Pro
• John Deere Section Control
• Implement Guidance
Select any combination of functions to configure. If a
PC12739CC —19—24OCT13
function is dependent on other functions, the system
automatically selects the required functions. The operator
is not able to deselect those functions. If the operator
selected the Boundaries function, the Resources function
would be automatically selected to force the operator to
select a Client, Farm, and Field.
The functions that the operator selects determine which
pages are included in Advanced Setup. Only screens GreenStar 3 Pro - Main
associated with functions selected are included.
successful setup. Those fields are visually indicated to the
For each function, there is a list of required fields that
operator. Progressing through Advanced Setup without
must be complete and valid before the system works.
completing the required fields causes the system not to
Red asterisks indicate required fields. Based on the
function correctly.
functions the operator has selected for setup, the GS3
applications determine which fields are required for
BA31779,00002D0 -19-24OCT13-1/1
45-2 103113
PN=39
GreenStar General
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
EQUIPMENT softkey
The equipment screen is used to record data by machine
to document total area and hours. Equipment settings
are also used for inputs on implement size, GPS receiver
MENU button
location, etc. Track spacing is used for machine guidance PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
and coverage maps.
The GREENSTAR 3 PRO - EQUIPMENT screen can
contain up to four tabs:
MACHINE tab
IMPLEMENT 1 tab
IMPLEMENT 2 tab (optional) GREENSTAR 3 PRO button
PC8677CC —19—24OCT13
IMPLEMENT 3 tab (optional)
EQUIPMENT softkey
CZ76372,0000063 -19-24OCT13-1/1
45-3 103113
PN=40
GreenStar General
MACHINE and IMPLEMENT Tabs

MACHINE tab allows setup of the following:
• Machine Type—Used to select machine type.
• Machine Model—Used to distinguish between different
models.
• Machine Name—Used to distinguish between multiple
machines of the same model.
• Connection Type—Drawbar or 3 pt. hitch.
• Machine Turn Radius
• Turning Sensitivity
• Recording Source—Used to determine when recording
turns on-off.
• Machine Offset—Used to eliminate skips or overlaps
due to an offset receiver.
NOTE: Not all recording sources are available
for all machines. Many recording sources
require ground speed.
Recording Source
PC17334 —UN—23OCT13
NOTE: If Manual Mode is selected, the operator must
push the Record or Pause Button to turn recording
on or off for Documentation and Coverage Maps.
The following control units can be used with AUTO to turn

recording on and off automatically :
• John Deere Harvest Monitor Recording Source
• John Deere SeedStar™ for Air Carts
• John Deere SeedStar Gen 2 Monitor or Variable Rate A—Automatic (from controller) H—SCV 1
Drive for Planters B—Manual Recording ON/OFF I— SCV 2
• John Deere SprayStar™ Gen 4 C—Implement Switch Open J— SCV 3
• John Deere Central Insecticide System D—Implement Switch Closed K—SCV 4
• Raven™ 440, 450, 460, 660 E—3-point Hitch
F— Rear PTO
L— SCV 5
M—AccuDepth
• SideKick G—Front PTO
• GreenSeeker™
• Rawson™ Accu-Rate™ and Accu-Plant™
• New Leader™ Mark III Mark IV The following settings of the implement are saved with
• Dickey-John™ Seed Manager implement name:
• Vanguard™ PIC Seed Monitor - Unique identifier of the implement (which will be
• Task Control Unit compliant implements shown as implement name)
NOTE: Dual Variety Function cannot be used with - Turn ON/OFF times for Section Control
a three motor VRD planter. - Offsets/dimensions of the implement
- Implement GPS receiver offsets
PTO, Hitch, and SCV can be used as a recording - Physical width
source on certain vehicles only. - Implement width
- In ground turn radius
AccuDepth™ icon only appears when an
- Track spacing
AccuDepth-controlled implement is connected.
- Connection type (will not be transferred to APEX)
SCV Recording will not allow recording; use
These settings will automatically display when an
AccuDepth icon as recording source.
implement name gets manually selected or an ISO
implement is detected. See implement detection
IMPLEMENT tabs allow setup of the following:
section of this Manual for more information.
• Implement Type—Used to select machine type.
• Implement Model—Used to distinguish between
different models. For more information, see MACHINE AND IMPLEMENT
• Implement Name—Used to distinguish between SETUP section.
multiple machines of the same model.
SeedStar is a trademark of Deere & Company
SprayStar is a trademark of Deere & Company
Continued on next page HC94949,00003C8 -19-23OCT13-1/2
45-4 103113
PN=41
GreenStar General
Raven is a trademark of Raven

GreenSeeker is a trademark of NTech Industries, Inc.
Rawson is a trademark of Rawson
Accu-Rate is a trademark of Rawson
Accu-Plant is a trademark of Rawson
New Leader is a trademark of New Leader
Dickey-John is a trademark of Dickey-John
Vanguard is a trademark of Vanguard
AccuDepth is a trademark of Deere & Company
HC94949,00003C8 -19-23OCT13-2/2
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Machine Setup
MENU >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO >> EQUIPMENT allows
access to MACHINE and IMPLEMENT setup screens.
MENU Softkey
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
GREENSTAR 3 PRO button

PC8677CC —19—24OCT13
EQUIPMENT softkey
Continued on next page CZ76372,000013B -19-24OCT13-1/4
45-5 103113
PN=42
GreenStar General
Machine Tab
PC13268CC —19—24OCT13
Machine Tab
A—Machine Tab F— Machine Name Drop-Down J— Change Offsets Button N—Fuel Button (Business
B—Implement 1 Tab Menu K—Recording Source Drop-Down Pack/Europe Only)
C—Implement 2 Tab G—Connection Type Drop-Down Menu
D—Machine Type Drop-Down Menu L— Record/Pause Button
Menu H—Machine Turn Radius M—COM Port Button
E—Machine Model Drop-Down Input-Box
Menu I— Turning Sensitivity Input-Box
NOTE: All items and changes will be saved under Machine Model—Model number of the vehicle being
the current machine name. used. For John Deere vehicles, model numbers will be
available from the drop down list.
NOTE: Offsets are provided by some ISO implements and
some Deere tractors. Some list boxes may be grayed Machine Name—The name is used to further clarify
out when the machine is automatically recognized. which machine is being used. For instance, if there are
two 8430’s in your operation, the machine names may be
The Machine and Implement tabs are required to be “John” and “Deere”, or “8430-1” and “8430-2”, or simply
populated with equipment information such as: “1” and “2”. However, settings pertaining to the tractor
such as turning radius, turn sensitivity, dimensions, etc.
• Type are stored to the name.
• Model
• Name
• Offsets
Machine Type—Vehicle type being used (e.g. Tractor,
Combine, Sprayer).
45-6 103113
PN=43
GreenStar General
NOTE: Machine Turn Radius and Turning Sensitivity

are for use with iTEC Pro only.
Machine Turn Radius—How sharp the machine can

turn without an implement attached and without applying
brake pressure. The turn radius is half the diameter as
measured at the center of the rear axle of a row crop
tractor, and the pivot point on tracks and 4WD tractors.
Example: 8030 wheel tractors have a minimum turn
radius of 6.1—6.7 m (20—22 ft). Choose a number to
start with and change as needed for accuracy.
Turning Sensitivity—AutoTrac gain setting when the
vehicle is in an automated turn. This is adjustable by the
operator to improve performance (default 70).
PC9890 —UN—05FEB07
Verify proper dimensions correspond to the Machine
selected.
NOTE: Not all recording sources are available
for all machines.
R—Machine Turn Radius

Machine Turn Radius
CZ76372,000013B -19-24OCT13-3/4
Machine Offsets
Press CHANGE OFFSETS button on Machine Setup
screen.
Offsets are used to eliminate skips or overlaps due to an
offset receiver.
To enter machine offsets:
• Select input box.
• Enter amount of offset in cm/in. using numeric keypad
and select enter button.
• Select the receiver toggle button to move the offset to
the right or left of cab center.
PC13269CC —19—24OCT13
If no receiver offset is required, then RECEIVER OFFSET
input box should read 0.
Machine offsets:
• A) Lateral Distance from center-line of machine to GPS
receiver.
• B) In-line distance from non-steering axle to GPS
Receiver.
• C) In-line distance from non-steering axle to connection
point. The connection point is where the tractor A—Lateral distance from D—Vertical distance from GPS
connects to the implement (drawbar, hitch) except center-line of machine to receiver to the ground
GPS receiver E—Offset Toggle Button
on 2 pt pivoting implements (large planter). In this B—In-line distance from F— Non-Steering Axle Location
case, measure the distance back to the pivot point non-steering axle to GPS Drop-Down Menu
immediately behind the hitch. receiver
• (D) Vertical distance from GPS receiver to the ground. C—In-line distance from
non-steering axle to
NOTE: Offset (D) is for use with Surface Water Pro. connection point
CZ76372,000013B -19-24OCT13-4/4
45-7 103113
PN=44
GreenStar General
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Implement Setup
Implement 1 Tab
Menu > GreenStar 3 Pro > Equipment > Implement Tab
Menu Button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
GreenStar 3 Pro Button

PC8677CC —19—24OCT13
Equipment Softkey
Continued on next page HC94949,0000424 -19-24OCT13-1/7
45-8 103113
PN=45
GreenStar General
PC12931CC —19—24OCT13
Implement Tab
A—Machine Tab E—Implement Type Dropdown G—Implement Name Dropdown I— Change Widths Buttons
B—Implement 1 Tab Menu Menu
C—Implement 2 Tab F— Implement Model Dropdown H—Change Offsets Button
D—Implement 3 Tab Menu
NOTE: All items and changes are saved under Verify and enter implement: Type, Model, and Name in
current implement name. dropdown menus.
Some ISO implements and John Deere tractors Implement name allows operator to save implement
provide offsets. Some list boxes may be grayed out dimensions.
when implement is automatically recognized.
Select Change Offsets button (H).

45-9 103113
PN=46
GreenStar General
PC11405CC —19—24OCT13
Implement Offsets
A—In-line distance from D—In-line distance from F— Offset Toggle Button
connection point to front connection point to control G—A+B = Documentation or
of implement. point of implement. Section Control location
B—In-line distance from front to E—In-line distance from when in use.
rear of implement. connection point to
C—Lateral distance from connection point for second
connection point to control implement. Value only
point of implement. needed if second implement
is used.
Implement Offsets—Defines actual implement position • C) Lateral distance from connection point to control
relative to tractor. Ensures implement is lined up to the point of implement. This lateral distance is from the
field at the end of turns. Also determines location of center of tractor to the center of implement, which
implement for the Minimize Skips and Minimize Overlaps is 0.0 for most implements. This dimension alerts
feature (see Change Settings on Machine tab). operator to potential collisions, and is critical to end-turn
performance. Adjust dimensions, if needed.
• A) In-line distance from connection point to front of • D) In-line distance from connection point to control
implement. On pull-type implements, this distance is point of implement. In many cases, this distance is from
from rear connections pivot point of machine to front connection point to the carrying wheels. For proper
working side of implement. Examples include front turns, measure this distance with implement at height it
ranks of field cultivator or seed drop point on a planter. typically will be at while turning.
For planters with a 2 pt. mount, measure from where
planter pivots behind mount. NOTE: Adjust dimensions to fine-tune in field
• B) In-line distance from front to rear of implement. On performance.
ground engagement tools, this is the distance from
the front rank of sweeps or points to rear rank. On a For implements with 3-point connections,
standard planter or pull-type sprayer, this dimension do not enter dimension (D).
would be zero. The seed is dropped at the same point
on every row, and the sprayer has nozzles at the same • E) In-line distance from connection point to connection
point along boom. Dimension (A) would then need to point for second implement. This value is only needed if
extend to the location of deep drop point or sprayer a second implement is used (for example, tow between
boom. On a spreader, (A+B) is the drop point of air carts).
product. Refer to manufacturer’s implement operator’s Typical Planter Setup—JD 1770 16R30 NT planter with
manual for this value. a 2-point connection
NOTE: Examples of equipment that will not be centered • A = 3.8 m (12.6 ft.)
include mower conditioners and most split • B = 0 m (0 ft.) - even though it is physically 2 m (6.8 ft.)
row planters with an even number of 38 cm • C = 0 m (0 ft.)
(15 in.) rows (for example, 24R15 or 32R15), Typical Disk Setup—JD 637 F 10.8 m (35.5 ft.) disk setup
unless there is an adjustable hitch. • A = 3 m (9.9 ft.)
45-10 103113
PN=47
GreenStar General
• B = 5 m (16.4 ft.) • C = 0 m (0 ft.)

HC94949,0000424 -19-24OCT13-4/7
PC9902CC —19—24OCT13
PC9903CC —19—24OCT13
Track Spacing Track Spacing
A—m (ft.)/(rows) Button B—Implement Width D—Physical Width

C—Track Spacing E—Row Width
NOTE: Implement tab shows header for combines, row tillage or spraying, or to account for some GPS drift, make
units for combines, and boom for sprayer. track spacing less than implement width.
Implement width may come from controller on IMPORTANT: Use width measurements to alert an
select controllers such as SeedStar™ . operator of potential intersections between
implement and impassable boundary. Operator
In some cases, track spacing achieves a higher still needs to be aware of potential collisions
degree of precision when entered in by rows if there are times implement is wider than
instead of feet. Track spacing calculation uses more dimension entered (for example, marker
decimal places when entered by rows versus three arm lowered). If markers are used in field,
decimal places allowed when entered by feet. add width of both markers to give ultimate
alarms of possible intersections.
Implement Widths—Enter implement width and track
spacing for guidance to calculate total area when NOTE: As a buffer to avoid obstacles, additional physical
documenting operation. Verify implement type, model, width may be added to implement to compensate
name, implement width, and track spacing when changing for several factors, such as GPS drift.
implements. Implement width and track spacing are
independent of each other. Physical Width—Actual width of entire implement used
Defining Implement Width and Track Spacing. Define in field when implement is raised. It is sometimes larger
implement width and track spacing using: than implement width.
• Implement Width m (ft.)—enter total implement Using a planter as an example, marker arms and blades
working width are wider than working width. Enter width if markers are
• Implement Width rows—enter number of rows and the not used, or are used and folded on ends. If markers are
row spacing in inches partially folded during turns, enter larger dimension.
Signal Approximate Physical Width
To toggle between these two, select m (ft.)/(rows) button. added to Implement
Track Spacing—Used in guidance for how far each pass RTK 0.6 m (2 ft.)
is from the last pass. For “perfect” guess rows, distance SF2 0.9 m (3 ft.)
is same as implement width. To ensure some overlap for SF1 3.4 m (11 ft.)
Physical Width Table
SeedStar is a trademark of Deere & Company

45-11 103113
PN=48
GreenStar General
NOTE: If physical width is less than implement (working)

width, message appears as reminder this width is
not usually correct (A 16R30 planter is physically
wider than its 12.2 m [40 ft.] working width).
For example, a dry fertilizer results in a working
width wider than the physical width. It spreads
farther than physical width of buggy.
The physical width is smaller than the implement width

which may not allow detection of all intersections with
impassable boundaries.
PC12865CC —19—24OCT13
Confirm Configuration
45-12 103113
PN=49
GreenStar General
Implement 2 and Implement 3 tab
PC12842CC —19—24OCT13
Implement 2 Tab
A—Machine Tab D—Implement 3 Tab F— Implement Model Dropdown
B—Implement 1 Tab E—Implement Type Dropdown Box
C—Implement2 Tab Box G—Implement Name Dropdown
Box
The Implement 2 and Implement 3 tabs are primarily used

For Implement 3 tab to appear, select implement type in
for logging hours against equipment.
Implement 2 tab.
For Implement 2 tab to appear, select implement type in
Implement 1 tab.
Implement 3 tab allows setup of:
Implement 2 tab allows setup of: • Implement Type—Used to select implement type.
• Implement Model—Used to distinguish between
• Implement Type—Used to select implement type. different models or multiple machines or the same
• Implement Model—Used to distinguish between model.
different models. • Implement Name—Use name to clarify which implement
• Implement Name—Used to distinguish multiple is being used.
machines of the same model. NOTE: Implement widths or offsets cannot be
NOTE: Implement widths or offsets cannot be defined defined for Implement 3.
for Implement 2 or 3.
HC94949,0000424 -19-24OCT13-7/7
45-13 103113
PN=50
GreenStar General
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Resources Softkey
Settings in Resources page are used for guidance,
documentation, and mapping.
NOTE: If alerts occur indicating memory space is full, Menu
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
utilize desktop software to remove unused items.
Resources page contains three tabs:

Resources Tab
• Client—Separates data from different clients, used
by custom and commercial operators. Data can be
unloaded for a specific client.
• Farm—Separates data from different farms and
PC8676CC —19—24OCT13
GreenStar 3 Pro
landowners.
• Field—Separates data from different fields within a farm.
• Task—Separates data from different field tasks. For
example, planting, spraying, or harvesting. Set to
‘Documentation Off’ for operators who only use guidance
and do not want to document field operation data.
• Operator—Separates data from different operators.
• License—Documents applicator license for operator.
• Crop Season—Separates data from different crop Resources Softkey
seasons.
Conditions Tab
Notes provide information to field operators, logging notes
• Temperature in field, or gathering and reporting information like soil
• Wind Speed sampling and field scouting.
• Wind Direction • Field Notes—Specific to a particular field and only
• Sky Condition shown for currently selected field.
• Humidity • Task Notes—Organized by task. Task notes for a
• Crop Growth Stage particular task are common across all clients, farms,
• Soil Moisture and fields.
• Soil Temperature
Notes Tab
BA31779,00006F7 -19-24OCT13-1/1
Fields automatically and the operator will be alerted when the

implement is completely out of the field.
Change Field Name
NOTE: Field Names can only be edited or deleted
Client, Farm, and Field name can be selected manually individually using Apex or another type of
or automatically. Several types of setup data are tied desktop software. To delete all data and setup
to Field Names including guidance lines, maps, and info in the display, Backup data to a USB
documentation data. If fields have external boundaries drive and select that option.
saved in the display, the field settings can be selected
CZ76372,0000288 -19-12JAN11-1/1
45-14 103113
PN=51
GreenStar General
Field Locator
PC12863CC —19—24OCT13
PC12864CC —19—24OCT13
With external boundaries setup and Field Locator On/Off on the map. When text appears, by pressing on the map
box checked (found in the resources and conditions tab), “Select Field” window will appear. Within the drop down
when the implement leaves the current field, text appears box, the fields within 100 feet of the implement will appear.
CZ76372,000016A -19-24OCT13-1/1
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Mapping Softkey
MENU > GreenStar 3 Pro > Mapping
The following functionality is accessed with the mapping
softkey: MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
• On-screen Maps
• Boundaries
• Flags
Several map type choices are provided in Map Settings.

PC8672CC —19—24OCT13
MAPPING softkey
CZ76372,0000064 -19-24OCT13-1/1
45-15 103113
PN=52
GreenStar General
MAPS tab
View and setup on-screen maps by selecting the Maps tab.
PC17286CC —19—24OCT13
GreenStar 3 Pro - Mapping
BA31779,00002D2 -19-24OCT13-1/13
PC10857RK —UN—01OCT09
Pan buttons -Move the map left, right, up, and down.
BA31779,00002D2 -19-24OCT13-2/13
PC10857RM —UN—01OCT09
Zoom buttons -Zoom the map larger and smaller.
BA31779,00002D2 -19-24OCT13-3/13
PC10857RO —UN—01OCT09
Toggle Map Size -Toggle map to a full screen view.
BA31779,00002D2 -19-24OCT13-4/13
PC10857RP —UN—01OCT09
Reset Zoom/Center Map - This button is used to
re-center the machine icon on the map view page after
zooming in and out or panning with the arrow buttons up,
down, left, and right.
Continued on next page BA31779,00002D2 -19-24OCT13-5/13
45-16 103113
PN=53
GreenStar General
PC10857RN —UN—01OCT09
Map View Toggle - The map can be toggled between
three views by selecting the Map View Toggle button.
When the button is pressed, the icon will change to one of
the 3 icons shown in this section. However, the button will
always remain in the same location.
BA31779,00002D2 -19-24OCT13-6/13
Map View Options

Moving Overhead View
• The vehicle is fixed and stays centered on the map
while the map moves.
• The direction of the vehicle travel is toward the top of
the page.
PC10857RE —UN—01OCT09
Moving Overhead View
BA31779,00002D2 -19-24OCT13-7/13
Perspective View
• Functions similar to Moving Map View
PC10857RD —UN—01OCT09
Perspective View
45-17 103113
PN=54
GreenStar General
Fixed Overhead View

• The vehicle moves back and forth while the map is fixed.
• North is always at the top of the page.
Recording Start or Stop button – Map recording can be
turned on and off manually or automatically. Go to the
Equipment Softkey to select the recording source.
MENU >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO button >> EQUIPMENT
soft key >> MACHINE tab >> RECORDING SOURCE
drop down box.
This button is used to start and stop recording when the
recording source is set to Manual. When an automatic
PC10857RF —UN—01OCT09
recording source is selected in Equipment setup, this
button will be disabled. When the red circle is blinking,
coverage recording is on.
See EQUIPMENT softkey in the GreenStar General
section for more details on automatic sources that can be
used to turn recording on/off.
Fixed Overhead View
BA31779,00002D2 -19-24OCT13-9/13
Editing Map Legend – The map legend displays the

values of map colors.
PC17287 —UN—17OCT13
1. Select legend button to change range of values for
maps that have color scales.
2. Enter preferred maximum and minimum values in
window that appears.
Legend is divided into five colors automatically.
Edit Map Legend
BA31779,00002D2 -19-24OCT13-10/13
PC10857RL —UN—01OCT09
Coverage Map Toggle button – The map can be toggled
between the Coverage Map and the current operation map.
45-18 103113
PN=55
GreenStar General
Map Settings button (A) – This button is used to set up

the map view.
Foreground maps overlay on top of background maps.
Background Layer Options (B) – choose available layer
to show as the background of the map view.
• Prescription Maps
• Arial Images
Foreground Layer Options (C) - choose between
Coverage Only map or As-Applied if available.
• As-applied seed rate map
• As-applied spray rate map
PC12932CC —19—24OCT13
• As-applied spread rate map
The As-Applied coverage map is used to show where and
how much product has been applied in the field.
• As harvested (yield) map
• As harvested (moisture) map
• Tillage depth map
• Coverage Only map PC17318CC —19—24OCT13
The Coverage Only map is used to show where the

machine has been in the field. This is the same coverage
map that is displayed on guidance pages. Map Settings Button (A)
NOTE: If Coverage Only map is selected, the legend

of the map view will read “Coverage only” and the Survey Points (I) – Check this box if you would like to view
Coverage Map toggle button will be disabled. your Survey Points. (Surface Water Pro/Pro Plus Only)
Guidance Lines (D) – Check this box if you would like Depression Map (J) – Check this box if you would like to
your Guidance Lines to show on your map view. view your Depression Map. (Surface Water Pro/Pro Plus
Only)
Prescription Legend (E) – Check this box if you would like
your Prescription Legend to show on the map view page. Clear Field Map Data – Clear Coverage Only map data
or As-Applied map data from the map view.
NOTE: An area of the prescription, that has been
assigned a zero rate, will now appear black on • Current Field (K)
your prescription map in the GS3. • All Farms and Fields (L)
Maps are retained through power cycles and will remain
Grid (F) – Check this box if you would like a grid pattern until a Clear Field Map Data button is used to clear the
to show up in your map view. map(s). Returning to a partially applied field will prompt
Grid Size (G) – Enter the size you want the grid to the user to clear map or continue field task.
represent on the map view. Display GPS Accuracy on Coverage Map (M) – Check
Drainage Map (H) – Check this box if you would like to this box to make the “Coverage Only” map paint orange
view your Drainage Map. (Surface Water Pro/Pro Plus when the Starfire receiver has reduced GPS accuracy.
Only)
45-19 103113
PN=56
GreenStar General
Displaying GPS Accuracy on Coverage Map – This feature

is specifically designed for Section Control on Planters,
but can be useful for any precision application. The
“Coverage Only” map will paint an orange color when the
GPS accuracy drops below the desired threshold. It will
continue to paint blue when GPS accuracy is acceptable.
Operating with reduced GPS accuracy may cause skips
and overlaps when using Section Control. Turn on the
feature by checking GPS ACCURACY in Map Settings.
MENU >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO >> MAPPING >> MAP
SETTINGS >> check GPS ACCURACY box
The threshold for desired GPS accuracy aligns with the
black line in the GPS Accuracy Indicator bar graph under
PC12740CC —19—24OCT13
the StarFire receiver icon. See your StarFire manual for
more information on the GPS Accuracy Indicator.
The threshold that causes the Coverage Map to paint
orange aligns with the GPS Accuracy Indicator bar graph
under the StarFire receiver icon. Both the map and bar
graph will turn orange when GAI < 9. See your StarFire
manual for more information on the GPS Accuracy
Indicator. Display GPS Accuracy on Coverage Map
PC10857RQ —UN—01OCT09
GPS Accuracy Indicator (GAI)
Overlapping coverage will paint the normal dark blue color
whether or the overlapping coverage was recorded with
reduced GPS accuracy.
GPS ACCURACY box

BA31779,00002D2 -19-24OCT13-13/13
45-20 103113
PN=57
GreenStar General
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Boundaries Tab
Select Menu > GreenStar 3 Pro > Mapping > Boundaries
Boundaries tab allows operators to record exterior
field boundaries and interior and headland boundaries. Menu
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
Boundaries calculate acreage. For best accuracy, drive
exterior boundaries.
NOTE: Select New from dropdown menus to create
client, farm, and field on Boundaries tab.
GreenStar 3 Pro
PC8672CC —19—24OCT13
Mapping Softkey
PC12933CC —19—24OCT13
Boundaries
Continued on next page BA31779,00006F1 -19-25OCT13-1/3
45-21 103113
PN=58
GreenStar General
PC12926CC —19—24OCT13
Boundaries with Driven Exterior Headland Boundary
Available Boundary Types

Exterior—Perimeter of field.
Passable Interior—Perimeter of area inside field not
farmed, but can be crossed with machine and implement
(for example, a waterway).
PC12925CC —19—24OCT13
Impassable Interior—Perimeter of an area inside field
not farmed, but cannot be crossed with machine and
implement.
Change boundary type to headland after creating an
exterior or interior boundary. If an exterior or interior
boundary is created, boundary type list changes to allow
for headland boundaries. Boundary Types
Exterior Headland—End rows along sides of field where

A—Maps H—Headland Group Dropdown
end turns occur. B—Boundaries I— Creation Method Dropdown
C—Flags J— Headland Indicator
NOTE: If Headland Indicator (J) is checked, display counts D—Client Dropdown Checkbox
down distance to next headland on guidance map. E—Farm Dropdown K—Boundary Offset Input-Box
F— Field Dropdown L— Receiver Offset Toggle
Interior Headland—End rows or turn rows around an G—Type Dropdown M—Record and Pause
Boundary Recording
impassable interior boundary. N—Stop Recording
Headland Group—Combination of one or more related
headland boundaries. Different operations use different
headland groups. For example, a planter group with 36.6 Headland boundaries can be driven or offset from exterior
m (120 ft.) headlands, and a field cultivator group with or interior boundary.
27.4 m (90 ft.) headlands.
45-22 103113
PN=59
GreenStar General
NOTE: Ensure headlands are large enough for machine Headlands on Guidance View page are dashed pink lines
and implement to turn around without use of brakes. to show where headlands exist on maps and perspective
views. Only exterior boundaries and impassable interior
Headlands boundaries are for use with iTEC Pro™. boundaries have a headland boundary.
Other GreenStar™ software view headlands on
Guidance page, but do not use them.
Section Control functionality is based on exterior,
interior, and impassable interior boundaries.
BA31779,00006F1 -19-25OCT13-3/3
Delete and Rename Boundaries

Along with the Client, Farm, and Field, drop down lists,
the Interior and Headland lists have the option to rename
and delete entries. From the list, select <List Cleanup>.
To rename an entry, select the Rename button, and type
the new name with the keyboard.
To delete entries, place checks next to the entries that
need to be removed. Then select the Delete Selected
Data button.
NOTE: Greyed out items can not be deleted because
they may be related to other data or were
created using desktop software.
PC13259CC —19—24OCT13
Data Cleanup
CZ76372,00002E7 -19-24OCT13-1/1
45-23 103113
PN=60
GreenStar General
Driven Headland Offset Boundary
PC17824 —UN—09OCT13
Driven Headland Boundary
A—Driven Headland Boundary C—Exterior Headland E—Interior Headland
B—Exterior Boundary D—Interior Boundary F— Field
(Impassable) (Impassable)
Create Driven Boundary 4. Select Driven from creation method dropdown menu
1. Select Maping > Boundaries tab. for exterior headlands, or place a check in Drive
Boundary checkbox for interior headlands.
2. Select client, farm, and field from dropdowns.
5. Enter distance from GPS receiver to edge of field.
3. Select boundary type from Type dropdown .
45-24 103113
PN=61
GreenStar General
PC17820 —UN—03OCT13
6. Select Toggle (B) to set boundary left or right of
machine receiver, or left or right of position of
implement.
NOTE: If set from implement, location is left or
right of rear of implement.
When toggling button to change recording position,
set recording as paused or off.
A—Record and Pause C—Stop Recording
7. Select Record and Pause (A) 1 sec. or more after Boundary Recording D—Recording Indicator Light
machine starts moving forward. Recording Indicator B—Toggle
Light (D) blinks red and pink when recording is on.
Select Record and Pause to drive around an obstacle.
Recording Indicator Light is solid red when paused. straight section. If recording was started in a corner,
When Record and Pause is selected again, recording select Stop before point where recording was started.
resumes. Boundary displays a straight line from where Make sure point where recording is stopped does
recording was paused to where it was resumed. not intersect point where it was started. Selecting
Stop completes boundary by showing a straight line
NOTE: If using iTEC Pro™, leave recording on between point where it was stopped and starting point.
when navigating an obstacle so iTEC Pro™
alerts operator of obstacle.
8. If recording was started along a straight section of

boundary, select Stop (C) after turning last corner near
BA31779,00006F2 -19-11OCT13-2/2
45-25 103113
PN=62
GreenStar General
Top And Bottom Offsets Boundary
PC10567A —UN—21OCT08
A—Top and Bottom Offset B—Exterior Boundary C—Exterior Headland
Headland Boundary (Impassable) D—Field
Continued on next page JS56696,0000499 -19-24OCT13-1/3
45-26 103113
PN=63
GreenStar General
PC17319CC —19—24OCT13
A—Maps Tab F— Field Name Drop-Down Menu I— Creation Method Drop-Down
B—Boundaries Tab G—Boundary Type Drop-Down Menu.
C—Flags Tab Menu J— Headland Indicator Check
D—Client Drop-Down Menu H—Headland Group Name Box
E—Farm Name Drop-Down Menu Drop-Down Menu K—Headland Settings Button
Creating Top and Bottom Headlands 3. Enter the name of the headland boundary in the
1. Create or select an exterior boundary. HEADLAND GROUP drop-down box. Several
headland boundaries may be saved per field for
2. Choose Exterior Headland from the TYPE drop-down different implement widths that may be used.
box Example: Planting headland group would be 24.4 m
NOTE: This option is not available to interior headlands. (80 ft) for a 16R30 if two passes are being made.
Continued on next page JS56696,0000499 -19-24OCT13-2/3
45-27 103113
PN=64
GreenStar General
4. Select HEADLAND SETTINGS to make adjustments

to the Row Heading, Offset X, and Offset Y. These are
the default settings for the approximate heading of the
rows in the field, and the width of headlands on the ‘X’
and ‘Y’ ends of the field.
The heading that is entered does not need to be the
exact heading. In the example, if the heading for the
AutoTrac A-B line is 85 degrees, entering 90 degrees
creates headlands on the east and west ends of the
field. During tillage work, if the work is being done at
30 degrees from east and west, entering 120 degrees
will give headlands on all sides of the field. In this
case, Constant Offset headlands could also be used.
PC10504CC —19—24OCT13
Efforts have been made to make the most logical
headlands based on the way the field normally is
farmed. If desired headlands are not coming out as
expected, change the Row Heading to several angles
close to the direction of travel. If still not satisfactory, a
Driven Headland boundary will need to be recorded.
NOTE: Top and bottom headlands are calculated as
offsets and may not be appropriate for all fields. Machine/Implement page. The width of each headland
Headlands will be created when the Row Heading is can be changed. Example: if the west end has 32
more than 15 degrees from any side of the field. 76.2 cm (30 in.) headland rows, and the East end has
48 76.2 cm (30 in.) headland rows, enter 24.4 m (80
The defaults for Offsets X and Y are twice ft) for X and 36.6 m (120 ft) for Y.
the implement width, as entered from the
JS56696,0000499 -19-24OCT13-3/3
45-28 103113
PN=65
GreenStar General
Constant Offset Boundary
NOTE: A boundary cannot intersect itself. Press first before pressing the Record/Pause button
Record/Pause button to pause recording just to begin recording again.
prior to stopping. Always start moving forward
PC10500A —UN—21OCT08
Constant Offset (not driven—same size on all sides)

A—Constant Offset Headland B—Exterior Boundary D—Interior Boundary F— Field
Boundary (not driven—same (Impassable) (Impassable)
size on all sides) C—Exterior Headland E—Interior Headland
Headland Constant Offset Boundary

3. Enter the name of the headland boundary in the
1. An Exterior Boundary must exist for the field. HEADLAND GROUP drop-down menu. You can save
several headland boundaries for a field for different
2. Choose Exterior Headland from the TYPE drop-down implement widths.
menu
Continued on next page JS56696,000049A -19-06OCT08-1/2
45-29 103113
PN=66
GreenStar General
4. In the Boundary Offset input box, indicate the distance 5. Repeat steps 2—4 for Impassable Interior Headlands.
from the headland to the exterior boundary (e.g. If the Also, an Interior Boundary must exist and Interior
planter is a 16R30 and two passes are planted in the Headland must be chosen.
headland, enter 24.4 m (80 ft).
JS56696,000049A -19-06OCT08-2/2
FLAGS tab
FLAGS tab allows setup of flags for guidance and • Area flags are used to mark an area of interest such
documentation. as a patch of weeds, a low spot in a field, or a tile line.
Width of an area flag is equal to implement width in
There are three types of flags: line, point and area. Equipment settings. When an AREA FLAG button is
• Line flags marks tile lines. When a LINE FLAG button pressed, FLAG ON button will flash, indicating flag is
is pressed, FLAG ON button will flash, indicating flag is active and map will indicate flag area. Pressing FLAG
active and map will indicate flag lines. Pressing FLAG button again will de-activate flag.
button again will de-activate flag. Up to six flags can be configured. Select button to setup
• Point flags mark a specific point in a field like a rock, from drop-down box, then indicate a name and flag mode.
tree stump, or where machine ran out of seed or spray.
Point flags can also be used to indicate locations for Flags can only be removed using desktop software.
soil sampling and field scouting. When a POINT FLAG
button is selected, a flag will be marked for that location.
Multiple point flags can be selected for a particular field.
OUO6050,00022BD -19-20NOV06-1/1
45-30 103113
PN=67
Guidance
Read This Manual
Before attempting to operate Parallel Tracking or This manual is for both Parallel Tracking and AutoTrac
AutoTrac, read this manual fully to understand
guidance systems applications.
components and procedures required for safe and
proper operation.
OUO6050,0000D01 -19-22SEP07-1/1
Guidance Systems
Parallel Tracking shows your position in field relative to AutoTrac is an assisted steering system. After operator
track that you determine with your first pass through field. enters a reference path (Track 0) in AutoTrac, machine
Parallel Tracking has modes to follow a straight or Curve will then steer itself parallel to that track.
track and has a row finder mode. Using machine icon and
line on your display, you know which way to steer in order
to keep your path parallel with your last. Audible alerts
accompany display so you can keep your eyes on field.
OUO6050,0000D02 -19-17OCT07-1/1
50-1 103113
PN=68
Guidance
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
GUIDANCE Softkey
The GREENSTAR 3 PRO - GUIDANCE screen contains
three tabs:
VIEW tab MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab
SHIFT TRACK SETTINGS tab
IMPORTANT: If changes are made while machine is in
auxiliary mode, turn key off and wait for display’s
power light to turn off before starting the ignition.
This allows display to shut down and save data.
To turn guidance on: PC8673CC —19—24OCT13
—Go to GUIDANCE softkey >> GUIDANCE SETTINGS

tab >> TRACKING MODE
—Select a tracking mode other than GUIDANCE OFF
To turn guidance off:
—Select GUIDANCE softkey >> GUIDANCE SETTINGS
tab >> TRACKING MODE drop-down box >> GUIDANCE GUIDANCE softkey
OFF
The GUIDANCE softkey consists of three tabs which The following items are optional when operating guidance:
allow the operator to set up and view settings for Parallel
Tracking, AutoTrac and Row Finder. NOTE: If a client, farm, and field are selected only the
Track 0's for that field will be displayed.
The following items are required for guidance to function:
• Tracking mode set to: • Client, Farm, and Field (if not selected, all Track 0's are
- Swap Track saved to - - - Client, Farm, and Field)
- Straight Track • Documenting field operational data (See setting
- Adaptive Curves Documentation Off in Documentation setup)
- AB Curves • Field Boundaries (Field Boundaries are required to
- Circle Track create a headland boundary and enable headland
- Row Finder boundary alerts. See Setup Mapping for more
information.)
NOTE: Circle Track is available for Parallel Tracking • Flags
, but the PivotPro module is required to • Coverage Map
AutoTrac in Circle Track mode.
NOTE: It is important that the system be set up properly.
Read and follow each procedure to assure proper
• Track spacing (See equipment section of GreenStar setup and operation of the guidance system.
Pro General Setup)
• Track 0 (Reference Path/Point)
• GPS signal (StarFire signal required for AutoTrac)
HC94949,000030F -19-24OCT13-1/1
50-2 103113
PN=69
Guidance
VIEW Tab
PC14314CC —19—24OCT13
GREENSTAR 3 PRO - GUIDANCE—VIEW tab
A—View tab E—Path Accuracy Indicator I— Guidance Icon M—Set AB Curve button
B—Guidance Settings tab F— Off-track Error J— Zoom In button N—AutoTrac Status
C—Shift Track Settings tab G—Track Number K—Steering Sensitivity O—Steer On/Off
D—Shift Track Buttons H—Zoom Out button L— GPS Indicator
The VIEW tab allows the operator to view and/or change to get back on the A-B line. Each arrow represents a
the following: distance. This distance is defined in the GUIDANCE
SETTINGS tab under Accuracy Bar Step Size.
• Path Accuracy Indicator
• Off-track error Example: The bar step size has been set to 10 cm (4 in.).
• Track number and direction This means that each arrow that lights up represents 10
• AutoTrac deactivation messages cm (4 in.) of off-track error. If two arrows are lit up on the
• Turn predictor or Headland Alert left side of the Path Accuracy Indicator it would represent
• Guidance Icon the vehicle being 20 cm (8 in.) to the right of the desired
• Shift Track buttons A-B line. Thus the operator must steer the vehicle 20 cm
• AutoTrac Status Pie (8 in.) to the left to get to the desired A-B line.
• Steer on/off button Off-track error—Total off-track error is numerically
• GPS indicator displayed in the box. Off-track error will be displayed in
• Set Track 0 (set circle, record, set AB curve) inches up to 99 cm (35 in.) of off-track error. If off-track
• Track 0 name error exceeds 99 cm (35 in.) the distance displayed will
• Track spacing change to meters (feet).
• Steering Sensitivity
Path Accuracy Indicator—Is a visual indicator of Track number—Represents the track number the vehicle
off-track error. The indicator consists of eight arrows on is guiding off of. It also tells which direction the track is
each side of the off-track error box. The arrows will light located from the original Track 0 set for the field.
up indicating the direction the vehicle must be steered
50-3 103113
PN=70
Guidance
AutoTrac deactivation message—Each time AutoTrac AutoTrac did not activate. The deactivation messages
is deactivated text is displayed indicating the reason display for 3 seconds and then disappear. These
why AutoTrac deactivated, in the upper left corner of the messages can be turned off and on from the Guidance
perspective view. Messages are also displayed as to why Settings tab.
Deactivation Message Description

Steering wheel moved Operator turned steering wheel
Speed too slow Vehicle speed is below minimum required speed
Speed too fast Vehicle speed is above maximum allowed speed
Invalid gear Vehicle operating in an invalid gear
Track number changed Track number changed
Invalid GPS signal SF1, SF2, or RTK signal was lost
SSU fault See John Deere dealer
Invalid display messages Check display settings
Invalid display settings Check guidance settings and Track 0 setup
No AutoTrac Activation No AutoTrac Activation on GS3
Heading error too large Vehicle is at an angle greater than 45 degrees from track
Off-track error too large Vehicle not within 40% of track spacing
Out of seat Out of seat too long
Oil temp too cold Hydraulic oil not above minimum required temperature
No TCM corrections Make sure TCM is turned on
Invalid SSU activation Need SSU activation code. See John Deere dealer.
SSU in diagnostic mode Fuse is in diagnostic slot in vehicle fuse box – remove fuse.
Header off Header was turned off
Road mode In transport gear
Invalid SSU voltage See John Deere dealer
Reverse timeout In reverse gear for more than 45 seconds
Vehicle too slow AutoTrac below minimum speed
Curve too sharp Maximum curvature has been exceeded
Vehicle not moving in a forward Vehicle must be in forward gear to activate
direction
Vehicle shutting down Vehicle is shutting down
Gear data error See John Deere dealer
Resume switch error See John Deere dealer
Keyswitch error See John Deere dealer
SPFH AutoTrac switch is not on Make sure SPFH AutoTrac switch is turned on
SPFH Quick Stop switch is on Make sure SPFH Quick Stop switch is turned off
AutoTrac Deactivation Messages
Turn Predictor/Headland Alert—A visual indicator is

GPS Indicator—Indicates what level of accuracy the
displayed 10 seconds before approaching a predicted StarFire receiver is currently operating at (3D, SF1, SF2,
turning point or headland (must be defined). When the or RTK). If using a GPS receiver other than a StarFire,
system detects a predicted turning point or headland, the the text 3D GPS will be displayed but the indicator bar
distance to that turning point or headland will be displayed
will not fill.
and will count down the intersection to that turning point or
headland. The visual indication is accompanied by tones. NOTE: AutoTrac SF1 must have a GPS accuracy
level of SF1 and AutoTrac SF2 must have a
NOTE: If a headland boundary is defined and GPS accuracy of SF2 or RTK.
headland indicator is selected it will be displayed
instead of turn predictor. Steer On/Off—The Steer On/Off button transitions
AutoTrac from being disabled to an enabled mode.
Guidance Icon—The icon represents the implement
and the pointer on the icon represents the center of the Shift Track—Shift track is used to adjust position of
implement. The icon changes width based upon the machine left, center or right of set track. Shift track can be
entered implement width. used to compensate for GPS drift. Drift is inherent to any
satellite-based, differentially corrected GPS system.
50-4 103113
PN=71
Guidance
PC8832 —UN—25OCT05
AutoTrac Status Pie Allows AutoTrac user to view the
stage that AutoTrac is in.
• INSTALLED (1/4 of pie)—AutoTrac SSU and all other
hardware necessary for use are installed.
• CONFIGURED (2/4 of pie)—Valid AutoTrac Activation,
Tracking Mode has been determined and a valid Track Stage 1—INSTALLED
PC8833 —UN—25OCT05
0 has been established. Correct StarFire signal level for
AutoTrac Activation is selected. Vehicle conditions met.
• ENABLED (3/4 of pie)—Steer Icon has been pressed
and “Steer On” is displayed.
• ACTIVATED (4/4 of pie with “A”)—Resume switch has
been pressed and AutoTrac is steering the vehicle. Stage 2—CONFIGURED
PC8834 —UN—25OCT05
(See AutoTrac Status Pie in this section for more
information.)
Stage 3—ENABLED
PC8835 —UN—25OCT05
Stage 4—ACTIVATED
HC94949,0000310 -19-24OCT13-3/4
PC12934CC —19—24OCT13
Tracking Mode Identifiers
Straight Track Mode
• Set Track 0 button
Set Track 0 Button
HC94949,0000340 -19-24OCT13-1/6
PC12935CC —19—24OCT13
Circle Track Mode
• Set Circle Button
Set Circle Button

HC94949,0000340 -19-24OCT13-2/6
PC12634 —UN—09JUN10
Adaptive Curves Mode
• Record button
Adaptive Curves Record Button
50-5 103113
PN=72
Guidance
PC12936CC —19—24OCT13
AB Curves Mode
• Record button
Set AB Curve Button

HC94949,0000340 -19-24OCT13-4/6
PC12937CC —19—24OCT13
Row Finder Mode
• Set Row Button
Set Row Button

HC94949,0000340 -19-24OCT13-5/6
PC14191 —UN—10NOV11
Swap Track Mode
• Swap Track Button
Swap Track Button
HC94949,0000340 -19-24OCT13-6/6
50-6 103113
PN=73
Guidance
Moving Map view and Perspective View

The display can now toggle between the Moving Map
view and the Perspective View. Use buttons (A) and (B)
to move from one screen to the other.
A—Toggles Screen to Moving B—Toggles Screen to

Map View Perspective View
PC12743CC —19—24OCT13
Perspective View
PC12744CC —19—24OCT13
Moving Map View
CZ76372,0000150 -19-24OCT13-1/1
50-7 103113
PN=74
Guidance
Full Screen Mapping
PC9344 —UN—21OCT07
PC9345 —UN—21OCT07
Perspective View Moving Map View
GREENSTAR 3 PRO>> MAPPING softkey

The display can now show the mapping view from one
edge of the screen to the other. The toggle button
switches between Perspective View, Moving Map View,
and Fixed Field View.
PC9346 —UN—08OCT07
Fixed Field View
PC9347 —UN—06SEP06
Toggle Button
50-8 103113
PN=75
Guidance
Coverage Maps Select the foreground drop-down box

and choose coverage or as-applied if available for the
type of coverage layer to display on the perspective view
and maps screens. (See Equipment softkey to select
recording softkey.)
A/B lines can be displayed on the maps by checking A/B
Lines checkbox (C).
A—Background H—Grid Size

B—Foreground I— Survey Points
C—Guidance Lines J— GPS Accuracy
D—Grid K—GPS Diagnostics
E—Drainage Maps L— Clear Field Map Date—This
F— Depression Map Field Only
G—Prescription Legend M—Clear Field Map Date—All
PC12579CC —19—24OCT13
Farms and Fields
N—Accept Button
Map Settings
CZ76372,0000069 -19-24OCT13-2/2
GUIDANCE SETTINGS Tab

The GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab allows setup of the a second until off-track error between machine and
following: desired track is less than value entered.
• Guidance Mode—allows operator to select between: • Turning View—can assist operators to guide vehicle
from one pass to the next by showing an overhead
- Guidance Off: Used when only documentation is view of the field instead of the perspective view while
needed. turning around. This feature can be turned on or off by
- Row Finder: Used in standing row crop applications to selecting or deselecting TURNING VIEW check box.
mark end of a pass and guide operator to next pass.
- Straight Track: Uses straight-line parallel passes.
• Turn Predictor—alerts operator by predicting the
end of pass. This feature can be turned on or off by
- Adaptive Curves: Uses a manually driven initial pass, selecting or deselecting Turn Predictor check box.
then guides off of previous pass.
- AB Curves: Uses a manually driven curved path
• AutoTrac Deactivation Message—shows operator
why AutoTrac deactivated.
with two end points (beginning and end) to generate
parallel passes.
• Lead Compensation—tracking lead compensation
helps minimize oversteering when lining up with a track
- Circle Track: (only available with optional PivotPro and position delays observed when making a turn.
module) Uses a center pivot center point location to
define concentric circles (tracks). NOTE: Lead compensation is only used for parallel
- Swap Track: Allows operators to switch between four tracking; therefore, input will be disabled
guidance lines in the same field. when AutoTrac is active.
• Tracking Tones—can be turned on and off and be set
to alert operator at a specified off-track distance. To • Accuracy Bar Step Size—used to set the value of
change distance at which tracking tones are activated, off-track distance each arrow on the Path Accuracy
select input field and enter a value between 10—60 Indicator represents.
cm (4—24 in.). Tracking tones can be used as an • Vehicle Heading Arrow—aids in tractor and implement
audible indication of steering direction. If track is right alignment when an indication of heading direction is
of machine, two low beeps will sound, if left of machine available
a single high beep will sound. Alarm will repeat twice
HC94949,0000301 -19-28MAY13-1/1
50-9 103113
PN=76
Guidance
Turning View
NOTE: Track 0 must be established for turning turned more than 45 degrees from track heading. The
view to be active. Screen will revert back to perspective view once vehicle is
within approximately 5 degrees of track.
Select the check box next to Turning View to set turning
view on or off. The operator has the ability to cancel the Turning View
once the screen transitions into turning view with a cancel
Turning view provides a visual indicator of machine button that appears in the top left corner of the guidance
relationship to closest track as machine turns. This view view. Once the cancel button is selected the screen will
can be used as a guide when turning into next track. switch back to the perspective view.
Turning View will appear in Straight Track, Curve Track,
Circle Track, and Row Finder modes once vehicle has
OUO6050,00021E1 -19-14NOV06-1/1
Turn Predictor
Turn predictor is intended to only predict turn point of a turn off go to Menu >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO button>>
vehicle using Parallel Tracking or AutoTrac. It is NOT a GUIDANCE softkey >> GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab.
headland alert. Because actual field boundary is unknown, Deselect the check box. Turn Predictor cannot be turned
turn predictions are based solely on previous turn behavior off on vehicles with out an operator presence switch tied
of vehicle. Turn predictions will not coincide with field to CAN line. Once turned OFF, it will remain off only until
boundary if field boundary is not linear and continuous, or next power cycle, seat switch time-out, or if manually
if operator makes turns before or after field boundary. turned back on by operator. Turn OFF will be displayed
on guidance screen when turn predictor is turned off.
NOTE: Turn predictor cannot be turned off if no seat
switch is present on the vehicle. Whenever Display resets Turn Predictor back to ON after
a seat switch time-out (operator out of seat for 7 seconds
Parallel Tracking—Turn Predictor will default to ON. on tractors, 5 seconds on combines and sprayers), it will
To turn off go to MENU >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO button display an alert indicating Turn Predictor has been reset
>> GUIDANCE softkey >> GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab. to ON due to operator leaving seat. An option will be
Deselect the check box. Once turned OFF, it will remain available allowing the operator to turn it OFF again from
off through power cycles until manually turned back on by the alert screen.
operator. Turn OFF will be displayed on guidance screen
when turn predictor is turned off.
AutoTrac—Turn Predictor will default to ON after every
power cycle or after every seat switch time-out. To
CZ76372,0000291 -19-12JAN11-1/1
Recording Turn Points

For a new turn point to be recorded for current track, will be recorded at a point at which AutoTrac is deactivated
vehicle must travel along track for more than 10 seconds, and a point in which the heading error exceeds 45 degrees.
at a speed greater than 0.8 km/h (0.5 mph). A turn point
OUO6050,0000D0A -19-17OCT07-1/1
50-10 103113
PN=77
Guidance
Predicting Turn Points
To predict a turn, display must have at least one stored

turn point that is within 8 tracks of current track and on
same end of field that vehicle is moving towards. Turn
XXXX m (ft) will be displayed on Perspective View screen
as soon as predicted turn point has been calculated for
a newly acquired track. An advance notification, both
audible (beep) and visual (Turn text changing to yellow
from green), will annunciate at approximately 10 seconds
prior to actual predicted turn. A turn notification, both
audible (two beeps) and visual (Turn text changing to red),
shall annunciate when GPS position crosses predicted
turn point.
PC8216 —UN—28MAY04
NOTE: XXXX can represent any value depending
upon the location of the machine.
The following are examples of how turns are predicted.

1. The end-point of current track if one exists.
Continued on next page OUO6050,00021E4 -19-06NOV08-1/2
50-11 103113
PN=78
Guidance
2. The intersection of current track and a perpendicular

line through 1 stored turn point, if only 1 stored point
exists within 8 closest tracks.
3. The intersection of current track and line through 2
closest stored turn points, if 2 or more stored points
exist within 8 closest tracks.
4. If 3 or more stored points exist within 8 closest tracks,
closest point will be checked to make sure it falls
within 10 meters of projected line through 2nd and
3rd closest points. If closest point is not within this
distance, then turn prediction will be based only on
perpendicular line through closest point.
PC8217 —UN—28MAY04
A—Point of Turn Prediction B—NOT Point of Turn
Prediction
A—Point of Turn Prediction B—NOT Point of Turn

Prediction
PC8218 —UN—27MAY04
PC8219 —UN—27MAY04
OUO6050,00021E4 -19-06NOV08-2/2
50-12 103113
PN=79
Guidance
Lead Compensation
NOTE: This input is disabled when AutoTrac is active. preference. Default setting for lead compensation is 127
cm (50 in.) Settings range from 0-250 cm (0-100 in.).
Lead compensation is only used for parallel
tracking; therefore, input will be disabled Recommended Tracking Lead Compensation
when AutoTrac is active. Machine Type Lead Compensation
Sprayer 183 cm (72 in.)
Tracking lead compensation is used to calculate a position Combines 183 cm (72 in.)
in front of receiver more closely associated with front of
Row Crop Tractor 71 cm (28 in.)
machine. Tracking lead compensation helps minimize
4WD Tractor 203 cm (80 in.)
over steering when lining up with a track and position
delays observed when making a turn. Value entered will Track Tractors 127 cm (50 in.)
depend on speed of travel, type of machine, and user
HC94949,000032B -19-28MAY13-1/1
Vehicle Heading Arrow

Place a check in Vehicle Heading Arrow check box (D) to
display an arrow on the Guidance View page indicating
heading direction after a line acquisition occurs. Vehicle
Heading Arrow provides indication of vehicle position in
relation to the AutoTrac line.
NOTE: Distance to Center of Pivot is only available
in Circle Track Mode.
A—Turning View F— Tracking Tones

B—Turn Predictor Enable/Disable
C—AutoTrac Deactivation G—Tracking Tones Input Box
Message H—Distance to Center of Pivot
D—Vehicle Heading Arrow I— Accept
E—Lead Compensation
PC16946CC —19—24OCT13
50-13 103113
PN=80
Guidance
PC14240CC —19—24OCT13
Vehicle Heading Arrow
A—View tab E—Shift Track Left I— Vehicle Heading Arrow M—AutoTrac Enable
B—Guidance Settings tab F— Shift Track Center J— Steer Sensitivity N—iTEC Pro Status Pie
C—Shift Track Settings tab G—Shift Track Right K—Set AB Curve O—iTEC Pro Diagnostics
D—iTEC Pro tab H—AutoTrac Guidance Path L— AutoTrac Status Pie
When Heading Error is less than 0.5 degrees, Vehicle acquisition. This feature helps ensure vehicle is square
Heading Arrow (I) turns green. to the line before beginning a pass.
When Heading Error is greater than 0.5 degrees, Vehicle Once the vehicle has acquired the line and traveled in a
Heading Arrow (I) turns yellow. forward direction for 10 seconds at more than 3.2 km/h (2
mph), the Vehicle Heading Arrow disappears.
Vehicle Heading Arrow provides an indication to vehicle’s
position in relation to the guidance path (H) during a line
HC94949,0000312 -19-24OCT13-2/2
50-14 103113
PN=81
Guidance
Shift Track Settings
Shift Track Settings sets up:

• Shifts Off (E)—Turn Shift Track on or off by selecting or
deselecting Shifts Off checkbox.
• Small Shifts (F)—Range 1—30 cm (0.4—12 in.). Small
shifts are active when AutoTrac™ is active.
• Large Shifts (G)— Range 30—406 cm (12—160 in.).
Large Shifts are disabled when AutoTrac™ is active or
when operating in curve track mode.
• Clear all shifts (H)—Clears all shifts for field, restoring
original position of track 0, and adjusting position of all
tracks in field. Clear all shifts is available in straight
track, circle track, adaptive curves, and AB curves.
Clear all shifts is disabled when AutoTrac™ is active.
• If Show Shift Track Totals on Map (I) is selected,
PC14476CC —19—24OCT13
shift track totals, incremental shift track amounts, and
direction are shown on Guidance View map for 3 sec.
when a shift track button is selected.
• Clear all shifts removes all shifts previously done in
any operation.
A—View F— Small Shifts

B—Guidance Settings G—Large Shifts Shift Track Settings
C—Shift Track Settings H—Clear all Shifts
D—iTEC Pro I— Show Shift Track Totals on
E—Shifts Off Map
Continued on next page BA31779,00006ED -19-25OCT13-1/2
50-15 103113
PN=82
Guidance
PC14477CC —19—24OCT13
A—View D—iTEC Pro F— Shift Track Center
B—Guidance Settings E—Shift Track Left G—Shift Track Right
C—Shift Track Settings
Shift Track Shift Track Settings (C). Shift track totals, incremental
shift track amounts, and direction are shown on Guidance
Shift track adjusts position of machine left, center, or right View map for 3 sec. when a shift track button is selected.
of set track. Use shift track to compensate for GPS drift. To center line on current machine location, select Shift
Shift track shifts track 0, and all AB lines associated with Track Center (F).
the track, right or left a pre-specified distance. An operator IMPORTANT: When using SF1, SF2, or RTK
can also center a guidance line on machine. Quick Survey Mode, track can drift over
To move line to left, select Shift Track Left (E). To move time or at power cycles. Use shift track to
line to right, select Shift Track Right (G). Each time a shift compensate for GPS drift.
track button is selected, line moves amount defined in
BA31779,00006ED -19-25OCT13-2/2
50-16 103113
PN=83
Guidance
PC9387 —UN—17OCT06
StarFire Signal Monitoring System
The GS3 alerts the operator when the current StarFire
signal is not optimal for high accuracy operations. There
are three alert levels (Normal, Marginal, and Poor). The
levels are determined both by the StarFire Receiver's
PDOP value and the number of satellites being tracked.
If the StarFire receiver is being used in high accuracy
operations, it is recommend that care be taken when the
Normal
StarFire Signal Monitoring system indicates the current
status is Marginal or Poor, as accuracy degradation may
occur. • Normal Operating Range
Normal
• Acceptable range for high accuracy operations
• PDOP value: 0 - 3.5
• Green Bar • Greater than or equal to 7 satellites being tracked
CZ76372,000006B -19-09JUL10-1/3
PC9388 —UN—17OCT07
Marginal
• Orange Bar with Permanent Alert Sign
• Marginal Operating Range
• Moderate risk of accuracy degradation
• PDOP value: 3.5 - 4.5
• Less than or equal to 6 satellites being tracked
Marginal
CZ76372,000006B -19-09JUL10-2/3
PC9388 —UN—17OCT07
Poor
• Red Bar and Flashing Alert Sign
• Poor Operating Range
• Significant risk of accuracy degradation - high accuracy
operations are not advised
• PDOP value greater than 4.6
• Less than or equal to 5 satellites being tracked
Poor
CZ76372,000006B -19-09JUL10-3/3
50-17 103113
PN=84
Guidance
Row Finder Mode Set track spacing in EQUIPMENT softkey >> IMPLEMENT
Theory of Operation tab.
Row Finder (Parallel Tracking Only) mode is intended for Operating Row Finder
use in row crop applications where rows are not always To use Row Finder press SET ROW button at end of pass
equally spaced. Row Finder will aid the operator in finding before starting turn.
which set of rows to enter back into the field on after
setting a reference point when coming out of the previous IMPORTANT: For optimal performance the SET
set of rows. ROW button must be pressed before machine
begins making turn at end of pass.
Track 0 Setup
Track 0 will be reset based on current track spacing,
GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab >> TRACKING MODE position, and heading. After starting turn, turning view will
drop-down box >> ROW FINDER. guide operator into next pass.
NOTE: Row Finder can only be operated in NOTE: If SET ROW button is pressed when
Parallel Tracking Mode. machine is stopped, system will reset track
Distance to Center of Pivot is only available 0 based on a 0° heading.
in Circle Track Mode.
Track Spacing must be set for operation of this mode.

HC94949,0000305 -19-20MAY13-1/1
Straight Track Mode

Theory of Operation
Straight Track mode assists operator in driving straight
parallel paths by using display and audible tones to alert
operator when machine is off track.
Straight Track allows the operator to create an initial
straight track using various different track 0 options. Once
the Track 0 (reference path) has been defined, all passes
for the field are generated. The generated passes can be
PC9508 —UN—24OCT06
used to operate Parallel Tracking or AutoTrac.
Passes are identical copies of the original pass.

Continued on next page HC94949,00002FE -19-24OCT13-1/11
50-18 103113
PN=85
Guidance
Track 0 Setup
Set Tracking Mode (E) to Straight Track.
A—View E—Tracking Mode

B—Guidance Settings F— Implement Guidance Mode
C—Shift Track Settings G—General Settings
D—iTEC Pro
PC12584CC —19—24OCT13
GreenStar 3 Pro - Guidance
50-19 103113
PN=86
Guidance
PC14241CC —19—24OCT13
A—View C—ShiftTrack Settings D—Set Track 0
B—Guidance Settings
NOTE: Track 0 and A-B lines are two terms used • Auto B
interchangeably, we will use term Track 0. • Lat/Lon
• Lat\Lon + Heading
Track 0 is the reference point from which all parallel
passes in field are based. Use the following procedures Methods of defining Track 0 are explained later in this
to set up Track 0 and Track Spacing. section.
Creating Track 0 7. Choose which guidance line calculation is preferred.
1. GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab—Select STRAIGHT 8. Set Track Spacing

TRACK mode. Track spacing can be defined two different ways:
2. VIEW tab—Press SET TRACK 0. • Select track spacing button from Set Track 0 dialog
3. Press NEW button below the CURRENT TRACK 0 box
drop-down box. - Enter implement width
- Enter desired track spacing
4. Enter a name for Track 0 using the alphanumeric
keypad NOTE: A higher degree of precision can be achieved
for track spacing when track spacing is entered
5. Press ENTER button. in by rows instead of feet. More decimal places
are used in the track spacing calculation when
6. Select method to define Track 0 from METHOD entered in by rows versus the three decimal
drop-down box. places allowed when entered by feet. Select
•A+B (ft.)/(rows) button to change to rows.
• A + Heading Continued on next page HC94949,00002FE -19-24OCT13-3/11
50-20 103113
PN=87
Guidance
• Set track spacing from EQUIPMENT softkey >> •A+B

IMPLEMENT 1 tab >> (See EQUIPMENT softkey
section.) • A + Heading
• Auto B
9. Select one of the following methods, from the • Lat/Lon
METHOD drop-down box, to create the A-B line. • Lat\Lon + Heading
HC94949,00002FE -19-24OCT13-4/11
A + B
1. Drive to desired location in the field.
2. Press SET A button.
3. Drive vehicle to desired point B
NOTE: It is required to drive a longer distance than
3 m (10 ft.) to set point B.
4. Press SET B button.

5. Press ENTER button.
A—Current Track 0 F— Elevation
PC16278CC —19—24OCT13
B—Method G—Track Spacing
C—New H—Set A
D—Remove I— Set B
E—Guidance Line Calculation J— Set B Later
Set Track 0
50-21 103113
PN=88
Guidance
Set B Later
Set B Later function allows the user to navigate away
from the Set Track 0 page while creating an AB Line first
by setting the “A” point on the Set Track 0 page and then
choosing Set B Later. Once Set B Later button has been
selected, the operator may navigate to Guidance View
page to view progress as well as coverage while setting
Track 0. When the operator is ready to Set B to complete
the AB Line, select the Set B button on the Guidance
View page.
A—Current Track 0 I— Set B

B—Method J— Set B Later
C—New K—Set Track 0
PC16278CC —19—24OCT13
D—Remove L— View tab
E—Guidance Line Calculation M—Guidance Settings tab
F— Elevation N—Shift Track Settings tab
G—Track Spacing O—iTEC Pro tab
H—Set A
Set Track 0
PC16283CC —19—24OCT13
Guidance View Page
50-22 103113
PN=89
Guidance
A + Heading
3. Select the HEADING input box and enter a heading
with the numeric keypad.
NOTE: 0.000 indicates North, 90.000 East, 180.000
South, and 270.000 West. Save value by
pressing ENTER button on keypad.
NOTE: The ENTER button will be disabled until both the

Set A and Set B points have been defined.
PC16279CC —19—24OCT13

C—New H—Set A
D—Remove I— Desired Heading
E—Guidance Line Calculation
Set Track 0
HC94949,00002FE -19-24OCT13-7/11
Auto B
3. Drive vehicle in desired direction across field.
NOTE: A distance of 15 m (45 ft.) or longer has to be
driven before point B can be defined. This method
calculates point B from the last five data points
taken from the 15 m (45 ft.) driven and runs a best
fit line through the points to determine a heading.
4. The B-point will automatically be saved after traveling

15 m (45 ft.).
PC16280CC —19—24OCT13
A—Current Track 0 E—Guidance Line Calculation

B—Method F— Elevation
C—New G—Track Spacing
D—Remove H—Set A
Set Track 0
50-23 103113
PN=90
Guidance
Lat/Lon
NOTE: The Latitude and Longitude coordinates have
to be entered in decimal degrees.
1. Enter latitude and longitude for point A.

2. Enter latitude and longitude for point B.
A—Current Track 0 G—Track Spacing

B—Method H—Point A—Lat
C—New I— Point B—Lat
D—Remove J— Point A—Lon
E—Guidance Line Calculation K—Point B—Lon
PC16281CC —19—24OCT13
F— Elevation
Set Track 0
HC94949,00002FE -19-24OCT13-9/11
Lat/Lon + Heading
2. Enter Latitude coordinate for point A.
3. Enter Longitude coordinate for point A.
4. Enter desired heading.
NOTE: 0.000 indicates North 90.000 East, 180.000
South, and 270.000 West.
5. Press enter button.

C—New H—Point A—Lat
D—Remove I— Point A—Lon
PC16282CC —19—24OCT13
E—Guidance Line Calculation J— Desired Heading Value
Set Track 0
50-24 103113
PN=91
Guidance
Guidance Line Calculation

Guidance Line Calculation allows an operator to create
new Straight Track guidance lines on their GreenStar
3 2630 display using non-John Deere calculations.
Throughout the industry, there are different calculations
used for creating straight tracks. This feature allows an
operator to choose a calculation type.
Non-John Deere 1: Uses BEELINE calculations when
creating a Straight Track.
Non-John Deere 2: Uses Trimble® calculations when
creating a Straight Track.
This feature is only supported when creating new
PC16240CC —19—24OCT13
Straight Track guidance lines. All methods for creating
a new straight track are supported, but A+B method is
recommended when creating new guidance lines based
on crop rows or beds that were previously made with a
competitive system. Using the same A+ Heading as a
competitive system will not result in desired performance.
Guidance Line Calculation defaults to John Deere (H).
Set Track 0
Select Non John Deere 1 (I) or Non John Deere 2 (J) from
Guidance Line Calculation drop-down box (E) to change
PC16241 —UN—19NOV12
calculation.
NOTE: To create John Deere guidance lines, use
default calculation of John Deere.
This feature does not allow an operator to import
competitive guidance lines.
Guidance Line Calculation is only supported when
Straight Track mode is selected.
Guidance Line Calculation feature does not B—Method G—Track Spacing
affect previous guidance lines. C—New H—John Deere
D—Remove I— Non John Deere 1
Guidance Line Calculation cannot be changed on E—Guidance Line Calculation J— Non John Deere 2
previously created and saved guidance lines.
Trimble is a trademark of Trimble Navigation Limited

HC94949,00002FE -19-24OCT13-11/11
50-25 103113
PN=92
Guidance
Adaptive Curve Mode

Theory of Operation
PC9028 —UN—16APR06
PC9029 —UN—17APR06
Curve track allows operator to record a manually driven copies of the original pass. Curvature of the pass changes
curved path. Once the first curved pass is recorded and to maintain pass to pass accuracy. When necessary,
machine is turned around, operator can Parallel Track™ operator can change curve path anywhere in the field by
or activate AutoTrac™ once propagated path appears. simply steering machine off the propagated path.
Machine is guided along subsequent passes, based off
previous recorded pass. Each pass is generated from the NOTE: Skip pass is not available in adaptive curve mode.
previous pass to ensure steering errors are not propagated
through entire field. Generated passes are not identical
Continued on next page BA31779,00006EE -19-25OCT13-1/17
50-26 103113
PN=93
Guidance
Track 0 Setup
PC12586CC —19—24OCT13
A—View D—Tracking Mode F— General Settings
B—Guidance Settings E—Implement Guidance Mode G—Curve Track Settings
C—Shift Track Settings
1. Select Adaptive Curves from Tracking Mode dropdown

(D). 3. Drive to desired location in field to start track 0.
2. Set track spacing in Equipment softkey > Implement

tab.
50-27 103113
PN=94
Guidance
PC15161CC —19—24OCT13
A—View C—Shift Track Settings E—Repeat Checkbox G—Pause
B—Guidance Settings D—Current Curve F— Record
4. Select Current Curve dropdown (D) to select, create, Check Repeat (E) to repeat a guidance line. To edit
or edit an adaptive curve track. an adaptive curve, uncheck Repeat.
Select New to enter a custom name for adaptive curve. 5. Select Record (F).
Select an existing adaptive curve listed from dropdown
list. Repeat or edit adaptive curve, if needed.
BA31779,00006EE -19-25OCT13-3/17
PC12634 —UN—09JUN10
6. A red light by Record button indicates path is being
recorded.
7. Drive machine along desired path.
8. Turn machine at end of first pass. Curve path Curve Track Record Button
generates next pass.
50-28 103113
PN=95
Guidance
Multiple Adaptive Curves

Multiple adaptive curves per field can be saved. Adaptive
curve name defaults to “Curved Track”. Uniquely name
new adaptive curves in same field.
PC16939CC —19—24OCT13
Rename adaptive curves:
1. Select List Cleanup (A) from Current Curve dropdown.
2. On Data Cleanup (B), Select Rename (C) to rename
track.
Delete adaptive curves:
1. Select List Cleanup (A) from Current Curve dropdown.
2. On Data Cleanup (B), use checkbox to select track(s).
3. Select Delete Selected Data (D) to delete tracks.
A—List Cleanup C—Rename

B—Data Cleanup D—Delete Selected Data
PC16940CC —19—24OCT13
50-29 103113
PN=96
Guidance
Repeat Mode
PC15161CC —19—24OCT13
A—View C—Shift Track Settings E—Repeat Checkbox G—Pause
B—Guidance Settings D—Current Curve F— Record
While using adaptive curves repeat mode:

Saving Curve Track Data
• Repeat on—Repeats previous paths and disables IMPORTANT: If it is desired to have repeatability with
recording.
saved Curve Track data, it is required that the
• Repeat off—Enables recording and projects guidance initial Curve Track data and subsequent trips
paths off recorded passes.
across the field be made using StarFire RTK (Real
To record a new path, uncheck (off) Repeat (E). Time Kinematics) accuracy. RTK base station
should be operating in Absolute Base mode.
When turning around on end or coming back after an
obstacle where recording is off, operator is able to see NOTE: Set up of client, farm, and field is not required
line without turning recording on. for curve track operation. It is required to
Default is off. If Repeat is on, recording is disabled. save track and be repeated.
Examples: Stored curve track data is assigned to a client, farm,

or field name that is set up in the Resources softkey >
To record new a path (such as planting) uncheck (off) Resources tab.
Repeat (E).
To follow an existing path (such as spraying or harvesting),
check (on) Repeat.
50-30 103113
PN=97
Guidance
Recalling Saved Curve Data Drive to where first pass is located.
NOTE: Curve track data can be recalled if same When desired path is highlighted, select resume switch
implement width is used. If a different implement (AutoTrac™ only) and machine automatically steers
width is used, record new data. on path. In Parallel Tracking™, operator is guided off
highlighted path.
• Resources softkey > Resources tab, select client, farm, NOTE: Do not turn on Record button. Repeat mode
field name curve track data was assigned to. does not require Record button to be on unless
• Guidance Settings tab > Tracking Mode dropdown > operator is redefining a path.
select Adaptive Curves.
• Equipment softkey > Implement tab > enter implement
width and track spacing.
BA31779,00006EE -19-25OCT13-7/17
Smooth Tight Turns

GreenStar 3 Pro > Guidance > Guidance Settings tab >
Curve Track Settings Change button
Smooth Tight Turns (D)—When box is checked, system
smooths a tight propagated path.
Implement In-Ground Turning Radius (E)—Value of how
tight of a turn radius implement can turn while in ground.
For a drawn implement, measurement cannot be less
than physical width of implement. A higher Implement
In-Ground Turn Radius results in smoother turns. A lower
Implement In-Ground Turn Radius results in tighter turns.
PC17071CC —19—24OCT13
Setting is used for generating curve tracks.
A—Curve Track Settings D—Smooth Tight Turns

B—Curve Track Recording E—Implement In-Ground Turn
C—Adaptive Curve Gap Fill Radius
F— Accept
50-31 103113
PN=98
Guidance
PC9529 —UN—27OCT06
PC9530 —UN—27OCT06
Smoothing Tight Turns Off Smoothing Tight Turns On
A—Previous Pass C—Next Pass—Smoothing Tight D—In-Ground Turn Radius

B—Next Pass—Smoothing Tight Turns On
Turns Off
With Smoothing Tight Turns on, path is generated based

on implement in-ground turn radius.
50-32 103113
PN=99
Guidance
Operating Curve Track
PC15161CC —19—24OCT13
PC12634 —UN—09JUN10
Start Curve Track:
Guidance softkey > View tab, select Record button (F).
Turn recording off if machine is driven outside of normal
field pattern (such as refill sprayer or planter) or if turns at Curve Track Record Button
end of field or in headlands do not need recorded. Turning
recording on or off is done manually. Recording can be A—View E—Repeat
left on when turning at end of each pass, if desired. B—Guidance Settings F— Record
C—Shift Track Settings G—Pause
NOTE: No navigation line appears until end of pass is D—Current Curve
reached and machine is turned around. Once
machine is turned around, system begins searching
through recorded line segments to determine path Shift Track only shifts recorded line segments in one
to guide on. System locates a parallel line segment direction based off orientation of current line segment.
within 1/2 to 1-1/2 track spacings. The predicted path
appears from which the operator can navigate from.
50-33 103113
PN=100
Guidance
Guiding Around Obstacles in Field
PC9029 —UN—17APR06
PC9030 —UN—17APR06
Recording is Left On Recording Turned Off
A—Recording Turned Off B—Recording Turned On D—Manualy Driven Segment

C—Gap in Curve Track
When operating curve track in a field and an obstacle is Recording Off: If recording is turned off when obstacle
encountered, such as a well head, telephone pole, or is approached and steered around and recording turned
power line, operator must drive around these obstacles. back on once obstacle has been navigated around and
Recording On: If recording is left on while driving around AutoTrac™ activated to finish the pass, a gap is present in
an obstacle, deviation to propagated path is recorded and recorded path where the obstacle is. On next path when
becomes a part of the path. On next pass when area is machine approaches gap, operator takes over manual
approached in the field, propagated path machine is on steering of machine and navigates through gap. Once gap
incorporates the deviation and machine steers along the has been navigated and propagated path is reacquired,
deviation. To straighten out deviation, operator takes over AutoTrac™ can be activated. Gap does not appear in
manual steering of machine to straighten out deviation. subsequent passes.
Once operator has driven past deviation in field and
reacquired intended path, resume switch can be engaged
and AutoTrac™ takes over machine steering.
50-34 103113
PN=101
Guidance
Adaptive Curves Gap Fill

If recording is turned off momentarily and turned on,
a straight line is generated to fill gap where recording
was turned off if it meets a set distance and heading
requirement. AutoTrac™ does not deactivate on
subsequent passes. If generated straight line where gap
would have been on subsequent passes is incorrect,
operator takes over manual steering of machine and
navigates along best fit line.
Example: An operator drives a SPFH along a truck until
truck is full. Operator stops when truck is full and truck
drives away. Operator of the SPFH raises the head and
PC17071CC —19—24OCT13
backs up to wait for the next truck. Raising the head
turns documentation off, breaking the adaptive curve into
separate segments. On subsequent passes, gap is filled
by the white line. The gap in the blue line is still shown on
the display, but does not disable AutoTrac™.
Adaptive Curves Gap Fill Option
NOTE: Settings are saved on warm boots. Checkbox
resets to default (on) after a cold boot or reprogram. A—Curve Track Settings D—Smooth Tight Turns
B—Curve Track Recording E—Implement In-Ground Turn
GreenStar 3 Pro > Guidance > Guidance Settings tab > C—Adaptive Curve Gap Fill Radius
Curve Track Settings Change button F— Accept
Curve Track Settings

into two segments if heading and distance requirements
When Adaptive Curve Gap Fill (C) is checked, system are met. Unchecking checkbox disables this feature.
automatically connects an adaptive curve that was split
BA31779,00006EE -19-25OCT13-12/17
Guidance Patterns
The method of searching all line segments allows an
operator to drive and be guided along field patterns:
• Simple Curve (A)
• Boxed (B)
PC9032 —UN—17APR06
• Spiral (C)
• S-Curve (D)
• Race Track (E)
• Circle (F)
Shift Track Operation
Shift track is not recommended when using curve track.
Shift track does not compensate for GPS drift in curve
track mode. A—Simple Curve D—S-Curve
B—Boxed E—Race Track
C—Spiral F— Circle
50-35 103113
PN=102
Guidance
Pause Recording Feature
PC14244CC —19—24OCT13
Curve Track Pause Recording Feature
A—View C—Shift Track Settings E—Pause
B—Guidance Settings D—Curve Track Recording
Paused . . .
Pause button (E) is located next to the curve track record created is a distance of 0.8 km (0.5 mi.). If
button. distance between points is greater than 0.8 km
(0.5 mi.), line segment does not connect. This
This feature allows operator to pause recording of a disconnection results in a gap in path.
machine path. When recording is resumed, curve track
resumes recording and a straight line is created between Operating Pause Recording
space where it was paused and resumed recording.
Pause is helpful when there is a long straight section or When pause is selected, “Paused” is displayed under the
navigating around obstacles. Record button. To resume recording, select Pause button.
NOTE: Longest bridge segment (line segment created
between paused and resumed) that can be
50-36 103113
PN=103
Guidance
Recording a Straight Path within a Curved Path

Straight Path Starts from Field Edge:
1. Drive machine to designated starting spot in field.
Turn curve track recording on and select pause.
2. “Paused” is displayed under Record button.
3. Start driving first pass. When spot in field is reached
PC9297 —UN—29JUL06
where pass starts to curve, select Pause again to start
curve track recording.
4. Drive to end of first pass.
5. The straight path (B) is created when the recording
is resumed.
A—Recording Turned On and C—Recording Resumed Straight Path Starting from Field Edge
Paused
B—Bridge Segment is
Generated to Connect
Points
BA31779,00006EE -19-25OCT13-15/17

Straight Path is Between Two Curves:
1. Drive machine to designated starting spot in field, turn
curve track recording on.
2. Start driving curve path.
3. Select Pause to start creating a straight path.
PC9298 —UN—29JUL06
4. Recording indicator turns black. “Paused” is displayed
under Record button.
5. Drive straight path.
6. When at point where straight path ends, select Pause.
Curve track starts recording again.
7. Straight path (B) is created when recording is resumed.
Straight Path Between Two Curves
A—Recording Paused C—Recording Resumed
B—Bridge Segment is
Generated to Connect
Points
50-37 103113
PN=104
Guidance
Guiding Around Obstacles in Field

IMPORTANT: Resume curve track recording after
obstacle is navigated. Curve track continues to
record driven path to propagate next pass.
Recording Paused:
PC9284 —UN—29JUL06
If recording is paused when obstacle is approached and
steered around and then recording is resumed once
obstacle has been navigated. A straight-line segment
connects points where curve track recording was paused
and where it was resumed.
Next pass is propagated without a deviation or a gap
around obstacle as occurs when recording is on or off
when going around an obstacle.
If machine is navigating on curve path when recording is
paused, curve path:
• Remains displayed on page, line machine up once
PC9285 —UN—08AUG06
obstacle is navigated. If path disappears from display
due to exceeding 40% track spacing rule, manually line
machine up on other side of obstacle. Line appears
once previous pass is located again.
• AutoTrac™ can be activated while paused to get
machine lined up on path before resuming curve track
recording. Pass 2
A—Recording Paused D—Recording Resumed

B—Bridge Segment is E—Path Recorded Without
Generated to Connect Two Machines Deviated Path
Points
C—Tractor Path Not Recorded
While Paused
BA31779,00006EE -19-25OCT13-17/17
50-38 103113
PN=105
Guidance
AB Curve Mode
Theory of Operation
PC9028 —UN—16APR06
The curvature of the path changes as the subsequent paths

get more convex or concave.
PC9030C —UN—27OCT06
A—Start Recording of AB Curve B—Stop Recording of AB Curve C—Paths Generated from Track 0
(Track 0) (Track 0)
AB Curves allows an operator to drive a curved line in AB Curve Generation Limits The initially recorded AB
the field with two end points (beginning and end) and curve must be at least 10 feet in length to be a valid AB
the passes parallel to the track in either direction will be Curve to use for guidance. The vehicle must be within 400
generated based on the original driven track. Each pass meters (0.25 miles) of where Track 0 was recorded for the
is generated from the original driven pass to ensure that system to start generating curve paths. If the vehicle is at
steering errors are not propagated through the entire field. this outer limit it may take several minutes to generate
The passes are not identical copies of the original pass. a path that shows up on the screen. During this time
The curvature of the pass changes to maintain pass to “Generating AB Curve” will be displayed on the screen.
pass error.
Straight Line Extensions AB Curve paths are generated
Once the AB curve (Track 0) is recorded 5 tracks will be with a 91 m (300 ft) straight line extension attached to the
generated (Track 0 and 2 passes on either side of Track end of the actual recorded path.
0). When the vehicle drives past the 2nd track from Track
0, ten additional tracks will be generated in that direction. Multiple AB Curves in a field A field can contain multiple
The system will continue to generate additional passes AB Curve paths. Each AB curve for a field must be
when the vehicle drives past the last pass displayed on recorded and uniquely named.
the screen.
Track Numbering Tracks will be numbered to allow for
NOTE: Skip pass is available in AB Curves mode skip pass and to aid in finding passes. The direction
label (N,S,E, or W) is defined by the heading determined
Generating AB Curve Path Information As the system between the first and last point in the curve.
generates the initial passes after recording Track 0 or when
generating additional passes the text “Generating AB
Curve” will be displayed on the perspective view. During
this time you will not be able to track off of any paths.
Continued on next page HC94949,000034B -19-24OCT13-1/13
50-39 103113
PN=106
Guidance
Straight Line Extensions
PC9540 —UN—21OCT07
PC9541 —UN—21OCT07
A—Headland Boundary, may B—End of Projected A/B Curve D—Beginning of Projected A/B
or may not be defined by C—91 m (300 ft) Straight Line Curve
the GS3 system .(shown for Extension
reference only)
Straight Line Extensions A/B Curve paths are generated on the path prior to entering the field. It may also aid in
with a 91 m (300 ft) straight line extension attached to continuing the guidance path when the recorded path gets
the end of the actual recorded path. This straight line shorter than the field boundary.
extension allows the operator to get the vehicle back
50-40 103113
PN=107
Guidance
Setup
PC14478CC —19—24OCT13
GreenStar 3 Pro - Guidance Screen
A—View C—ShiftTrack Settings D—Set AB Curve
B—Guidance Settings
• GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab >> TRACKING MODE IMPORTANT: AB Curve must be selected in order
drop-down box >> AB CURVE to operate AB Curve Guidance.
50-41 103113
PN=108
Guidance
Creating an AB Curve
PC12591CC —19—24OCT13
A—View D—Tracking Mode F— General Settings button
B—Guidance Settings E—Implement Guidance Mode G—Curve Track Settings button
C—ShiftTrack Settings
Creating AB Curves a. Press the track spacing entry box

NOTE: Track 0 and AB Curve are two terms used b. Enter implement width
interchangeably, we will use term Track 0.
c. Enter desired track spacing
Track 0 is the reference point from which subsequent
curve passes in the field are based. Use the following NOTE: A higher degree of precision can be achieved
procedure to setup Track 0 and Track Spacing. for track spacing when track spacing is entered
in by rows instead of feet. More decimal places
NOTE: Multiple AB Curves may be recorded per field. are used in the track spacing calculation when
They will need to be named and recorded separately. entered in rows versus the three decimal places
allowed when entered by feet. Select (ft/rows)
1. Guidance View tab >> Set AB Curve button (lower button to change to rows.
left corner)
6. Press the AB Curve record button to start recording.
2. Press NEW button below the Current AB Curve
drop-down box. 7. Drive the initial pass.
3. Enter a name for Track 0 using the alpha/numeric 8. Press the AB Curve record button to stop recording.
keypad.
9. Press the Enter button
4. Press Enter button
5. 5. Set Track Spacing Continued on next page HC94949,000034B -19-24OCT13-4/13
50-42 103113
PN=109
Guidance
what the operator intended, it may be deleted

NOTE: If GPS signal is lost while recording, recording by using the REMOVE button.
is stopped and the AB curve that was recorded
to that point will be saved. If the AB Curve is not
HC94949,000034B -19-24OCT13-5/13
PC12637 —UN—09JUN10
Pause Recording Feature
This feature allows the user to PAUSE the recording
of a vehicle's path. When recording is UN-PAUSED,
curve track will resume recording and connect the space AB Curves Pause button
between where it was PAUSED and UN-PAUSED with
a straight line. This can be helpful when there is a
long straight section of path or when navigating around Operating Pause Recording
obstacles.
When the pause button is selected, “Paused” is displayed
NOTE: The longest bridge segment (line segment created below the RECORD button. To un-pause select the
between PAUSED and UN-PAUSED) that can be PAUSE button again.
created is a distance of 0.5 miles (2,640ft). If the
distance between the points is greater than 0.8
km (0.5 miles) (2,640 ft) the line segment will not
connect resulting in a gap in the path.
HC94949,000034B -19-24OCT13-6/13

Straight Path starts from Field Edge:
1. Drive the vehicle to the designated starting spot in the
field. Turn curve track recording on and press the
PAUSE button.
2. “Paused” is displayed below the button.
PC9297 —UN—29JUL06
3. Start driving the first pass. When the spot in the field
is reached where the pass starts to curve, select the
pause button again and curve track will start recording
again.
4. Drive to the end of the first pass.
5. The straight path (B) will be created when the
recording is un-paused. Straight Path starting from the Field's Edge
A—Recording Turned ON then C—Recording UN-PAUSED

PAUSED
B—Bridge segment is
generated to connect
points
50-43 103113
PN=110
Guidance

Straight Path is between Two Curves:
1. Drive the vehicle to the designated starting spot in the
field and turn curve track recording on.
2. Start driving the curve path.
3. When you want to start creating a straight path, select
PC9298 —UN—29JUL06
the pause button.
4. Recording indicator will turn black. “Paused” is
displayed below the button.
5. Drive the straight path.
6. When you are at the point where the straight path
should end, select the pause button again and curve
track will start recording again. Straight Path between Two Curves
7. The straight path (B) will be created when the
recording is un-paused. A—Recording PAUSED C—Recording UN-PAUSED
B—Bridge segment is
generated to connect
points
HC94949,000034B -19-24OCT13-8/13
Saving AB Curves Data

The stored AB Curve Track data is assigned to
a Client, Farm, Field name that is setup in the
RESOURCES/CONDITIONS softkey >> RESOURCES
tab.
NOTE: Setup of Client, Farm, and Field is not required
for Curve Track operation but is required for the
track to be saved and repeated.
The recorded AB Curve Track data is saved to the USB

drive. This data can be transferred into desktop software
and saved to the USB drive or additional USB drives for
use in future field applications. The USB drive can also be
PC12592CC —19—24OCT13
taken from one GS3 display to another and recall the AB
Curve Track data for use.
Recalling Saved AB Curve Data
IMPORTANT: Make sure the USB drive contains
the Curve Track data for this field.
• RESOURCES/CONDITIONS softkey >> RESOURCES Set AB Curve

tab (Select the Client, Farm, Field name to which the
stored Curve Track data was assigned.) A—Current AB Curve F— Pause Button
• GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab >> TRACKING drop-down B—New G—Cancel Button
box >>AB CURVE TRACK C—Remove H—End Track Later Button
D—Track Spacing I— Accept Button
1. Select the AB Curve Name from the Current AB Curve E—Record/Stop Button
drop down box.
2. Press Enter button
50-44 103113
PN=111
Guidance
Smooth Tight Turns

GreenStar 3 Pro - GUIDANCE >> GUIDANCE SETTINGS
tab >> CURVE TRACK SETTINGS CHANGE button
Curve Track Settings
Smooth Tight Turns—When box is checked the system
will automatically smooth a propagated path that was
PC9527CC —19—24OCT13
becoming tight.
Implement In-Ground Turning Radius (ft)—This is the
value of how tight of a turn radius the implement can
turn while in the ground. For a drawn implement, this
measurement should be no less than the physical width
of the implement. A higher Implement In-Ground Turn
Radius will result in smoother turns. A lower Implement Curve Track Settings
In-Ground Turn Radius will result in tighter turns. This
setting is only used for generating curve tracks.
A—Curve Track Settings C—Implement In-Ground Turn
NOTE: Be sure Implement In-Ground Turn Radius is set to B—Smooth Tight Turns Radius (ft)
a realistic value for the size of implement being used.
HC94949,000034B -19-24OCT13-10/13
PC9529 —UN—27OCT06
PC9530 —UN—27OCT06
Smoothing Tight Turns OFF Smoothing Tight Turns ON
A—Previous Pass C—Next Pass—Smoothing Tight D—In-Ground Turn Radius

B—Next Pass—Smoothing Tight Turns On
Turns Off
With Smoothing Tight Turns On the path is generated

based on user's turn radius.
50-45 103113
PN=112
Guidance
Remove AB Curve Track Data

GUIDANCE VIEW tab >> SET AB CURVE button
To remove curve track data:
1. Select the AB Curve name that is to be deleted from
the Current AB Curve drop-down box.
2. Press the remove button.
3. Confirm the removal of the AB Curve.
A—Current AB Curve E—Record/Stop Button

B—New Button F— Pause Button
C—Remove Button G—End Track Later Button
D—Track Spacing Button
PC12630CC —19—24OCT13
Set AB Curve
HC94949,000034B -19-24OCT13-12/13
Guiding around Obstacles in a Field

As the operator manually drives around the obstacle the
AB curve path will remain on the screen. The original path
will not be altered.
Original Path will not be Altered PC9030B —UN—24OCT06
HC94949,000034B -19-24OCT13-13/13
50-46 103113
PN=113
Guidance
Circle Track Mode

Track 0 Set Up
PC12593CC —19—24OCT13
A—View C—Shift Track Settings D—Tracking Mode
B—Guidance Settings E—General Settings
NOTE: Circle track is available in Parallel Tracking™

without a Pivot Pro activation. An AutoTrac™ Set circle center and track spacing for operation of circle
and Pivot Pro activation is required to AutoTrac™ track.
in Circle Track mode.
Guidance Settings > Tracking Mode dropdown > Circle

Track
Continued on next page BA31779,00006EF -19-25OCT13-1/4
50-47 103113
PN=114
Guidance
PC16165CC —19—24OCT13
A—View C—Shift Track Settings D—Distance to Center
B—Guidance Settings E—Set Circle
1. Select Set Circle (E). - Enter desired track spacing

2. Select New in Current Circle dropdown.
• Set track spacing from Equipment > Implement 1 >
Change Widths. See Equipment section for more
3. Enter name using alphanumeric keypad. information.
4. Select Accept. 7. Define circle center:
5. Select method to define circle center from Method • Drive Circle

dropdown. • Lat/Lon
• Drive Circle Drive Circle
• Lat/Lon NOTE: It is required to drive over 10% of circle before
6. Set track spacing. center is calculated. More of the circle that is driven,
the more accurate circle center is. Drive entire
Track spacing is defined two ways: circle for optimum circle center calculation.
NOTE: A higher degree of precision is achieved when
track spacing is entered as rows instead of feet. 1. Drive machine to desired starting location.
Select (ft.)/(rows) button to change to rows. 2. Select Record to start recording. Recording Circle is
displayed on page.
• Select track spacing button from Set Circle page:
- Enter implement width 3. Drive desired circle.
50-48 103113
PN=115
Guidance
4. Select Record again to stop recording. Record can be If multiple passes in same field are performed and follow
selected once “End Circle” is displayed on page. Drive the same passe, circle center information from the farm
and record as much of circle as possible. The more of and field can be recalled. For example, during planting,
the center pivot circle driven the more accurate center operator sets up a circle center and names it Pass 1 for
point is calculated. River Farm > East Field. When operator comes back to
spray field a month later, select River Farm > East Field
5. Select Accept on Set Circle page, concentric circles from Resources tab and select Pass 1 from Current Circle
are displayed based on track spacing. dropdown. Circle center information set up during planting
Lat/Lon is recalled. Repeat same steps for return trips to field.
NOTE: Enter Latitude and Longitude coordinates Operating Circle Track

in decimal degrees. When operating circle track it is not necessary to drive
tracks in a specific order. Depending on zoom level,
1. Select Lat. input-box. Enter center point latitude all tracks that can be displayed show up on page with
coordinates and select Accept closest track designated by a thicker line. Track number is
2. Select Lon. input-box. Enter center point longitude displayed under path accuracy indicator, and automatically
coordinates and select Accept.. updates when new track is approached. Track number
changes when machine is half way between two tracks.
3. Select Accept on Set Circle page.
Path accuracy indicator shows off track error distance. Off
Selecting Accept enters circle center coordinates, track error shows distance from closest track to machine.
concentric tracks are displayed based on track spacing. Off track error counts up until machine reaches point
halfway between two tracks. After reaching mid-point,
Line machine up on track or use center shift track to get
off track error counts down as machine approaches next
tracks lined up with machine.
track.
Circle Center Information Top right portion of Guidance View page displays distance
Circle Center information (latitude and longitude to end of pass using turn predictor. Distance counts down
coordinates) is named (occurs during Set Circle to predicted turn. Tones sound when machine is 10 sec.
procedure) and assigned to a field name where it can be from intersecting turn point and again when predicted turn
recalled for future use. Farm and field names are set up point is reached.
and changed in Resources softkey > Resources tab. See Example: An operator can enter a slightly smaller
Resources section to set up farm and field names. implement width to account for operator error while
NOTE: If farm and field names are not created, circle steering or GPS error.
center information is saved to “- - - -” farm and field.
50-49 103113
PN=116
Guidance
Distance to Center
Distance to Center displays distance from current
position of machine in field to center of circle. Distance is
continuously updated while operator Parallel Tracks™ or
AutoTracs™ on a circle track. Distance to Center value
(D) is displayed on Guidance View tab (A).
Example: If length of center pivot is known, this feature
aids in lining up an implement for first pass. For example,
if center pivot is 305 m (1000 ft.) long, and implement
is 12 m (40 ft.) wide, drive 299 m (980 ft.), and center
shift guidance line. Another example is if the implement is
6 m (20 ft.) wide, drive 302 m (990 ft.), and center shift
guidance line.
PC16166CC —19—24OCT13
Go to Guidance Settings > General Settings to enable or
disable Distance to Center of Pivot.
Shift Track When in Circle Track Mode
NOTE: RTK Absolute Base Mode is highly recommended
in high accuracy applications when using Circle
Track. Only RTK Absolute Base Mode provides
consistent repeatability and accuracy in Circle Track.
Use shift track to shift tracks radially closer or further from

center point. Shift track does not move center point. Shift
track allows operator to use various implement widths,
account for different lengths of center pivot towers, or to
account for stretching or shrinking of center pivot irrigation
sections.
Example 1: Operator makes first pass through field, saving
circle center information to Pass 1 and River Farm > East
Field using a 4.6 m (15 ft.) implement. Operator returns for
second pass in same field with 9.1 m (30 ft.) implement.
To follow stored track, operator recalls saved circle center
Pass 1, line up machine on desired track, and use a one
time shift track to allow for difference in implement widths.
PC16167CC —19—24OCT13
Example 2: Operator uses SF2 and defines a circle center
point by manually driving circle. Next day, operator returns
to field and finds AutoTrac™ is not lining up properly with
previous path due to GPS drift. Operator drives circle to
find circle center point.
Shift Track Operation
To move line to left, select Left Shift Track button. To
move line to right, select Right Shift Track button. Each A—View D—Distance to Center
B—Guidance Settings E—Distance to Center of Pivot
time left or right button is selected, line is moved amount C—Shift Track Settings F— Accept
defined in Shift Track Settings. To center line on current
location of machine, select Center Shift Track button.
To clear all shifts, go to Shift Track Settings page and When operating circle track in some slope conditions,
select Clear all Shifts. The shift totals appear on guidance circle track spacing and center pivot track do not match in
map if Show Shift Track Totals on Map is enabled. tracks away from the center pivot. This spacing is due to
difference between distance traveled over a hill and on a
Accuracy in Slope Conditions level plane. AutoTrac™ draws the circle spacing as if the
Circle track was designed for center pivot operation on plane were level. This difference in distance increases as
ground with less than 2% slope. slope increases.
BA31779,00006EF -19-25OCT13-4/4
50-50 103113
PN=117
Guidance
Swap Track Mode
PC13627CC —19—24OCT13
Guidance Settings - Swap Track
A—View tab C—Shift Track Settings tab E—General Settings button
B—Guidance Settings tab D—Tracking Mode selection
Swap track allows operators to switch between four NOTE: Swap Track works with existing guidance lines.
guidance lines in the same field. Swap track can be used Lines must be created before using Swap Track.
to switch between any Straight Track, Adaptive Curve, AB
Curve or Circle Track guidance lines within a field. 1. Select Guidance Settings tab
Swap Track automatically changes the Tracking Mode 2. In Tracking Mode selection, choose Swap Track
and Track Name associated to the tracks selected without
the operator having to change them.
Continued on next page BA31779,000551F -19-24OCT13-1/4
50-51 103113
PN=118
Guidance
3. Select VIEW tab

4. Select Swap Track Setup button.
A—View tab B—Swap Track Setup button
PC14247CC —19—24OCT13
Guidance View - Swap Track
BA31779,000551F -19-24OCT13-2/4
5. If a guidance line has already been selected, it will be

displayed as Current Track. Otherwise, set Current
Track to guidance line that will be used first.
6. In Swap- to Track(s) selection, choose the second
guidance line that will be used in the field. Operators
can also select the third and fourth guidance lines
using the additional drop-down boxes.
NOTE: It is required to select at least one Swap-to Track.
NOTE: If any Swap-to Track(s) are left blank, the selected

Swap-to Track(s) are grouped once the accept
button is selected. This grouping allows the operator
to toggle between selected tracks.
PC16149CC —19—24OCT13
NOTE: Only existing guidance lines for the current
field are displayed. Change tracking mode to
Straight Track, Adaptive Curve, AB Curve, or
Circle Track to create a new guidance line.
Once created, return to Swap Track to use new
guidance line with other existing lines.
Setup Swap Tracks
NOTE: Guidance lines are arranged in order of mode
(Straight, Curve, then circle) and then alphabetically
within each of the modes. A—Current Track selection C—Accept button
B—Swap-to Track selection
7. Select Accept button.
NOTE: Changes to the Current Track and the
associated information are not made until the
Accept button is pressed.
Continued on next page BA31779,000551F -19-24OCT13-3/4
50-52 103113
PN=119
Guidance
8. The Current Track is displayed at the bottom of the

View tab and the Swap-to Track is displayed within the
Swap Track Toggle button.
Select the Swap Track Toggle button to switch
between selected guidance lines.
Changing Swap-to Track
While operating with the Current Track, the operator can
select the Swap Track Setup button and change the
Swap-to Tracks.
NOTE: The operator can change the order of guidance
lines in the setup button.
PC14248CC —19—24OCT13
Operating with AutoTrac
When the Swap Track Toggle button is selected and
the system switches to the new guidance line, AutoTrac
deactivates. The AutoTrac Status Pie shows three pieces
of the pie. The operator only must press the resume
switch to activate AutoTrac.
Guidance View - Swap Track Buttons
Changing the Current Track, while operating AutoTrac,
deactivates AutoTrac when the Accept button is pressed.
A—Swap Track Toggle button C—Setup button
Operator can access the Setup button and select the next B—Current Track D—AutoTrac Status Pie
desired track without deactivating AutoTrac.
NOTE: After the last Swap Track is selected the list will
start over with the first track that was selected
in the Swap Track Settings.
BA31779,000551F -19-24OCT13-4/4
50-53 103113
PN=120
Guidance
Tram Lines
Tram Lines are guidance lines shown in a differentiating
color to help machine operators distinguish between
regular guidance lines and guidance lines where
adjustments must be made to the implement. For
example, manually turning off planter sections to allow a
drivable pass in the field at a predetermined spacing.
Operators can set up Tram Lines and view them on
Guidance maps. Tram lines are compatible with Straight
Track, AB Curves, and Circle Tracks.
Tram Line spacing and Tram Shifts are saved to the
PC14318CC —19—24OCT13
guidance lines they were set up for. Operators can recall
Tram Line settings when a guidance line with Tram Line
setup is selected.
When viewing Tram Lines on guidance maps the Tram
Line currently being tracked on is light blue. Planned
Tram lines are shown in bright green.
NOTE: Tram Lines work with existing guidance Guidance Settings - Tram Settings
lines. Guidance lines must be created before
setting up Tram Lines. A—View D—General Settings
B—Guidance Settings E—Tram Settings
Tram Line Setup C—Shift Track Settings
1. Select Guidance Settings tab.

2. Select Tram Settings button (E).
Continued on next page BA31779,0000400 -19-24OCT13-1/3
50-54 103113
PN=121
Guidance
3. Check the Tram Lines Checkbox (A) to turn on the

ability to view projected Tram Lines on guidance map.
4. Increase or Decrease the Tram Spacing (B) using the
+/- buttons to adjust the number of guidance lines
between each projected tram line.
NOTE: Tram Spacing is the number of guidance
lines between Tram lines.
Minimum spacing is 0 and maximum
spacing is 20.
5. Select Center Shift button (D) to shift Tram Line to

current track.
Tram Shift function allows the operator to adjust which
guidance lines are planned Tram Lines, but do not
PC14317CC —19—24OCT13
affect any guidance Shift Track settings.
NOTE: Direction of Shift and distance shifted is
shown below the Tram Shift buttons.
Tram Line Settings
A—Tram Lines Checkbox E—Tram Shifts - Right

B—Tram Spacing F— Clear Shifts
C—Tram Shifts - Left G—Info
D—Tram Shifts - Center H—Accept
Continued on next page BA31779,0000400 -19-24OCT13-2/3
50-55 103113
PN=122
Guidance
The ‘?’ button (G) displays a popup with help text for
the specific settings.
(A) Tram Lines Checkbox
Shows/Hides Tram Lines on the Guidance map.
(B) Tram Lines Settings Map
Reflects Tram Lines using the existing settings along with
displaying the current track number and zoom controls.
(C) Tram Line Colors
• Current Tram Line — Represents the Tram Line
currently being tracked on.
• Projected Tram Line — Represents the projected
Tram Lines using the Tram Spacing and Shift Settings.
PC14319CC —19—24OCT13
(D) Tram Spacing
The number of tracks between the projected Tram Lines.
The range of this value is from 0 to 20 tracks.
(E) Tram Shifts - Left/Right Shift
Shifts the Tram Lines left or right by one track.
Tram Line Settings 1/2
(F) Tram Shifts - Center Shift
Shifts the Tram Lines to align to the current acquired track.
(G) Tram Shifts - Clear Shift
Clears the existing Tram Shifts.
PC14320CC —19—24OCT13
Tram Line Settings 2/2
BA31779,0000400 -19-24OCT13-3/3
50-56 103113
PN=123
Guidance
AutoTrac Setup It is very important to remember:

Operate Guidance Systems Safely
• Receiver has to go through a warm-up period after
Read and understand Operate Guidance Systems Safely starting.
in the Safety section. • Vehicle is set up properly (for example: ballasted
according to vehicle operator manual).
AutoTrac System • Implement is set up to run properly (wear parts such
as shanks, shovels, and sweeps are in good working
General Information condition and correctly spaced).
IMPORTANT: • Understand how field/soil conditions affect system
(loose soil requires more steering than firm soil, but firm
AutoTrac system relies on Global Positioning soil can cause uneven draft loads).
System (GPS) operated by the United States
government, which is solely responsible for its Status Pie
accuracy and maintenance. System is subject IMPORTANT: Although AutoTrac system can be
to changes that could affect accuracy and activated when SF2 (or SF1 if using AutoTrac
performance of all GPS equipment. SF1 activation) correction signal is confirmed,
Operator must maintain responsibility for system accuracy may continue to increase
machine and must turn at end of each track. after powering up system.
This system will not turn at end of a track AutoTrac SF2 activation will operate on
unless equipped with iTEC Pro. SF1, SF2, or RTK signal.
AutoTrac basic system is intended to be used as an AutoTrac SF1 activation will operate on
assistance tool to mechanical markers. Operator must SF1 signal only.
evaluate overall system accuracy to determine specific
field operations where assisted steering may be used. NOTE: Status pie and steer icon will not be displayed if
This evaluation is necessary because accuracy required no SSU or AutoTrac Activation is detected.
for various field operations may differ depending on
farming operation. Because AutoTrac uses StarFire AutoTrac icon has four stages as shown in AutoTrac
differential correction network along with GPS, slight shifts Status Pie
in position may occur over time.
• INSTALLED
AutoTrac Accuracy— Overall AutoTrac system accuracy • CONFIGURED
is dependent upon many variables. Equation looks like: • ENABLED
AutoTrac System Accuracy = Signal accuracy + Vehicle
Setup + Implement Setup + Field/Soil Conditions.
50-57 103113
PN=124
Guidance
• ACTIVATED PC8832 —UN—25OCT05
Stage 1 INSTALLED (1/4 of pie)—SSU and all other

hardware necessary for use are installed.
• SSU is detected
Stage 1—INSTALLED
HC94949,0000302 -19-24OCT13-2/26
PC8833 —UN—25OCT05
Stage 2 CONFIGURED (2/4 of pie)—Tracking Mode has
been determined. A valid Track 0 has been established.
Correct StarFire signal level for AutoTrac activation is
selected. Vehicle conditions met.
• Guidance system has been turned ON in display.
• Guidance Track 0 has been defined. Stage 2—CONFIGURED
• AutoTrac Activation detected.
• StarFire signal is present. • Speed is less than maximum.
• SSU has no active faults pertaining to the steering • TCM message is currently available and valid.
function. • In proper operating gear.
• Hydraulic oil warmer than minimum temperature.
HC94949,0000302 -19-24OCT13-3/26
PC8836 —UN—25OCT05
Steer On/Off– Press steer On/Off button to move
AutoTrac from CONFIGURED stage to ENABLED stage.
Steer On/Off
HC94949,0000302 -19-24OCT13-4/26
PC8834 —UN—25OCT05
Stage 3 ENABLED (3/4 of pie)—Steer Icon has been
pressed. All conditions are met for AutoTrac to operate
and system is ready to be activated.
• Select Steer On/Off button once to turn “Steer On”
Stage 3—ENABLED
HC94949,0000302 -19-24OCT13-5/26
PC8835 —UN—25OCT05
Stage 4 ACTIVATED (4/4 of pie with “A”)—Resume switch
has been pressed and AutoTrac is steering vehicle.
• Press Resume Switch—AutoTrac has been activated
Stage 4—ACTIVATED
50-58 103113
PN=125
Guidance
PC8629 —UN—03AUG05
PC8868 —UN—02NOV05
Tractors
Tractors
N63532 —UN—07AUG03
PC7989 —UN—04NOV03
4700 and 4710 Sprayers
4720, 4920, 30, and 40 Series Sprayers
Resume Switch– Press Resume Switch to move

AutoTrac from ENABLED stage to ACTIVATED stage.
Pictures show where Resume Switch can be found on
tractors, sprayers, and combines. Combines use button 2
or 3 on multi-function handle.
A—Resume Switch
PC7925 —UN—14OCT03
Combines
50-59 103113
PN=126
Guidance
PC8852 —UN—30OCT05
Steering Sensitivity
To adjust steering sensitivity select input box and enter
desired steering sensitivity value via numeric keypad and
select enter button. Sensitivity can also be adjusted up or
down by selecting + or – buttons on either side of steer
sensitivity input box.
NOTE: Valid range for steer sensitivity is 50-200 with Steer Sensitivity
200 being the most aggressive setting.
such as integral implements with a heavy draft load. A
User Adjustable Steering Sensitivity—steering low steering sensitivity setting is less aggressive to allow
sensitivity is aggressiveness of AutoTrac steering system. system to handle lighter draft loads and higher speeds.
A high steering sensitivity setting is more aggressive to
allow system to handle tough manual steering conditions
HC94949,0000302 -19-24OCT13-8/26
PC8848 —UN—30OCT05
PC8849 —UN—30OCT05
Figure A Figure B
A—Default Gain C—Track

B—Entered Steering Gain D—2.5 seconds
Steering sensitivity is only applied after machine is within event may be observed when implement is raised at start
0.5 m (1.6 ft.) of track FIGURE A. Therefore, adjusting or end of row transitions. If this event is observed while
steering sensitivity does not change line acquisition implement is activated, sensitivity level is too high (see
performance. Steering Sensitivity).
Steering sensitivity is momentarily reduced if tractor front
wheel and heading oscillations become too large. This
50-60 103113
PN=127
Guidance
Adjusting Steering Sensitivity Level integral implement requires a higher steering sensitivity
than a similar drawn implement. Finally, steering
Steering sensitivity must be adjusted to accommodate sensitivity will not address condition where front wheels
field conditions and tractor/implement configuration. are not able to turn tractor. Always make sure front axle
Steering sensitivity should always be evaluated when load with implement activated is sufficient for steering
implement is activated. In general, soft soil requires a before adjusting steering sensitivity level.
higher steering sensitivity level than firm ground and an
PC8850 —UN—30OCT05
PC8851 —UN—30OCT05
Figure A Figure B
A—10 second B—1 second C—Track
Too Low—If steering sensitivity is too low, a slow

wandering track error pattern can be observed on display. AutoTrac performance during line acquisitions, Curve Trac
This track error pattern takes approximately 10 seconds to or in-row S-ing that cannot be tuned out using Steering
go from side to side as is shown in FIGURE A. If excessive Sensitivity adjustment.
track error is occurring, increase steering sensitivity by Difficult ground conditions (extremely soft or extremely
small increments until desired accuracy is achieved. rough) require additional tuning beyond the capabilities of
NOTE: It is normal to see a momentary track error when standard Steering Sensitivity value.
encountering a large rut, furrow, or implement load
change. Proper steering sensitivity adjustment
will help minimize track error. Read this information in its entirety BEFORE tuning
AutoTrac Advanced Settings.
Too High—Setting steering sensitivity to highest level
will not result in maximum tracking accuracy. If steering
sensitivity is too high, excessive front wheel motion AutoTrac Advanced Settings software includes six different
will be observed which reduces accuracy and causes tunable sensitivities that allow finer adjustment of
unnecessary front axle component wear. At extreme AutoTrac system. The following are details for tuning
high levels, machine motion will become large enough to this software:
cause steering sensitivity to be momentarily changed to 1. Check & fix other problems before you
default level. Wheel motion to watch for when determining tune—Perform necessary mechanical checks and
if aggressiveness is too high occurs at an interval of calibrations through associated tractor. It is important
approximately 1 second from side to side as shown in to do this step first otherwise you run the risk of
FIGURE B. If excessive wheel motion is observed, lower masking actual machine faults and wasting your time
steering sensitivity by small increments until desired tuning a system that cannot be tuned.
performance is achieved.
2. Characterize current AutoTrac problem—There are
Advanced AutoTrac Settings various types of issues this software may be able to
Tuning Recommendations resolve. First, the specific type of problem needs to be
identified from the possible items below:
NOTE: AutoTrac Controller has been tuned to perform
well in most field conditions using the variety of a. Excessive Wheel Motion—Overall AutoTrac
implements encountered by AutoTrac. However, for performance is acceptable, but operator is
those conditions outside of normal, we have provided concerned about how quickly the wheels are
Advanced Settings to allow operator fine-tune their twitching back and forth.
systems for specific field conditions and implements.
Problem or Situation:
50-61 103113
PN=128
Guidance
b. Aggressive S-ing Motion—Continual back and

forth motion as observed by operator looking out d. Steering Response Rate: Adjusts rate of vehicle
over front nose of tractor. Although a lot of motion is steering in order to maintain tracking performance.
observed, off-track error shown on display (distance Increasing steering responsiveness generally
away from AB line) is often relatively small. results in better tracking performance.
Higher settings: Result in better tracking
c. Lazy S-ing Motion—Performance of AutoTrac performance but may also cause increased wheel
seems sluggish when trying to stay on line and motion or jittery behavior.
slowly wanders from side to side. Lower settings: Results in decreased wheel motion
but may also result in worse tracking performance.
d. Lazy Line Acquisition—AutoTrac appears Range: 50 to 200.
sluggish during line acquisition and tractor remains
off to one side of line for a long time before getting e. Curve Sensitivity: Determines how aggressively
lined up. AutoTrac responds to a curve in track. This setting
affects performance in curve track guidance only.
e. Aggressive Line Acquisition—AutoTrac Higher settings: Turn vehicle in a smaller radius
overshoots line, and continues to overcompensate (tighter) around curve.
during acquisition. Results in high frequency, tight Lower settings: Turn vehicle in a larger radius
S-ing pattern during acquisitions. around curve.
Range: 50 to 200.
f. Lazy Curve Track Performance—AutoTrac is
sluggish in Curve Track mode resulting in slow, f. Acquire Sensitivity: Determines how aggressively
wandering S-ing about the desired line and often vehicle acquires track. This setting affects
tracks to the outside of desired path. performance while acquiring track only.
High settings: Result in more aggressive line
g. Aggressive Curve Track Performance—AutoTrac acquisitions.
exhibits rapid and high frequency corrections in Lower settings: Result in smoother line acquisitions.
Curve Track mode, resulting in a tight S-ing pattern Range: 50 to 200.
or tracking to the inside of desired path.
5. Follow Tuning Instructions—First try to adjust
3. Access Advanced Settings page on GS3. settings based on how it was characterized in Step
2. If familiar with how settings affect performance,
4. ATI Advanced Settings Parameters. proceed to general tuning instructions if desired.
Although customer’s comfort needs to be taken into
a. Line Sensitivity Heading: Determines how account, try to tune tractor based on lateral error
aggressively AutoTrac responds to heading error. on GS3 and tracks that tractor leaves behind. After
Higher Settings: Result in more aggressive finding a reasonable set of parameters, try running
response to vehicle heading error. tractor at different speeds to ensure settings are
Lower settings: Result in less aggressive response still acceptable. Sometimes settings that maximize
to vehicle heading error. AutoTrac performance are very close to making
Range: 50 to 200. operator feel uncomfortable.
b. Line Sensitivity Tracking (Lateral Gain):

Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds General Tuning Instructions
to off-track (lateral) error.
Higher settings: Result in more aggressive Adjustment Recommendations:
response to vehicle off-track error. • Steering Sensitivity—Set at 100 before making
Lower settings: Result in less aggressive response other adjustments – after that make adjustments in
to vehicle off-track error. increments of 10.
Range: 50 to 200.
• Line Sensitivity Tracking—Adjust in increments of 20.
c. Heading Lead: Determines impact of yaw rate
(vehicle rate of turn) on tracking performance. • Line Sensitivity Heading—Adjust in increments 10.
Heading lead acts as a look-ahead parameter and
can be used to minimize over steering. Large • Heading Lead—Adjust in increments 10.
adjustments may result in poor performance.
Higher settings: Result in more aggressive • Steering Response Rate—Adjust in increments 10.
response to yaw rate.
Lower settings: Result in less aggressive response • Acquire Sensitivity—Adjust in increments 20.
to yaw rate.
Range: 50 to 130. • Curve Sensitivity—Adjust in increments 20.
50-62 103113
PN=129
Guidance
One Value at a Time—Attempt to adjust settings in down this parameter until an acceptable amount of
problem field conditions while AutoTrac is active. wheel motion exists. Although it may be possible for
this parameter to be changed independently, you may
need to increase Line Sensitivity Heading and/or Line
1. Start with factory default settings.Steering Sensitivity Tracking (lateral) gains to compensate for
Sensitivity value will correlate to the value on the the wheel motion decrease. Keep in mind that forcing
Guidance View Tap. Attempt to use a value for this this value too low may compromise AutoTrac accuracy
setting that is similar to conditions in which you are because this responsiveness determines how quickly
running (70 for concrete, 100 most conditions, 120 the system can compensate for off-track error. The
for soft ground). This number may still need to be recommended Steering Wheel Speed setting should
modified beyond suggested settings. be adjusted until there is slightly less wheel motion
than what is considered excessive by the operator.
2. While AutoTrac is active in problem conditions (such 2. Aggressive S-ing Motion—The two main
as speeds, ground, or tire setup), increase/reduce adjustments to address aggressive S-ing motion are
Line Sensitivity Heading by a factor of 10. Line Sensitivity Heading and Heading Lead. Start
by increasing Heading Lead to enable system to
3. If change in Line Sensitivity Heading is ineffective at look further ahead when making corrections. If this
addressing the issue, reset Line Sensitivity Heading is unsuccessful, the likely cause is overaggressive
parameter and increase/reduce Heading Lead in Line Sensitivity Heading and this gain should then be
same manner as the previous step. reduced. Forcing this gain low may require an increase
in Line Sensitivity Tracking (Lateral) gain to maintain
4. If none of the previous steps were effective, reset overall system performance at an acceptable level.
Heading Lead and increase/reduce Steering 3. Lazy S-ing Motion—This may be the most difficult
Response Rate in a similar fashion to previous steps. situation to address because the sluggish behavior
can be caused by field conditions or machine setup.
Combining Settings—If the above procedure does In some cases, tuning the gains may not achieve
not give satisfactory performance and once you have performance desired. Start by increasing Line
become more comfortable with how parameters change Sensitivity Tracking and check performance. If system
AutoTrac performance (as detailed in the previous step), remains sluggish, increase Line Sensitivity Heading
try different combinations of parameters while AutoTrac is until system begins to respond more aggressively. If
active. The following chart should be used as a reference fine-tuning is needed, Steering Response Rate can be
and contains suggested values based on various types adjusted accordingly, increasing this value will make
of conditions, please note that values may need to be system more aggressive.
adjusted beyond these recommendations to achieve
satisfactory performance. Step 1: Optimize Steering Response Rate
To return all settings to their default values, use the • Tune speed by operating parallel to and 1.2 m (4 ft.)
“Return To Defaults” button provided at the bottom of the off of A-B Line.
Advanced Settings screen. • Activate AutoTrac Controller and observe performance.
Most Common Conditions
• While tuning, adjust in increments of 10 between range
of 50 to 200.
1. Excessive Wheel Motion—Adjust Steering Response
Rate first before making any other adjustments. Turn
50-63 103113
PN=130
Guidance
PC8797 —UN—21FEB06
Step 2: Optimize Acquire Sensitivity
• Tune speed by operating parallel to and 1.2 m (4 ft.)

off of A-B Line.
• Activate AutoTrac Controller and observe performance.
• Tune Acquire Sensitivity until machine acquires line
smoothly. Acquire Sensitivity Too Low
PC8796 —UN—21FEB06
A—Desired Track—Broken B—Actual Track—Solid Line

Line
Acquire Sensitivity Too High

PC8999 —UN—08MAR06
HC94949,0000302 -19-24OCT13-13/26
Step 3: Optimize Line Sensitivity

A: Line Sensitivity—Tracking
• Tune line sensitivity tracking while operating on A-B line.
• If machine wanders too far from A-B line adjust line
sensitivity—tracking higher.
• If machine becomes unstable around A-B line adjust
PC8794 —UN—08MAR06
line sensitivity—tracking lower.
B: Line Sensitivity—Heading
• Tune line sensitivity heading while operating on A-B line.
• If the front of the machine wanders too far from track
direction, adjust line sensitivity—heading higher.
• If machine becomes unstable, adjust line Line Sensitivities Too Low
sensitivity—heading lower.
NOTE: Line Sensitivities work together—If both are set
too high,vehicle will become unstable. If both are
set too low, vehicle will wander around A-B line.
A—Desired Track—Broken B—Actual Track—Solid Line

Line
PC8795 —UN—08MAR06
Line Sensitivities Too High
PC8999 —UN—08MAR06
50-64 103113
PN=131
Guidance
Heading Error Meter

Heading Error Meter is designed to aid in tuning Advanced
AutoTrac Settings.
Ideally, heading error should be within +/- 1 degree.
Arched bar graph value will live update with minimum and
maximum heading error changes over the last 10 seconds.
Heading Error Meter value indicator will be red when
heading error is greater than 0.5 degrees or less than -0.5
degrees. Indicator will be green if heading error is greater
than -0.5 degrees and less than 0.5 degrees.
NOTE: Heading Error Meter is also available when
using AutoTrac Universal.
PC12225CC —19—24OCT13
Heading Error Meter
50-65 103113
PN=132
Guidance
Advanced AutoTrac Screens
PC14326CC —19—24OCT13
A—View D—Tracking Mode Drop-Down F— General Settings
B—Guidance Settings Menu G—Lightbar Settings
C—Shift Track Settings E—Implement Guidance Mode H—AutoTrac Advanced Settings
Drop-Down Menu
50-66 103113
PN=133
Guidance
Advanced AutoTrac Settings

Select machine direction from Machine Direction
Drop-down box.
NOTE: AutoTrac Reverse settings can be adjusted on all
machines, but only affects performance on select
models. See Ag Sales Manual for more information..
Accept button (K) saves and applies current settings and

returns to the previous page. Restore Default Settings
button (N) sets all settings to factory default value. See
each setting for its default value. The ‘?’ button (H) displays
a pop-up with help text for each of the specific settings.
A—Machine Direction I— Help Button
PC14861CC —19—24OCT13
Drop-down Box J— Back Button
B—Line Sensitivity Tracking K—Next Button
C—Decrease Button L— Accept Button
D—Bar Graph M—Acquire Sensitivity
E—Increase Button N—Curve Sensitivity
F— Line Sensitivity Heading O—Restore Default Settings
G—Heading lead P—Monitor Performance
H—Steering Response Rate
Advanced AutoTrac Settings 1/2
PC14864CC —19—24OCT13
Advanced AutoTrac Settings 2/2

50-67 103113
PN=134
Guidance
Line Sensitivity Tracking

Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to
off-track (lateral) error.
Higher settings: Results in more aggressive response to
vehicle off-track error.
Lower Settings: Results in less aggressive response to
vehicle off-track error.
PC14185CC —19—24OCT13
Line Sensitivity Tracking 1/6
50-68 103113
PN=135
Guidance
Line Sensitivity Heading

Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to
heading errors.
Higher settings: Result in more aggressive response to
vehicle heading error.
Lower settings: Result in less aggressive response to
vehicle heading error.
A—Heading Error B—Tracking Error
PC14186CC —19—24OCT13
Line Sensitivity Heading 2/6
PC8994 —UN—07MAR06
PC8993 —UN—09MAR06
50-69 103113
PN=136
Guidance
Steering Wheel Speed

Adjusts rate of vehicle steering to maintain tracking
performance. Increasing steering wheel speed generally
results in better tracking performance. If set to high,
steering column resistance can result in AutoTrac
deactivations.
PC14187CC —19—24OCT13
Steering Wheel Speed 3/6
HC94949,0000302 -19-24OCT13-20/26
Steer Play
Some vehicles have excess play in their steering system
which allows steering wheel to be turned without change
in vehicle direction. This setting controls distance that the
steering wheel turns to take up this excess play.
PC14188CC —19—24OCT13
Steer Play 4/6

50-70 103113
PN=137
Guidance
Acquire Sensitivity
Determines how aggressively vehicle acquires track. This
setting affects performance while acquiring the track only.
High settings: Results in a more aggressive track line
acquisition.
Lower settings: Results will give smoother entry into the
next track.
PC14189CC —19—24OCT13
Acquire Sensitivity 5/6
HC94949,0000302 -19-24OCT13-22/26
Curve Sensitivity
Determines how aggressively AutoTrac responds to a
curve in the track. This setting affects performance in
curve track guidance only.
Higher settings: Turns vehicle in a smaller radius (tighter)
around curve.
Lower Settings: Turns vehicle in a larger radius around
curve.
PC14190CC —19—24OCT13
Curve Sensitivity 6/6

50-71 103113
PN=138
Guidance
Diagnostic Readings
PC12746CC —19—24OCT13
GREENSTAR 3 PRO >> DIAGNOSTIC softkey >> AutoTrac
• (A) View - Drop-down Box. • (J) Pivot Pro License - Indicates if display has a valid
• (B) Last Exit Code Issued - Indicates why AutoTrac Pivot Pro License.
deactivated or will not activate. • (K) AB Line Defined - Indicates if a valid AB (Track 0)
• (C) Time of Last Exit Code - Time and date of when is defined and selected for current tracking mode.
last exit code occurred. • (L) Free of SSU Trouble Codes - Indicates if SSU
• (D) SSU Capabilities (Curve, Reverse, Steer has any active trouble codes which might not allow
Sensitivity) - Indicates if vehicle steering controller AutoTrac to activate.
is capable of operating in Curve Track, Reverse, or if • (M) Valid Implement Guidance Configuration - If
Steer Sensitivity is tunable from display. Yes or No will implement guidance is in use, indicates whether certain
be displayed indicating if that feature is available or not. settings and constraints have been met.
• (E) AutoTrac License - Indicates whether or not the • (N) Steer On/Off Button - Indicates if Steer On/Off
display has a valid AutoTrac License and which it is button is in the on or off state.
(SF1 or SF2). • (O) Vehicle Gear Selected - Show which gear the
• (F) GPS Valid - Indicates if valid GPS is received. vehicle is currently in.
• (G) Differential Correction Indicates if receiving • (P) Speed Within Range - Indicates if vehicle is
differential correction. traveling within speed range limitations of the platform
• (H) Differential Mode Selected Indicates differential AutoTrac is operating on.
correction mode selected on StarFire receiver (SF1, • (Q) Within 80 Degrees of Line - Indicates if vehicle
SF2, RTK). heading is within 80 degrees of the track the vehicle
• (I) Tracking Mode Selected - Displays which tracking is trying to acquire.
mode is currently selected. • (R) Within 40% Tracking Width - Indicates if vehicle
off track error is within 40% of the track spacing.
50-72 103113
PN=139
Guidance
Enhanced AutoTrac Diagnostics
PC14193CC —19—24OCT13
GREENSTAR 3 PRO >> DIAGNOSTIC softkey >> Enhanced AutoTrac
• (A) View - Drop-down Box. • (H) Machine GPS Receiver - Displays slowest and
• (B) Information fastest speeds allowed by machine receiver. iTC
• (C) Lower Speed Limit - Calculated by tractor and receivers operating SF1, SF2, or RTK, as well as 3000
reflects the slowest speed AutoTrac is allowed to receivers operating SF1 and SF2 GPS signal will have
activate. Speed must be at or above 0.1 km/h (0.1 mph). a speed limit of 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph) and higher. 3000
• (D) Upper Speed Limit - Calculated by tractor and receivers operating RTK signal will have a speed range
reflects the fastest speed AutoTrac is allowed to limit of 0.1 km/h (0.1 mph) and higher.
activate. Speed must be at or below 30 km/h (18.6 mph). • (I) Implement Steering Controller - Displays slowest
• (E) Unlimited Reverse Capable and fastest speeds allowed by steering controller
installed on implement. Normal speed range of
NOTE: Minimum and maximum speeds allowed are Application Controller 1100 is 0.5—30 km/h (0.3—18.6
controlled by tractor platform and software mph).
version of the Steering Controller. For a complete
list of compatible tractors with this additional
• (J) Implement GPS Receiver - Displays slowest and
fastest speeds allowed by implement receiver. iTC
functionality, visit www.StellarSupport.com. receivers operating SF1, SF2, or RTK, as well as 3000
receivers operating SF1 and SF2 gps signal will have
• (F) Overall System - Displays slowest and highest a speed limit of 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph) and higher. 3000
speed capabilities. Values are calculated using machine receivers operating RTK signal will have a speed range
and implement steering controller capabilities, as well limit of 0.1 km/h (0.1 mph) and higher.
as the GPS receiver capabilities.
• (K) iGuide Enabled - Displays Yes when iGuide is
• (G) Machine Steering Controller - Displays slowest enabled and No when iGuide is disabled.
and fastest speeds allowed by steering controller
installed on machine.
50-73 103113
PN=140
Guidance
AutoTrac System Accuracy

Accuracy Equation
AutoTrac System Accuracy = GPS Signal Accuracy + Steering Kit Type + Vehicle Setup + Tracking Mode + Implement Setup +
Field/Soil Conditions
GPS Signal Accuracy especially when using Curve Track, will give accuracy
on the ground that may be less than desirable for some
The starting point of any system is the receiver. Guidance row-crop applications.
begins with that receiver receiving raw GPS signals from
satellites and a differential correction to that signal. Raw Please refer to machine operator’s manual for complete
GPS tells the receiver approximately where it is, and the recommendations on ballast.
differential correction signal hones into its actual position.
Fifteen-minute pass-to-pass accuracy is the range of Tracking Mode
accuracy that a customer will experience in typical Tracking Mode refers to the AutoTrac mode being used
conditions. For example, the SF1 signal has a 15-minute with the system (Straight Track, Circle Track, or Curve
pass-to-pass accuracy of 33 cm (13-in.) 95% of the time. Track). With Straight Track and Curve Track, multiple A/B
This means that the accuracy of a StarFire iTC with SF1 lines can be set based off the initial track and implement
signal will show a location 33 cm (13-in.) or less to its width. In Adaptive Curve mode, multiple Adaptive Curves
actual position 95% of the time and 16 cm (6.5-in.) or less can be recorded and stored on the display. While John
68% of the time. The signal accuracy that the customer is Deere Curve Track software "smooths" the track to record
using helps determine the accuracy they can expect. a better curved line, there is still the opportunity for greater
Steering Kit Type error on the ground with Curve Track than in both Straight
Track and Circle Track. Once all tracks have been laid and
Steering Kit Type refers to which type of AutoTrac vehicle the vehicle is operating in repeat mode, the vehicle still
kit, ATU, or integrated AutoTrac steering kit is being has the possibility for increased error due to the machine
used on the machine. While performance can be similar characteristics while navigating through a curve pass.
between a properly set up ATU kit and an integrated kit, GPS Signal Accuracy, Vehicle Setup, Implement Setup,
testing has shown that total system error may be greater and Field/Soil Conditions still affect the accuracy equation.
with the ATU kit than with the integrated kit. Customers
may notice delayed line acquisition and higher off-track Implement Setup
errors with the ATU kit. AutoTrac universal kit on 2WD A common cause of unsatisfactory performance of the
machines may also have less accuracy due to less steering AutoTrac system is improper implement setup. It is best
authority on the front end. For maximum accuracy, both to ensure AutoTrac performance of the vehicle alone is
the integrated kit and the ATU kit need to have sensitivities sufficient prior to attaching to an implement. Once the
properly set up and monitored for field conditions. vehicle is proven to sufficiently track up and back on
Vehicle Setup the same line, connect the implement to ensure overall
system performance. The implement must pull straight
Proper setup of vehicles is crucial to the performance and level behind the vehicle, meaning all parts (shanks,
of AutoTrac. This includes making sure the vehicle is planter units, etc) need to be spaced appropriately and
ballasted by increasing weight on the steering axle up should not be damaged or worn unevenly from one side
to, but not exceeding the weight capacity of the tires to to the other. A good exercise is to measure from the
improve steering authority. Please note that if additional center line of the tractor to each individual engagement
attachments, such as side or front mounted saddle point to ensure the implement is symmetrical. This helps
tanks, are installed, ballast can be affected. Additional avoid uneven side-to-side draft on the tractor. When
attachments need be taken into account when selecting using integral planters on flat and level ground, sway
proper ballasting. Along with increased ballast, it is blocks should be set to allow the free travel of the tractor
important to remember AutoTrac performance will vary separate from the implement, approximately 3.8—5.0
by platform due to inherent vehicle design differences. cm (1.5—2.0 in.) of travel without allowing the lower
For example, track tractors give an operator very good arms of the three-point to come in contact with the tires.
accuracy control, but a sprayer or 4WD tractor loses Sway blocks may need to be adjusted more tightly to
some of that accuracy control due to differences in drive accommodate side slopes and other side draft operations
train and steering response. Ground speed also affects to achieve desirable implement performance.
performance. With the ability to operate at higher speeds,
operators need to remember higher speeds impact Field/Soil Conditions
performance. Using AutoTrac above 19 km/h (12 mph),
Continued on next page BA31779,0000300 -19-05DEC11-1/2
50-74 103113
PN=141
Guidance
imperative to understand these factors and what can and

The environment in which the vehicle is operating cannot be adjusted to achieve optimal performance. For
also affects the performance of the AutoTrac system. more information on expected accuracy, please visit the
For example, loose soil conditions can reduce the accuracy calculator on www.StellarSupport.com.
effectiveness of the steering system because traction
is lost. Firm soil conditions can cause uneven loads in Points To Remember
high-draft applications. Differential Lock can provide
some compensation to lost traction and uneven loads or It is very important to remember:
terrain, depending on the situation and operation being • Receiver has to go through a warm-up period upon
performed. However, it must be used at the operator’s start-up.
discretion and only if the operator feels it is beneficial • Vehicle is setup properly (ballasted according to vehicle
to the particular operation. Slope of the land can also operator manual, etc.)
play a key factor in performance because the machine or • Implement is setup to run properly (wear parts such
implement may slide down a slope while trying to operate as shanks, shovels, and sweeps are in good working
AutoTrac resulting in a motion called ‘crabbing’. Currently, condition and correctly spaced).
AutoTrac does not compensate for crabbing along a slope. • Understand how field/soil conditions affect system
There are many factors affecting accuracy and (loose soil requires more steering than firm soil, but firm
performance of the GreenStar AutoTrac system. It is soil can cause uneven draft loads).
BA31779,0000300 -19-05DEC11-2/2
50-75 103113
PN=142
Guidance
AutoTrac Tractors
PC8629 —UN—03AUG05
Enabling System
The following criteria must be met for AutoTrac to be
enabled:
• Vehicle has an AutoTrac capable steering controller
(SSU)
• Hydraulic oil temp is above 20°C (68°F)
• AutoTrac license activated (26-digit Activation Code)
• Track 0 has been set up
• GPS signal status is present
• TCM turned on
Activating System
PC8868 —UN—02NOV05
CAUTION: While AutoTrac is activated, operator
is responsible for steering at end of path
and collision avoidance.
Do not attempt to turn on (Activate) AutoTrac
system while transporting on a roadway.
After system has been ENABLED, operator must manually

change system to ACTIVATED status when steering
assistance is desired.
NOTE: If it has been set, activating AutoTrac will
activate automatic power shift . In 8020T and
9020T tractors, automatic power shift (APS)
must be set up after enabling AutoTrac. If
AutoTrac is enabled after automatic power shift
has been set, APS must be reset.
PC14812 —UN—16MAR12
APS can be set either before or after enabling AutoTrac in
8010T tractors.
Press resume switch (A) to activate AutoTrac. This will
initiate assisted steering. A-Resume Switch.
NOTE: Resume switch location may vary depending
on vehicle type, model, and year.
A—Resume Switch
PC16925 —UN—09MAY13
Continued on next page HC94949,0000303 -19-15MAY13-1/2
50-76 103113
PN=143
Guidance
PC8866 —UN—02NOV05
A—Track 0 C—Track Spacing E—Track Heading Error
B—Track 1 South D—Off-Track Lateral Error
Track number changes at 50% of row spacing. To turn off AutoTrac from GUIDANCE VIEW
Once tractor is at end of row operator must turn system tab, toggle STEER ON/OFF button until
to next pass. By turning steering wheel, AutoTrac is STEER OFF is displayed.
deactivated. operator must turn onto next track.
Deactivating System
AutoTrac can be activated by pressing resume switch only
after the following conditions are met: AutoTrac system can be made DEACTIVE by the
following methods:
• Travel above 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph) for a minimum of 10
seconds then system will be capable of slow speed • Turning steering wheel.
• Forward vehicle speed is less than 30 km/h (18.6 mph) • Exceeding speed of 30 km/h (18.6 mph) or below 0.1
km/h (0.06 mph).
NOTE: Minimum and maximum speeds allowed will be
controlled by the tractor platform and the software NOTE: Minimum and maximum speeds allowed will be
version of the Steering Controller. For a complete controlled by the tractor platform and the software
list of compatible tractors with this additional version of the Steering Controller. For a complete
functionality, please visit www.StellarSupport.com. list of compatible tractors with this additional
functionality, please visit www.StellarSupport.com.
• Reverse speed is less than 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
• Vehicle heading is within 80° of desired track. • Degradation of differential correction signal from SF2 or
• The machine is within 40% of track spacing RTK to WAAS/EGNOS for longer than 3 minutes.
• Operator is seated. • Pressing STEER ON/OFF button.
• TCM is on. • Operator out of seat for more than 7 seconds.
• In reverse AutoTrac will remain activated for 45 • Activated in neutral longer than 30 seconds.
seconds. After 45 seconds the machine must be put in • In reverse for longer than 45 seconds.
a forward gear before reverse will activate. • Reverse speed exceeds 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
Deactivating System
CAUTION: Always turn off (Deactivate and Disable)

AutoTrac system before entering a roadway.
HC94949,0000303 -19-15MAY13-2/2
50-77 103113
PN=144
Guidance
AutoTrac Sprayers
Enabling System
Press STEER ON/OFF button to toggle between
enable/disable AutoTrac.
N63532 —UN—07AUG03
To enable system, all of the following criteria must be met:
• AutoTrac activation is detected.
• Track 0 has been set up.
• Tracking mode selected.
• SSU is in normal operating mode.
• 4700 Series Sprayer is in 1st, 2nd, or 3rd range.
• 4900 and R40XX Series Sprayer in Field Gear. 4700 and 4710 Sprayer Resume Switch
• 5430i Sprayer is in 1st, 2nd, or 3rd range and transport
lock out switch is off.
• Hydraulic oil is warmed to minimum specification.
Specification
Hydraulic Oil Minimum
Temperature—Tempera-
ture.................................................................................................. 10 °C
(50 °F)
• TCM must be installed and turned on.

PC7989 —UN—04NOV03
After system has been ENABLED, operator must manually

change system to ACTIVATED status when steering
assistance is desired. 4720, 4920, 30 Series, 40 Series, 5430i, and R40XX
Sprayers Resume Switch
Activating System
Press resume switch (A) to activate AutoTrac. This A—Resume Switch
will initiate assisted steering.
NOTE: 4700 and 4710 have resume switch on console. • In reverse, AutoTrac will remain activated for 45
4720, 4920, 30 Series, 40 Series, 5430i, and R40XX seconds. After 45 seconds, the machine must be put in
Sprayers have two buttons on multi-function lever. forward gear before reverse will activate again.
In order to activate system, the following criteria must be
• On 5430i Sprayers, AutoTrac is only possible
in 2-wheel-steering mode. When operating in
met: 4-wheel-steering mode and AutoTrac is activated, the
• Sprayer multi-function lever is out of park. rear wheels are going to be centered in neutral position
• 4700 Series Sprayer is in 1st, 2nd, or 3rd range. and the system switches set to 2-wheel-steering
• 4900 and R40XX Series Sprayer in Field Gear. mode automatically. When the operator activates the
• 5430i Series Sprayer is in 1st, 2nd, or 3rd range. 4-wheel-steering mode again, AutoTrac will be disabled.
• Vehicle speed for 4940 Dry Box and R4038 Deactivating System
Sprayer/Drybox is less than 47 km/h (29 mph). All other
Sprayers/Dryboxes are less than 37 km/h (23 mph).
• Vehicle heading is within 45 degrees of desired track CAUTION: Always turn off (Deactivate and Disable)
above 11.3 km/h (7 mph); Vehicle heading is within 80° AutoTrac system before entering a roadway.
of desired track below 11.3 km/h (7 mph). To turn off AutoTrac from GUIDANCE VIEW
• Off track error is within 40% of track spacing. tab, toggle STEER ON/OFF button until
• Operator is seated. STEER OFF is displayed.
• TCM is on.
Continued on next page HC94949,0000304 -19-12JUN13-1/2
50-78 103113
PN=145
Guidance
AutoTrac system can be made DEACTIVATED by

• In reverse longer than 45 seconds.
performing the following methods:
• Shifting speed to 4th range on 4700 Series Sprayers.
• Shifting to transport mode on 4900 and R40XX Series
• Turning steering wheel. Sprayers.
• By placing multi-function lever in neutral. • Shifting speed to 4th range on 5430i Sprayers.
• Slowing to speeds less than 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph). • Activating 4-wheel-steering mode on 5430i Sprayers.
• Exceeding 48 km/h (30 mph) for 4940 Dry Box and • Toggle STEER ON/OFF button until STEER OFF is
R4038 Sprayer/Drybox. Exceeding 38 km/h (23.6 mph) displayed in GUIDANCE VIEW tab.
for all other Sprayer/Dryboxes. • Operator out of seat for more than 7 seconds.
HC94949,0000304 -19-12JUN13-2/2
AutoTrac Combines
Enabling System
• Track 0 has been setup.
• TCM must be installed and turned on.
PC7925 —UN—14OCT03
• Header On
Activating System

system while transporting on a roadway. Deactivating System
After system has been ENABLED, operator must manually CAUTION: Always turn off (Deactivate and Disable)
change system to ACTIVATED status when steering AutoTrac system before entering a roadway.
To turn off AutoTrac from GUIDANCE VIEW
Press button 2 or 3 on multi-function handle to tab, toggle STEER ON/OFF button until
activate AutoTrac. This will initiate assisted steering. STEER OFF is displayed.
NOTE: The multi-function handle depends upon which
AutoTrac system can be made DEACTIVE by following
series of combine you have.
methods:
In order to activate system following criteria must be met: • Disengaging header
• Road Transport Switch is in field position. • Turning steering wheel
• Header is engaged. • Slowing to speeds less than 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph)
• Multi-function handle is forward. • Exceeding speed of 22 km/h (13.6 mph)
• Vehicle speed is less than 22 km/h (13.6 mph). • Toggle STEER ON/OFF button until STEER OFF is
displayed in GUIDANCE VIEW tab.
• Vehicle heading is within 45° of desired track. • Operator out of seat for more than 5 seconds.
• Off track error is within 40 % of track spacing. • Track number is changed.
• Operator is seated. • In reverse longer than 45 seconds.
• TCM is on.
Continued on next page RW00482,00000AA -19-08NOV12-1/2
50-79 103113
PN=146
Guidance
AutoTrac Resume Button (If Equipped)

AutoTrac resume button (A) activates or deactivates
AutoTrac system.
AutoTrac resume button also activates or deactivates
RowSense system.
PC16247 —UN—08NOV12
System Requirements:
• Properly equipped header is connected.
• Engine is running.
• Road transport disconnect switch must be in field
position.
• Header is engaged.
A—AutoTrac Resume Button
RW00482,00000AA -19-08NOV12-2/2
AutoTrac™ Windrowers
Enabling System
To enable system, following criteria must be met:
PC17878 —UN—21OCT13
• AutoTrac™ activation detected.
• Track 0 is set up.
• Steering controller is in normal operating mode.
• TCM installed and turned on.
Select Steer On and Off to toggle between enable and
disable AutoTrac™.
Activating System A—AutoTrac™ Resume Button
CAUTION: While AutoTrac™ is activated,

operator is responsible for steering at end of Deactivating System
path and collision avoidance.
Do not attempt to turn on (Activate) AutoTrac™ CAUTION: Always turn off (Deactivate and Disable)
system while transporting on a roadway. AutoTrac™ system before entering a roadway.
To turn off AutoTrac™ from Guidance View page,
To activate system, following criteria must be met: toggle Steer On and Off until Steer Off is displayed.
• Header engaged. AutoTrac™ system is deactivated by the following
• Multifunction control handle forward. methods:
• Forward vehicle speed greater than 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph)
and less than 29 km/h (18 mph). • Disengaging header.
• Vehicle heading within 45° of desired track. • Driving in reverse.
• Off track error within 40% of track spacing. • Turning steering wheel.
• Operator seated. • Slowing to speeds less than 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph).
• TCM installed and turned ON. • Exceeding forward speed of 29 km/h (18 mph).
After system is Enabled, operator must manually change • Toggle Steer On and Off until Steer Off is displayed in
system to Activated status when steering assistance is Guidance View page.
desired. • Operator out of seat for more than 5 sec.
• Track number is changed.
Select AutoTrac™ Resume button (A) on multifunction
control handle to activate AutoTrac™. AutoTrac™
Resume initiates assisted steering.
BA31779,00006F0 -19-25OCT13-1/1
50-80 103113
PN=147
Guidance
AutoTrac Cotton Harvester

See Cotton Harvester Operators Manual for more
information on operating Row-Trak™.
NOTE: Only for model year 2012 and newer Cotton
Harvesters with Row-Trak.
A
Enabling System
B
PC14809 —UN—15MAR12
Press STEER ON/OFF button (B) to toggle between
• Track 0 has been setup.
• TCM must be installed and turned on. A—Resume Switch B—Steer On/Off Button
Activating System
CAUTION: While AutoTrac is activated, operator • TCM is on.

is responsible for steering at end of path Deactivating System
Do not attempt to turn on (Activate) AutoTrac CAUTION: Always turn off (Deactivate and Disable)
system while transporting on a roadway. AutoTrac system before entering a roadway.
After system has been ENABLED, operator must manually To turn off AutoTrac from GUIDANCE VIEW
change system to ACTIVATED status when steering tab, toggle STEER ON/OFF button until
assistance is desired. STEER OFF is displayed.
Press resume switch (A) on multi-function handle to AutoTrac system can be made DEACTIVE by following
activate AutoTrac. This will initiate assisted steering. methods:
In order to activate system following criteria must be met: • Disengaging header or fan.
• Turning steering wheel
• Road Transport Switch is in field position. • Slowing to speeds less than 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph)
• Header and fan are engaged. • Exceeding forward speed of 22 km/h (13.6 mph) or
• Multi-function handle is forward. reverse speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).
• Forward vehicle speed is greater than 0.5 km/h (0.3 • Toggle STEER ON/OFF button until STEER OFF is
mph) and less than 22 km/h (13.6 mph) displayed in GUIDANCE VIEW tab.
• Vehicle reverse speed is less than 10 km/h (6.0 mph). • Operator out of seat for more than 5 seconds.
• Vehicle heading is within 45° of desired track. • Track number is changed.
• Off track error is within 40 % of track spacing. • In reverse longer than 45 seconds.
• Operator is seated.
Row-Trak is a trademark of Deere & Company
BA31779,00003CA -19-28MAR12-1/1
50-81 103113
PN=148
Guidance
AutoTrac Self-Propelled Forage Harvesters

Enabling System
A
• Track has been set.
PC8987 —UN—29NOV05
• TCM is installed and turned ON.
• Clutch switch (A) is engaged.
• AutoTrac/Row Guidance button (B) is ON.
Activating System
CAUTION: While AutoTrac is active operator

After system has been ENABLED, operator must

manually change system to ACTIVE status when steering
PC8989 —UN—29NOV05
Press resume switch (A) on multi-function handle to
activate AutoTrac. This will initiate assisted steering.
In order to activate system following criteria must be met:
• Road Transport Switch is in field position.
• Row Track button needs to be turned ON.
• Main clutch is switched ON. A—Clutch Engage Switch B—AutoTrac/Row Guidance
• Header is engaged. Button
• Forward vehicle speed is greater than 0.5 km/h (0.3
mph) or reverse vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h (6.0
mph).
• Forward vehicle speed is less than 22 km/h (13.2 mph). • Deactivating header.
• Vehicle heading is within 80° degrees of desired track if • Turning steering wheel more than 30 degrees.
speed is less than 10 km/h. • Switching OFF main clutch.
• Vehicle heading is within 45° degrees of desired track if • Field/Road switch is switched to road mode.
speed is higher than 10 km/h. • Slowing to speeds less than 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph).
• Off track error is within 40 % of track spacing. • Exceeding forward speed of 22 km/h (13.2 mph) or
reverse speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).
• Operator is seated.
• Reverse operation for longer than 45 seconds.
• TCM is installed and turned ON.
• Degradation of differential correction signal from higher
Deactivating System to lower accuracy level for longer than three minutes.
• Toggle STEER ON/OFF button until STEER OFF is
displayed in GUIDANCE VIEW tab.
CAUTION: Always turn off (Deactivate) AutoTrac
system before entering a roadway. Do not • Operator out of seat for more than seven seconds.
attempt to turn on (Activate) AutoTrac system • Track number is changed.
while transporting on a roadway.
AutoTrac system can be made DEACTIVE by following

methods:
CZ76372,00001AD -19-01OCT10-1/1
50-82 103113
PN=149
Guidance
AutoTrac Sugar Cane Harvester

Enabling System
To enable the system all the following criteria must be met:
• Vehicle has an Auto Trac capable steering controller
(SSU).
• Auto Trac license activated (26 digit activation code).
• Tracking has been set up (see section SetUp Tracking).
• Tracking/guidance is ON.
PC10471 —UN—31AUG07
• GPS signal status is present (SF2 or RTK).
• Park Brake is turned off.
• Steer Button set to on.
Activating System

IMPORTANT: Although the AutoTrac system can

be activated when SF2 correction signal is
confirmed, system accuracy may continue to
increase after powering up the system.
PC10470 —UN—31AUG07
NOTE: Resume switch location may vary depending on
vehicle model and year. Press resume switch, Right
foot pedal, or optional left hand command arm.
In order to activate the system the following criteria must

be met: Foot Switch
• Ground drive controls are in forward and within 15
percent of each other.
• Forward vehicle speed is greater than 1.6 km/h (1 mph). AutoTrac system can be deactivated by the following
• Vehicle heading within 80 degrees of desired track. methods:
• Machine is within 40 percent of track spacing. • Moving either Ground Drive levers more than 10
• Operator is seated. degrees from the opposite control lever.
Deactivating System • Placing Ground Drive lever in neutral.
• Slowing to speeds less than 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
• Degradation of differential correction signal from SF2 to
CAUTION: Always turn off (Deactivate and Disable) SF1 for longer than 3 minutes.
AutoTrac system before entering a roadway. • Pressing the Steer On/Off button on the main run screen.
To turn off AutoTrac from GUIDANCE VIEW • Operator out of seat for more than 5 seconds.
tab, toggle STEER ON/OFF button until
STEER OFF is displayed.
CZ76372,00001AE -19-01OCT10-1/1
AutoTrac Universal
AutoTrac Universal
For instructions on operating AutoTrac Universal, see the
AutoTrac Universal operator's manual.
CZ76372,00001AF -19-01OCT10-1/1
50-83 103113
PN=150
Original GreenStar Monitor
Compatible Systems
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Press: MENU button >> ORIGINAL GREENSTAR
MONITOR button
The following section explains operation of Original
GreenStar Monitor software. Original GreenStar Monitor
can be used to display information from controllers that PC12866CC —19—24OCT13
are designed for use with original GreenStar display.

NOTE: The original GreenStar Monitor is only
viewable as a full screen.
Compatible Systems
Original GreenStar Monitor application is compatible with
following John Deere 2.5 v controllers: ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR Button
• SeedStar Gen 1 Seed Monitor and Variable Rate Drive

• SeedStar Gen 2 Seed Monitor and Variable Rate Drive • European Sprayer
• SeedStar Air Cart • European Spreader
• SprayStar • European Wrapping Baler
• Accu-Depth • Rauch Axera Fertilizer Spreader
• Original StarFire Receiver • Harvest Monitor (Except 70 Series Combines)
• TCM • Self Propelled Forage Harvester
• European Drill
CZ76372,0000170 -19-24OCT13-1/1
Operating Original GreenStar Monitor

IMPORTANT: If dual monitors are being used with Once in Original GreenStar Monitor application, operator
an Original GreenStar Display on the system interface will function the same as the Original GreenStar
along with a GS3 display, the Original GreenStar Display. See vehicle or implement Operator's Manual for
Monitor application will not be available and more information.
will not appear on menu.
CZ76372,00000AD -19-09JUL10-1/1
55-1 103113
PN=151
Performance Monitor
PC12867CC —19—24OCT13
Performance Monitor
The GS3 2630 display comes standard with Universal
Performance Monitor (UPM), which provides productivity
information such as vehicle speeds, acre counters, and
fuel efficiency data. The information available to be
displayed in UPM depends on the vehicle on which
the display is installed. There may be slight differences
between the values from UPM and the vehicle monitor UPM Performance Monitor Icon
due to rounding of decimals within UPM calculations.
30 Series Tractors
• Universal Performance Monitor will be denoted in the
On 30 series John Deere tractors the GS3 2630 display display menu with the UPM Performance Monitor Icon.
will disable UPM and show Advanced Performance
Monitor (APM) from the tractor TECU. APM is a feature
of the tractor and is similar to UPM. Read your tractor
Operator’s Manual for information on APM.
Dual Display Operation
The GS3 2630 display maybe installed on the corner post
of a John Deere vehicle that also has a display on the
armrest running UPM. In this case, the values displayed
by UPM on the corner post display will be sent from UPM
on the armrest display. Therefore the values will be
identical on both displays.
NOTE: Resetting UPM Totals on one display will also
reset UPM Totals on the other display.
CZ76372,0000172 -19-24OCT13-1/2
• APM will be denoted in the display menu with the APM PC9046 —UN—17APR06
Performance Monitor Icon.
APM Performance Monitor Icon

CZ76372,0000172 -19-24OCT13-2/2
Performance Monitor Setup to allow user to choose from either automatically or

manually engaging the area counter.
Dual Display Setup
The three default control sources are:
With both 2630 and GS3 Command Center installed,
UPM data and recording source will be synchronized. For • MANUAL
example, changing recording source to GreenStar on • Implement Switch
GS3 Command Center will change 2630 UPM recording • AUTO
source to GreenStar as well. Note that data sync will
exhibit some noticeable delay. Depending on vehicle configurations, other possible
control sources include (not limited to):
This function allows users to choose the control source
that engages the area and distance counters associated • GreenStar
with implement working status. It presents multiple • Front Hitch
choices of control source based on vehicle configurations • Rear Hitch
OUO6050,0001298 -19-20JUL10-1/1
60-1 103113
PN=152
Performance Monitor
PC9047 —UN—17APR06
UPM (UNIVERSAL PERFORMANCE
MONITOR) Functionality
NOTE: GPS radar speed will be shown under the regular
radar speed icon in APM. No GPS option will Wheel
display as the radar feed is designated by the PC9048 —UN—17APR06
radar wire feed connection behind the command

center described later in this section.
Vehicle Speed Radar

PC9049 —UN—17APR06
The operator will be able to view the vehicle speed and
can select radar speed (if available), GPS speed (if
available), or transmission wheel speed. The display
readout will switch when below 0.3 kph to 0.29 and back
to 1.1 when above 1.0 kph. The figures below show the GPS
vehicle speed icons.
CZ76372,00000BE -19-24OCT13-1/11
PC9050 —UN—17APR06
Front and Rear PTO RPM
The user is able to view both the front and rear PTO RPM
(if available). The data will be displayed and rounded to
the nearest 10th's digit. This option is only available if the
Front PTO
vehicle has the front and/or rear PTO option. The figures PC9051 —UN—17APR06
below show the PTO icons.
Rear PTO
CZ76372,00000BE -19-24OCT13-2/11
PC9052 —UN—17APR06
Wheel Slip
The operator is able to view the current wheel slip of
the vehicle. Note that this feature will only be available
if a radar sensor is installed. It will be displayed as a
Wheel Slip
percentage calculated as the difference between the
wheel speed and radar speed, divided by the wheel
speed. The figure below shows the wheel slip icon.
CZ76372,00000BE -19-24OCT13-3/11
PC9053 —UN—17APR06
Fuel Per Hour
If available from the vehicle network, the operator is able
to view the instantaneous fuel flow in gal/h (or liters/h).
The output value is a computation that factors desired fuel
Fuel Per Hour
quantity (not measured), current engine speed, cylinder
size of the engine, and fuel density. This will then give the
operator an idea of what range to expect for consumption.
Continued on next page CZ76372,00000BE -19-24OCT13-4/11
60-2 103113
PN=153
Performance Monitor
PC9054 —UN—17APR06
Fuel Per Area
The current fuel per area measurement (gal/area or
liters/area) will be shown on the screen. The value is
based on current fuel usage, implement/header width,
Fuel Per Area
and speed. The area counter is enabled when the arrow
is in the down position. The figure below shows the fuel
per area icon.
CZ76372,00000BE -19-24OCT13-5/11
PC9055 —UN—17APR06
Instantaneous Productivity
Instantaneous Productivity is calculated from the
vehicle speed and implement/boom/header width and is
expressed in terms of area/hour. If recording is off, the
Instantaneous Productivity
area/hour value will be zero. The figure below shows the
instantaneous productivity icon.
CZ76372,00000BE -19-24OCT13-6/11
PC9056 —UN—17APR06
Area Counter
The operator is able to select an area counter. The
counter can be reset by the operator in the totals page.
The PM will use the current implement width setting,
Area Counter
the speed (priority is GPS speed, radar speed, wheel
speed), and the recording status to count hectares/acres.
If recording is off, area will not accumulate. If the value exceeds 9999.9, then the counter will reset to zero. The
figure below shows the area counter icon.
CZ76372,00000BE -19-24OCT13-7/11
PC9057 —UN—17APR06
Distance Counter
The user will be able to view and reset the distance
counter. This counter will accumulate any time the vehicle
is moving (regardless of recording status) and will use the
Distance Counter
same speed as the area counter to calculate the distance.
The figure below shows the distance icon.
60-3 103113
PN=154
Performance Monitor
SETTINGS SCREEN
The setup screen of the PM application, shown, contains
a number of major sections that include settings that
the operator can adjust and/or calibrate. Each of these
settings or calibration instructions are described in this
section. Totals and Settings Screens will remain similar in
both the APM and UPM applications. Resetting totals in
APM mode will require the operator to depress and HOLD
PC12687CC —19—24OCT13
the reset button for 3 seconds.
UPM Setting Screen
PC9076CC —19—24OCT13
APM Setting Screen
CZ76372,00000BE -19-24OCT13-9/11
NOTE: If the vehicle that you are operating does not
PC9095CC —19—24OCT13
have radar make sure that the radar check
box is not checked or inconsistent readings
and alarms will be displayed.
Radar Connection
The operator is able to select/unselect a check box if the
radar is directly connected to the display or not. This Radar Connection
connection check box will NOT display when operating
APM as it will automatically default to the radar feed via
the connection behind the command center.
60-4 103113
PN=155
Performance Monitor
PC9096 —UN—17APR06
Implement/Header Width
The operator is able to enter and view the width of the
implement/header. This value will remain in sync with the
Field Doc application implement width. This parameter will Implement/Header Width
be used by the PM for area and productivity calculations.
The figure below shows the implement width icon. on or off. The PM will use this status to know when to
Recording Sources for UPM / APM (Below) engage the various measurements and this value will be
in sync with the GreenStar Application.
The display will allow the operator to choose from an input
list which source or function will indicate that recording is
CZ76372,00000BE -19-24OCT13-11/11
PC9058 —UN—17APR06
Recording Sources for UPM
The display will allow the operator to choose from an input
list which source or function will indicate that recording is
on or off. The PM will use this status to know when to Manual
engage the various measurements and this value will be
in sync with the GreenStar Application.
Manual When this item is selected, the operator can manually
trigger and stop the recording button, located to the left of
the recording source list. This choice is always available.
CZ76372,00000BF -19-24OCT13-1/8
PC9059 —UN—17APR06
Rear Hitch
This choice is only available if the vehicle is equipped with
a rear hitch. CCD based vehicles with UPM Rear Hitch
Recording is non-adjustable; In-work (recording on) below
Rear Hitch
70%, and out-of-work (recording off) above the 70% down
threshold.
CZ76372,00000BF -19-24OCT13-2/8
PC9060 —UN—17APR06
Front PTO
This item is only available in the list if the vehicle is
equipped with a Front PTO.
Front PTO
CZ76372,00000BF -19-24OCT13-3/8
PC9061 —UN—17APR06
Rear PTO
equipped with a Rear PTO.
Rear PTO
CZ76372,00000BF -19-24OCT13-4/8
PC9062 —UN—17APR06
Implement Switch Closed
This item is always available and functions based on the
position of the implement switch.
Implement Switch Closed
Continued on next page CZ76372,00000BF -19-24OCT13-5/8
60-5 103113
PN=156
Performance Monitor
PC9063 —UN—17APR06
Implement Switch Open
Implement Switch Open
CZ76372,00000BF -19-24OCT13-6/8
PC9064CC —19—24OCT13
AUTO
If a John Deere implement is connected to the system that
is broadcasting its work status, this item will be selected in
this list and then the rest of the list will be disabled.
AUTO
CZ76372,00000BF -19-24OCT13-7/8
PC9065 —UN—17APR06
SCV I-VI
The user can assign any SCV to turn the recording source
on. These selections will only show up if the vehicle has
the corresponding SCV’s. (Selective Control Valves for
SCV I-VI
the Hydraulics)
CZ76372,00000BF -19-24OCT13-8/8
PC9058 —UN—17APR06
Recording Sources for APM
Recording Sources for UPM / APM (Below) The display
will allow the operator to choose from an input list which
source or function will indicate that recording is on or off. Manual
The PM will use this status to know when to engage the
various measurements and this value will be in sync with
the GreenStar Application. When this item is selected, the operator can manually
Manual trigger and stop the recording button, located to the left of
the recording source list. This choice is always available.
CZ76372,00000C0 -19-24OCT13-1/6
PC9067 —UN—17APR06
Rear Hitch
This choice is only available if the vehicle is equipped with
a rear hitch. APM Hitch Recording is an adjustable height
setting in the command center.
Rear Hitch
CZ76372,00000C0 -19-24OCT13-2/6
PC9068 —UN—17APR06
Rear PTO
equipped with a Rear PTO.
Rear PTO
Continued on next page CZ76372,00000C0 -19-24OCT13-3/6
60-6 103113
PN=157
Performance Monitor
PC9069 —UN—17APR06
Implement Switch
Implement Switch
CZ76372,00000C0 -19-24OCT13-4/6
PC9064CC —19—24OCT13
AUTO
If a John Deere implement is connected to the system that
is broadcasting its work status, this item will be selected in
this list and then the rest of the list will be disabled.
AUTO
CZ76372,00000C0 -19-24OCT13-5/6
PC9071 —UN—17APR06
SCV I-VI
The user can assign any SCV to turn the recording source
on. These selections will only show up if the vehicle has
the corresponding SCV’s. (Selective Control Valves for
SCV I-VI
the Hydraulics)
CZ76372,00000C0 -19-24OCT13-6/6
PC9099CC —19—24OCT13
Performance Monitor
Service Intervals
The operator is able to view and change the Service
Intervals Field. When the operator changes the Service
Interval, the Hours Since Last Service value will remain
unchanged. If the operator sets the interval to zero, the Service Interval
Service Interval function will be disabled. The valid range
is 0 - 990 hours. When ‘Service Interval’ – ‘Hours Since will not display again until the next power cycle. The first
Service’ is less than 20 hours to next service, the operator figure below shows the service interval input field, while
will see an alarm saying "The vehicle is due for service in the second figure shows the alarm box when the vehicle
XX hours." After the alarm is cleared by the operator, it needs to be serviced.
CZ76372,00000C1 -19-24OCT13-1/2
PC9100CC —19—29OCT13
Hours Since Last Service
The operator is able to manually reset the hours since
service value, at which time an alarm will display
confirming that the total should be reset. The first figure
below shows the reset button for hours since service and
the second shows the confirmation alarm. On CAN-Based
vehicles, the operator will need to select and HOLD
the reset button for 3 seconds. See list of CAN-Based
vehicles in APM section. Time Since Last Reset
CZ76372,00000C1 -19-24OCT13-2/2
60-7 103113
PN=158
Performance Monitor
PC9118 —UN—17APR06
PERFORMANCE MONITOR CALIBRATIONS
Percent Slip Zeroing
The operator is able to calibrate the wheel slip to zero on
certain vehicles if radar is installed. Zero Slip Button
NOTE: Wheel slip zeroing and radar calibration are not
possible on CAN based vehicles in the UPM. The
NOTE: Vehicle must be traveling between 7 and
only time the user will be able to perform wheel
9 km/h (4.5 to 5.5 mph) before the zero slip
slip zeroing is if they are on a CCD vehicle.
button will be enabled
When the operator initiates this function, the radar will be
Reset % slip value by driving the vehicle on a hard level
commanded to a new wheel speed calibration such that the
surface at a constant speed of 8 km/h (5 mph). Select and
% slip is now zero. If the system determines a calibration
hold % slip switch for a minimum of 3 seconds to zero out
is not possible under the current operating conditions,
slip. It is recommended to have an implement connected
then an alarm will be issued stating the calibration
to the vehicle but not engaged in the ground (no load).
was not successful. The first figure below shows the
zero slip button that when selected brings up the wheel
slip calibration page. The remaining figures show the
calibration pages for a successful or failed slip calibration.
CZ76372,00000C2 -19-15JUL10-1/2
PC9119 —UN—17APR06
Radar Calibration
The operator is able to calibrate the radar through a series
of steps, illustrated in the following figures.
• The operator initiates the calibration procedure by Radar Calibration button
selecting the calibrate radar button.
• Measure out a 123 m (400 ft) course, and select “Start
connection, then radar calibration is possible
Calibration” at the beginning of the course.
on a CAN-Based vehicle. See notes below for
• Drive the course and then hit stop at the end of the
configuring radar on a CAN based tractor (See
course.
CAN-Based vehicle list in APM section).
NOTE: The radar cannot be calibrated unless on
a CCD-Based vehicle. The only exception If the calibration was not successful, the operator will be
to this is if you directly hook the radar to the taken back to the first calibration screen.
display via the Greenstar harness direct radar
CZ76372,00000C2 -19-15JUL10-2/2
60-8 103113
PN=159
Performance Monitor
Configuring Tractor For DIRECT GPS or

Ground Based Radar Feed (CAN-Based
Vehicles ONLY)
NOTE: If you have any questions, your John Deere dealer
can assist in field installing GPS or a radar device.
PC9120 —UN—17APR06
CAN-Based tractors equipped with radar must be
re-configured when switching to GPS receiver as
the true ground speed input signal or vice versa
for calibrating the ground based radar.
Certain CAN-Based vehicles will need CCU and TECU

vehicle address configuration changes to enable radar
operation. Please see your John Deere Dealer for service Remove Command Center Panel
support.
1. Remove screw (A) and Command Center (B).
2. Inside right-hand console locate console one wire
lead marked ”GPS” and one marked ”Radar”.
3. Remove radar plug (C) from wiring connector (E).
4. Remove GPS plug (D) from dust cap (F).
5. Install GPS plug into connector and radar plug into
PC9121 —UN—17APR06
dust cap.
6. Install Command Center with previously removed
screw.
A—Screw D—GPS Plug

B—Command Center E—Connector
Connect GPS side of Harness
C—Radar Plug F— Dust Cap
OUO6050,0000CDB -19-08NOV07-1/1
Dual Beam Radar Sensor Only (Automatic

Calibration)
On tractors equipped with factory or dealer installed dual
beam radars, it is not necessary to calibrate vehicle
speed. Reset % wheel slip value if:
• Wheel speed and radar speed are not equal when slip
is not present
• Wheel slip is displayed where slip should not be present PC9122 —UN—17APR06
• Change tire size
Reset % slip value by driving tractor on a hard level surface
at a constant speed of 8 kph (5 mph). Press and hold %
Slip Switch (A) for a minimum of 3 seconds to zero out
slip. It is recommended to have an implement connected
to the tractor but not engaged in the ground (no load).
OUO6050,0000CDC -19-31OCT07-1/1
60-9 103113
PN=160
Performance Monitor
Calibrating Dual Beam Radar 4. Place check in Dual Beam Radar check box (A).
1. Select Menu button. 5. Select Calibrate (B).
2. Select Performance Monitor button. a. Dual Beam Radar Check Box.
3. Select Calibration Softkey. b. Calibrate Box
CZ76372,000027F -19-11JAN11-1/1
RADAR CONNECTION SIGNAL VALIDATION
PC9123CC —19—24OCT13
(UPM MODE ONLY)
1. Ensure the radar connected check box is checked in
the setup screen. This check box will only display in
UPM mode. In APM mode, radar feed is designated
by the wire connection behind the command center
denoted in the Configuring Tractor section.
Radar Connected Checkbox
The GS3 display will display the GPS radar feed value
when connected. This value should be 57.42 during
normal operation. To view this value once connected
CZ76372,00000B0 -19-24OCT13-1/7
PC9124 —UN—17APR06
2. Select the Clock Icon
Clock Icon
CZ76372,00000B0 -19-24OCT13-2/7
3. Select Soft Key G
PC9125CC —19—24OCT13
Softkey G
60-10 103113
PN=161
Performance Monitor
4. Select VTi.001Implement in the drop down menu
PC9126CC —19—24OCT13
VTi.001Implement
CZ76372,00000B0 -19-24OCT13-4/7
5. Scroll down until you see Address 60
PC9127CC —19—24OCT13
Address 60
60-11 103113
PN=162
Performance Monitor
6. Address 60 should display 57.42 if radar is feeding

from the iTC GPS receiver
If this value is 57.42, you are directly feeding GPS radar
signal. Ground based radars will display approximately
the same values when connected. If zero is displayed, no
radar signal is being seen, GPS nor Ground Based.
PC9128CC —19—24OCT13
Display 57.42
CZ76372,00000B0 -19-24OCT13-6/7
PC9129 —UN—17APR06
If operating a CAN-Based vehicle and actual speed (not
0.000) is displayed in on the radar input screen, the vehicle
IS seeing a direct radar signal, either GPS or Ground
Based Radar, depending on the position of the radar signal
wire connection located behind the command center.
Certain CAN-Based vehicles will need CCU and TECU operation. Please see your John Deere Dealer for service
vehicle address configuration changes to enable radar support.
CZ76372,00000B0 -19-24OCT13-7/7
PERFORMANCE MONITOR TOTALS SCREEN

PC9130CC —19—24OCT13
PC9131CC —19—24OCT13
UPM Totals Screen APM Totals Screen

The totals screen of the PM application contains three third contains the record button. All of the items will be
sections: the first contains the averages for many of the stored in memory so the values will be retained between
instantaneous functions from the main page, the second vehicle power cycles. Totals and Settings Screens will
contains the total distance and a reset button, and the remain identical in both the APM and UPM applications.
60-12 103113
PN=163
Performance Monitor
PC9086 —UN—17APR06
Total Area
This is the area covered by the implement since the
last time this counter was reset. The area is calculated
from the implement / header width, speed source
Total Area
(priority is GPS speed, radar speed, wheel speed), and
the Recording Source set in Performance Monitor. If
Recording is off, area will not accumulate. If the value the area value may be different from the
exceeds 9999.9, the counter will reset to zero. value in GreenStar Totals.
NOTE: The Implement Width does not change with

Overlap Control like in GreenStar Totals, so
CZ76372,00000C3 -19-24OCT13-2/12
PC9087 —UN—17APR06
Average Productivity
Average productivity is calculated from the total area and
total time accumulated while the vehicle is moving and
recording since last reset.
Average Productivity
CZ76372,00000C3 -19-24OCT13-3/12
PC9088 —UN—17APR06
Average Fuel Per Area\
Average fuel per area is calculated from the total fuel used
and total area accumulated since last reset.
Average Fuel Per Area
CZ76372,00000C3 -19-24OCT13-4/12
PC9089 —UN—17APR06
Average Fuel Economy
PM will use the absolute fuel consumption and an internal
timer that is incremented as soon as the engine is running
since last reset to compute the average fuel per hour.
CZ76372,00000C3 -19-24OCT13-5/12
PC9090 —UN—17APR06
Total Fuel Used
If available from the vehicle, the operator will be able to
view total fuel used in liters (or gallons) since last reset.
The value can be manually reset by the operator.
Total Fuel Used
CZ76372,00000C3 -19-24OCT13-6/12
PC9091 —UN—17APR06
Average Operating Speed
The PM will maintain a value that represents the average
operating speed of the machine when the machine
is moving. These units will be expressed in terms
Average Operating Speed
of distance/time. The PM will calculate the value by
dividing the total distance traveled by the vehicle (since
the last reset) by the total engine hours accumulated accumulated when the vehicle is sitting still will not
when the vehicle is moving (since the last reset). Hours contribute to these calculations.
60-13 103113
PN=164
Performance Monitor
PC9092 —UN—17APR06
Total Engine Hours
Engine hours are a value that represents the number of
tenths of an hour that the vehicle’s engine has run since
last reset. Engine hours are only incremented when the
Total Engine Hours
engine RPM’s are above 0.
CZ76372,00000C3 -19-24OCT13-8/12
PC9093 —UN—17APR06
Total Idle Time
The operator will be able to view a value that represents
how much time the vehicle has spent in the idle state.
This value will increment any time the vehicle is running
Total Idle Time
and is at idle. The vehicle is considered to be at idle if all
of the following conditions are met:
• All SCV’s are in neutral or float
• Engine RPM is above 0
• Vehicle is not moving based on radar, GPS, or wheel If all of the conditions listed above are met, the application
speed sensor will count/record how much time is spent at idle.
• Front and Rear PTO are disabled
CZ76372,00000C3 -19-24OCT13-9/12
PC9094 —UN—17APR06
Total Distance
The total distance counter will accumulate any time the
tractor is moving (regardless of recording status or speed
input). The distance counter that appears on the main
Total Distance
screen is the same counter that appears on the totals
screen.\
CZ76372,00000C3 -19-24OCT13-10/12
Resetting Totals
Many of the counters/totals can be reset by the operator.
PC9132CC —19—29OCT13
This capability will be accomplished via two different reset
buttons. Alarms will display to confirm the actions before
the totals are reset.
NOTE: When operating with APM, you must HOLD DOWN
the reset button for 3 seconds to clear out the totals.
Reset Area Totals (this will reset all values on the totals Reset Area Totals
page except distance)
CZ76372,00000C3 -19-24OCT13-11/12
Reset Distance (only resets the distance counter)

PC9133 —UN—17APR06
Reset Distance
CZ76372,00000C3 -19-24OCT13-12/12
60-14 103113
PN=165
Performance Monitor
PC9134 —UN—17APR06
ADVANCED PERFORMANCE MONITOR
(APM)
This section covers only those additional functions that
become available when operating APM
The APM is only available on CAN electronic based John
Deere vehicles with a TECU controller which include the
following: APM Icon
Tractors 8030’s
7030’s 7020’s • Area Counter
6020’s • Distance Counter
Combines 9060’s 9050’s • Engine Speed (RPM’s)
• Rear Hitch Position
If the GS3 display is connected to one of the vehicles • System Voltage
above, the UPM automatically becomes disabled and will • Engine Coolant Temp
not be a selectable option in the menu. • Engine Oil Pressure
• Hydraulic Oil Temp
The APM application contains all functions of the UPM • Transmission Oil Temp
plus an additional 7 functions.
Optional items based on vehicle platform and configuration
When the GS3 Display is connected to John Deere CAN are:
electronic based vehicles the following real-time functions
become available: • PTO Status (Front & Rear)
• Fuel per Hour
• Wheel and Radar or GPS Speed • Fuel per Area
• % Wheel Slip • Radar Connection and Calibration
• Instantaneous Productivity
CZ76372,00000B1 -19-24OCT13-1/3
PC9034CC —19—24OCT13
PC9135CC —19—24OCT13
Layout Option A
Run Screen for APM in Layout A
The APM is only available in layout manager option A as

seen in the example image below. APM will not function
in any other screen layouts currently.
60-15 103113
PN=166
Performance Monitor
PC9137 —UN—18APR06
PC9136 —UN—18APR06
Drop down menus for APM selectable functions
NOTE: 8030’s and 7030’s will NOT display TIME TILL
EMPTY in the GS3 display even though it is
available in the tractor command center.
PC9138 —UN—18APR06
Totals and Settings Screens will remain identical in both
the APM and UPM applications.
In Work / Out of Work Status Indicator
The arrow will change based on the recording source.
• UP Arrow—displayed when NOT working PC9139 —UN—18APR06
• DOWN Arrow—displayed when working

Status Recording for SCV Flow on CAN-Based
Vehicles
For SCV recording on CAN-Based vehicles, the SCV will
only change recording status if the SCV paddle goes Out of Work
PC9140 —UN—18APR06
through a detent ‘click’, not by canceling flow.
If detent flow is set to some time less than ‘C’ continuous:
• Retract detent completed changes the status to "in-work"
• (If set to 5 seconds, state changes after 5 seconds of
flow, not at start of flow) In Work
• Extend detent initiated changes the status to "not
in-work"
• Extend detent initiated changes the status to "not
If detent flow is set to continuous: in-work"
• Retract detent initiated changes the status to "in-work" Each SCV remembers its status through power cycles.
CZ76372,00000B1 -19-24OCT13-3/3
60-16 103113
PN=167
Performance Monitor
PC9141 —UN—18APR06
Additional Functions Available in APM Mode
Engine Speed
Speed of the engine in RPM
Engine Speed
OUO6050,0002313 -19-07OCT08-1/6
PC9142 —UN—18APR06
Engine Coolant Temperature
Temperature of the engine coolant in ºC or ºF
Engine Coolant Temperature

OUO6050,0002313 -19-07OCT08-2/6
PC9143 —UN—18APR06
Engine Oil Pressure
Pressure of engine oil in kPA or PSI
Engine Oil Pressure

OUO6050,0002313 -19-07OCT08-3/6
PC9144 —UN—18APR06
System Voltage
APM Battery system voltage
System Voltage
OUO6050,0002313 -19-07OCT08-4/6
PC9145 —UN—18APR06
Transmission Oil Temperature
The temperature of the transmission oil displayed in
degrees ºC or degrees ºF
Transmission Oil Temperature
OUO6050,0002313 -19-07OCT08-5/6
PC9146 —UN—18APR06
Rear Hitch Position
APM Displays the current rear-hitch position and position
limits
Rear Hitch Position
OUO6050,0002313 -19-07OCT08-6/6
60-17 103113
PN=168
Documentation
No GPS Documentation
If GPS is lost or there is no receiver a grower can still
document and accumulate information or Totals. The
software used an alternative speed source, wheel speed.
OUO6050,0000E54 -19-01SEP09-1/1
Turning Documentation ON and OFF

NOTE: Totals listed under TOTALS button are only
calculated when documentation is turned on.
See DOCUMENTATION softkey in this section to turn on

documentation.
To turn documentation off, for guidance only, go to
RESOURCES/CONDITIONS softkey >> RESOURCES
tab >>TASK. Change TASK to DOCUMENTATION OFF.
All guidance screens and features are functional but no
documentation data is recorded.
A—Task Drop-Down Menu
PC16889CC —19—24OCT13
Resources Page
RW00482,0000169 -19-24OCT13-1/1
65-1 103113
PN=169
Documentation
How Documentation Organizes Data
PC8867 —UN—02NOV05
A—FARM NAME C—Task 1 and Task 2 D—Operation 1-4
B—Field 1 and Field 2
Data Organization Product type, product name, rate, depth, height, seed
type, or crop variety define each operation.
GreenStar Basics and Pro documentation system
organizes operation data as shown in chart. Each farm For example:
can have multiple fields, with each field there are multiple
tasks and each task can have multiple operations. A task Task—Pre-emerge Spraying
is any trip over field to perform a specific function. Each Operation—Product Application
defined task can contain up to four operation choices.
Available operation types are defined later in this section.
OUO6050,00022BF -19-20NOV06-1/1
65-2 103113
PN=170
Documentation
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
DOCUMENTATION softkey
IMPORTANT: When setting up the display with vehicle
key in the accessory position (power on, engine
off), turn key to OFF position for 20 seconds
MENU button
BEFORE starting the vehicle. Setup data is PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
saved to the internal memory before operating
which protects it from being lost.
If the vehicle is running during setup and
programming, turn off the vehicle with key in
the OFF position and wait 30 seconds before
restarting. All data is saved to the internal
memory preventing it from being lost.
DO NOT turn the key to the start position PC8676CC —19—24OCT13
directly from the accessory position. The
reduction in voltage during the starting phase
could result in a loss of all setup data.
The documentation screen allows the setup of operations

and specific details that are associated with those
operations.
1. Select RESOURCE/CONDITIONS softkey. RESOURCES/CONDITIONS softkey
PC8677CC —19—24OCT13
2. Select or Enter Client, Farm, Field, and Task.
3. Select EQUIPMENT softkey.
4. Setup recording source and implement width.
5. Select DOCUMENTATION softkey.
6. Choose the type of operation and the details of each
operation. EQUIPMENT softkey
PC8678CC —19—24OCT13
The name of the operation appears on the
documentation tabs.
65-3 103113
PN=171
Documentation
Client, Farm, Field, and Task Setup

NOTE: See GreenStar General setup, RE-
SOURCES/CONDITIONS softkey for more informa-
tion on setting up Client, Farm, Field, and Task.
If Client, Farm, Field, or Task are not selected, the

Documentation screen displays the information that is still
required.
PC13625CC —19—24OCT13
Machine and Implement Setup
NOTE: See GreenStar General setup, MACHINE/IM-
PLEMENT softkey for more information on setting
up Machine and Implement.
NOTE: For some Task Controller supportive implements Documentation Resources Required
the operation type, equipment type and
implement width are set automatically (when
supported by the implement).
CZ76372,0000328 -19-24OCT13-2/2
Field and Task Notes

PC8676CC —19—24OCT13
Press: MAIN MENU >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO >>
RESOURCES/CONDITIONS softkey
Notes can be used to provide detailed information to field
operators, logging notes while in field, or gathering and
reporting other information like soil sampling and field
scouting.
Field notes are specific to a particular field and will only
show for the currently selected field. RESOURCES/CONDITIONS softkey
Task notes are organized by task and notes for a particular

task are common across all clients, farms and fields.
CZ76372,00002D3 -19-24OCT13-1/1
65-4 103113
PN=172
Documentation
Operations
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Select: MENU > GREENSTAR 3 PRO >
DOCUMENTATION > NEW tab
Four operations per task are allowed for all tasks other
than Harvest. The Harvest task only allows the Harvest
operation. Listed are available operations and details that MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
can be set up within those operations.
Tillage
• Type
• Depth
Planting and Seeding
• Seed Type GREENSTAR 3 PRO button
• Seed Brand PC8678CC —19—24OCT13
• Varieties
• Target Rates*
• Rate Units
• Application Method
• Depth
• Tillage Practice
• Lot Number
• Product Details (For Europe Only) DOCUMENTATION softkey
*Rate comes from control unit on selected control units
Product Application
• Product(s)/Product Rate
• Carrier/Carrier Rate*
• Tank Mix Name (Optional)
• Application Method
• Height
• Product Details (For Europe Only)
*Rate comes from control unit on selected control units
Harvest
• Crop Type
• Seed Brand
PC12874CC —19—24OCT13
• Variety
• Load Name
• Load Number
• Load Destination
• Residue management
NOTE: If using Harvest Doc or Harvest Monitor
in a 70 Series combine, all Harvest Monitor GREENSTAR - DOCUMENTATION
functions are accessed through the armrest
CommandCenter. Please consult the 70 Series
Operator Manual for more detailed information • Type
on using the CommandCenter • Name
Water Management Automatically Generated Operations
• Type Some operations are automatically created when the

display is connected to certain machines and a client,
NOTE: See your SurfaceWater Pro Operator's farm, field, and task are defined.
Manual for more information.
Other
65-5 103113
PN=173
Documentation
Example: When a SeedStar Gen II planter is connected to Example: When Harvest Monitor from a John Deere 50,
the display (and a client, farm, field, and task are defined) 60, or 70 Series Combine (NA) or 9000i series (Europe)
a seeding operation is automatically created. The details is connected to the display only the harvest operation will
of the operation will still need to be defined. be available.
Limited Availability of Operations
Some operations WILL NOT be available when display is
attached to certain machines and implements.
CZ76372,0000177 -19-24OCT13-2/2
Controllers
When connected to controllers below, recording on/off will • ISOBUS Task Controller compliant implements
be controlled automatically:
Once setup properly, the only operational changes
• John Deere 1990 CCS needed for documentation are turning recording on/off,
• John Deere Harvest Monitor changing details within the operation, and changing
• John Deere SeedStar for Air Carts Client/Farm/Field as needed.
• John Deere SeedStar Monitors or Variable Rate Drive If product details change while operating, go to
for Planters
DOCUMENTATION softkey and select tab for affected
• John Deere SprayStar Gen 4 operation.
• Raven 440, 450, 460, 660
• SideKick To remove a controller, you must select the remove button
• GreenSeeker from the 3rd-Party controller setup page.
• Rawson Accu-Rate and Accu-Plant
• New Leader Mark III Mark IV NOTE: 3rd-Party controllers are controllers using
• Dickey-john Seed Manager RS232 connection (Field Doc Connect) and
• Vanguard PIC Seed Monitor ISOBUS compliant controllers supporting Task
• John Deere 800i Series sprayer Controller functionality.
CZ76372,00002B3 -19-30MAR11-1/1
PC13217CC —19—24OCT13
Remove, Disable, and Enable Operations
User created operations will have a Remove button in the
lower left hand corner of the operations page. Selecting
this button, and accepting the Remove Operation popup, Remove Operation
will remove the operation from Documentation and data
will no longer be recorded for that operation.
65-6 103113
PN=174
Documentation
PC13218CC —19—24OCT13
When operations are created by controllers, the button in
the lower left hand corner changes to an Enable/Disable
button. This allows the operator to disable recording of
certain operations while still recording others if needed.
Disable Operation
NOTE: It is possible to use Section Control and display PC13219CC —19—24OCT13
coverage maps with documentation turned off.
A—Enable/Disable button
Enable Operation
PC14232CC —19—24OCT13
Enable/Disable Operation
BA31779,00002F3 -19-24OCT13-2/2
PC10857TZ —UN—30MAR10
Using Documentation with Planters
NOTE: If you are connected to a John Deere
SeedStar Planter, a Planting/Seeding tab is
automatically created.
If you are not connected to a John Deere SeedStar

planter make sure you have selected the correct planter
and number of rows on the equipment button.
65-7 103113
PN=175
Documentation
PC17288CC —19—24OCT13
Planter Screen
A—Choose Seed Type E—Variety 2 L— Displays Populations — Drive P—Remove Tab
B—Displays Prescription if F— Variety 3 Section 2 Q—Advanced Settings
Prescription is being used G—Variety 4 M—Assign Varieties to Rows R—Prescriptions
C—Implement Name H—Variety 5 N—Individual Planter Rows
D—Variety 1 I— Variety 6 O—Drive Selections
J— Input Population on
NON-SeedStar2
K—Displays Populations — Drive
Section 1
NOTE: Before setting Documentation, make sure the Implement Selection

planter is fully set up and connected to the tractor.
See your planter operator's manual for procedure. The implement name is not pre-populated. If using a
John Deere SeedStar planter, only number of rows will
Seed Type Selection be automatically populated.
Select seed type from drop down box (A). Set up the implement using the Equipment Softkey “H”
before setting up operation. MENU > GREENSTAR >
When choosing the seed type from the drop down, if the EQUIPMENT “H”. If this step is not taken, you will be
list is too long, the user may uncheck and retire seed required to enter setup information twice.
types using APEX to simplify future seed selection.
65-8 103113
PN=176
Documentation
PC17337CC —19—24OCT13
Variety Selection
The operator has the ability to document up to six varieties
at one time.
Select Add Variety
Select from the drop down list of enter seed Brand (A)
(Optional).
Select from the drop down list of enter seed Variety (B).
Select or allow automatic selection of the color that will
represent the variety on the display and map (C).
NOTE: It is possible to manually select the same color
for two or more varieties. Documentation will still
occur for each individual variety, however the
map will paint the colors that were chosen will
make visual variety separation difficult.
PC17289CC —19—24OCT13
Select and then enter the Lot Number using the key pad
(D). (Optional)
Select ACCEPT.
NOTE: If six varieties have already been entered, entering
a seventh variety will replace the first variety entered.
This process will repeat for each new variety past six.
A—Brand C—Color
B—Variety D—Lot Number
CZ76372,0000121 -19-24OCT13-3/17
Removing Varieties
Once a variety has been entered it cannot be deleted
or edited using the GreenStar Display. However, it is
possible to remove a variety from view on the display.
Choose the variety you wish to remove from view.
From the variety drop down (A) , select the entry with
the dashes.
Select Accept.
A—Variety drop down menu
PC17290CC —19—24OCT13
65-9 103113
PN=177
Documentation
PC17338CC —19—24OCT13
Assign Varieties to Rows
The operator may assign a variety to any number of row
units, in any configuration up to six varieties may be
chosen to document for any one planter
Select Assign Variety to Rows
Choose the variety that is to be assigned.
NOTE: Assigning varieties to rows will begin with Row
Unit 1 on the left and continue in order to end of
the planter on the right. As with any implement,
right and left are determined as sitting in the seat,
direction of travel when the implement is working.
Choose the End Row.

NOTE: The end row is the row in which the variety chosen
is to stop. The row entered is included.
PC17291CC —19—24OCT13
Assign Multiple Varieties
If multiple varieties are to be assigned select the page
forward soft key.
Choose the next variety to be assigned.
Choose the end row. Notice that the start row is the row
after the last end row. Example: Variety 1 was assigned
to rows 1 through 4, page forward is pressed, the next
start row will be 5. If a change needs to be made to a previous row
assignment, pressing the page back key allows editing to
Repeat this process until all rows of the planter that are occur to an earlier row variety.
dropping seed are assigned the correct variety.
If a row will not be planting, you must select and assign,
Row Not Planting from the drop down list.
CZ76372,0000121 -19-24OCT13-5/17
PC10857UG —UN—30MAR10
Several examples of variety assignments are as follows:
1/2 Planter 3 Varieties
1/2 Planter Single Variety
CZ76372,0000121 -19-24OCT13-6/17
PC10857UH —UN—30MAR10
3 Varieties with the middle variety spanning the disconnect
CZ76372,0000121 -19-24OCT13-7/17
PC10857UI —UN—30MAR10
5% Refuge with 4 contiguous rows
65-10 103113
PN=178
Documentation
PC10857UJ —UN—30MAR10
Seed Corn planted in a 6 female, 2 male configuration
CZ76372,0000121 -19-24OCT13-9/17
PC10857UK —UN—30MAR10
Seed corn planted with male rows set to NOT PLANTING
CZ76372,0000121 -19-24OCT13-10/17
PC10857UL —UN—30MAR10
5% refuge with 4 contiguous rows and 1/2 planter one
variety and 1/2 planter second variety
CZ76372,0000121 -19-24OCT13-11/17
PC10857UO —UN—31MAR10
Population (Seeds/Acre)
If using a John Deere SeedStar planter, this number is set
using that monitor. This is also true for any compatible
controller installed.
If using a non John Deere SeedStar planter, the target Select Target Rate Button
rate button is active on the GS3 display.
CZ76372,0000121 -19-24OCT13-12/17
Select Rate Units
PC17292CC —19—24OCT13
65-11 103113
PN=179
Documentation
Select the target rate box (B) and enter the desired
number on the key pad. If using a multiple drive planter
check the box (A) to assign the target rate for each drive
PC17293CC —19—24OCT13
section on the planter. If multiple targeted rates are
desired, un check box (A) and assign each drive section a
targeted rate as performed on the first.
A—User 1 Rate for All Drive B—Target Rate

Selections checkbox
PC17294CC —19—24OCT13
CZ76372,0000121 -19-24OCT13-14/17
PC17295CC —19—24OCT13
Advanced Settings (Optional)
The advanced settings softkey allows the user to provide
more information about the operation that is going to be
recorded. This information will be available in APEX for
later analysis.
Select Advanced Settings (A).
A—Advanced Settings button
65-12 103113
PN=180
Documentation
Select Application Method (A).

Select Tillage Practice (B).
PC17296CC —19—24OCT13
PC10857UV —UN—31MAR10
Advanced Settings (A)
PC10857UW —UN—31MAR10
Tillage Practices (B)
65-13 103113
PN=181
Documentation
Enter seed height/depth.
PC17296CC —19—24OCT13
CZ76372,0000121 -19-24OCT13-17/17
65-14 103113
PN=182
Documentation
Using Documentation with Seeder/Air Carts
NOTE: Before setting up Documentations ensure

SeedStar Air Cart is setup, See SeedStar Air Cart
Operator's Manual for procedures.
When using a John Deere Air Cart, each tank will be

represented by an operation.
Two Tank Cart: The far left tab will always represent the
front tank. The second tab will represent the rear tank on
a two tank cart.
Three Tank Cart: The far left tab represents the front
PC13220CC —19—24OCT13
tank. The second tab represents the middle tank. A third
tab will appear for the rear tank.
Fill out each operation for each tank even if applying the
same product from two or more tanks.
All aircart tanks will be represented by an operation
tab, even if they are turned off. The target rate will be
displayed as 0 for tanks that are turned off.
NOTE: Before setting up Documentation, make sure the A—Select Seed Type G—Assign Variety to Tank
Air Cart is fully set up and connected to the tractor. B—Displays Name of H—Bar Color indicates Variety
See your aircart operator's manual for procedure. Prescription (if chosen) Chosen
C—Implement Name I— Section Variety is Assigned
D—Variety Entered To
Seed Type Selection E—Tab Used to Add Variety J— Disable Operation Button
F— Target Rate (If using K—Advanced Settings
Select seed type from drop down box (A). SeedStar2, this is set on L— Allows Operator to Apply
that monitor) (If using Prescription
When choosing the seed type (A) from drop-down menu, non-Deere, you can enter
if the list is too long, the user may check and retire seed target rate here
types using Apex to simplify future seed selection.
Implement Selection
Select: MENU > GREENSTAR > EQUIPMENT
The implement name is not pre-populated. If using a John
Deere Aircart, only number of tanks and sections will be If this step is not taken, you will be required to enter setup
pre-populated. information twice.
Set up the implement using the EQUIPMENT button
before setting up operation.
65-15 103113
PN=183
Documentation
PC17337CC —19—24OCT13
Variety Selection
The operator has the ability to enter six varieties but will
only be able to document one variety at one time per tank. Add Variety button
Select: ADD VARIETY button.
Select from the drop-down menu or enter SEED BRAND
(A) (Optional).
Select from the drop-down menu or enter SEED VARIETY
(B).
Select or allow automatic selection of the color that will
represent the variety on the display and map. (C)
NOTE: It is possible to manually select the same color
for two of more varieties. Documentation will
still occur for each individual variety however
the map will paint the color chosen.
PC17298CC —19—24OCT13
Select and then enter the Lot Number using the keypad
(D) (Optional).
Select the accept button.
A—Brand C—Color
B—Variety D—Lot Number
CZ76372,00002B8 -19-24OCT13-2/8
Remove Varieties
Once the variety has been entered it cannot be deleted or
edited using the GreenStar display. However, it is possible
to remove a variety from view on the display.
Choose the variety you wish to remove from view.
From the variety drop-down menu, select the entry with
the dashes.
Select Accept
Although the variety is removed from view, it may still be
chosen at a later date for documentation.
PC17299CC —19—24OCT13
65-16 103113
PN=184
Documentation
PC17300CC —19—24OCT13
Assign Variety to Tank
For tanks configured for seeding the operator may assign
a variety to each tank of the aircart. PC17301CC —19—24OCT13
Select Assign Variety to Tank

Choose the variety that is to be assigned.
Select Accept.
CZ76372,00002B8 -19-24OCT13-4/8
PC10857VE —UN—31MAR10
Population (Weight/Acre)
If using a John Deere Aircart, this number is set using
that monitor. This is also required when any compatible
controller is connected. Target Rate button
If using a non-John Deere Aircart that does not have a
controller reporting to that display, the target rate button is Select Target Rate button.
active on the GS3 display.
CZ76372,00002B8 -19-24OCT13-5/8
Select Rate Units (A).
PC17302CC —19—24OCT13
Select the target rate (B) and enter the desired number
on the key pad.
A—Rate Units B—Target Rate Box
CZ76372,00002B8 -19-24OCT13-6/8
PC13221CC —19—24OCT13
Advanced Settings
The advanced settings softkey allows the user to provide
more information about the operation that is going to be
recorded. This information will be available in APEX for
later analysis.
Select Advanced Settings. (A)
A—Advanced Settings button
65-17 103113
PN=185
Documentation
Select Application Method (A).

Select Tillage Practice (B).
Enter Seed Height/Depth (C).
A—Application Method C—Seed Height/Depth

B—Tillage Practice
PC17303CC —19—24OCT13
CZ76372,00002B8 -19-24OCT13-8/8
Seeding Product Details—Europe Only

The Product Details function allows documentation and
communication of related information between desktop
software and GS3 for products like chemicals, fertilizer
and crop.
Product Details are only available for the Operations
"Planting / Seeding" and "Product Application". Planting /
Seeding is supported by seeder.
NOTE: The GreenStar Seeder/ Sprayer/ Spreader
Pro (Universal) activation enables the
Product Details function. Product Details
isn’t available in all countries.
PC12870CC —19—24OCT13
1. If Product Details button (B) is grayed out, define
Variety (A) first.
2. Press Product Details button (B).
3. Product details screen will appear.
65-18 103113
PN=186
Documentation
NOTE: Max. 25 entries could be added.
To add a detail, press (D). This will open the Product

Details Entry screen.
A—Seed Type D—Button for new data set

B—Variety E—Cancel, Back to prior page
C—Button to change or delete
a data set
PC12871 —UN—22SEP10
65-19 103113
PN=187
Documentation
Information Types available for Planting / Seeding:

• Germination Rate
• Genetically Modified
• Priming Information
• Thousand Corn Weight
After the operator defines Type (A), input in fields below
will be possible. When operator has finished the input,
either confirm or cancel.
If Type (A) is setup to “Genetically Modified” the popup
provides a check box (B) to mark whether the product is
modified or not.
PC12873 —UN—22SEP10
Delete Data Set
1. Select Type (A).
2. Choose “- - - -“.
3. Press Accept button.
PC12872 —UN—22SEP10
CZ76372,0000178 -19-24OCT13-3/3
65-20 103113
PN=188
Documentation
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Using Documentation with a Dry
Box/SpreadStar
MENU button >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO button >>
DOCUMENTATION softkey MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
This screen allows operator to setup and change product
application when GS3 system is connected to a dry box.
Client, Farm, Field, and Task information must be setup
to run documentation for the dry box.

PC8678CC —19—24OCT13
65-21 103113
PN=189
Documentation
Product Application tabs are automatically generated

when GS3 system is hooked up to dry box controllers.
The first Product Application tab (A) is used to set up Bin
- 1.
The second Product Application tab (B) is used to set up
Bin - 2.
If the machine is equipped with only one bin the second
tab will not show up.
Button (C) allows the operator to document additional
product.
PC13225CC —19—24OCT13
Button(D) selects between a single product and tank mix.
Button (E) allows the operator to input information on the
product that is being applied.
Location (F) displays rate that is currently written in the
prescriptions.
Button (G) displays the rate that is currently being
commanded by the controller.
Location (H) displays the rate that is physically being A—Product #1 H—Actual Rate
applied to the field. B—Product #2 I— Prescription
C—New Product (#3) J— Application Method
Location (I) displays the name of prescription if one is D—Product Application Type K—Height/Depth
E—Product Type L— Disable Operation Button
selected. F— Prescription Rate M—Advance Settings
G—Target Rate N—Prescription Button
Location (J) displays the application method selected
using the advanced settings, button (M).
Location (K) displays the Height/Depth and is selected Button (M) is used to added details.
using the Advanced Settings button (M).
Button (N) is used to select prescription or convert
Button (L) is disabled while connected to dry box controller. shapefile to a prescription.
CZ76372,0000292 -19-24OCT13-2/3
Pressing the Product Setup button, shown on previous

page, will bring up the Product Application screen. This
screen allows the operator to change Product Type or
Product Name. Rate Units are set on lb./ac. and cannot be
changed when using a dry box.. Pressing the Enter button
(E) will save changes and return operator to the GreenStar
3 Pro - Documentation screen. Pressing the Cancel
button (D) will return the operator to the GreenStar 3 Pro -
Documentation screen without making any changes.
A—Product Type D—Cancel button

B—Product Name E—Enter button
C—Rate Units
PC9716CC —19—24OCT13
Product Application Screen

CZ76372,0000292 -19-24OCT13-3/3
65-22 103113
PN=190
Documentation
Product Application Product Details—Europe

Only
The Product Details function allows documentation and
communication of related information between desktop
software and GS3 for products like chemicals, fertilizer
and crop.
Product Details are only available for the Operations
"Planting / Seeding" and "Product Application". Product
Application is supported by sprayer and spreader.
NOTE: The GreenStar Seeder/ Sprayer/ Spreader
Pro (Universal) activation enables the
Product Details function. Product Details
LX1048292 —UN—24AUG09
isn’t available in all countries.
1. If Product Details button (A) is grayed out, define

Product Type (B) and Product Name (C) first.
2. Press Product Details button (A).
3. Product details screen will appear.
CZ76372,0000179 -19-22SEP10-1/3
NOTE: Max. 25 entries could be added.
To add a detail, press (F). This will open the Product

Details Entry screen.
A—Type E—Button to change or delete

B—Name or Variety a data set
C—Value designator 1 F— Button for new data set
D—Value designator 2 G—Cancel, Back to prior page
LX1048297 —UN—24AUG09
Continued on next page CZ76372,0000179 -19-22SEP10-2/3
65-23 103113
PN=191
Documentation
Information Types available for Product Application:

• Active Ingredient
• Indication
• Buffer Zone
• Content
• Waiting Time
After the operator defines field (E), an input in field (F), (G)
and (H) is possible. When operator has finished the input,
either confirms with (K) or cancel with (J).
Delete Data Set
LX1048298 —UN—24AUG09
1. Select field (E).
2. Choose “- - - -“.
3. Press button (K).
A—Type F— Dropdown list (can be

B—Name changed)
C—Units G—Units dropdown list (can’t
D—Value be changed)
E—Dropdown list (can’t be H—Value field
changed) J— Cancel, back to Product
Details Screen
K—Accept changes, back to
Product Details Screen
CZ76372,0000179 -19-22SEP10-3/3
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Tank Mixes
Press: Menu button >> GreenStar 3 Pro button >>
MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13

PC8678CC —19—24OCT13
Continued on next page CZ76372,00002BA -19-24OCT13-1/4
65-24 103113
PN=192
Documentation
PC13222CC —19—24OCT13
GreenStar 3 Pro - Documentation
A—Product Name tab D—Tank Mix Name F— Carrier
B—New E—Add Product G—Advanced Settings
C—Product Application Type
The operator can define and document tank mixes during

product application operations. They can be created and
• Selecting a desired Product Application Type (C).
stored using desktop software or while in the cab.
• Defining the ingredients by pressing Add Product
buttons (E). Up to 6 defined ingredients per tank mix
If a tank mix is created with desktop software and imported are supported.
to documentation via the USB drive, it can be selected in • Specify the carrier by pressing the Carrier button (F).
the Tank Mix Name (D) drop-down box under "Custom." Advanced Settings Button (G) allows operator to input the
Tank mixes created with desktop software can be modified Application Method and the Height/Depth.
with the GS3 display but not permanently.
NOTE: Preferred Partner software may not support
• If the tank mix being used was created in the GS3
display, PRODUCT APPLICATION will appear on the
this function. For further details, refer to your product tab (A).
Desktop Software User's Guide.
A tank mix can be created on the GS3 display by:

Continued on next page CZ76372,00002BA -19-24OCT13-2/4
65-25 103113
PN=193
Documentation
Define the ingredients by pressing Add Product button on

GreenStar 3 Pro - Documentation screen.
A—Product Application D—Rate Units

B—Product Type E—Rate
C—Product Name
PC13223CC —19—24OCT13
Product Application
CZ76372,00002BA -19-24OCT13-3/4
Specify the carrier by pressing the Carrier button on the

GreenStar 3 Pro - Documentation screen.
A—Carrier C—Base Solution Rate

B—Carrier Type D—Rate Units
PC13224CC —19—24OCT13
Carrier
CZ76372,00002BA -19-24OCT13-4/4
65-26 103113
PN=194
Documentation
Viewing Locked Tank Mixes

If you created a locked tank mix (A) in Apex. It is possible
to view the contents of the locked tank mix. Press soft
key (B) to view.
A—Lock (Tank Mix) B—Locked Tank Mix softkey
PC17304CC —19—24OCT13
PC17305CC —19—24OCT13
CZ76372,000008B -19-24OCT13-1/1
65-27 103113
PN=195
Documentation
Harvest Documentation
NOTE: Totals listed under TOTALS button are only

calculated when documentation is turned on.
When using Harvest Doc on self propelled harvesting

equipment (Combine or Self-Propelled Forage Harvester),
the operator should only choose one documentation
tab (HARVEST), otherwise there will be no recording
of data. In case there is an OTHER tab on the GS3
Pro Documentation page, this needs to be removed by
selecting the OTHER tab and selecting REMOVE button.
See DOCUMENTATION softkey in this section to turn
documentation on.
To turn documentation off, for guidance only, go to
PC12824CC —19—24OCT13
RESOURCES/CONDITIONS softkey > RESOURCES tab
> TASK. Change TASK to DOCUMENTATION OFF. This
allows all guidance screens and features to be functional
while recording no documentation data.
GreenStar 3 Pro - Documentation

CZ76372,0000154 -19-24OCT13-1/1
65-28 103113
PN=196
Documentation
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Harvest Documentation Setup
MENU button > GREENSTAR 3 PRO button >
DOCUMENTATION button > HARVEST tab
This screen allows operator to setup and change following MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
items:
Grain Cotton
Crop Type* Crop Type*
Seed Brand Seed Brand
Variety* Variety*
Load Type Load Type
Load Number Load Number
Load Alarm On/Off GREENSTAR 3 PRO button
PC8678CC —19—24OCT13
Load Cart Load Cart
Load Destination Module ID
Residue management Gin Turnout %
HARVEST tab
* required
NOTE: Client, Farms, Fields, Task, have to be setup
under RESOURCE/CONDITIONS button before DOCUMENTATION softkey
the Resource/Condition icon is shown and harvest
operation can be accessed.
NOTE: Combines loose unswitched power shortly
Tank and Basket Loads will only increase if after the key is turned off (90 seconds). Any
the current load has been selected for more time the GS3 display looses unswitched power
than 60 seconds. This will prevent a new it will go through a longer startup sequence. In
load from being created when, for example, addition, yield or moisture maps will need to
a truck is being topped off. be reselected after power up.
Save to a USB drive before starting Harvest, otherwise it
can be setup in cab as a new names.
CZ76372,00002BB -19-24OCT13-1/5
Changing Harvest Settings

MENU button > GREENSTAR 3 PRO button >
DOCUMENTATION button > HARVEST tab
NOTE: Operations can be set up using desktop
software and saved to a USB drive.
NOTE: Ensure that the first Operations tab is

set to Harvest.
Three other operations are available for selection, but

PC13226CC —19—24OCT13
not needed.
Select CHANGE HARVEST SETTINGS button (A)
A—CHANGE HARVEST
SETTINGS button
Change Harvest Settings

Continued on next page CZ76372,00002BB -19-24OCT13-2/5
65-29 103113
PN=197
Documentation
The Harvest Settings screen allows operator to define:

• Crop Type
• Brand
• Variety
• Variety Locator
• Residue Management (Excluding Cotton)
Variety Locator
Check the Variety Locator box in Harvest Settings to
have the GS3 automatically change to the variety that
was recorded while planting. This will record the variety
that is coming into the center of the header (verify correct
lateral and inline offsets on the Header page). The correct
variety is recorded for each 3 meters (10 feet) square grid
PC17306CC —19—24OCT13
for each field selected in desktop software.
The variety locator files must be saved to the flash drive
prior to combining.
A Variety Locator Message may appear telling the
operator if the file for the current field is found, or if a file is
available but not used.
Change Harvest Settings
CZ76372,00002BB -19-24OCT13-3/5
IMPORTANT: For Variety Locator to work on GS3

displays, varieties must be recorded when
planting, loaded to desktop software, and saved
to a flash drive. All fields that will use Variety
Locator on a GS3 display at harvest must have
the variety seeding information saved to a flash
drive using desktop software. See the desktop
software operator's manual for more information
on how to properly save files to a flash drive.
PC9299 —UN—29JUL06
Desktop Software
65-30 103113
PN=198
Documentation
Defining Residue Management

Select desired residue management:
• Chop
• Spread
• Chop and Spread
• Windrow
• Undefined (non-specified)
PC17307CC —19—24OCT13
• NEW
Once selections have been made, press the Accept button.
Loads
NOTE: Contractor and Contract # can only be set up with
desktop software and saved to a USB drive.
The Harvest tab screen allows an operator to view and

change: Select desired destination of load.
• Load Name (Can be anything operator wants it to be. NOTE: Load name and destination can be saved from
Examples are Tank, Truck, Field, Basket, or Module) Apex or other compatible desktop software.
• Load Number (Increment or Decrement to next load)
• Load Destination Apex is not available in all EAME countries.
• Gin Turnout % (Cotton Only)
Defining Gin Turnout % Enter the % Lint that is estimated
Select letter button next to LOAD NAME to input desired for each field. The default is 33%.
name.
Select LOAD DESTINATION button.
CZ76372,00002BB -19-24OCT13-5/5
65-31 103113
PN=199
Documentation
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Harvest Monitor Setup
Select: MENU >> ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR
button
Harvest Monitor is only available through the ORIGINAL PC12866CC —19—24OCT13
GREENSTAR MONITOR application on the GS3 display.
Once in the Original GreenStar Monitor application,
operator interface will function the same as the Original
GreenStar Display.
NOTE: The Original GreenStar Monitor is only
NOTE: For all 9x70 combines, Harvest Monitor is ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR Button
located within the Command Center. See Combine
Operator's Manual for more information.
Select: SETUP >> HARVEST MONITOR
IMPORTANT: If dual monitors are being used with
an Original GreenStar Display on the system Operator will need to setup information in HARVEST
along with a GS3 display, Harvest Monitor MONITOR on SETUP—HARV MON—PAGE 1 screen:
will automatically function on the Original 1. Header Width
GreenStar Display and the Original GreenStar 2. Header Type
Monitor application will not be available and 3. Yield Calibration
will not appear on menu. 4. Moisture Calibration
5. Record Stop Height
Starting
NOTE: Farm, Field, and Crop need to be setup in
NOTE: Errors may appear when first powering up the HarvestDoc on GS3 >> DOC (I) button.
system. Cancel these errors before proceeding.
Screen: SETUP—HARV MON—PAGE 1

Continued on next page CZ76372,000017E -19-24OCT13-1/5
65-32 103113
PN=200
Documentation
Defining Header
Screen: SETUP—HEADER
Select: SETUP >> HARVEST MONITOR >> HEADER
TYPE
IMPORTANT: Make certain header type is correct
when changing from one header to another.
The wrong header selection will result in
an inaccurate information.
NOTE: To change from feet to meters see SETUP

GreenStar DISPLAY.
Depending on which type of header is selected,
PC12875CC —19—24OCT13
there are additional items to be setup.
HEADER TYPE button will toggle between corn head, row

crop, platform and belt pickup.
Select desired header type.
Corn Head/Row Crop Head
Define Header
IMPORTANT: Make certain row spacing is correct
when header types are changed. The wrong row
spacing will result in inaccurate area calculation. Platform/Belt Pickup
Header Width
TYPE >> HEADER WIDTH
NOTE: If row crop (e.g. soybeans) are being harvested
TYPE >> HEADER WIDTH
with a platform, and row spacing does not allow use
Enter header (in rows) width using numeric keypad. of full header width, adjust header width to crop width
being cut. For example: 7.6 meter (25 ft) platform
Row Spacing may be 7 meters (24 ft) depending on row spacing.
Screen: SETUP—HEADER Platform = Actual field cutting width in meters (feet)
Select: SETUP >> HARVEST MONITOR >> HEADER Belt Pickup = Actual width of grain cut to
TYPE >> ROW SPACING produce windrow in meters (feet).
Enter row spacing mm (inches) using numeric keypad.
Set increments (in m (ft) ) for cut width to change on
Row Change RUN—PAGE 1 screen. Use numeric keypad to enter
number.
Change increments (in meters or feet) for cut width to
Select: SETUP >> HARVEST MONITOR >> HEADER change on RUN—PAGE 1 screen. Use numeric keypad
TYPE >> ROW CHANGE to input correct header width in meters or feet.
Set increments (in rows) for cut width to change on RUN -
PAGE 1 screen. Use numeric keypad to enter number.
65-33 103113
PN=201
Documentation
PC12876 —UN—24SEP10
Selecting Recording
There are different methods of starting recording and
these methods will change based model of combine and
moisture sensor.
Record Stop Height
The most common method is the Record Stop Height.
The operator raises the header to the desired height for below that percentage, recording will turn on. If it is raised
recording to shut off. Press the button next to Save, and a above that percentage, recording will turn off.
percentage height will be saved. If the header is lowered
CZ76372,000017E -19-24OCT13-3/5
Setting Yield/Area Units

This screen is a continuation of SETUP - HARV MON -
PAGE 1 screen.
This screen allows operator to choose Yield Units and
Area Units that will be displayed on RUN pages. It also
allows operator to configure RUN pages and turn on and
off printer functions.
Area Units
To select units of area select AREA UNITS button: on
SETUP - HARV MON - PAGE 2 screen. AREA UNITS
button will toggle between ACRES and HECTARES.
Selection will appear boxed in capital letters.
PC12877CC —19—24OCT13
Harvest Monitor Page 2
65-34 103113
PN=202
Documentation
Yield Units
NOTE: See Standard Weights Chart section for
standard weights of corps.
To select units of measure for yield readings, select

YIELD UNITS button and SETUP - YIELD UNITS - PAGE
2 screen will appear.
Select desired unit.
PC12878CC —19—24OCT13
Yield Units
CZ76372,000017E -19-24OCT13-5/5
65-35 103113
PN=203
Documentation
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Harvest Machine Setup
Defining Machine
Select: Main Menu > GreenStar 3 > EQUIPMENT softkey
> MACHINE tab> Machine list box MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
NOTE: Select COMBINE, COTTON PICKER, or COTTON
STRIPPER if not detected automatically.
Define make and model in list boxes below machine. (Not

required)
Refer to Machine And Implement Setup section for
information on machine offsets.
Defining Header Width and Header Offset PC8677CC —19—24OCT13
Select: HEADER tab > HEADER list box

NOTE: Select Header Type if not detected automatically.
Enter header make and model. (Not required)

Header Width is set up in Harvest Monitor. See Section on
Harvest Monitor Setup or the 70 Series combine Operator
EQUIPMENT softkey
Manual for procedures.
Verify that the proper width has been sent from Harvest
Monitor and shows in this tab. Refer to Machine And Implement Setup section for more
information.
This screen allows operator to define:
Defining Header Width for Self-Propelled Forage
• Header Name Harvesters
• Header Width comes from Harvest Monitor (see Original
GreenStar Monitor or the 70 Series combine Operator Header width is set up in OBD RCP 180 and others. See
Manual) the user manual that came with the self-propelled forage
• Header Offset harvester to verify the correct setup in the OBD. Do this
• Track Spacing (See Guidance section) for all other implements and headers which cannot be
changed in the display itself (field is grayed out).
NOTE: Header Offset is used for operators using an
offset head (for example, draper).
65-36 103113
PN=204
Documentation
Cut Width Adjustment
PC12913CC —19—24OCT13
GREENSTAR 3 PRO - EQUIPMENT screen >> HEADER
A—Machine E—Implement Name Drop-Down I— Decrease Cut Width—Left L— Increase Cut Width—Right
B—Header Menu Hand Side Hand Side
C—Implement Type Drop-Down F— Change Offsets Button J— Overlap Control Check Box
Menu G—Change Widths Button K—Decrease Cut Width—Right
D—Implement Model Drop-Down H—Increase Cut Width—Left Hand Side
Menu Hand Side
Cut width can be adjusted in two places:

Press arrows (H) (I) (K) and (L) to increase or decrease
• GREENSTAR 3 PRO - EQUIPMENT screen >> the amount of cut width on the left or right side.
HEADER tab
The Overlap Control Check Box (J) allows the operator
• One of two home pages options enable or disengage the overlap control feature.
The width of the header is shown on the HEADER tab
screen as Implement width.
65-37 103113
PN=205
Documentation
PC12914CC —19—24OCT13
Half Screen Home Page Option
Cut Width Adjustment is available in either a full or half the actual width of crop coming into the header. It also
screen on the home page. creates accurate on-screen and desktop software maps.
When the header is raised, it will automatically go back
To combine less than a full cut, press the arrows (D) or (F) to a full cut.
to reduce the gray bar (B) to the correct width and correct
placement along the width of the header (A). Arrows (C) NOTE: Changing cut width is no longer available
and (G) increase the crop width. This adjustment allows on the Run Page of Harvest Monitor using the
for the correct number of acres to be calculated based on Original GreenStar monitor.
CZ76372,0000183 -19-24OCT13-3/3
65-38 103113
PN=206
Documentation
Harvest Monitor Yield Calibration

Calibration
General Calibration Information
Screen: SETUP—YIELD CALIBRATION
Select: SETUP >> HARVEST MONITOR >> YIELD
CALIBRATION
Mass flow sensor must be calibrated in order to
achieve accurate grain weight measurements. Standard
Calibration procedure must be performed in every
crop that is harvested. In addition, optional Low Flow
Compensation procedure may be performed to obtain an
PC12879CC —19—24OCT13
improved level of accuracy in situations where there are
large variations in grain flow rate.
The following paragraphs describe different screens that
are used in calibration procedure.
Calibration In Progress or System Not Calibrated Cell
This section displays if mass flow sensor has been Standard Calibration
calibrated to desired crop.
If system has not be calibrated a message displaying
IMPORTANT: Before calibrating be sure that combine
“System NOT Calibrated” will be displayed.
grain tank and unloading auger tube are
If standard calibration has been performed a bar graph empty. Be sure that wagon or truck hauling
indicating flow rate sensor has been accurately calibrated. grain away from combine is empty.
If a standard and low flow calibration has been completed, NOTE: Message with the following information may
bar graph will expand to show an increased area of appear on screen: “Low Cal Flow Comp NOT
accuracy. required.” If this message appears, flow rate
Calibration Mode Cell during calibration was very low. Therefore, it is
neither necessary nor possible to perform optional
This screen indicates whether Standard Calibration Low Flow Compensation procedure. Standard
procedures or optional Low Flow procedure is to be Calibration procedure is sufficient.
performed.
Yield monitor system can be accurate only if
Select CALIBRATION MODE button to switch between operator follows correct calibration procedures.
STANDARD CALIBRATION and optional LOW FLOW
CALIBRATION. The following procedures should be performed at
maximum ground speed which operator expects
Yield Calibration Cell to run in this crop and condition, and in an area
that is reasonably level and of uniform yield.
This screen allows calibration procedure to be started or
stopped. 1. Select CALIBRATION MODE button to select desired
Harvested Weight Cell calibration.
This screen indicates approximate weight of grain that 2. Select START/STOP button. Display will change to
has been harvested during calibration process. YIELD CALIBRATION IS RUNNING.
Scale Weight Cell 3. Begin harvesting. Weight displayed in HARVESTED

WEIGHT cell should increase while harvesting.
This screen allows scale weight to be entered after a
calibration run is complete (during calibration run, indicates 4. Harvest known amount of grain (i.e. grain tank full,
approximate weight of grain that has been harvested). truck load, wagon load, etc.).
Calibration Factor Cell 5. When known load is completed, stop machine and
allow all harvested grain to enter grain tank.
Value shown here allows mass flow sensor to read
accurately. This value will be updated automatically by 6. Select STOP button to stop calibration. Display will
Calibration procedure. This value can also be adjusted change to YIELD CALIBRATION IS STOPPED.
manually.
65-39 103113
PN=207
Documentation
IMPORTANT: Be sure to empty grain tank IMPORTANT: Standard calibration procedure will not
completely and be certain all grain is on change data already saved. After changes are
one vehicle (wagon or truck). made, all harvest information collected from
that point on will reflect changes.
7. Have known amount of grain weighed. While waiting
for scale ticket to return, you may continue by selecting NOTE: If scale ticket weight is more than 50% higher
RUN button. or lower than displayed weight, system will
8. When scale ticket returns to combine, go to Yield NOT allow entry of scale weight.
Calibration Page.
11. Select SCALE WEIGHT button to enter new value.
9. Select SCALE WEIGHT button to change weight value. CALIBRATION FACTOR will change automatically
when grain weight is entered.
10. Using numeric keypad, input NET WEIGHT OF
GRAIN from scale ticket.
65-40 103113
PN=208
Documentation
Low Flow Compensation Procedure—Optional

NOTE: DO NOT perform a manual adjustment of
calibration factor if you intend on using Low
Flow Compensation procedure.
The following procedure should be performed only after

Standard Calibration procedure has been performed for
this crop and condition. While procedure is optional, it will
produce accurate results only if it is followed carefully.
The procedure should be performed at approximately
one-half to two-thirds of ground speed at which Standard
Calibration procedure for this crop and condition was run
and in an area that is reasonably level and uniform in yield.
PC12880CC —19—24OCT13
CALIBRATION
IMPORTANT: Be sure combine grain tank and
unloading auger are empty. Be sure wagon or
truck hauling grain away from combine is empty.
Low Flow Comp Cal
1. Select CALIBRATION MODE button and select LOW

FLOW. IMPORTANT: Be sure to empty grain tank
2. Select START/STOP button and display will change to completely and make sure all grain is on
YIELD CALIBRATION IS RUNNING. one vehicle (wagon or truck).
NOTE: There is a delay after changing ground speed 8. Have known amount of grain in truck or wagon
before moving indicator responds. Therefore, after weighed. While waiting for scale ticket to return, you
making a ground speed adjustment, wait 10 to 20 may continue by selecting RUN button.
seconds and observe effect of moving indicator
before making another adjustment. 9. When scale ticket returns to combine, go to YIELD
CALIBRATION screen
3. Begin harvesting and adjust ground speed until 10. Select SCALE WEIGHT button to change weight value.
moving indicator stabilizes in target range.
11. Using numeric keypad, input net weight of grain from
4. HARVESTED WEIGHT cell should increase while scale ticket.
harvesting.
IMPORTANT: Calibration procedures will not change
5. Harvest known amount of grain (grain tank full, truck data already saved. After changes are made,
load, wagon load, etc.). all harvest information collected from that
6. When known load is completed, stop machine and point on will reflect changes.
allow all harvested grain to enter grain tank.
NOTE: If scale ticket weight is more than 50% higher
NOTE: Message with the following information may or lower than displayed weight, system will
appear: Comp Flow Too High. Repeat Comp Run. NOT allow entry of scale weight.
If this message appears, it will not be possible
to enter scale weight. Repeat optional Low Flow 12. Select SCALE WEIGHT button to enter new value.
Compensation procedure, paying special attention FLOW COMP NUMBER will change automatically
to keep moving indicator in target range (A). when grain weight is entered.
7. Select START/STOP button again to stop calibration.

Display will change to YIELD CALIBRATION IS
STOPPED.
65-41 103113
PN=209
Documentation
PC12881 —UN—24SEP10
Manually Adjusting Calibration Factor
CALIBRATION Calibration Factor
NOTE: Do not perform a manual adjustment of
Calibration Factor if you intend on using Low
Flow Compensation procedure. 2. Using numeric keypad, input calibration factor.
If scale weight is more than 50% higher or 3. Select CALIBRATION FACTOR button to enter a new
lower than displayed weight, system will not value.
allow entry of scale weight. Displayed Calibration Factor = 950
A new calibration factor can also be entered manually. Weight of grain shown on display = 27,643 lb
To calculate calibration factor, divide weight shown on
Net weight of grain from scale ticket = 27,022
display by new weight on scale ticket. Multiply result by
displayed calibration factor (see example below). This is Displayed Calibration Factor (950) X Weight of grain
the new calibration factor. shown on display (27,643 lb) / Net weight of grain from
scale ticket (27,022 lb) = New Calibration Factor (971)
To manually enter a calibration factor:
New Calibration Factor = 971
1. Select CALIBRATION FACTOR button to change
calibration factor.
CZ76372,0000180 -19-24OCT13-4/4
Harvest Monitor Moisture Correction

Setup—Moisture Correction
IMPORTANT: Changing moisture correction in the
“Moisture Correction” cell will not change
the data already saved. After changes are
made, all harvest information collected from
that point will reflect the changes.
SETUP - MOISTURE screens are used to setup moisture

correction, moisture alarm (on/off) and moisture curves.
Screen: SETUP—MOISTURE
Select: SETUP >> HARVEST MONITOR >> MOISTURE
PC12882CC —19—24OCT13
Moisture correction screen is used to set moisture
correction to match reading from a customer or elevator
certified moisture sensor as shown on RUN - PAGE 1
screen.
Moisture Sensor
Continued on next page CZ76372,000017F -19-24OCT13-1/4
65-42 103113
PN=210
Documentation
Moisture Correction
NOTE: Harvesting, recording is “ON”, determine how
many points the moisture correction needs to be
added or removed from the instantaneous moisture.
Not harvesting, recording “OFF”, will display average
moisture of crop. Average moisture does not need
to be corrected. If average moisture is corrected,
the instantaneous moisture could be over corrected.
1. Screen: SETUP—MOISTURE CORRECTION

Select: SETUP >> HARVEST MONITOR >>
MOISTURE >> MOISTURE CORRECTION
PC12883CC —19—24OCT13
NOTE: “Crop” cell displays the selected crop.
2. MOISTURE CORRECTION button and FIXED

MOISTURE VALUE button allow the operator to
correct the moisture reading on RUN—PAGE 1 screen
by toggling to FIXED MOISTURE VALUE, moisture
sensor will be disabled and forces moisture value to
what was entered. Moisture Correction
3. If using MOISTURE CORRECTION: Select

MOISTURE CORRECTION button and using numeric 3. Select ELEVATOR GRAIN MOISTURE button on
keypad input a number value to be added to reading SETUP—ADVANCED CORRECTION screen.
displayed on RUN—PAGE 1 screen.
4. Using numeric keypad, enter value from elevator.
4. Select MOISTURE CORRECTION button again to
save this value. 5. Select ELEVATOR GRAIN MOISTURE button to save
value.
5. If using fixed moisture value; Select FIXED
MOISTURE VALUE button and using numeric keypad, 6. To start sampling select START button.
input a number value (%) to be displayed on RUN -
PAGE 1 screen. NOTE: Screen will prompt operator to POUR SAMPLE
IN MOISTURE SENSOR.
Advanced Moisture Correction
Make sure moisture sample chamber is fully
NOTE: This procedure is used to determine moisture filled and is free of air pockets. Air pockets will
correction when elevator readings do not agree cause inaccurate moisture readings.
with combine moisture readings.
7. Pour sample into moisture sensor.
Do not use this procedure if crop moisture levels
are above 16%. For crops above 16% enter 8. Screen will display CALIBRATION IN PROGRESS.
moisture correction manually.
9. MEASURED MOISTURE IS cell will display the
1. Collect 1 L (1 qt) grain sample from the grain tank and moisture of the sample in the moisture sensor.
place in a sealed container and have tested by elevator. 10. Select ACCEPT button to save this value or select
IMPORTANT: To finish this procedure the combine DECLINE button to decline this value.
engine must be turned OFF.
2. Select ADVANCE MOISTURE CORRECTION button

on SETUP—MOISTURE CORRECTION screen.
65-43 103113
PN=211
Documentation
Moisture Alarm
This screen is used to determine the set points (minimum
and maximum) for activation of the moisture alarm.
Select MOISTURE ALARM button on SETUP—MOIS-
TURE screen and SETUP—MOISTURE ALARM screen
will appear.
Select MINIMUM MOISTURE button and using numeric
keypad enter a new minimum setting.
Select MAXIMUM MOISTURE button and using numeric
keypad enter a new maximum setting.
Select MOISTURE ALARM button to toggle ON/OFF.
PC12906CC —19—24OCT13
Moisture Alarm
CZ76372,000017F -19-24OCT13-3/4
Moisture Curve
Three moisture curve choices are:
• Enter New Curve — This would be used when a new
curve has been developed for a new crop.
• Update Curve — This would be used when a better
curve has been developed for a current crop.
• Restore Curve Defaults — This would be used when to
reinstate the original curve.
PC10343CC —19—24OCT13
Refer to MOISTURE CURVE CALIBRATION CODES
later in this section for the latest available codes.
This screen is used to enter new moisture curves that may
be provided by the factory.
Use the following to enter a new curve as directed.
Moisture Curves
1. Select MOISTURE CURVE button on SETUP—H
Mon—MOISTURE, MOISTURE CURVE
NOTE: If needed select page button until desired 5. Select SAVE THIS CURVE button.
crop appears. NOTE: To update an existing curve, toggle to UPDATE
CURVE on SETUP - MOISTURE CURVE screen.
2. Select desired crop to be updated.
NOTE: To view current moisture curve, go to INFO 6. Select letter button next to blank cell and using
Harvest Monitor section. numeric keypad enter update.
7. Select SAVE THIS CURVE button .
3. Select CROP button to toggle between ENTER NEW
CURVE, UPDATE CURVE or RESTORE CURVE 8. To restore default curves, select CROP button to
DEFAULTS. toggle to RESTORE CURVE DEFAULTS.
4. If ENTER NEW CURVE is selected select letter button 9. Select SAVE THIS CURVE button to restore default
next to a blank cell and using numeric keypad enter curves for the selected crop.
the new moisture curve number.
CZ76372,000017F -19-24OCT13-4/4
65-44 103113
PN=212
Documentation
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Harvest Monitor Cotton Setup
Press: MENU button >> ORIGINAL GREENSTAR
MONITOR button
Harvest Monitor is only available through the ORIGINAL PC12866CC —19—24OCT13
GREENSTAR MONITOR application on the GS3 display.
Once in the Original GreenStar Monitor application,
operator interface will function the same as the Original
GreenStar Display.
NOTE: The original GreenStar Monitor is only
IMPORTANT: If dual monitors are being used with ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR Button
an Original GreenStar Display on the system
along with a GS3 display, Harvest Monitor Monitor application will not be available and
will automatically function on the Original will not appear on menu.
GreenStar Display and the Original GreenStar
BA31779,00003CE -19-24OCT13-1/5
Harvest Monitor Cotton Flow Chart

Setup
Harvest Monitor
Page 1 Page 2
Set Number of Rows Yield Calibration Run Page Recording Yield Units Area Units
and Spacing ON/OFF
Total Width Quick Cal Material Bales Acres
Spacing Standard Cal Header Pounds Hectares
Active Rows Manual Cal Combination Kilograms
Machine Model Row Correction Cal Manual Hundred wt.
Metric Tonnes
Tons
Setting Yield Units

Screen: SETUP
Press: SETUP >> HARVEST MONITOR >> YIELD
UNITS:
NOTE: See standard weight chart section for
standard weights of crops.
• Bales
• Pounds
• Kilograms
• Hundred Wt
• Metric Tonnes
• Tons
PC12907CC —19—24OCT13
Setting Area Units

Screen: SETUP - HARVEST MON
Press: SETUP >> HARVEST MONITOR
Press AREA UNIT button to toggle between ACRES
and HECTARES. Selection will appear boxed in and Harvest Monitor Cotton
capitalized.
Continued on next page BA31779,00003CE -19-24OCT13-2/5
65-45 103113
PN=213
Documentation
Setting Rows and Spacing

Screen: SETUP - ROWS & SPACING
Select: SETUP > HARVEST MONITOR > SET ROW &
SPACINGS
IMPORTANT: Make certain rows and spacings are
correct. Wrong row spacing will result in
inaccurate area calculation.
1. Select NUMBER OF ROWS button.

2. Enter number of rows and select NUMBER OF ROWS
button again to enter value.
PC12908CC —19—24OCT13
NOTE: An alarm will be displayed in section G to
state limits for row spacings.
Rows & Spacing

65-46 103113
PN=214
Documentation
PC8135 —UN—12MAR04
A—Row #1 D—Row #4 G—Row Left of First Row
B—Row #2 E—Row #5 H—Row Right of Last Row
C—Row #3 F— Row #6
3. Enter row spacing for all rows starting with LEFT OF - Between fourth and fifth row should = a row
FIRST ROW. Select SELECTED ROW SPACING spacing of 30 (in)
button to toggle from one row spacing to next. Select - Between fifth and sixth row should = a row spacing
ROW SPACING button to enter distance between of 30 (in)
rows. - Right of last row should = a row spacing of 30 (in)
• Total width should now show 15 (ft).
NOTE: Picker setup for skip row cotton will vary
Example: You have a 9996 cotton picker, which is from above example.
setup to pick 6 rows of 30 (in) cotton. To setup up the
right spacing in the Display for area to be calculated Harvest Doc cotton automatically adjusts row
properly you will need to enter the following: spacing of the end sections to match the
working width of header.
• Enter 6 for the number of rows.
• Next enter 30 (in) for each selected row spacing. 4. Verify TOTAL WIDTH: is shown correctly after entering
• To enter row spacing you will need to toggle between all row spacings.
selected rows
- Left of first Row should = a row spacing of 30 (in) 5. To make a row inactive select ROW SELECT button
- Between first and second row should = a row until number of desired row appears boxed in. Select
spacing of 30 (in) ROWS ACTIVE button to toggle selected row between
- Between second and third row should = a row ON/OFF. When a row is inactive its number will appear
spacing of 30 (in) on display with a slash through it.
- Between third and fourth row should = a row
spacing of 30 (in)
65-47 103113
PN=215
Documentation
6. Select MACHINE MODEL button to toggle to proper

machine model. There may be only one machine
model available depending on software version.
Recording
Screen: SETUP—RECORDING ON/OFF
Press: SETUP >> HARVEST MONITOR >> RECORDING
ON/OFF BY:
This screen allows operator to setup recording on/off
using the following methods:
Material—Flow of Cotton
PC12909CC —19—24OCT13
Header—Raise/Lower Picking Units
Combination—Raise/Lower Picking Units and Material
Flow Detected
Manual—On/Off by operator from RUN page
Recording Source
BA31779,00003CE -19-24OCT13-5/5
65-48 103113
PN=216
Documentation
Harvest Monitor Cotton Calibration Post Calibration: Done with desktop software. There is
Calibration no post calibration procedure to be performed in field or
on display. This is recommended method for best results.
NOTE: Always read the text to the left of the START/STOP Desktop software allows post calibration using weight of
arrow. This explains the current status of calibration. crop from whole field or weight of crop from each module,
Arrow changes back and forth between START depending on level of detail wanted.
and STOP. When yield calibration is stopped,
START arrow is shown. When yield calibration
is running, STOP arrow is shown. Are you a customer that is using Harvest Monitor
STOP arrow—CALIBRATION IS RUNNING. Push Cotton for the sole purpose of seeing your yield as
button to STOP CALIBRATION. you go across the field?
START arrow—CALIBRATION IS STOPPED. If you believe it is important for the Harvest Monitor Cotton
Push button to START CALIBRATION. system to be as accurate as possible at all times in the
field (on display in cab), the following recommendation
Screen: SETUP—YIELD CAL can help you achieve this expectation: Mass flow sensors
need to be calibrated to achieve more accurate seed
Press: SETUP >> HARVEST MONITOR >> YIELD cotton weights shown on the display in the field. This is
CALIBRATION done by performing a QUICK CAL or STANDARD CAL
after a Row Compensation Calibration is performed in
Mass flow sensors must be calibrated in order to achieve uniform crop. STANDARD Cal, which uses actual scale
accurate cotton weights. Calibration should be performed weights, is the best form of calibration to use in order to
when necessary as condition and maturity of crop change attain more accurate cotton weights. Once calibrated,
or at least once a season. additional calibration may be used for any substantial
Quick Calibration: Easiest calibration procedure when changes in types of cotton, variety change, moisture, crop
there is no scale available for weighing harvest samples. management, quality of defoliation, weeds, irrigated vs.
non-irrigated, crop conditions, etc. Any of these condition
Standard Calibration: Used when actual weights can be changes in cotton could cause shift in accuracy of the
obtained from a scale for harvest samples. system. Throughout the season it is recommended to
check accuracy by weighing the cotton. Recalibration is
Manual Calibration: Only used if previous procedures do suggested if you find that the system is not accurate.
not work because calibration is off by more than 50%.
Before performing manual calibration, check to make sure
all components in yield monitoring system are installed and
performing correctly, and that sensors are unobstructed.
65-49 103113
PN=217
Documentation
Row Compensation
Screen: SETUP—STANDARD CAL
CALIBRATION >> STANDARD CALIBRATION >> ROW
COMPENSATION
NOTE: Only perform once. This only needs to be
performed after system has been installed or if
sensor attachment has changed in any way.
1. Press START button to begin procedure.

NOTE: Sample must be of a uniform yield for all
PC12910CC —19—24OCT13
rows being harvested.
2. Harvest a yield sample—30.5 m (100 ft) or 1/4 basket.

3. Press STOP button.
4. Accept or decline run made.
5. A date will be displayed if successful.
Row Compensation
CZ76372,0000182 -19-24OCT13-2/5
Quick Calibration
Screen: SETUP—YIELD CAL
CALIBRATION
IMPORTANT: Before calibrating be sure that
harvester basket is empty. Be sure boll buggy
or cotton module is empty.
Procedure should be performed at maximum
ground speed which operator expects to run
in this crop and condition, and in an area that
is reasonably level and of uniform yield.
PC12911CC —19—24OCT13
If standard calibration is running estimated yield
will be adding up because they are tied together.
If standard calibration has been performed
operator does not need to run quick
calibration process.
NOTE: Always read the text to the left of the START/STOP

arrow. This explains the current status of calibration. Quick Cal
Arrow changes back and forth between START
START arrow is shown. When yield calibration NOTE: Pay close attention to area next to button C. When
is running, STOP arrow is shown. the black arrow states start, that means you have to
press the button to start calibration. Area left of the
STOP arrow—CALIBRATION IS RUNNING. Push arrow states if calibration is running or stopped.
button to STOP CALIBRATION.
2. Harvest a yield sample.
START arrow—CALIBRATION IS STOPPED.
Push button to START CALIBRATION. 3. Press STOP button.
1. Press START button. 4. Enter yield estimate for sample just harvested.
65-50 103113
PN=218
Documentation
Standard Calibration
CALIBRATION >> STANDARD CALIBRATION
NOTE: Always read the text to the left of the START/STOP
arrow. This explains the current status of calibration.
Arrow changes back and forth between START
START arrow is shown. When yield calibration
is running, STOP arrow is shown.
STOP arrow—CALIBRATION IS RUNNING. Push
button to STOP CALIBRATION.
PC12912CC —19—24OCT13
START arrow—CALIBRATION IS STOPPED.
Push button to START CALIBRATION.
1. Press START button.

NOTE: If Quick Calibration Procedure is started (on
prior page) weight will count up on SETUP -
STANDARD CAL screen. Standard Cal
2. Harvest a yield sample.

7760 Cotton Picker Round Module Calibration
3. Press STOP button to end procedure. Instructions:
4. Enter scale weight for sample just harvested. (Make sure the accumulator and bale chamber are empty
before harvesting)
Harvested Weight—Approximate weight of cotton that has
been harvested during calibration process. 1. Push START button.
2. Harvest a yield sample of one to four round modules
Scale Weight—Allows scale weight to be entered after (Stop harvesting before completing the last full
a calibration run is complete. During calibration run, module).
indicates approximate weight of cotton that has been 3. Press STOP button to end procedure (Empty
harvested. accumulator and perform a manual wrap).
Calibration Factor—Allows mass flow sensor to read 4. Enter scale weight for sample just harvested (Use
accurately. Value will be updated automatically by weight of round module or truck load for calibration
calibration procedure. This value can also be adjusted weight).
manually.
65-51 103113
PN=219
Documentation
PC12881 —UN—24SEP10
Manual Adjustment of Calibration Factor
CALIBRATION >> STANDARD CALIBRATION Calibration Factor
NOTE: If scale weight is more than 50% higher or
lower than displayed weight, system will not displayed calibration factor (see example below). This is
allow entry of scale weight. It is recommended the new calibration factor.
that you review harvesting procedures and
verify vehicle hauling cotton away from picker To manually enter a calibration factor:
is also following correct procedures. At that 1. Press CALIBRATION FACTOR button to change
time, repeat calibration procedures. calibration factor.
Do not change calibration factor in the 2. Using numeric keypad, input calibration factor.
middle of a field.
3. Press CALIBRATION FACTOR button to enter new
Always read the text to the left of the START/STOP value.
arrow. This explains the current status of calibration.
Arrow changes back and forth between START Displayed Calibration Factor (800) X New weight of cotton
and STOP. When yield calibration is stopped, from scale ticket (4830) / Weight of cotton shown on
START arrow is shown. When yield calibration display (5125) = New Calibration Factor (754)
is running, STOP arrow is shown.
Example:
STOP arrow—CALIBRATION IS RUNNING. Push
button to STOP CALIBRATION. Displayed Calibration Factor = 800
START arrow—CALIBRATION IS STOPPED. 800 is factory default value for calibration factor.
Push button to START CALIBRATION. Weight of cotton shown on display = 5125
A new calibration factor can also be entered manually. New weight of cotton from scale ticket = 4830
To calculate calibration factor, divide weight shown on
New Calibration Factor = 754
display by new weight on scale ticket. Multiply result by
CZ76372,0000182 -19-24OCT13-5/5
PC10857TX —UN—30MAR10
Tillage Operation
Select: TILLAGE
Select Type
TILLAGE button
• Primary Tillage
• Rotary Hoe
• Row Crop Cultivation
• Secondary Tillage
PC17308CC —19—24OCT13
• New
Select Depth
1. Enter number on keypad.
2. Select ACCEPT.
OUO6050,000126C -19-24OCT13-1/1
65-52 103113
PN=220
Documentation
Map Based Prescriptions

PC8676CC —19—24OCT13
Prescriptions
Application Plans from desktop software can be applied
using selected implement control units.
Map-based prescriptions are compatible with the following

equipment:
RESOURCE/CONDITIONS softkey
• SeedStar Generation II (gray Boxes on planter frame) PC8677CC —19—24OCT13
(1900 carts PIN 690101 and higher, and all 1910 carts)
with Variable Rate Drives. Application Plans can be in
seeds per hectare (acre).
• SeedStar 2 planters with Variable Rate Drives
• Gen2 1900 and 1910 model air carts with variable rate
drives and SeedStar 2 air carts with variable rate drives.
Air Carts must have Variable Rate Drives. Application
Plans must also be created with mass or weight units
(ex. kilograms/hectare or pounds/acre). Application EQUIPMENT softkey
PC8678CC —19—24OCT13
plans cannot be in liquid or seed count form. Multiple
prescriptions can be applied simultaneously by creating
an operation for each tank.
• Task control unit compliant implements
• Sprayers and SprayStar Gen IV
• 3rd-Party Controllers: Ensure that accurate data is
recorded by setting control unit rate units equal to
Application Plans. 3rd-Party Controllers compatible with
the following list of variable rate control units: DOCUMENTATION softkey
- Raven 440, 450, 460, 660 PC8704 —UN—17AUG05
- SideKick
- GreenSeeker
- Rawson Accu-Rate and Accu-Plant
- New Leader Mark III and Mark IV
- LH Technologies PRESCRIPTIONS button
• GreenStar Rate Controller
NOTE: 3rd-Party control units are control units using 2. Select or Enter Client, Farm, Field, and Task.
RS232 connection (Field Doc Connect) and
ISOBUS compliant control units supporting 3. Select EQUIPMENT button.
Task Controller functionality. 4. Setup recording source and implement width.
NOTE: Depending on capability of control unit; seed, 5. Select DOCUMENTATION button.
dry product and liquid can be applied.
6. Choose an operation type. Example seeding or
NOTE: It is not possible to run prescriptions of two product application.
seperate ISO implements or two Field Doc 7. Select PRESCRIPTIONS button.
Connect implements. However it is possible to run
prescriptions for multiple operations performed by a 8. Select the PRESCRIPTION from the PRESCRIPTION
single implement (multiple operation implement). drop-down box.
Prescription Multiplier
Setup Prescriptions
IMPORTANT: If using John Deere sprayer, rate
Client, Farm, Field, and Task Setup knob must be set to AUX.
NOTE: See GreenStar 3 Basics and Pro General Setup, If using John Deere AirCart or Planter, set
RESOURCES and CONDITIONS button for more desktop software as Active Rate.
information on setting up Client, Farm and Field.
If using a 3rd-Party control unit, see the
1. Select RESOURCE and CONDITIONS button. operator manual of the control unit.
65-53 103113
PN=221
Documentation
NOTE: 3rd-Party control units are control units using Prescription Overview Background Layer
ISOBUS compliant control units supporting Map Setting Tab
Task Controller functionality.
The operator can select the prescription map as the
If applying multiple prescriptions, operator must choose a background layer in the map settings page when a
prescription for each operation. Example—air cart with a prescription is being applied. Aerial images can also be
prescription for each tank. used as a background layer. As applied data will show
over the prescription layer as it is recorded.
If applying the same product from two of more tanks,
operator needs a prescription for each tank. To select the prescription as a background layer:
Prescription Override or Multiplier Select: GREENSTAR 3 PRO > MAPPING > MAP
SETTINGS
Select a rate to override the prescription.
Then choose from the from the BACKGROUND
Increase or decrease the prescription rate by 15%. All drop-down menu.
rates in the prescription are adjusted by 15%.
For more information on Maps refer to the Maps section
Select ENTER button. of this operator's manual.
CZ76372,00002B4 -19-24OCT13-2/3
In the Look Ahead input box (A), enter the number of

seconds to look ahead for prescription rate changes. This
is an adjustment to compensate for the delay between the
control unit making the rate change and the solution pump
responding. This should be between 0 and 4 seconds.
Default is 0.0 seconds.
NOTE: Text (B) will be displayed and the accept button
will become inactive when prescription base units do
not match, i.e. liquid units vs. weight units or gallons
vs. pounds. Correcting the base unit measurement
mismatch will allow the prescription to be applied.
To convert prescription shapefiles, select
“Shapefile” from the drop-down menu and select
the enter button. This will take you to the
PC17917CC —19—24OCT13
Shapefile Conversion Homepage.
A—Look Ahead (Seconds) B—Text with Accept button
CZ76372,00002B4 -19-24OCT13-3/3
65-54 103113
PN=222
Documentation
PC12853 —UN—31AUG10
Shapefile Converter
Shapefile converter converts shapefile prescriptions to a
form used with GreenStar™ 3 System. Not all desktop
software solutions are compatible with the GS3 2630
Display.
Shapefile Converter Process
Supported Shapefile format: ESRI format, WGS-84
non-projected
A—Desktop Software other C—GS3 2630 Display
NOTE: Most farm management software creates a than Apex D—GreenStar™ Prescription
shapefile in WGS-84 non-projected format. To B—USB Drive Application
confirm prescription shapefile from third Party
software program is compatible, test file using
Shapefile Converter before field application.
Create a prescription (Rx) folder on USB drive.
GS3 2630 Display supports up to 120 Save all prescription shapefiles to this folder.
shapefiles per USB drive. GS3 2630 Display references Rx folder to
import prescription shapefiles.
Only use shapefile converter for prescrip-
tion shapefiles.
BA31779,00006F8 -19-24OCT13-1/6
Shapefile Conversion Home Page

NOTE: Shapefiles must be in Rx folder on USB drive.
1. Select Shapefile to convert from dropdown menu.

2. Enter a name. Name automatically populates and
can be edited.
NOTE: Selecting wrong column results in under or
over application of product.
3. Select Column. Select column that contains product

rate).
4. Select Product Type (chemical, fertilizer, or seed).
PC12747CC —19—24OCT13
NOTE: Unit system setting (English or Metric) on GS3
2630 Display and shapefile are required to match.
Selecting wrong units results in under or over
application of product.
5. Select Rate Units (pounds, tons, ounces, or seeds per

acre).
Shapefile Conversion Home Page
6. Enter out of field rate. Out of field rate is default rate
control rate used if outside field boundary.
8. Once steps 1-7 are completed, select Accept button.
7. Enter loss of GPS rate. Loss of GPS rate is default
rate control rate used if GPS signal is lost). 9. To cancel all changes, select Cancel button.
65-55 103113
PN=223
Documentation
Shapefile Conversion in Progress

NOTE: Shapefile conversion process can take
up to 30 sec.
Once correct shapefile is selected and values have been

entered correctly in Shapefile Conversion page, shapefile
conversion process begins.
Cancel button cancels shapefile conversion process.
Shapefile Conversion page displays after selecting Cancel
button.
PC12854CC —19—24OCT13
BA31779,00006F8 -19-24OCT13-3/6
Shapefile Conversion Failed

NOTE: If engine is shut off during shapefile conversion
process, reconvert shapefile.
If shapefile cannot be converted, this page appears.

Errors are:
• File is missing or corrupt.
- Make sure matching .shp, .shx, and .dbf files are on
USB drive.
- Include matching .shx and .dbf files or system cannot
convert the shapefile.
- Make sure files are in Rx folder on USB drive.
• Shapefile error.
- Shapefile format is not compatible.
PC12748CC —19—24OCT13
• Database file error, incorrect version.
- The dBase file version number incorrect.
• Database file error, file format incorrect.
- The dBase file format is incorrect.
• Index file error.
- The .shp file header does not match .dbf file header.
• Projection file error.
- Validate shapefile is formatted in WGS84 projection. Shapefile Failed Page
• Unknown error.
- The file could not be validated.
• Field is too large. field of less than 800 ha (1977 acre) could fulfill or
- Cannot import a shapefile with maximum bounding exceed an MBR of 800 ha (1977 acre).
rectangle (MBR) larger than 800 ha (1977 acre). MBR • If any of these messages are displayed, select Accept
is latitude-longitude rectangle which encompasses a button to go back to Shapefile Conversion homepage.
shapefile map. For example, an irregularly shaped
65-56 103113
PN=224
Documentation
Shapefile Conversion Maximum Number of Rates

If more than 254 rates are present in a shapefile, this
message appears:
The number of rates in the shapefile exceeds the
maximum number of rates supported in a prescription.
The number of rates will be reduced.
If message is displayed, GS3 2630 Display reduces
number of rates by minimizing differences between
shapefile and generated prescription.
PC12749CC —19—24OCT13
Maximum Number of Rates Page
BA31779,00006F8 -19-24OCT13-5/6
Shapefile Conversion Summary Page

NOTE: If Accept button is grayed out, product type or rate
do not match rate units in original prescription. Select
Cancel button to return to Shapefile Conversion
homepage. Enter correct product type or rate units.
Area of prescription, assigned a zero rate,
appears black on prescription map.
Once shapefile conversion is complete, this page appears.

A preview map of prescription is displayed. Select Enlarge
Map button for a detailed view.
Verify information is correct before accepting. Select
Accept button to save converted shapefile.
PC13626CC —19—24OCT13
Shapefile Conversion Page

BA31779,00006F8 -19-24OCT13-6/6
65-57 103113
PN=225
Documentation
Connecting 3rd-Party Controllers

PC8676CC —19—24OCT13
IMPORTANT: When connecting with a Rawson
controller, turn main switch to OFF before
leaving vehicle or performing maintenance.
NOTE: 3rd-Party controllers are controllers using

ISOBUS compliant controllers supporting Task
Controller functionality.
RESOURCES softkey
NOTE: Please visit www.StellarSupport.com for list of PC8677CC —19—24OCT13
third party compatible controllers.
Data from 3rd-Party controllers can be recorded directly

from the following controllers:
NOTE: Go to www.StellarSupport.com to find the latest
information about approved platforms.
• Raven 440, 450, 460, 660 EQUIPMENT softkey

• SideKick PC8872 —UN—17NOV05 PC8649 —UN—01NOV05
• GreenSeeker and YARA N-Sensor
• Rawson Accu-Rate and Accu-Plant
• New Leader Mark III Mark IV
• Dickey-John Seed Manager
• Vanguard PIC Seed Monitor NEXT ENTER button
• ISOBUS Implement with Task Controller enabled
System will record Actual Rate, Implement Width, and 2. Press the EQUIPMENT button.
GPS Recording Status (implement switch not required)
directly from Field Doc Connect controller. 3. Press the COM PORT button.
Task Controller will record all data implements can supply. 4. Select manufacturer, model, and Comm Port.
Communication Status will show active when data
Rawson, Raven, and New Leader Controllers are also is being sent on selected Communication Port,
capable of accepting prescriptions from the GS3 display. and inactive when controller is disconnected or not
(See the Map Based Prescriptions section for more communicating.
information.)
5. Press NEXT button.
To setup a Field Doc Connect Controller:
6. If using a Rawson or New Leader Controller, operator
NOTE: You must purchase the harness PF90363 and must also enter Mid-point and Step Size.
follow the included instructions for connecting
the controller to the display. 7. Press ENTER button to finish.
1. Choose a Client, Farm, Field and Task in the

RESOURCES softkey.
CZ76372,00002B5 -19-24OCT13-1/1
65-58 103113
PN=226
Documentation
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Simultaneous Documentation and
Prescriptions with John Deere and 3rd-Party
Controllers
NOTE: 3rd-Party controllers are controllers using MENU button
RS232 connection (Field Doc Connect) and PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
ISOBUS compliant controllers supporting Task

The GS3 display can simultaneously run

documentation/prescriptions for John Deere and
3rd-Party controllers. An example of this is the display
recording seed and fertilizer rates from an air cart while
also recording anhydrous ammonia rates from a 3rd-Party GREENSTAR 3 PRO button
controller. PC8678CC —19—24OCT13
Set up the Air Cart or Planter according to instructions in

the GS3 operator's manual.
Under EQUIPMENT softkey, MACHINE tab, choose the
COM Port button to set up the 3rd-Party controller.
Refer to Field Doc Connect list for approved controllers
on www.StellarSupport.com.
PC8704 —UN—17AUG05
PRESCRIPTIONS button
CZ76372,000017B -19-24OCT13-1/1
PC10857VN —UN—01APR10
Other Operation
The OTHER operation tab is used for activities that do not
have a task controller associated. Using a self-propelled
windrower and recording a coverage map would be one
example.
Select or Enter a type. • Area
• Area Remaining
Select or Enter a name. • Time
Although the other operation tab will not allow yield • Productivitiy
recording, the following information will be available:
OUO6050,0001271 -19-01APR10-1/1
PC10857VM —UN—01APR10
Surface Water Management
Select: WATER MANAGEMENT > TYPE
PC10857VO —UN—01APR10
Continued on next page CZ76372,0000397 -19-06DEC11-1/2
65-59 103113
PN=227
Documentation
Choose DITCH or LEVEE
PC10857VP —UN—01APR10
CZ76372,0000397 -19-06DEC11-2/2
65-60 103113
PN=228
Totals
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
TOTALS Softkey
Totals
The Totals page show the data based on which items in
the dropdown menus are selected. For example, when MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
a Harvest task is selected for a farm and field, planting
data will not show, and when Crop Totals are shown,
information for each particular crop is not broken down by
which farm or field the crop was in.
This can be filtered further by filtering by field, crop, and
load.
All values shown are for the items that are used for filtering.
ITEM SPECIFICATION PC8679CC —19—24OCT13
• Area—Area harvested with recording ON

• Date Range—Beginning and ending date of harvest
activity
• Average Productivity—The average amount of area
harvested per hour when recording is ON
• Moisture—Percent of moisture of the crop as
determined by Harvest Monitor
• Yield (dry)—Crop yield as determined by Harvest TOTALS softkey
Monitor if dried down to the standard payable moisture.
The standard payable moisture is entered for each crop • Farm—A group of fields that are located near each other
with desktop software. • Field—An area of land which is physically defined by
• Yield (wet)—Yield of the crop as it comes out of the field roads, creeks, or other things
• Productivity—Average wet mass of the crop per hour • Load—Sub-unit of what is harvested in each field. It
• Length of time—Number of hours that recording has could be a grain tank, a truck load, or the entire field
been ON • Area Remaining—The Area Remaining is derived by
• Fuel Used—Estimated total fuel used taking the initial acres and subtracting what has already
• Mass (dry)—Dry mass as determined by Harvest been harvested. Needs a boundary (or acres entered
Monitor if dried down to the standard payable moisture into desktop software) to be functional.
• Mass (wet)—Wet mass as determined by Harvest • Time to Finish—Time to finish is derived by taking the
Monitor area remaining and dividing by the average productivity.
• Additional items that will show depending on how it is Time for turning, stopping to unload, etc. will not be
filtered include: taken into account. Needs a boundary (or acres entered
• Client—Anyone, including yourself, that data will be into desktop software) to be functional.
collected for, such as a landlord
CZ76372,0000098 -19-24OCT13-1/1
70-1 103113
PN=229
Totals
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Harvest Totals
Totals
Totals for Harvest Totals screen allows operators to view
a variety of operational information. MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
Harvest - Combine Harvest - Cotton
Brand Brand
Variety Variety
Area Area
Yield (dry) Yield avg Seed
Yield (wet) Max Lint Yield
Dry Mass Totals Seed
Wet Mass Min Lint Yield PC8679CC —19—24OCT13
Moisture Yield avg Lint
Length of Time Length of Time
Estimated Time to Finish* Estimated Time to Finish*
Area Remaining Area Remaining*
Productivity Productivity
Productivity Productivity
Total Fuel Used Total Fuel Used
TOTALS softkey
Date Total Bales
Total Lint
Date To filter totals, select criteria desired, and press enter.
*Estimated time and area remaining require that an To clear totals press and hold 0 button.
exterior boundary has been selected.
Interaction with Harvest Monitor
Harvest - Combine Harvest - Cotton Harvest - SPFH
Operator Operator Operator
NOTE: Today, with the current GreenStar display and
mobile processor, when Harvest Doc is on the
Destination Destination Destination
bus with Harvest Monitor, the Totals come from
Load # Load # Load # HarvestDoc not Harvest Monitor. The same shall be
Load Name Load Name Load Name with Documentation on the GreenStar display family.
Residue Management Gin Turnout % The user shall not be able to see Harvest Monitor
Load Information totals through the Original GreenStar Monitor, an
auxiliary Original GreenStar Display, or 70 Series
In addition, the totals will be filtered on the Load level. If Command Center unless Documentation is off.
Harvest is not selected in the Operation list box, the Load
list box should be disabled.
CZ76372,0000130 -19-24OCT13-1/1
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
General Overview
Combine—Specific Items are done through Harvest
Monitor (calibrating yield, moisture, selecting the size and
type of header, etc.)
Menu
PC12866CC —19—24OCT13
1. Select Menu.
2. Select Original GreenStar Monitor.
3. Slect Setup/Harvest Monitor.
ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR Button

CZ76372,000016E -19-24OCT13-1/1
70-2 103113
PN=230
Totals
Set Up Totals on Home Page

1. Select Menus > Layout Manager.
2. Totals can be displayed at various locations on the
screen, but are configurable only on a half screen
(A) or on the softkey region (B). To learn more about
setting up different areas of the screen, see the Layout
Manager section in this operator's manual.
PC10857ID —UN—25MAR09
3. Select the GreenStar 3 Pro button and find Totals
section.
4. Select Totals section and then select the Enter button
to complete setup.
5. In the example shown here, the flags screen go into
the blue region and the yield map into the red region.
A—Half Screen B—Softkey Region
CZ76372,000009A -19-09JUL10-1/1
Configuring Totals
1. Select the Configure button.
A—Configure Button
PC17309CC —19—24OCT13
Continued on next page OUO6050,0001076 -19-24OCT13-1/4
70-3 103113
PN=231
Totals
PC17310CC —19—24OCT13
2. The configuration is different for each type of
operation. This example sets up the Harvest-Combine
Operation Type
Each field on the screen can be changed to show the
information that you want to see for that operation.
PC17311CC —19—24OCT13
Continued on next page OUO6050,0001076 -19-24OCT13-2/4
70-4 103113
PN=232
Totals
3. For Harvest operations, checking the box at lower

left replace some of the spaces with the controls for
recording load data.
A—Load Controls Check Box
PC17312CC —19—24OCT13
OUO6050,0001076 -19-24OCT13-3/4
4. The Totals screen for the softkey region can be

configured in the same way. On both screens, some
of the regions can be left blank, to make the remaining
numbers stand out more clearly. In this way, the home
page can be built to meet the needs of the individual
operator, with either a few key numbers or with a
detailed screen that shows everything happening in
the operation.
PC17313CC —19—24OCT13
OUO6050,0001076 -19-24OCT13-4/4
70-5 103113
PN=233
Totals
Viewing Current Harvest Data

Once the Home Page has been created and configured,
it can be used to show the operation current data. This
data can be toggled between the current Field data and
the current Load data by pressing the button (A).
When looking at the field data, it is possible to view either
the totals for all varieties or toggle to view the last variety
harvested. This is done by pressing button (B).
PC17314CC —19—24OCT13
It is only possible to view data for a variety that has
already been harvested. If there is variety in the field that
has not been harvested, it does not appear in the rotation.
A—Field/Load Toggle Button B—One/All Varieties Toggle

Button
OUO6050,0001078 -19-24OCT13-1/1
Crop Season
GreenStar 3 Pro field documentation tracks the crop
season for each operation (A). This allows you to report
on everything that you did for a crop, even if some of
the operations occurred in the previous year. Common
examples of this are fall tillage operations and winter grain
crops.
The Crop Season is selected on the Client/Farm/Field
page from the drop-down. This value is automatically set
to the current calendar year unless the operator changes it.
A—Crop Season
PC12832CC —19—24OCT13
CZ76372,0000157 -19-24OCT13-1/1
70-6 103113
PN=234
Totals
Overlap Control
NOTE: When using Overlap Control, header width
is divided into sections automatically with a
maximum of eight sections and a minimum
section width of 1.5 m.
Overlap Control automatically adjusts the width of the

header as the harvester moves over areas that have
already been harvested. This feature improves the
accuracy of the area and yield data.
Platform
Platform Width Number of Sections
Less than 6.1 m (20 ft) 3
PC12833CC —19—24OCT13
6.1 — 7.3 m (20 — 24 ft) 4
7.6 — 8.8 m (25 — 29 ft) 5
9.1 — 10.4 m (30 — 34 ft) 6
10.7 -11.9 m (35 — 39 ft) 7
12 m (40 ft) and greater 8
Row Crop Head

Row Spacing Rows per Section
38 cm (15 in.) 4 A—Overlap Control Check Box
51 cm (20 in.) 3
76 cm (30 in.) 2
help ensure there is no area outside of the field is included
Overlap Control is turned on by checking the box on the in the yield calculation if a section of the head or platform
Header setup screen. When it is turned on, the manual extends over the boundary. Similarly, an interior boundary
controls for changing the header width are disabled. allows you to drive across a waterway and help ensure
that each section is off while crossing.
Overlap Control ensures that harvested area does not
extend over or out of field boundaries or extend into an • If a boundary is unloaded into desktop software, it can
interior boundary. either be set up on the display in the field, or in the
desktop software and saved to the USB drive. If interior
• Exterior boundary—only one exterior boundary can be boundaries are used, those fields must also have an
defined for a field. exterior boundary.
• Interior boundaries—multiple interior boundaries can be • If data is not unloaded into desktop software, and
defined and named for a field. interior boundary can be created on the display without
having an exterior boundary.
Boundaries, though optional, can be helpful when using
Overlap Control. For example, an exterior boundary can
CZ76372,0000158 -19-24OCT13-1/1
Recording Load Data

Loads are a powerful feature of the GreenStar 3 Pro field
documentation system. They allow the user to capture PC17315CC —19—24OCT13
data for specific parts of a field. This can be used to track
the crop that is sent to various destinations, such as bins
or an elevator. They can also be used to trace scale
tickets back to the field.
70-7 103113
PN=235
Totals
PC10857IN —UN—25MAR09
Loads are identified by their name and number and by
the crop type and crop season. The destination can have
more than one load with the same load name.
CZ76372,0000159 -19-24OCT13-2/4
The operator can set the Load Name, Number, and

Destination at any time before the load is saved. The
Load Name (A) and Load Destination (B) are selected
from the drop-down lists. New names and destinations
PC17316CC —19—24OCT13
can be created at any time. They can also be saved
from Apex or other compatible desktop software. The
Load Number (C) is selected using the + and – buttons to
increase or decrease the number. The number can also
be selected and changed from 1-9999.
Load totals continue to accumulate until the operator
presses the Save Load button (D). When the load is
saved, the accumulated total is stored to the internal
memory and the Load Number automatically increases by A—Load Name C—Load Number
one. The load data can be viewed on the display or saved B—Load Destination D—Save Load
to a USB drive to be used by Apex or another compatible
desktop program.
NOTE: Apex is not available in all EAME countries.
CZ76372,0000159 -19-24OCT13-3/4
NOTE: Auto-increment is available only on combines.
The operator can select the Auto-Increment Load Number

check box (A) on the Harvest operation setup screen. If
this box is selected, the system automatically increases
the Load Number by one every time the grain tank auger
stops.
When Auto-Incrementing is selected, the Save Load
button is disabled.
A—Auto-Increment Load
Number Check Box PC12834CC —19—24OCT13
CZ76372,0000159 -19-24OCT13-4/4
70-8 103113
PN=236
Totals
Adding to an Existing Load

The Load Number can be changed back to a number that
has already been recorded using the + and – buttons.
This is useful if Auto-Incrementing is turned on and it is
necessary to stop or swing the auger in before the bin is
emptied.
The Load Data screen on the home page always shows
the totals since the last time the load was saved. If the
PC17317CC —19—24OCT13
load number is changed to an existing load, the totals that
have already been saved are not reflected on the screen.
To see these values, use the J button to view the reports.
OUO6050,000107C -19-24OCT13-1/1
Additional Load Tips care about how it gets there, use the Load Name field
for the destination. For example, an operation that is
A load does not have to be a combine bin load. If your delivering to several elevators can create a Load Name
operation is more concerned with truck loads, you can for each elevator.
track the crop in each truck by using one number until
the truck is emptied. A single load can have totals from more than one field.
This allows you to finish a field and start another while
The Load Name and Load Destination fields do not have tracking the load in a truck or cart.
to have the name and destination in them. If tracking
where the crop is going is important to you and you do not
OUO6050,000107D -19-06APR09-1/1
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Viewing Current Totals Reports
The GreenStar 3 Pro field documentation system allows
you to view the totals for the operations that you are
performing. This is a powerful tool that can display totals
MENU button
by field, crop, variety, and load. PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
Totals reports can be viewed by selecting the J button

from the GreenStar 3 Pro screens.

PC8679CC —19—24OCT13
TOTALS softkey
Continued on next page CZ76372,000015A -19-24OCT13-1/3
70-9 103113
PN=237
Totals
The Totals screen shows the current totals. The operation

type; client, farm, and field, and crop season are displayed
in the box on the left (A). This box also contains the
navigation buttons that allow you to change the contents
of the screen.
The upper box on the right (B) shows the operational
data. This depends on the type of operation selected, but
normally reflects either the application or harvest data.
The box on the lower right (C) displays productivity data.
This information is displayed for all operation types.
The time and area remaining are dependent upon the
field boundary. This information is not available if the field
does not have a boundary.
PC12835CC —19—24OCT13
The fuel data is approximate and tends to reflect a greater
quantity than used.
A—Box on Left C—Lower Box on Right

B—Upper Box on Right
CZ76372,000015A -19-24OCT13-2/3
Pressing the button next to Current Field Totals (A)

changes the screen to display load totals. The load totals
screen is the same as the field totals, but only displays
the totals accumulated since the last time the Save Load
button was pressed.
A—Field/Load Totals B—Harvest-Combine Corn
PC12836CC —19—24OCT13
CZ76372,000015A -19-24OCT13-3/3
70-10 103113
PN=238
Totals
Viewing Filtered Totals Reports

The GreenStar 3 Pro field documentation system also
allows you to view totals for other operations or to view
the accumulated data for several fields or even several
years. This allows you to have some of the power of the
Apex desktop system in the cab.
The filtered totals reports can only operate on data
that is present on the display. If the display has
been cleared or if another profile has been loaded,
that data is not available for reporting.
PC12837CC —19—24OCT13
The filtered totals are seen by selecting the View Custom
Filter button (A) at the bottom of the totals screen.
This will bring up the Custom Filter dialog box.
A—View Custom Filter button
CZ76372,000015B -19-24OCT13-1/3
The Custom Filter allows you to choose the criteria for the
data that you want to see. You must select are Operation
Type first, as this causes some of the data filters to
change. For harvest operations, the Crop and Variety are
required, but you can select All for the Variety.
All of the other fields can either be left as All, or specific
values can be chosen.
Press the Enter key to create the report.
If you have a lot of data in the memory, generating the
report takes longer, particularly if you are performing an
operation at the same time. While the report is being
created, you can view other screens normally. The display
lets you know when the report is complete.
PC12838CC —19—24OCT13
70-11 103113
PN=239
Totals
When you return to the report screen, you see the results
of your custom filter. This screen is like the current totals
screen, with the exception that the left-hand box now
shows the custom fitter that was used.
The results on the custom filter report include the current
totals for the operation that you are performing, if it
matches the filter that you specified. The current totals
are included as of the time that the report was created. If
you would like to refresh the screen to show more recent
data, you can press the Refresh filter button at the top of
the screen (A).
You can change the custom filter by pressing the Modify
Custom Filter button, which brings up the custom filter
PC12839CC —19—24OCT13
dialog box again.
You can also return to the current totals by pressing the
View Current Totals button at the lower left of the screen.
A—Refresh Filter Button C—View Current Totals Button

B—Modify Custom Filter
Button
CZ76372,000015B -19-24OCT13-3/3
70-12 103113
PN=240
John Deere Section Control
Theory of Operation
• Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver
John Deere Section Control is an optional software • Display activated with Section Control
activation that can be purchased and activated on a • Capable control units
display.
Section Control utilizes the previous as-applied coverage
Section Control is an operator assistance tool that can turn and boundaries (exterior, interior, and exterior headland)
machine and implement sections on and off automatically. to determine section status.
Section Control utilizes the following components for
operation:
BA31779,00002D4 -19-15NOV11-1/1
Compatibility • Additional ISOBUS compatible implements are listed on

IMPORTANT: Section Control only functions
on vehicles and implements with To view available software and enter code to activate
compatible software. Section Control see OBTAINING ACTIVATION CODE
& ACTIVATING SOFTWARE IN DISPLAY. It is found in
• JD 4000 Series self-propelled sprayer with SprayStar Display Setup section.
version 5.11 or higher.
NOTE: A 15 hour demo activation is available on every
• All versions of SpreadStar™ new display. The 15 hours count down when
• JD Horst 700i, 800i and 5430i Sprayer (Europe Only) Section Control is activated, and the master
• All versions of Rate Controller switch is on. When the demo period is over,
• All versions of Rate Controller - Dry Section Control is unavailable until the activation
• All versions of SeedStar 2: Planters, Air Carts, and code is purchased through a John Deere Dealer,
1990CCS. (SeedStar 2 planters must be equipped with
Individual Row Unit Clutches) and entered into the display.
SpreadStar is a trademark of Deere & Company

BA31779,00002D5 -19-15NOV11-1/1
Boundaries the field if a section extends over the boundary. Similarly,

a setting of Minimize Overlap on an interior boundary
Boundaries, though optional, can be helpful when using allows driving across a waterway and helps ensure that
Section Control. Using Minimize Overlap, an exterior each section is off while crossing. See GREENSTAR
boundary can help ensure there is no application outside of GENERAL BOUNDARY section for more details.
BA31779,00002D6 -19-15NOV11-1/1
Coverage Map coverage map that is displayed on guidance pages).

See the GreenStar General - Maps Tab section of this
The As-Applied coverage map is used to show where the Operators Manual for details on Coverage Only and
vehicle has applied product. The Coverage Only is used As-Applied coverage maps.
to show where the vehicle has been in the field (same
CZ76372,000019E -19-29SEP10-1/1
Accuracy • Ensure the implements’ wear parts are in good working

condition and correctly spaced.
The overall Section Control system accuracy is dependent • Understand how field conditions and applied product
upon many variables. rate affect machine dynamics.
Section Control System Accuracy = GPS Signal Accuracy • Ensure GPS Receiver went through a warmup period
+ Machine and Implement Setup + Display Setup + Field upon start-up to ensure Section Control performance.
Conditions + Product Rate. - As the GPS Accuracy increases (SF1, SF2, and RTK),
Section Control reaction accuracy will also increase.
It is important to: - GPS shading (such as trees or buildings) affects
Section Control accuracy.
• Ensure Machine and Implement are set up properly • Ensure Section Control settings, Machine, and
(according to manufacturer's operators manual). Implement dimensions are set up properly in the display.
BA31779,00002D7 -19-15NOV11-1/1
75-1 103113
PN=241
Limitations of Section Control and off times to determine when to start and stop
applying and painting coverage map. If machine
There are limitations of Section Control to be aware of. changes speed during this time period, map and
GPS Accuracy Can Cause Map and Boundary Shifts product application may not start or stop at correct
time. It is important that speed remains constant
Boundary and coverage map location are based off an when entering and exiting headlands.
initial reference point. All other mapped points within the
coverage map are positioned relative to this reference Turning around in headland at 13 km/h (8 mph),
point. with a turn on time of 2 sec., machine travels
approximately 7.2 m (23.5 ft.) at 13 km/h (8 mph)
On start-up, system checks for existing coverage map for
in 2 seconds. If operator accelerates during this
current field. If there is existing coverage for current field,
time, machine covers this distance in less than 2
Section Control uses original reference point from existing
seconds. This causes delayed product application
coverage map. If there is no existing coverage for current
and mapping resulting in a gap.
field, then system checks for boundary for current field.
If there is a boundary, Section Control utilizes center of
- The type of end turns driven can affect Section
field boundary as reference point. If there is no boundary,
Control as well. The software can predict future
a reference point is created with first recorded point for
position of the boom relatively well during 180
current field.
degree turns, but not during light bulb turns. If light
Poor GPS accuracy can affect boundaries and coverage bulb turns are made, skips in the coverage map
maps. It is critical to have good GPS accuracy when using may be more severe when exiting headlands.
Section Control. If reference point for a Section Control 3. If gaps are still in coverage map, but product
boundary or coverage map is created with poor GPS, application is physically correct, turn on and off
boundary and coverage map issues (gaps, overlaps, or times and overlap settings may not be set correctly.
shifts) occur as GPS accuracy increases over time. Reference Turn On or Off Settings and Overlap
Settings sections for adjustments.
The same issues could be seen during field operation 4. If multiple operations are being carried out
when shading, low satellite availability, or loss of signal are simultaneously (for example, planting and applying
experienced. To minimize a map or boundary shift, good fertilizer), verify the following settings to prevent gaps
GPS accuracy is needed, especially when establishing in the coverage map.
reference point. Having Optimize Shading checked helps - Ensure section setup is similar across all operations.
prevent errors due to drastic signal level change. For example, if planting and applying fertilizer
Coverage Map and Actual Product Application Shows simultaneously and using John Deere Section
Gaps the Full Width of Boom or Implement control for both operations, ensure both operations
are configured with the same number of sections. If
If the coverage map and product application shows small planter system has six sections, configure fertilizer
gaps within the full width of the boom or implement when system to have six sections.
exiting headlands or other previous coverage with Section - Adjusting Percent Overlap in Section Control
control, do the following checks. Overlap Settings could also reduce gap issues
in multiple operation scenarios. The appropriate
1. Use latest version of GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display percent overlap depends on section configurations
software. This software ensures the most recent for each operation.
features and enhancements can be utilized.
2. Verify driving habits. Prescriptions
- Slowing down when entering headlands and rapidly
accelerating when exiting headlands increases When utilizing prescriptions, Section Control commands
severity of small gaps in coverage map. Section sections off in zero rate prescription areas.
Control looks at speed of machine and turn on
HC94949,0000422 -19-17OCT13-1/1
75-2 103113
PN=242
Required Setup • Setup data from desktop software

IMPORTANT: Some operators connect two separate NOTE: It is possible to use Section Control and display
fields into one using a “land bridge” between coverage maps with documentation turned off. See
them. Product may still be applied over this Remove, Disable, and Enable Operations section.
strip of land if Section Control is left on. To
prevent unexpected coverage, always turn Activation
Section Control or the master switch OFF
while transporting between fields. The 2630 Display requires a Section Control Activation.
Every Display has a 15 hour demo activation from the
NOTE: Documentation is recommended, but not required factory.
when operating Section Control. If a client, farm, See Display Setup > Display Software Activations section
field are selected only the coverage or as applied in this Operators Manual for details.
map for that field are displayed. When using
Headland Control a Client, Farm, Field, Field Machine and Implement Offsets are critical for Section
boundary, and Exterior Headland must be defined. Control to function properly.
It is highly recommended to physically measure the
The following items are optional when operating Section
machine and implement offsets. The entire distance from
Control:
the GPS receiver to the point that product is applied
• Client, Farm, and Field (if not selected, all coverage has to be accounted for in the machine and implement
maps are saved to undefined Client, Farm, and Field dimensions. Correct dimensions will ensure optimal
and data is not able to be saved to desktop software) Section Control performance.
• Documenting field operational data
Reference the Machine Setup and Implement Setup
• Field Boundaries
sections in this OM for complete details on how to
• As-applied Map
correctly measure the dimensions.
• Prescription
BA31779,00002D9 -19-23NOV11-1/1
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Section Control Softkey
Settings in the Section Control button are used to fine
tune Section Control for optimal performance.
MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
GREENSTAR 3 button
PC8905CC —19—24OCT13
SECTION CONTROL softkey

BA31779,00002DA -19-24OCT13-1/1
75-3 103113
PN=243
Summary
See Maps Tab in GreenStar General section of this
operator’s manual for details on buttons contained inside
the Map view.
Along with the map, the Summary screen also displays
coverage map legend (E), as-applied rates for different
operations (F), Section Control Master On/Off (G), and
Section Status bar (H).
A—Summary Tab E—Coverage Map Legend

B—View by Operation Tab F— As-applied Rates
C—Rates and Sections Tab G—Section Control Master
D—Settings Tab On/Off
PC13237CC —19—24OCT13
H—Section Status bar
Summary Screen
BA31779,00002DB -19-24OCT13-1/1
PC13243 —UN—28APR11
Section Status Bar
The Section Status bar displays different states depending
on a couple factors. The bars are colored blue if the
operation that they are connected to has liquid units (gal, Section Status Bar
L), and then are colored green if the operation has dry
units (lbs, kg, seeds).
A—Solid Box C—Outlined Box
The Status bars will also be displayed with: B—Hashed Box
• (A) a solid box when the section is enabled and turned on

• (B) a hashed box when the section is enabled by the
implement controller but not turned on
• (C) an outlined box when the section is disabled by the
implement controller
CZ76372,00002D1 -19-28APR11-1/1
75-4 103113
PN=244
View by Operation
The View by Operation tab displays similar information to
the Summary tab, but only displays one operation at a time.
Operation buttons (E) above the map are labeled and
arranged in the same manner that operation tabs are
organized in Documentation. Choose between different
operations by selecting the desired button. The currently
selected Operation button will be highlighted.
Along with the Operation button, the implement sections
for the current operation will be noted with a triangle (G)
in the Section Status bar.
PC13238CC —19—24OCT13
If the legend (F) has been selected to display rates, the
legend will be changed to a button. Select it to change the
high and low values for the legend range.
A—Summary Tab E—Operation Selection

B—View by Operation Tab buttons
C—Rates and Sections Tab F— Rate Legend
D—Settings Tab G—Section Status bar
View by Operation Tab
CZ76372,00002C8 -19-24OCT13-1/1
Rates and Sections

The Rates and Sections tab displays each operation with
the same name (E) that is displayed on the Documentation
tabs. Along with the operation name, Actual and Target
rates (F) and then the operation Sections (G) are shown.
A—Summary Tab E—Operation Name

B—View by Operation Tab F— Actual and Target Rates
C—Rates and Sections Tab G—Operation Sections
D—Settings Tab
PC13239CC —19—24OCT13
Rate and Sections Tab
CZ76372,00002C9 -19-24OCT13-1/1
75-5 103113
PN=245
Settings
Section Control Settings allow the operator to fine-tune
the settings to optimize Section Control performance.
Enable/Disable
Enable Section Control by placing a check in the Section
Control Master checkbox (E).
Individual operations can be disabled for Section
Control by removing checks in corresponding boxes.
Operations displayed are the same operations shown in
Documentation and match up with Documentation tabs.
PC14942CC —19—24OCT13
NOTE: Section Control Master and at least one operation
must be checked for Section Control to operate.
Headland Control
Check this box to turn on Headland Control (F). Uncheck
the box to turn it off. Headland Control allows Section
Control to turn on and off at the Headland Boundary to
apply product only to the main portion of the field while not
applying to the headland area. Product can be applied to
the headland with Headland Control turned off. A—Summary Tab F— Headland Control
B—View By Operation Tab Checkbox
NOTE: Headland Control is only available if Section C—Rates and Sections Tab G—Overlap Settings Button
Control is activated. Deactivating Section D—Settings Tab H—Turn On/Off Settings Button
E—Section Control Master I— Section Control Map
Control also disables Headland Control even if Checkbox Settings Button
the corresponding checkbox is still checked. If
the operator changes the field in the display,
headland control checkbox is deactivated. If
the operator wants to use headland control in
the new field, the headland control checkbox
needs to be activated again.
HC94949,0000051 -19-24OCT13-1/1
75-6 103113
PN=246
Overlap Settings
The system can be configured to operate in three modes:
• Minimize Skip
• Minimize Overlap
• Percent Overlap
Minimize Skip ensures product coverage up to field
boundaries, interior boundaries, and as applied area
reducing skips. Minimize Skip can result in over
application and is 100% overlap.
Minimize Overlap ensures that product coverage does not
extend over or out of field boundaries. It also ensures
that product coverage does not extend into an interior
PC13240CC —19—24OCT13
boundary. This setting could cause skips along field
boundaries or interior boundaries depending on the angle
a boundary is crossed. Minimize Overlap can result in
under application and is 0% overlap.
Percent Overlap allows settings from 0-125% Overlap.
Percentages between 0-100% ensures product coverage
into previous covered area or outside of field boundaries
based upon individual section widths. To achieve
increasing amounts of overlap, utilize the Percentage
Overlap between 100-125%. Each percentage point
above 100% accounts for one additional foot of overlap.
This allows the operator to achieve desired results and
prevent skips by creating intentional overlap.
NOTE: It is not recommended to utilize the Turn on and
Turn off times to achieve intentional overlap: this
may cause additional system complications.
A—Exterior Boundaries D—Interior Boundaries Percent

Drop-Down Menu Input Box
B—Exterior Boundaries E—Coverage Drop-Down Menu
Percent Input Box F— Coverage Percent Input
PC13241CC —19—24OCT13
C—Interior Boundaries Box
Drop-Down Menu
HC94949,0000052 -19-24OCT13-1/1
75-7 103113
PN=247
Turn on and Turn off Settings

Turn on time (sec.) (A): defaults to 1, but can be changed
between 0.3—15, in increments of 0.1 seconds.
Turn off time (sec.) (B): defaults to 0.6, but can be
changed between 0.3—15, in increments of 0.1 seconds.
The operator can adjust the Turn on and Turn off settings
to fit a specific machine. The Turn on and Turn off settings
are to compensate for average physical machine reaction
time (Electrical & Mechanical) for applying product. Keep
in mind that the reaction time does NOT increase as
ground speed increases. The physical reaction time
remains constant for that machine configuration. The
PC14943CC —19—24OCT13
machine travels more, or less, distance while the reaction
is taking place at different ground speeds.
NOTE: It is not recommended to utilize the Turn on and
Turn off times to achieve intentional overlap; this
overlap can cause additional system complications.
To achieve increasing amounts of overlap, utilize the
Percent Overlap between 100—125% . This overlap
allows the operator to achieve desired results and
prevent skips by creating intentional overlap.
A—Turn On Time (Sec.) B—Turn Off Time (Sec.)
The best method to determine the correct Turn on and
Turn off times is to turn on or off a section manually.
Measure the time from when the switch is actuated to drastically changing while entering or exiting a boundary or
when product starts or stops. For a sprayer, measure the previous coverage area, Section Control cannot anticipate
time from when the switch is actuated to when product that change because it estimates your Turn on and off
starts and stops reaching the crop. Enter Turn on and off position based on current position, direction, and speed.
times to the nearest 0.1 of a second.
Once a machine’s Turn on and Turn off time is determined,
If the Turn on time is set to 0.3 seconds, the command it remains the same unless a dramatic system change is
signal is sent when the system estimates the section to made to the machine. For example, a change in system
be 0.3 seconds from the boundary or uncovered area. plumbing affects the average physical machine reaction
The coverage map begins painting 0.3 seconds after the time.
command signal is sent. If the actual machine reaction
NOTE: When using multiple Section Control capable
time is 0.8 seconds, the machine travel 0.5 seconds past
control units, the Turn on or off time is most accurate
the boundary or into the uncovered area before applying.
at the primary operation (location of implement
In this situation the coverage map began painting before
offsets). All other operations are less accurate.
the actual application started, therefore the two did not
match.
Each operation can be assigned its own On and Off time.
As the Turn on time increases, the command signal Set the primary operation on/off time using the directions.
is sent earlier as the boundary or non-covered area For the secondary operations, follow the directions and
is approached. If the Turn on time is 1.0 second, the then adjust as necessary to compensate for distance
command is sent 1.0 second before the implement is from primary operation and the distance traveled by the
expected to reach the boundary or previously covered implement. Speed greatly influences these on/off times.
area. The coverage map will start painting 1.0 second Keep this in mind when adjusting the times for secondary
after the command signal is sent. Section Control expects operations.
the machine to begin applying at this time as well because
NOTE: See the “Understanding Section Control Turn
the operator entered a Turn on time of 1.0 second.
on and Turn off Settings” later in this section
The more constant the ground speed is kept when entering for examples of Turn on and off times when
or exiting boundary or previous coverage area, the more multiple applications exist.
accurate Section Control is. If the machine speed is
HC94949,0000053 -19-24OCT13-1/1
75-8 103113
PN=248
Section Control Map Settings

The Map Settings button allows operator to configure
background and foreground map layers for summary
coverage map (A) and for each operation controlled by
Section Control (B). The operator can view the background
and foreground mapping operation through the View By
Operation tab within the Section Control softkey.
NOTE: The Section Control softkey can be configured as
a window in the Layout Manager. The operator can
use the Layout Manager to scroll through different
operation maps quickly in the View by Operation tab.
A—Background and B—Section Control Operation
PC14944CC —19—24OCT13
Foreground Map Layers
PC14945CC —19—24OCT13
HC94949,0000050 -19-24OCT13-1/1
75-9 103113
PN=249
Enabling
Enabling The System for a Seeding Operation • Master Implement Switch is on.
ALL of the following are required for Section Control to
• Section Control Master and at least one Operation
checked.
function:
• Speed is greater than 0.8 km/h (0.5 mph).
• The implement must be lowered into the ground. • Vehicle is within 7.64 km (4.75 miles) of the field
• Section switches are on. reference point. Refer to Limitations of Section Control
• Master Implement switch must be on. section for more information about reference points.
• Section Control Master and at least one Operation NOTE: If IBS (Index Boom Section) or a boom section
checked. switch has turned off a section, Section Control
• Vehicle speed must be greater than 0 km/h (0 mph) for does not turn it on. If Section Control has turned
all planting and seeding operations. off a section, IBS does not turn it back on.
• Vehicle is within 7.64 km (4.75 miles) of the field
reference point. Refer to Limitations of Section Control
section for more information about reference points.
Enabling the System for Non-Deere ISO Implements
(Europe Only)
Enabling the System for a Product Application
Operation
• Section Control check box is checked
• Implement is set up correctly according to the implement
ALL of the following are required for Section Control to manufactures Operator Manual.
function:
• Section Switches are on.
BA31779,00002DE -19-15NOV11-1/1
75-10 103113
PN=250
Understand Section Control Turn On and Turn Off Settings
Sprayers
Air Seeders
NOTE: Turn on and off times in examples in this section are
not true for every machine. Determine turn on and Air seeders average 6–13 km/h (4–8 mph) while seeding
turn off times for particular machine and implement. and have longer delay times (2–6 sec.). Largest delay
time is usually from the time the product leaves meter,
Section Control operates based on drop point and travels through air system, and reaches soil. Air carts
turn on and off time of primary function. set turn on and off times depending on air seeding tool
configuration and product being applied. Smaller tools
At 24 km/h (16 mph) in a self-propelled sprayer, the usually have lower turn on and off times, while larger tools
average physical reaction time of the system (turn off may require larger turn on and off times.
command at multifunction control handle, boom valve
reacts and turns off, liquid flows out of boom freely until Determining correct turn on and off time for air cart
check valve pressure is met) is 2.5 seconds. Liquid operations may be different from other operations due to
continues to fall to crop canopy past 2.5 seconds. Physical mechanics of air cart system. First carry out machine and
overall operational reaction time could be approximately 3 implement offset measurements.
seconds. To determine initial turn on or off time for each meter, use
To determine turn on time for sprayer, press master on a stop watch to perform the following measurements.
switch and measure amount of time until product hits the 1. Turn on fan.
crop. To determine turn off time, shut master off switch,
and measure amount of time until product stops flowing. 2. Open half-width disconnects.
Liquid handling system takes longer to react when turn on 3. Utilize calibration switch to rotate meters
than turning off due to liquid pressure differentials. Turn
For turn on time, measure time it takes from when switch
on time is often slightly greater than turn off time. Ground
is activated to when product exits openers at the outside
speed only affects distance traveled while machine
of implement. For turn off time, measure the time it takes
reaction delay is taking place. Also, distance traveled
from when switch is activated to when product exits
varies between turn on and off times and from operator
openers at center of machine.
to operator.
If a tool has multiple operations on separate ranks, such as
Planters
separate fertilizer placement, adjust turn on or off times to
Planters average 6—12 km/h (4—7 mph) while planting account for distance between ranks. Section Control maps
and have minimal machine electrical clutch reaction delay to rear rank on tool. To adjust for time on a separate rank,
times (under 0.8 sec. usually). Largest delay time is such as the front rank of a separate fertilizer placement
usually from the time the seed leaves the meter disk, tool, increase turn on time by the time it takes tool to travel
travels in seed tube, and reaches soil. At a 10 km/h (6 the same distance as the spacing between ranks.
mph) planting speed, planters travel 2.8 m (8.8 ft.) in
For example, if distance between front and rear rank is
1 second. Travel distance is 280 mm (10.5 in.) every
1.5 m (5 ft.) and traveling 5 mph (7.3 fps), increase turn
one-tenth of a second. For example, entire seed delay
on or off time for front rank operation by 0.7 sec. (5 ft./7.3
time from switch being selected in cab, clutch stops, seed
fps = 0.7 sec.) for operation.
meter stops, and all seed has reached soil; time elapsed
0.8 seconds. To change 0.3—0.8 sec. on look ahead Speed affects adjustment. For example, when traveling
time dramatically changes location of seed placement 13 km/h (8 mph) instead of 8 km/h (5 mph), decrease time
when turning on or off. On average, row-crop planters by 0.4 sec. instead of 0.7 seconds.
generally set a turn off time to 0.3 seconds and a turn on
time between 0.5—1.0 seconds.
75-11 103113
PN=251
To fine-tune on or off times, create scratch path in field. enough coverage to determine accurate turn on and off
When creating scratch path, push half width disconnects times. Turn meters and half widths on. Apply product
up to cut off flow of product. Lower tool to engage perpendicular of scratch paths for visual verification of
drives and documentation recording to create coverage when it starts and stops applying product once master
(paint) in coverage map on display. Scratch path should switch is triggered. See diagrams.
be at least twice as wide as implement width to allow
PC17850 —UN—18OCT13
PC17849 —UN—15OCT13
Single Rank
Primary Rows
A—Primary Rows D—Desired Product Rate

B—Zero Product E—Ideal Target for Turning Off
C—Reduced Product Rate F— Ideal Target Line for Turning
On
PC17851 —UN—18OCT13
Double Rank
PC17852 —UN—18OCT13
Triple Rank
HC94949,0000423 -19-25OCT13-2/2
75-12 103113
PN=252
Diagnostic Readings
Select GREENSTAR 3 > DIAGNOSTIC > SECTION
CONTROL
Read the latest Operator Manual before operation.
To obtain a copy, see your dealer or visit
• (A) View drop down box – Indicates the type of
diagnostics information currently being viewed.
• (B) Status – Indicates the current Section Control status.
- Waiting – No Section Control compatible implement
connected to the system
- Initializing – System is initializing
- Loading bitmap center – System is loading center
PC14946CC —19—24OCT13
point from Bitmap
- Loading bnd center – System is loading center point
from Boundary map
- Defining field center – System is defining center point.
No defined field boundary or previous coverage
- Loading boundaries – System is loading field
boundaries
- Operating – System is being operated.
- Suspended (No GPS) – System does not have GPS
signal • (G) Master Section Control Enabled – Indicates a status
• (C) License – Indicates an active Section Control of the Master Section Control checkbox.
license on the display. - Yes – Enabled
- Activated – The Section Control license is activated. - No – Disabled
- Not Activated – The Section Control License is not • (H) No. of Boundaries – Indicates the number of
activated. boundaries usable by Section Control for the current
• (D) No. of Operations - Indicates the number of field.
operations that are Section Control capable. • (I) Distance from Reference Point (ft.) – Indicates the
• (E) Master Turn On Time (sec.) – Indicates the turn on distance the machine is from field reference.
time which is the largest among the 1-4 operation turn • (J) Memory Usage (%) – Indicates the % of memory
on times. used.
• (F) Master Turn Off Time (sec.) – Indicates the turn off
time which is the largest among the 1-4 operation turn
off times.
75-13 103113
PN=253
• (A) View drop down box – Indicates the type of

diagnostics information currently being viewed.
• (B) Operation Drop down box – Indicates the operation
for the diagnostic information currently being viewed.
• (C) Controller – Indicates the controller responsible for
selected Operation.
• (D) Section Control Capable – Indicates Controller is a
Section Control Capable Controller.
• (E) Section Control Enabled – Indicates the status of
the selected Operation Section Control checkbox.
- Yes – Enabled
- No – Disabled
• (F) Operation Turn on Time (sec.) – Indicates the turn
on time for the selected operation.
PC14947CC —19—24OCT13
• (G) Operation Turn off Time (sec.) – Indicates the turn
off time for the selected operation.
• (H) Primary Section Controller – Indicates the selection
is the primary operation.
• (I) No. of Sections – Indicates the number of sections
for the selected operation.
• (J) Section Control Command – Indicates the current
command for each section.
• (K) Section Command Legend – Defines the numbers
in the Section Control Command Section. - 4– Over Previous Coverage
- 0 – Off - 5 – Prescription Rate Bellow Minimum
- 1 – On - 6 – Speed Rate Below Minimum
- 2 – Outside Exterior Boundary - 7 – Undefined
- 3 – Inside Interior Boundary
HC94949,0000055 -19-24OCT13-2/2
75-14 103113
PN=254
Section Control Settings Quick Sheet—Metric

Physical machine reaction Distance traveled at given Distance traveled per GPS
Constant Ground Speed delay time speed and time update
(km/h) (seconds) (meters) (meters)
3 1 0.83 0.17
3 2 1.67 0.17
3 3 2.50 0.17
3 4 3.33 0.17
3 5 4.17 0.17
3 10 8.33 0.17
6 1 1.67 0.33
6 2 3.33 0.33
6 3 5.00 0.33
6 4 6.67 0.33
6 5 8.33 0.33
6 10 16.67 0.33
9 1 2.50 0.50
9 2 5.00 0.50
9 3 7.50 0.50
9 4 10.00 0.50
9 5 12.50 0.50
9 10 25.00 0.50
12 1 3.33 0.67
12 2 6.67 0.67
12 3 10.00 0.67
12 4 13.33 0.67
12 5 16.67 0.67
12 10 33.33 0.67
15 1 4.17 0.83
15 2 8.33 0.83
15 3 12.50 0.83
15 4 16.67 0.83
15 5 20.83 0.83
15 10 41.67 0.83
18 1 5.00 1.00
18 2 10.00 1.00
18 3 15.00 1.00
18 4 20.00 1.00
18 5 25.00 1.00
18 10 50.00 1.00
21 1 5.83 1.17
21 2 11.67 1.17
21 3 17.50 1.17
21 4 23.33 1.17
21 5 29.17 1.17
21 10 58.33 1.17
24 1 6.67 1.33
24 2 13.33 1.33
24 3 20.00 1.33
24 4 26.67 1.33
24 5 33.33 1.33
24 10 66.67 1.33
27 1 7.50 1.50
Continued on next page BA31779,00002E1 -19-15NOV11-1/2
75-15 103113
PN=255
(km/h) (seconds) (meters) (meters)
27 2 15.00 1.50
27 3 22.50 1.50
27 4 30.00 1.50
27 5 37.50 1.50
27 10 75.00 1.50
30 1 8.33 1.67
30 2 16.67 1.67
30 3 25.00 1.67
30 4 33.33 1.67
30 5 41.67 1.67
30 10 83.33 1.67
BA31779,00002E1 -19-15NOV11-2/2
75-16 103113
PN=256
Section Control Settings Quick Sheet—SAE

(mph) (seconds) (feet) (inches)
2 1 2.93 7.04
2 2 5.87 7.04
2 3 8.80 7.04
2 4 11.73 7.04
2 5 14.67 7.04
2 10 29.33 7.04
4 1 5.87 14.08
4 2 11.73 14.08
4 3 17.60 14.08
4 4 23.47 14.08
4 5 29.33 14.08
4 10 58.67 14.08
6 1 8.80 21.12
6 2 17.60 21.12
6 3 26.40 21.12
6 4 35.20 21.12
6 5 44.00 21.12
6 10 88.00 21.12
8 1 11.73 28.16
8 2 23.47 28.16
8 3 35.20 28.16
8 4 46.93 28.16
8 5 58.67 28.16
8 10 117.33 28.16
10 1 14.67 35.20
10 2 29.33 35.20
10 3 44.00 35.20
10 4 58.67 35.20
10 5 73.33 35.20
10 10 146.67 35.20
12 1 17.60 42.24
12 2 35.20 42.24
12 3 52.80 42.24
12 4 70.40 42.24
12 5 88.00 42.24
12 10 176.00 42.24
14 1 20.53 49.28
14 2 41.07 49.28
14 3 61.60 49.28
14 4 82.13 49.28
14 5 102.67 49.28
14 10 205.33 49.28
16 1 23.47 56.32
16 2 46.93 56.32
16 3 70.40 56.32
16 4 93.87 56.32
16 5 117.33 56.32
16 10 234.67 56.32
18 1 26.40 63.36
75-17 103113
PN=257
(mph) (seconds) (feet) (inches)
18 2 52.80 63.36
18 3 79.20 63.36
18 4 105.60 63.36
18 5 132.00 63.36
18 10 264.00 63.36
20 1 29.33 70.40
20 2 58.67 70.40
20 3 88.00 70.40
20 4 117.33 70.40
20 5 146.67 70.40
20 10 293.33 70.40
BA31779,00002E2 -19-15NOV11-2/2
75-18 103113
PN=258
CANBUS
CANBUS Theory of Operation
PC16933 —UN—13MAY13
Tractor CANBUS
The CANBUS (Controller Area Network) system is a vital with each other using the CANBUS system. Think of this
component to the operation of AMS equipment. CANBUS as the Interstate Highway system with cars constantly
is a harness that runs from the front of the machine to moving up and down the system.
the rear. All controllers on the machine communicate
Continued on next page RW00482,000018D -19-16MAY13-1/7
80-1 103113
PN=259
CANBUS
PC16930 —UN—10MAY13
CANBUS Overview
A—Controller 1 D—Branch Line G—Active Terminator
B—Controller 2 E—Passive Terminator H—Keyed power supply from
C—Controller 3 F— Main Line machine
A sample CANBUS system is shown. In this system, • The other four wires are the twisted quad CANBUS
there is an active terminator, a passive terminator and wires. They are what transfer and protect the data
3 controllers. between controllers.
- The red and black wires are power and ground to
The active terminator has 6 wires (2 reds, 2 blacks, a provide magnetic shielding of the CAN high and CAN
yellow and a green). low wires (green and yellow).
• One red wire and one black wire are a power and - The green and yellow wires are CAN Hi and CAN
ground Input from the machine. These are the power Lo. They are the two wires that carry the messages
supply for the CANBUS. between the controllers.
80-2 103113
PN=260
CANBUS
PC16934 —UN—13MAY13
PC16935 —UN—13MAY13
No messages on CANBUS
Messages sent on CANBUS
CAN High and CAN Low wires transmit data, or • The red and black wires go up to the controller but do
messages, on BUS using binary code. (0 means Power not go into the controller. These wires provide magnetic
On and 1 means Power off. Voltage of both CAN Hi and shielding up to the controller in the branch.
CAN Low is 2.5V if there are no messages on the BUS.
The Main Line of the CANBUS is the four wires going from
If a message is sent, CAN High increases 1 V and CAN the active terminator to the passive terminator. Think of
Low decreases by 1 V during the time the bit is sent. this like the main Interstate.
Each controller has 2 CANBUS wires going into it. The Branch Lines of the CANBUS are the wires coming
off the Main line and going to each controller. Think of this
• These are the green and yellow wires (CAN Hi and like an exit ramp off the Interstate.
CAN Lo). Only the green and yellow wires carry the
messages.
80-3 103113
PN=261
CANBUS
Twisted Quad Cable

The twisted quad CANBUS wire has 4 wires twisted
together inside a black heat shrink. It is a non-shielded
PC16932 —UN—10MAY13
wire. Instead of having a physical shield, the CANBUS
uses a magnetic shield. The red wire is a 12 volt wire that
sends current from one end of the CANBUS (the Active
Terminator) to the other end of the CANBUS (the Passive
Terminator). Since all 4 wires are twisted together, the red
wire’s magnetic field has good coverage over the other
three wires. This magnetic field makes it hard for outside Twisted Quad Cable
magnetic forces to penetrate the CANBUS and appear as
bogus or “garbage” messages.
A—Pin E goes to Yellow Wire C—Yellow Wire goes to Pin E
NOTE: Shielding is used to keep electrical current (C) (A)
B—Pin F goes to Green Wire (D) D—Green Wire goes to Pin F (B)
from passing between two wires laying side by
side but not physically touching. This is known
as electromagnetic induction (EMI).
operate without a Passive terminator. Both the
active and passive terminator have the same part
The Yellow wire is CAN Hi (think of the color of the sun
number. Because of this, they are swappable and
high in the sky) and plugs into Pin E on the terminator.
are great for diagnostics. If you think you have
The Green wire is CAN Lo (think of the color of the
a failed terminator, you can remove one or swap
grass that is low) and plugs into Pin F on the terminator.
them and see if that fixes the problem.
Resistance between these two pins is approximately 120
Ohms. Since there are two terminating resistors on the
Passive Terminator
CANBUS, the resistance between the yellow and green
wire should be 60 Ohms on a working system. The Passive Terminator is at the very end of the CANBUS.
It must be the last node on the opposite end as the Active
Active Terminator
Terminator on the CANBUS. The Passive Terminator is
The Active Terminator is where the CANBUS starts. It responsible for:
contains six wires and feeds the CANBUS system from
battery power. It makes sure CAN Power is always 12V. • Regulating voltages in the CAN Hi and CAN Lo wires
The Active Terminator is responsible for the following • Terminating messages
actions: NOTE: The Active Terminator must be in the system for
the CANBUS to work. However, the CANBUS can
• Powering up the CANBUS (Sending current out to the
operate without a Passive terminator. Both the
red wire to provide the magnetic shield and to power
active and passive terminator have the same part
up the passive terminator).
number. Because of this, they are swappable and
• Regulating voltages in the CAN Hi and CAN Lo wires
are great for diagnostics. If you think you have
• Terminating messages.
a failed terminator, you can remove one or swap
NOTE: The Active Terminator must be in the system for them and see if that fixes the problem.
the CANBUS to work. However, the CANBUS can
80-4 103113
PN=262
CANBUS
PC16936 —UN—14MAY13
Vehicle CANBUS vs Implement CANBUS on a Tractor
A—Engine D—Hitch F— GPS
B—SCV’s E—Passive Terminator G—Virtual Terminal
C—Transmission H—IBBC (Active Terminator)
Vehicle CANBUS vs. Implement CANBUS on a Tractor connect the GPS receiver, the display (VT), and the ISO
connector (IBBC) in the rear of the tractor.
A vehicle CANBUS on a tractor connects the engine in the
front of the tractor with the transmission and hydraulics NOTE: The Implement CANBUS on a tractor is commonly
in the rear of the tractor and enables communication referred to as the ISOBUS.
between them. An Implement CANBUS on a tractor would
80-5 103113
PN=263
CANBUS
PC16941 —UN—15MAY13
Extension of CANBUS to Implement
A—Passive Terminator C—GPS E—ISOBUS Plug-in G—Active Terminator
B—TECU D—Virtual Terminal F— Sensor
Extension of the CANBUS to an attached Implement implement and tractor communicating over the same
CANBUS system.
The ISOBUS can extend the tractor implement CANBUS
to the implement attached. This extension results in the
80-6 103113
PN=264
CANBUS
PC16937 —UN—14MAY13
Communication on the CANBUS
A—I am a display. Is there an D—I have opened all five of my
implement attached? sections and I have started
B—Yes I am a pull behind sprayer. spraying my chemical.
I have five sections that can E—We are approaching a
turn on or off. waterway and we need to turn
C—I can display those five off sections 4 and 5 but leave
sections to the operator and sections 1, 2 and 3 open to
utilize Section Control to spray.
determine when to turn each
section on and off. We have
now entered a field that hasn’t
been sprayed and the five
sections need to be opened.
Communication on the CANBUS 2. (B) - Yes I am a pull behind sprayer. I have five
sections that can turn on or off.
The tractor and implement are able to communicate back 3. (C) - I can display those five sections to the operator
and forth by messages transmitted on the CANBUS. and utilize Section Control to determine when to turn
Messages would include loading the graphic user each section on and off. We have now entered a field
interface, such as section control commands, to the that hasn’t been sprayed and the five sections need
2630 display. Another message from the implement to be opened.
communicated to the display would be application rates 4. (D) - I have opened all five of my sections and I have
from a pull behind sprayer. started spraying my chemical.
An example would be a pull behind sprayer hooked up to 5. (E) - We are approaching a waterway and we need to
a tractor. The conversation would be as follows: turn off sections 4 and 5 but leave sections 1, 2 and 3
open to spray.
1. (A) - I am a display. Is there an implement attached?
RW00482,000018D -19-16MAY13-7/7
80-7 103113
PN=265
CANBUS
ISOBUS Virtual Terminal and Virtual

Virtual Terminal (VT) is a part of the software for John
Implement Theory of Operation Deere GreenStar 3 2630 displays. VT is a standardized
Virtual Terminal display for all controller and implements on the BUS. John
Deere Virtual Terminal offers a size of 640 x 480 pixels.
PC16921 —UN—08MAY13
JD Sprayer 962i (Virtual Implement) and 2630 Display (Virtual Display) Example
The implement loads its graphic user interface, also in the example of the VI of a John Deere 962i Sprayer into
referred to as Virtual Implement (VI), into the VT as shown a 2630 display.
RW00482,000018E -19-24OCT13-1/5
PC17342 —UN—24OCT13
When the VI Gets loaded into the 2630 display, a status
bar will display how far the upload has progressed.
Once the VI has been loaded into the display, it will be
saved in the Displays internal memory. When the display
detects the same implement again (for example after
shutdown or disconnection) the display will load the VI out
of its internal memory and display it.
VT is comparable to a monitor on personal computers. It Status Bar
displays information processed by a control unit on the
implement. This means that all pages shown in the VT
(implement icon on main menu) are neither controller nor Since the VT is just displaying the VI, frozen VI pages
handled by the 2630 software. are most likely to be caused by an overloaded implement
control unit.
Virtual Implement
VI retrieves input from operator and controls the
VT displays the Virtual Implement (VI) of the implements implement. Pressing a button causes the implement
connected to the tractor CANBUS. VI is the graphic user controller to perform a specific movement of the
interface of the implement. While the actual implement implement, such as opening a section.
being utilized is located at the rear of the machine, its
user interface, the virtual part of the implement or VI, is
located on the display.
Continued on next page RW00482,000018E -19-24OCT13-2/5
80-8 103113
PN=266
CANBUS
PC16926CC —19—24OCT13
John Deere 2630 Display with multiple VIs
NOTE: The John Deere 2630 Display can display

multiple VI’s at the same time.
RW00482,000018E -19-24OCT13-3/5
PC17342 —UN—24OCT13
To verify if the Virtual Implement and Virtual Terminal are
compatible, complete the following steps:
1. Plug implement into ISO connector.
2. Select Main menu.
3. Check status bar of implement (GS3 2630 display
only).
Status Bar
80-9 103113
PN=267
CANBUS
4. Check for ISOBUS conformance stickers on

implement.
PC16924 —UN—08MAY13
Conformance Sticker
RW00482,000018E -19-24OCT13-5/5
80-10 103113
PN=268
ISO Implements
Implement Detected Warning
ISOBUS implement. For more information, see READ
OPERATOR MANUALS FOR ISOBUS IMPLEMENTS in
the Safety section.
PC13149 —19—17FEB11
RN38933,0000137 -19-21SEP11-1/1
Operating ISO Implement

IMPORTANT: Before using display to control ISOBUS to use. When used with ISOBUS implements,
implements, read operator manual provided by information and control functions placed on this
implement manufacturer and observe all safety display are provided by implement and are the
messages in manual and on implement prior responsibility of implement manufacturer.
OUO6050,0002316 -19-06OCT08-1/1
85-1 103113
PN=269
ISO Implements
ISO Implements
The John Deere GreenStar 3 2630 display supports
ISOBUS 11783 compliant implements. These implements
can be displayed and operated with this display. A
standardized connector in the back of the tractor allows
the connection of such implements. An ISO compliant
implement is always equipped with a ISO connector (A)
that fits into the ISO Plug-in (B). ISOBUS implements may
support the Aux Control functionality (See Aux Control
section for more details).
See ISOBUS User guide on Stellarsupport.com, to find
out more about ISO specific connectors and Plugs.
A—ISO Connector (IBBC) B—ISO Plug-in (IBBP)
PC16901 —UN—14MAY13
PC16900 —UN—14MAY13
Continued on next page RW00482,000016A -19-14MAY13-1/3
85-2 103113
PN=270
ISO Implements
Task Controller
Task Controller (TC) is a part of the software of a John
Deere 2630 display.
As described by its name, TC controls one or several of
the following tasks:
• John Deere section control
• Map-based prescriptions
• Documentation
PC13246 —UN—15APR11
Task Controller supports communication with some
IOSBUS compliant implements. Communication depends
on software compatibility between display and implement.
Once the implement communicates with Task Controller
on the Display, implement type will be grayed out and
recording source will be set to auto.
Raven Direct Injection
NOTE: The current Task Controller implementation is
limited to certain machines. It can only communicate source, target and actual rate parameters are
with one implement at a time. set automatically with Task controller based
Implement width, sections, operation type, on the ISO implement.
implement type, machine type, recording
RW00482,000016A -19-14MAY13-2/3
Virtual Terminal and Virtual Implement

Virtual Terminal (VT) is a part of John Deere GreenStar
2 and GreenStar 3 display software.
• VT is a standardized display for all controller and
implements on the BUS. John Deere Virtual Terminal
offers a size of 640 x 480 pixels.
• The implement loads its graphic user interface, also
referred to as Virtual Implement (VI), into the VT as
PC13245 —UN—15APR11
indicated. Example: The VI of a John Deere Sprayer is
displayed by a 2630.
• When VI gets loaded into the 2630 display, a status bar
will show how far the upload has progressed.
• VT is comparable to a monitor on personal computers,
which displays information processed by a control unit
on the implement. This means that all pages shown
in the VT (implement icon on main menu) are neither John Deere Pull-type Sprayer Menu
controlled nor handled by the 2630 Software.
machine functions like tank volume, boom sections, spray
rate control, etc. See specific product Operator’s Manual
The John Deere pull-type sprayer presents its information for details.
as shown. The VI allows the control and setup of all
RW00482,000016A -19-14MAY13-3/3
85-3 103113
PN=271
ISO Implements
Multiple ISO Implements

The 2630 is only able to communicate with one implement
connected through CANBUS/ISOBUS at a time.
Implement data will displayed if Task Controller can
communicate with the implement correctly. Task Controller
can also send data back to the implement such as target
rate or section ON/OFF commands.
Data that may be displayed:
• Unique identifier of the implement (ISO CAN name), will
be shown as implement name
• Implement type
• Turn ON/OFF times for section control
PC13660CC —19—24OCT13
• Offsets/dimensions of implement
• Implement GPS receiver offsets
• Physical width
• Implement width
• In ground turn radius/turn radius
• Track spacing
• Connection type (not transferred to APEX)
Too Many Implements Detected
If two ISO implements are connected, the operator PC13661 —UN—06DEC11
will need to select which implement the display will
communicate with.
The other implement will load its user interface, but section
control, application rate, and John Deere Implement
detection will not be supported.
Select the preferred implement from the drop down (A).
Implement Selection Drop Down
RW00482,000017F -19-24OCT13-1/1
85-4 103113
PN=272
ISO Implements
Softkeys
64 Softkeys (VT)
The 2630 display can support up to 64 VI soft keys for an
implement. (See the VI/VT section for more information.)
The display provides a means for the operator to navigate
and select defined softkeys, depending on available
controller functions of the ISOBUS implement.
Softkey E and Softkey J
Depending on the controller and available functions of
the ISOBUS implement, the user can navigate to the
next/previous set of softkeys by using the arrow softkeys
E and J.
PC13265 —UN—28APR11
Softkey Mask
RW00482,0000180 -19-24MAY13-1/1
Data Cleanup
Data cleanup function removes controller VI graphic
files from the display. This can be done in case the
implement's user interface does not show up anymore
or if it does not show up correctly. The cleanup forces
the implement controller to send its data to the display
again after a restart.
Select MENU > MESSAGE CENTER > CLEANUP.
PC13663CC —19—24OCT13
Check the box for the data to be removed and then press
Begin Cleanup.
After a restart, the controller will display a bar graph in the
main menu until the user interface is reloaded.
A—Controllers Checkbox B—Begin Cleanup Button

Data Cleanup
RW00482,0000196 -19-24OCT13-1/1
85-5 103113
PN=273
Theory of Operation
As any ISO implement is connected to a machine for
the first time, data (such as implement type, model,
name, offsets, and widths) from the implement controller
is loaded and saved to displays internal memory. Any
changes made on display to implement data will be
saved to displays internal memory and sent to implement
controller to replace existing data. If the same implement
gets connected to the same display, the display will
recognize the implement and load the implement data
from the displays memory. If display recognizes the
implement data does not match data on the display it will
load implement data from the implement controller.
PC14108CC —19—24OCT13
NOTE: When an implement gets auto detected, only
adjust implement settings (implement model,
name, turn ON/OFF times, widths, turn radius,
track spacing, and connection type) when
implement is connected to display.
As an ISO implement is connected to a machine, a

message (as shown on the right) will inform you that data Implement Detection Information Screen
has been loaded either from the implement or from the
display. The implement detection message indicates that
Task Controller communication is active.
RW00482,0000194 -19-24OCT13-1/1
Implement Detection • Create a new implement name to store data from the
implement with the newly created name.
ISO implement sends a unique identifier to the 2630
Display each time the implement is connected. This NOTE: A new name should only be created when
unique identifier shows up as the implement name implement is actually connected. Otherwise,
in: → GreenStar → Equipment → Implement Tab. assignment of implement data will not work.
It distinguishes the connected implement from other
implements. Implement Detection – Reconnected
Implement Detection – First Connection If an implement has been connected to the display before,
the display will recognize the unique identifier. The
Display will load implement data (such as widths, offsets, machine will then load data from displays internal memory
connection type, and turn on/off times) from the implement unless display recognizes implement data has changed.
memory into the display memory, when it detects a unique This means that all data the customer has entered for this
identifier for the first time. Once the new implement has specific implement name, (such as connection type, turn
been detected the operator can: on/off times, track spacing, physical widths, etc.), will be
• Use implement with the new unique identifier without displayed correctly.
making data changes. NOTE: If implement data is not correctly stored on
• Change implement data to an existing name to assign the implement controller, then the 2630 display
implement data stored on the 2630 display to the will not be able to upload or show correct data.
connected implement. John Deere highly recommends verifying values
NOTE: An existing name should only be selected on equipment setup pages (Menu, GreenStar,
when the implement is connected. Otherwise the Equipment, and Implement Tab).
assignment of the implement data will not work.
RW00482,0000181 -19-06JUN13-1/1
90-1 103113
PN=274
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
GreenStar Equipment Settings
Select MENU >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO >> EQUIPMENT
for access to MACHINE and IMPLEMENT setup screens.
MENU Softkey
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
GREENSTAR 3 PRO Button

PC8677CC —19—24OCT13
EQUIPMENT Softkey
RW00482,0000182 -19-24OCT13-1/5
Machine type (A) will be set to tractor and can not be

changed. Connection type will auto populate.
NOTE: Only data that is provided by the implement
can be displayed. For example if connection
type is not provided, it can not be changed.
Grayed out machine type indicates that task
controller communication is active.
A—Machine Type
PC14109CC —19—24OCT13
Machine Setup Page
Continued on next page RW00482,0000182 -19-24OCT13-2/5
90-2 103113
PN=275
Information provided by implement controller that can not

be changed:
• Implement Type
NOTE: Grayed out implement type indicates task
controller communication is active.
Information that can be transferred from implement to

2630 Display that can be changed:
• Implement model
• Unique identifier of the implement, which will be shown
as implement name
• Turn ON/OFF times for Section Control
PC14110CC —19—24OCT13
• Offsets/dimensions of the implement
• Physical width
• Implement width
• In ground turn radius
• Track spacing
• Connection type (will not be transferred to APEX)
Only data that is provided by the implement can be Implement Setup Page
displayed. For example if physical width is not provided, it
can not be set.
A—Implement Type D—Change Offsets
Implement name has to be set, otherwise any changes to B—Implement Model E—Change Widths
implement settings (such as width or turn radius) will NOT C—Implement Name
be saved. Implement Name must be entered if implement
model is changed.
Contact manufacturer of implement to find out what data
NOTE: Only change auto-detected implement values
the implement can transmit to 2630 display.
when the implement is connected to the 2630 display.
90-3 103113
PN=276
PC14111CC —19—24OCT13
Offsets provided by the implement controller can be viewed
and changed by selecting the Change Offsets button.
NOTE: Depending on the information the implement
controller sends to the display, the offsets
may or may not be set. CHANGE OFFSETS
Only change auto-detected implement values when

the implement is connected to the 2630 display.
PC14112CC —19—24OCT13
90-4 103113
PN=277
PC14113CC —19—24OCT13
“Implement width” is always loaded from the implement
controller and can not be changed on the display.
CHANGE WIDTHS
PC14114CC —19—24OCT13
RW00482,0000182 -19-24OCT13-5/5
90-5 103113
PN=278
Implement Offsets and Widths 1. Data is entered and stored on the display. Implement
Connect implement to 2630 Display prior to finishing controller accepts data changed on display and saves
setup in 2630 display. After implement is connected to data to its internal memory. Implement controller will
2630 display select: Menu → GreenStar → Resources → send updated values to every display which gets
Task (add picture 2) select implement name in: Menu → connected.
GreenStar → Equipment → Implement Tab. Enter offsets 2. Data is entered and stored on display. Implement
and other machine data. controller does not accept data changed on display
and does not overwrite original values. Implement
Once implement name has been selected while implement controller will send original values to any display at
is connected, implement name will be assigned to first connection although the offsets or widths may be
the unique identifier. Now every time implement is incorrect.
reconnected to this display, it will show the correct
implement name and offsets
Implement provides incorrect offsets or widths. Offsets or widths are changed on the implement
controller user interface after first connection.
In case implement does not provide correct offsets or
widths: Data is entered and stored on implement controller.
• Download offsets for John Deere implements from GSD There are two possibilities:
net database or measure offsets manually.
1. Offsets will be loaded from implement controller if
• For Non-Deere implements contact manufacturer for
controller communicates that its data has changed.
offsets or measure offsets manually.
2. Offsets will not be loaded from implement controller if
NOTE: Refer to Measuring Offsets User Guide on controller does not communicates that its data has
StellarSupport.deere.com for more information changed.
on how to measure offsets.
NOTE: John Deere highly recommends that the
user verifies implement data on implement’s
Offsets or widths are changed on the 2630 display
user Interface after values have been
equipment setup page after first connection.
changed on the display.
There are two possibilities:
RW00482,0000183 -19-24MAY13-1/1
90-6 103113
PN=279
Implement Detection and APEX

NOTE: APEX is farm management software that has
additional functions other than documentation, like
exporting implement data. APEX is not available
in all countries. To check APEX availability for
purchase, contact your John Deere Dealer.
In case APEX exports data such as implement data or

task templates from desktop computer to the 2630 display,
follow the steps:
1. Connect implement to 2630 display.
2. Import data from Apex to 2630 display.
PC16992CC —19—24OCT13
3. Select task template in: Menu → GreenStar (A) →
Resources → Task (B).
4. Select implement name in: Menu → GreenStar →
Equipment → Implement Tab (C).
5. Enter offsets and other machine data.
6. Export data from 2630 Display to a USB drive.
7. Import data from USB drive into APEX.
APEX will store the unique identifier with the implement
data. Once an implement profile has been set, always use
implement name defined in 2630 display for data transfer.
See Theory of Operation in the John Deere Implement
Detection section of this manual for more information
about the unique identifier.
A—Resources Tab C—Implement Tab

B—Task Drop-Down Menu
PC16997CC —19—24OCT13
RW00482,0000185 -19-24OCT13-1/1
90-7 103113
PN=280
Theory of Operation Modular Telematics Gateway (MTG) hardware, a current
JDLink subscription that includes Remote Display Access,
NOTE: The following functionality may not be available and an Ethernet cable to connect the display to the MTG.
in all countries at time of publication.
From a remote computer or a mobile device, operators
John Deere Remote Display Access (RDA) enables are able to log in to MyJohnDeere.com and select the
JDLink™ operator to view the operating GreenStar™ 3 machine that they would like to view. Selecting Remote
2630 display from a remote location. With this feature, Display Access for that piece of equipment provides
you will be able to assist the operator efficiently in making access to the display in the cab. The operator’s view of
changes within the display regarding setup, optimization, the GreenStar 3 2630 display data will be sent through the
and troubleshooting. ethernet cable to the MTG, and from the MTG to the John
Deere communications network via the wireless cellular
How it Works data connection. The display information is then passed
Remote Display Access uses a communications along to the users computer through the internet. The
modem/controller (MTG), cellular antenna, and Ethernet machine’s GreenStar display can then be viewed by the
cable installed in a machine to send images of display remote operator, and cell phone or radio communication
screen changes to a web browser. can be made to make necessary adjustments to the
operator’s John Deere display.
Easy to use and understand
To use John Deere Remote Display Access, the
equipment must have a GreenStar 3 2630 display, JDLink
JDLink is a trademark of Deere & Company
HC94949,00003CB -19-23AUG13-1/1
Requirements Website
Hardware
• To use RDA, we recommend browser versions of
• MTG Vehicle Harness Microsoft Internet Explorer®, Mozilla Firefox®, Google
• MTG Controller with serial number (three options) Chrome™, or Apple Safari®. For best performance,
- PCMAMGA700000 or above we recommend downloading the latest version of
- PCMAMGB100000 or above whichever browser is used.
- PCMAMGC100000 or above • Compatible Internet connection types: Air card, Wi-Fi,
• Cellular Antenna (two options depending on machine) Satellite, Dial up, DSL, Cable
- High Performance Antenna • JDLink.com and/or MyJohnDeere.com website access
- Low Profile Antenna • Access to MTG within account or third-party access
• Ethernet Cable Mobile Devices
• Ethernet Switch (required to connect GreenStar 3 2630
to MTG in a Model Year 2014 and later machine with a Remote Display Access can be accessed from any mobile
Generation 4 CommandCenter display) device with internet connection using one of the approved
• 2630 Display browsers as an HTML application. To ensure proper
display and use, mobile operators may need to enable
Software cookies. Some Blackberry devices may work correctly,
• The 2630 and MTG must have compatible software but they are not being supported.
versions for RDA to function. The latest software Cellular Coverage
versions can be found on StellarSupport.com.
Subscription (four options) • Remote Display Access relies on 2G and/or 3G cellular
signal to initiate and maintain a connection.
• JDLink Ultimate with RDA • Remote Display Access is not compatible via satellite
• JDLink Ultimate Dual with RDA (available in approved telematics connection.
countries only) • Poor cellular signal will delay an RDA session from
• JDLink Select with RDA being initiated lost or dropped during the RDA session,
• JDLink Select Dual with RDA (available in approved the session may be terminated.
countries only) • To verify cellular signal at the machine, select Main
Menu > GS3 > Diagnostics. Select Network from the
Refer to StellarSupport.com, JDLink terminal setup, drop-down and go to page 2.
or MyJohnDeere.com equipment list to find MTG
subscription status.
HC94949,00003CC -19-27AUG13-1/1
95-1 103113
PN=281
Remote Display Access Session

Session Request
A tone and a message popup will alert the operator that
the display has received a RDA session request. This
request message must be accepted to allow the display to
be viewed remotely. This request can also be cancelled
if a request is received in error or the operator does not
want to allow the display to be viewed.
PC15025CC —19—24OCT13
Remote Display Access Request
Continued on next page RW00482,000008D -19-24OCT13-1/2
95-2 103113
PN=282
PC13685CC —19—24OCT13
A—Blue Outline C—Session Type E—User Name
B—Wireless Connection Status D—Connection Duration F— Organization
G—End Session Button
Session in Progress Connection Status (B), Session Type (C), Connection

Duration (F), and User Name (D) and Organization (E) of
When a Remote Display Access session is in progress, user conducting the RDA session.
there is a blue outline (A) around the display screen to
indicate the session is active. End Session
Session Information The active Remote Display Access session can be
terminated at any time by pressing the End Session (G)
Select Main Menu > Display > Remote softkey to view button located at the bottom of this page. The End Session
details about the session. If a Remote Display Access button is grayed out when the session is no longer active.
session is in progress, the page displays Wireless
RW00482,000008D -19-24OCT13-2/2
95-3 103113
PN=283
Troubleshooting
1. Verify display and MTG are powered up.
2. Verify there are no cracks/breaks or visible damage to
Ethernet cable.
3. Verify that there is an Ethernet cable connecting MTG
to 2630 display and connections are tight.
4. Verify Ethernet cable is connected to correct port on
back of 2630 display.
There are two ports on back of 2630. One is labeled
PC13664 —UN—07DEC11
Ethernet and other is labeled USB. The Ethernet cable
needs to be connected to Ethernet Port.
A—Ethernet Connection
2630 Ethernet Connection
RW00482,000008E -19-24OCT13-1/3
5. Ensure Ethernet cable is connected to correct port on

MTG.
PC13665 —UN—07DEC11
There are 3 ports on the MTG. The port will be labeled
Ethernet. The other two ports are for the antenna.
They are labeled GPS and Cell.
6. Verify 2630 display is updated to latest software
version.
NOTE: A list of the latest software versions and MTG Ethernet Connection
downloads for the latest updates can be found
at StellarSupport.com.
A—Ethernet Connection
a. Go to Main Menu > Message Center > Reprogram
softkey.
a. Go to Main Menu > Message Center > Addresses
b. Scroll to find Greenstar™ Display 2630 in the list. softkey.
c. Verify it has the latest software version. b. Select JDL from the drop down menu and check
d. If the display does not have the latest software address 103 for MTG software version.
version, download the latest version. c. If the MTG does not have the latest software version,
7. Verify software version of MTG. obtain latest software from your John Deere Dealer.
NOTE: 2630 display and MTG must have compatible

software versions for RDA to function.
95-4 103113
PN=284
8. Verify MTG is communicating and has cell signal.

a. Check signal indicator icons on the display.
• Go to Main menu > GS3 > Diagnostics softkey.
Select Network from the drop down menu and
navigate to page 2.
b. Check MTG for Cellular Status.
• Go to Main Menu > Message Center > Addresses
softkey. Select JDL from the drop down menu and
check address 112.
Value Displayed Description
0 No Error
PC16162CC —19—24OCT13
1 Modem Unresponsive
2 No SIM
3 Network Registration Error
4 Error Establishing Calls
9. Cold boot display.

a. Power down machine.
b. Disconnect harness from display and leave
unplugged for 15-20 seconds. A—Signal Strength C—RDA State
B—MTG RDA Compatibility
c. Plug harness back in to display.
d. Power up machine.
• Customers must contact your John Deere Dealer.
10. Cold boot MTG. • Dealers refer to DTAC Solution 89996.
RW00482,000008E -19-24OCT13-3/3
Additional Information
For additional information about Remote Display Access,
please visit MyJohnDeere.com, JDLink.com or contact
your local John Deere dealer.
CZ76372,000038C -19-07DEC11-1/1
95-5 103113
PN=285
Theory of Operation Files sent out to machine(s) are not automatically applied
NOTE: This functionality may not be available in all to the display. Operator in the cab has to apply files to
countries at time of publication. utilize them on the display. MTG stores incoming files
(Setup and Rx). These files are available in the display
John Deere Wireless Data Transfer (WDT) is an optional Transfer Log for 90 days without being applied or imported
upgrade for a machine’s JDLink subscription. WDT on display. If they are not applied or imported within 90
subscription upgrade is added to the machine’s MTG days, they will no longer be available in transfer log and
using StellarSupport™. An Ethernet connection between will be deleted from MTG.
display and MTG is also required to utilize WDT. Files sent in from the machine will be available on
WDT allows operators with JDLink™-enabled machines MyJohnDeere and (or) within Farm Management
to transfer agronomic data over cellular connection to and Information Software if it is connected to the MyJohnDeere
from GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display without using a USB account. Outgoing files (HID, Documentation, and Setup)
drive. Setup and Prescription (Rx) files can be sent out to can be triggered to be sent on request or automatically
display from web, mobile device, or Farm Management at the change of Client, Farm, or Field. If loss of power
Information Software, like Apex™. Setup, Documentation or cellular signal interrupts file transfer, transfer process
and Harvest ID, Cotton files can be sent from display back continues once power or cellular signal is regained.
to web, mobile device, or Farm Management Information WDT cannot be utilized to transfer coverage maps
Software. If files have been sent using WDT, they can between machines, or to send software updates out to
also be exported using a USB drive. If files are exported display.
using a USB drive before they are sent using WDT, files
are marked as already being exported and can no longer
be sent using WDT.
StellarSupport is a trademark of Deere & Company
Apex is a trademark of Deere & Company
HC94949,0000426 -19-17OCT13-1/1
Requirements
• To use WDT, we recommend browser versions of
Hardware Microsoft Internet Explorer®, Mozilla Firefox®, Google
Chrome™, or Apple Safari®. For best performance,
• GreenStar 3 2630 Display we recommend downloading the latest version of
• Ethernet Cable (may be factory or field installed, whichever browser is used.
depending on model year and platform) • MyJohnDeere website access
• Ethernet Switch (required only for Final Tier 4 machines • In order to send files to or receive files from a machine,
that have a Generation 4 CommandCenter connected certain preferences and roles need to be set within
to the MTG) MyJohnDeere.
• MTG
• Optional:Farm Management Information Software, Mobile Devices
such as Apex
WDT can be accessed from any mobile device with
Software internet connection using one of the approved browsers
as an HTML application.
• Refer to MyJohnDeere Online Help for the latest
software versions required. Cellular Coverage
Subscription • WDT relies on 2G and/or 3G cellular signal to transfer
files to and from display. Cell coverage and/or internet
• JDLink Ultimate + RDA + WDT connection may affect speed or file to or from machine.
• JDLink Ultimate Dual + RDA + WDT • WDT is not compatible via satellite telematics
Refer to StellarSupport or MyJohnDeere equipment list to connection.
find MTG subscription status. • To verify cellular signal at the machine, select Main
Menu > GS3 > Diagnostics. Select Network from
Website drop-down and go to page 2.
HC94949,000035E -19-10JUN13-1/1
100-1 103113
PN=286
Transfer Log
PC17860CC —19—24OCT13
Data Management (A)
NOTE: Data sends automatically when Client,
Farm, or Field change.
• Erase Data (B): Clear Transfer Log, Documentation

Data, or All Data from display.
• Data Transfer Settings (C): Choose to send files on
request or automatically.
• Send Files (D): Send setup, documentation, and HID
files back to MyJohnDeere. Maximum file size that can
PC17861CC —19—24OCT13
be sent using WDT is 20 MB zipped. If Data Transfer
Settings are set to Automatic, and Send Files button is
pressed shortly after change of Client, Farm, or Field,
“Documentation Data Already Sent” alert may appear.
Documentation Data Already Sent - All available
documentation data has already been exported via USB
drive or sent via Wireless Data Transfer. Refer to the
Display Transfer Log for file status.
Wireless Icon–WDT and Machine Sync Compatibility
A—Data Management E—WDT and John
(E) B—Erase Data Button Deere Machine Sync
C—Data Transfer Settings Compatibility
NOTE: WDT and Machine Sync cannot be utilized at Button F— Transfer Log
the same time. To send files wirelessly, operator D—Send Files Button G—File In or File Out
disconnects from Machine Sync network. Once Notification
files have been exported or imported successfully,
operator reconnects to Machine Sync network.
Onscreen help is available to explain statuses of
Wireless icon-WDT and Machine Sync compatibility
by selecting question (?) mark.
100-2 103113
PN=287
- Exported: File has been received on MyJohnDeere.

• Blue Arrows (A): Files can be sent or received - Ready to Use: File is available to apply to display or
wirelessly. Machine is not in a Machine Sync network. has been applied to display.
• One Blue Arrow (B): Files can only be received on • A maximum of 200 file transfer records can be kept in
display but not applied. Files cannot be sent wirelessly the Transfer Log. Once more than 200 records have
(Machine Sync Network-Inactive State). been reached in the Transfer Log, the oldest records
• Empty Arrows (C): Cannot send or receive data are removed.
wirelessly (Machine Sync Network-Tracking, Ready,
Acquire).
• To prevent a memory full issue from occurring on
display, periodically delete files from Transfer Log.
Transfer Log (F) Sending files wirelessly uses up display memory twice
as fast. The file is saved to internal memory of display,
• Select tabs to sort by file type. and a copy of file is saved in Transfer Log so the file
• File Status can be re-sent at any time.
- Processing File: File is being zipped on display and is
in the process of being sent to the MTG. File In/File Out (G)
- Exporting: File is in the process of being sent from
MTG to MyJohnDeere. (Machine can now be powered
• Notification that a file has been transferred to or from
display.
down and file transfer still occurs.)
100-3 103113
PN=288
Manage File
• Apply Setup (A): Apply setup file to display, which
overwrites existing setup.
• Resend: Resend documentation, HID, or setup file to
MyJohnDeere.
• Import Rx (B): Add received prescription (Rx) to the
existing Rx on display.
• Replace Rx (C): Delete all existing Rx on display, and
replace with received Rx.
• Manage Rx List (D): Select and delete existing Rx on
display.
• Clear from Log (E): Clear file from Transfer Log.
A—Apply Setup D—Manage Rx List
PC17060CC —19—24OCT13
B—Import Rx E—Clear from Log
C—Replace Rx
PC17061CC —19—24OCT13
HC94949,0000428 -19-24OCT13-3/3
100-4 103113
PN=289
Troubleshooting
1. Verify correct preferences and roles have been set.
2. Verify correct machine is selected for sending files.
3. Verify MTG has an active subscription.
- JDLink™ Ultimate + RDA + WDT
- JDLink™ Ultimate Dual + RDA + WDT
Refer to StellarSupport™ or MyJohnDeere equipment
list to find MTG subscription status.
4. Verify Ethernet cable connecting MTG to GreenStar™
3 2630 Display and the connections are tight.
a. Verify Ethernet cable is connected to the correct
port on the back of the GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display.
There are two ports on the back of the display. One
is labeled Ethernet and the other is labeled USB.
PC17062CC —19—24OCT13
Ethernet cable needs to be connected to Ethernet
port.
b. Ensure Ethernet cable is connected to the correct
port on MTG. There are three ports on MTG. Port
will be labeled Ethernet. The other two ports are for
the antenna. They are labeled GPS and Cell.
5. Verify there are no cracks, breaks, or visible damage
to Ethernet cable.
6. Verify GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display is updated with the
latest software version. A—View Dropdown Menu
a. Go to Main Menu > Message Center > Reprogram
softkey.
b. Scroll to find GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display in the list. Value Displayed Description
c. If display does not have the latest software version, 0 No Error
download the latest version from StellarSupport™. 1 Modem Unresponsive
7. Verify MTG is updated to the latest software version. 2 No SIM
a. Go to Main Menu > Message Center > Addresses
3 Network Registration Error
softkey.
b. Select JDL from dropdown menu, and check 4 Error Establishing Calls
address 103 for MTG software version. 9. Verify John Deere Data Usage Agreement has been
c. If MTG does not have the latest software version, accepted.
obtain latest software from your John Deere Dealer.
Cold boot display
8. Verify MTG is communicating and has cell signal.
a. Check signal indicator icons on the display. Go to 1. Power down machine.
Main menu > GS3 > Diagnostics softkey. Select 2. Disconnect harness from display.
Network from dropdown menu (A) and navigate to
page 2. 3. Leave harness unplugged for 15–20 seconds.
b. Check MTG for cellular status. Go to Main Menu >
Message Center > Addresses softkey. Select JDL 4. Plug harness into display.
from dropdown menu and check address 112. 5. Power up machine.
Cold boot MTG
• Customers must contact their John Deere Dealer.
• Dealers refer to DTAC Solution 89996.
HC94949,0000427 -19-24OCT13-1/1
100-5 103113
PN=290
Service ADVISOR Remote
Overview updated software via the JDLink hardware onboard.

Remote programming gives John Deere the ability to
Theory of Operation update software to enhance the performance of the
Service ADVISOR™ is a diagnostic tool used by John machine. This capability can be used to reprogram
Deere dealers to perform diagnostics as well as updates most machine controllers. The user actively participates
to machine settings and software. Dealers can access with the dealer in this process by both downloading the
diagnostic trouble codes and diagnostic addresses, software update and installing the software update.
create readings and recordings, and program controllers. NOTE: Some vehicle controllers may not be compatible
This technology consists of both software and hardware. for SAR reprogramming.
Technicians attend a minimum of 8 hours of training to
become certified in utilizing this tool. Vehicle Compatibility
Service ADVISOR™ Remote (SAR) is a function of NOTE: If equipped, Access Manager provides the
Service ADVISOR™ that allows the dealer technician capability to unlock, partially lock, or lock operator
to connect to a SAR enabled machine via the JDLink™ access to specific components, including the ability
network to remotely access diagnostic trouble code to download and install software updates. Please
information and record diagnostic data, as well as to refer to your machine’s OM for more details.
remotely program controllers on SAR-enabled machines.
Similar to software (payload) updates in the computer For a current list of approved vehicles, please contact
industry, SAR enables John Deere to remotely deliver your John Deere Dealer or visit www.StellarSupport.com.
CZ76372,0000674 -19-24OCT13-1/1
Vehicle Reprogramming
With SAR dealers have the ability to send new software
to a vehicle to update controllers. Once the dealer sends
the software, a message will appear on the display stating
that there is new software available. Pressing Accept will
take the user to the software updates page.
PC12691 —UN—27JUL10
Software Update Available
105-1 103113
PN=291
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
If the message is cancelled, the user can access the page
by selecting the Menu button and then Remote Software
Updates.
MENU button
PC12671 —UN—21JUL10
Remote Updates Menu Button

CZ76372,0000673 -19-25OCT13-2/5
Download Updates
On the Remote Software Updates page, the operator
can either reject (A) or download (B) the new software.
Pressing the Download Software (B) button will start
the download process. This process will continue in the
background and normal machine operation can continue.
A—Reject Download Button C—Install Software Button

B—Download Software Button
PC15179 —UN—31MAY12
Remote Software Updates
105-2 103113
PN=292
Install Updates
Once the software has been downloaded and it is ready
for installation, a message will appear on the display.
Press the accept button to go to the Remote Software
Updates page.
Software installation can take up to 40 minutes. Pressing
the cancel button enables you to update the software at a
later time if desired.
PC12692 —UN—27JUL10
Update Ready for Install
105-3 103113
PN=293
PC12856 —UN—07SEP10
PC12672 —UN—28JUN10
PC13582 —UN—09MAY11
PC12857 —UN—07SEP10
On the Remote Software Updates page, press the Install Once prompted, accept the terms and conditions and then
Software button to begin the installation process. follow the on screen instructions.
CAUTION: Some vehicle functions, including If there is a problem during the install process, the system
lights, may become inoperable during will try a second install. If the second attempt fails, please
reprogramming. To avoid injury, ensure the contact your John Deere dealer.
vehicle is in a safe location and configuration
before reprogramming. Do not reprogram near
public roadways or in active work sites.
CZ76372,0000673 -19-25OCT13-5/5
105-4 103113
PN=294
Troubleshooting - Reprogramming
Symptom Problem Solution
Accessory Power Lost Engine Started or key turned off Do not start engine or remove power
while software updates are being
installed. Turn key off and return to
ON position.
Voltage Low The system voltage is too low to Turn off or remove accessories that
proceed with the software installation. are unnecessary.
Check battery voltage and recharge

battery if necessary.
Communication Fault The software installation cannot Turn key off and then back to on.
be completed because of a Then retry software installation.
communications fault
Contact a John Deere Dealer if
communication cannot be established.
Remote Software Updates icon not Cannot access Remote Software Check harness and connections to
on display Updates page on the display MTG.
NOTE: Remote Software Icon shall be
available at all times, whether
there is a payload or not.
CZ76372,0000672 -19-24OCT13-1/1
105-5 103113
PN=295
Auxiliary Controls
Auxiliary Control Safety Signs
Auxiliary Control Detected
Auxiliary Control. Press ”Enter” key F to navigate to the
home page. Go to the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing
the ”Mapping” key G to review or change the Auxiliary
Control assignments.
If ”Disable” is selected (default), all Auxiliary Controls will
PC13154 —19—17FEB11
be disabled.
If ”Enable” is selected, all Auxiliary Controls will be
enabled.
RN38933,0000138 -19-21SEP11-1/4

This message occurs when the system detects an Auxiliary
Control and that configuration has been modified during
run time (e.g. additional input and/or implement added).
Press ”Enter” key F to navigate to the home page. Go to
the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the ”Mapping” key
G to review or change the Auxiliary Control assignments.
PC13155 —19—17FEB11
RN38933,0000138 -19-21SEP11-2/4

This message occurs when the operator enables the
Auxiliary Control manually. Press ”Enter” key F to navigate
to the home page. Go to the Auxiliary Controls page by
pressing the ”Mapping” key G to review or change the
Auxiliary Control assignments.
PC13146 —19—17FEB11
Continued on next page RN38933,0000138 -19-21SEP11-3/4
110-1 103113
PN=296
Auxiliary Controls

This message occurs when Auxiliary Control has been
enabled manually, however, not all assignments have
been completed successfully. Press ”Enter” key F to
navigate to the home page. Go to the Auxiliary Controls
page by pressing the ”Mapping” key G to review or change
the Auxiliary Control assignments.
IMPORTANT: If the ”Enter” key F is selected, the
implement only follows the assignments which
PC13153 —19—17FEB11
have been completed successfully, however,
there are still assignments which are not
complete. It is necessary to review the Auxiliary
Controls mapping screen by pressing the
”Mapping” key G and complete all assignments
before enabling Auxiliary Controls.
RN38933,0000138 -19-21SEP11-4/4
Auxiliary Control Alerts

Auxiliary Control Disabled
IMPORTANT: Auxiliary Control is disabled because
requested assignments could not be completed.
Go to the Auxiliary Controls page to enable.

Auxiliary Control and at least one of the requested
assignments could not be completed. It is necessary
to check the Auxiliary Controls page by pressing the
”Mapping” key G and review the assignments before
Auxiliary Control can be enabled.
PC17343CC —19—25OCT13
Continued on next page CZ76372,000005D -19-25OCT13-1/5
110-2 103113
PN=297
Auxiliary Controls

IMPORTANT: Auxiliary Control configuration changed.
Auxiliary Control is disabled because requested
assignments could not be completed. Go to
the Auxiliary Controls page to enable.
This message occurs when the Auxiliary Control

configuration has been modified during run time (e.g.
additional input and/or implement added) and at least one
of the requested assignments could not be completed.
It is necessary to check the Auxiliary Controls page by
pressing the ”Mapping” key G and review the assignments
before Auxiliary Controls can be enabled.
PC17344CC —19—25OCT13
110-3 103113
PN=298
Auxiliary Controls
Auxiliary Control Not Available

IMPORTANT: Auxiliary Control is not available. To
utilize this display for the Auxiliary Control
configuration, set its function instance
to 1. All other displays must be set to a
function instance > 1.
This message occurs when the display which runs the
PC17332CC —19—24OCT13
Auxiliary Control function is not the primary display for the
Implement Bus (Function Instance 1).
Go to Menu button > Display button > Diagnostic softkey
> Multiple Displays tab > Change Settings button.
Set Implement Bus Function Instance to 1.
A—Implement Bus B—Function Instance
PC17349CC —19—25OCT13
CZ76372,000005D -19-25OCT13-3/5
Auxiliary Control Not Available

IMPORTANT: Auxiliary Control is not available. The
connected auxiliary input device does not meet
the implement function requirements.
This message occurs if an input device cannot control

any of the requested implement functions due to an
incompatibility (e.g. the input sends analog signals and
PC17348CC —19—25OCT13
the implement sends digital signals).
110-4 103113
PN=299
Auxiliary Controls
Communication Error
IMPORTANT: Communication Error
Communication problem with auxiliary input.
Communication may be lost.
Check connections to controller.
This message occurs when the system detects a

communication problem with auxiliary input (i.e. the
joystick is disconnected). Press ”Enter” key F to quit this
error message, then check all connections.
PC17331CC —19—25OCT13
CZ76372,000005D -19-25OCT13-5/5
110-5 103113
PN=300
Auxiliary Controls
110-6 103113
PN=301
Auxiliary Controls
Auxiliary Controls Page

PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
The following screens allow mapping of ISO compliant
auxiliary/implement functions to ISO compliant auxiliary
controls.
Example:
MENU button
The display has been set up in a tractor that is attached PC11392CC —19—24OCT13
to a sprayer.
A switch box has been installed in the tractor containing
two switches: Switch 1 and Switch 2.
The sprayer has two functions that can be controlled by
the switch box: turning the pump on and off, and turning
the nozzles on and off.
DISPLAY button
The operator can choose which switch will turn the pump PC17339CC —19—24OCT13
on and off and which switch will turn the nozzles on and off.
The tractor could be attached to a different implement and
the switches could be assigned to control functions of
that implement.
Also, a different input device, such as a joystick, could be
installed and that device could be assigned control over
the sprayer's functions. AUXILIARY CONTROLS softkey
OUCC002,00029E8 -19-24OCT13-1/1
110-7 103113
PN=302
Auxiliary Controls
Auxiliary Controls Page—Implement Function Mapping
PC17327CC —19—24OCT13
Auxiliary Controls
A—Status Selection D—Input Selection G—Implement Type
B—View Selection E—Status Indicator H—Auxiliary Controls Softkey
C—Input Device Selection F— Implement Function I— Message Center Softkey
IMPORTANT: Before using Auxiliary Controls, read

the operator manual provided by the implement An auxiliary input device (C) consists of a number of
manufacturer and observe all safety messages ”Inputs” (D). These inputs may be buttons, switches,
in the manual and on the implement prior to dials, etc.
use. When using Auxiliary Controls, information This Auxiliary Controls page allows the user to match
and control functions placed on this display these inputs with various implement functions. This
are provided by the implement. process is called ”Mapping” an input to a function. Once
this ”Mapping” is completed, a function (F) may be
AUXILIARY CONTROLS softkey H performed by activating the associated input.
This screen allows the mapping of an ISO compliant The available functions (F) and inputs (D) depend on the
implement functions to ISO compliant Auxiliary Input ISO compliant implements/controls (G) that are currently
devices. connected.
Continued on next page OUCC002,00029E9 -19-24OCT13-1/5
110-8 103113
PN=303
Auxiliary Controls
PC17328CC —19—24OCT13
Auxiliary Controls
A—Input Device Selection C—Implement Function E—Implement Type
B—Input Selection D—Status Indicator
(green=mapped/red=un-
mapped)
To assign one of an input device’s input controls to

one of an implement’s functions perform the following 5. Another list control will appear in the ”Input” column
steps: (B).
1. Select an implement function (C) by using the up and 6. Select an item from this list to select the specific input
down arrow buttons located on the left hand side to map to the currently selected implement ”Function”
of the screen or by pressing directly on the desired (C).
implement function (touchscreen functionality). Functions which are in use are grayed out, but can
2. The row that contains the currently selected implement be selected.
function will be indicated by a cursor colored rectangle. IMPORTANT: The input device selection list only
3. Select the list control under the ”Input Device” column shows inputs which are compatible to the
(A) in the currently selected row. implement functions.
4. Choose an ”Input Device” (A) by selecting one of the 7. A status indicator (D) will appear to indicate if the input
items listed in this control. device’s input (B) control was successfully mapped to
the implement "Function" (C) or not.
110-9 103113
PN=304
Auxiliary Controls
• A green status indicator (D) indicates that the 8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 to map as many controls as is
mapping is completed successfully. needed.
• A red status indicator (D) indicates that the mapping
was not successful. In this case, check the
assignments and change as necessary.
OUCC002,00029E9 -19-24OCT13-3/5
PC17320CC —19—24OCT13
Auxiliary Controls
A—Input Device Selection B—Input Selection C—Unmapped
To remove an existing assignment perform the 3. Select one of the list controls from the selected row.
following steps: Either the ”Input Device” (A) or ”Input” (B) lists will
1. Select an existing assignment by using the up and suffice.
down arrow buttons located on the left hand side 4. From the selected list, choose the ”Unmapped” item
of the screen or by pressing directly on the desired (C).
assignment (touchscreen functionality).
5. The assignment arrow will be removed and the
2. The row that contains the currently selected controls will be set to ”Unmapped” (C).
assignment will be indicated by a cursor colored
rectangle.
110-10 103113
PN=305
Auxiliary Controls
PC17321CC —19—24OCT13
Auxiliary Controls
A—View Selection B—All D—Unmapped
C—Mapped E—Conflicts
To filter the current list of ”Mappings”:

4. Choose the ”Unmapped” item (D) to see only the
1. Select the ”View” list control (A). implement functions that have not yet been ”Mapped”
to input controls on an input device.
2. Choose the ”All” item (B) to see all ”Mapped” (C) and
”Unmapped” (D) implement functions and ”Conflicts” 5. Choose the ”Conflicts” item (E) to see only the
(E). This is the default selection. implement function assignments in conflict to each
other. See Auxiliary Controls—Conflicts and Disable
3. Choose the ”Mapped” item (C) to see only the Functions in this Section.
”Mapped” implement functions.
OUCC002,00029E9 -19-24OCT13-5/5
110-11 103113
PN=306
Auxiliary Controls
Auxiliary Controls—Assignment Error

Messages
While assigning functions, some assignment error
messages may appear.
When an auxiliary function is not responding to an
assignment request, the error message (A) appears:
Auxiliary function is not responding. Check
assignment on Auxiliary Controls page.
The related assignment (B) is displayed. Press key E to
reach the Auxiliary Controls page or enter key F to return
to the previous screen.
PC17330CC —19—25OCT13
IMPORTANT: It is recommended to press key E to
reach the Auxiliary Controls page and check
the auxiliary function assignment.
NOTE: The failed assignment is indicated by the

missing status indicator while the input device
and input are displayed.
Auxiliary Assignment—Time out
A—Assignment Error E—Auxiliary Controls Page

B—Assignment Access Key
F— Enter Key
OUCC002,00029ED -19-25OCT13-1/4
When an auxiliary input is not responding to an

assignment request, the error message (A) appears:
Auxiliary input is not responding. Check assignment
on Auxiliary Controls page.
the auxiliary input assignment.
NOTE: The failed assignment is indicated by the

PC17345CC —19—25OCT13

F— Enter Key
Auxiliary Input Status Enable—Time out
Continued on next page OUCC002,00029ED -19-25OCT13-2/4
110-12 103113
PN=307
Auxiliary Controls
When an implement rejects an assignment, the error

message (A) appears:
Assignment not accepted by auxiliary function.
Check assignment on mapping screen.
the auxiliary input assignment.
NOTE: The rejected assignment is indicated by the

PC17346CC —19—25OCT13

F— Enter Key
Auxiliary Assignment—Negative Response
OUCC002,00029ED -19-25OCT13-3/4
When the selected auxiliary input does not match the

implement functions while the learn mode is active (thus
the assignment was not successful), the error message
(A) appears:
The requested auxiliary input does not meet the
implement function requirements. The assignment
cannot be made.
Press enter key F to reach the Auxiliary Controls page
and check the auxiliary input assignment.
A—Assignment Error F— Enter Key
PC17347CC —19—25OCT13
Auxiliary Assignment—Negative Response
OUCC002,00029ED -19-25OCT13-4/4
110-13 103113
PN=308
Auxiliary Controls
Auxiliary Controls—Preferred Assignments
PC17322CC —19—24OCT13
A—Single Assignment Icon B—Assignment Lock Icon
Auxiliary Controls allow an implement to request a by the operator, the implement may store the mapping
preferred assignment for a specific input. The preferred as the new preferred assignment for this particular
assignment depends on the input device and implement configuration. If joystick and implement are disconnected
configuration. and reconnected at a later date, the implement is able to
reload the assignments again.
Example:
Based on input device and/or implement requirements the
A joystick (4 inputs) and an implement (4 functions) are assignments may be limited:
connected to the vehicle.
• The single assignment icon (A) can be set by an
• Input 1 = function 1 auxiliary function and/or input.
• Input 2 = function 3 - If an implement function sets a single assignment
• Input 3 = function 2 and 4 icon, it can only be mapped separately to ONE button
• Input 4 = not assigned of the input device and no additional function can be
In this example the implement requests function 3 to assigned to this button.
be mapped to input 2 and both functions 2 and 4 to be - If an input sets a single assignment icon, it can only
mapped on input 3. Input 4 remains blank. be mapped to ONE implement function.
• The assignment lock icon (B) states that the assignment
This is called a preferred assignment and is requested by is requested automatically by the implement and cannot
the implement as soon as implement and input device be set manually by the operator.
are connected. Once an assignment has been changed
110-14 103113
PN=309
Auxiliary Controls
NOTE: Depending on the implement functions, the

preferred assignment can also differ between
the implement manufacturers.
CZ76372,0000294 -19-24OCT13-2/2
Auxiliary Controls—Conflicts and Disabled
ZX1042161 —UN—14OCT08
Functions
Auxiliary Controls—Conflicts:
When a conflict occurs, the GS3 display shows a yellow
square (A) next to the Auxiliary Control symbol in the
message center button. This allows the operator to
recognize conflicts at any time independently from the
screen he is working on.
NOTE: The joystick icon appears only if Auxiliary A—Conflict Occurrence Alert
Controls has been enabled.
110-15 103113
PN=310
Auxiliary Controls
PC17323CC —19—24OCT13
A—View Selection C—Mapped F— Input
B—Conflicts D—Unmapped G—Assignment Lock Icon
E—Conflict Number
From the Auxiliary Controls page, the operator can select In this example (see illustration), functions 2 and 3 have
the mapped (C) and unmapped (D) functions and conflicts been requested to be assigned to the same input (F)
(B) from the drop-down list of view selection (A). although this input is set with a single assignment icon.
All conflicts are grouped together in the conflicts filter and In addition, the third function (STOP) is set with an
marked with yellow square and numbers (E). All conflicts assignment lock icon (G) and cannot be set manually.
with the same number are related to each other. To resolve the conflict the second function MUST be
The conflict square icon (E) will appear on all related remapped.
assignments even if they have been completed
successfully or not.
110-16 103113
PN=311
Auxiliary Controls
Auxiliary Controls—Enabled Functions PC17326CC —19—24OCT13

A—Status Selection C—Disabled E—Status Indicator—Constant
B—Enabled D—Learn Mode
Auxiliary Controls—Enabled Functions: status indicator independent from if an assignment

has been completed successfully or not. See
The status selection drop-down list (A) allows the operator Auxiliary Controls—Disabled Functions hereafter.
to enable (B) or disable (C) the Auxiliary Control functions
and to enable the learn mode (D). Selecting the ”Learn Mode” allows the operator to map
All active assignments are shown with a constant status the functions by selecting the respective input controls for
indicator (E). In case of a conflict, the status indicator (E) the referring assignment. See Auxiliary Controls—Learn
switches from green to red color. Mode hereafter.
NOTE: If disabled is selected, Auxiliary Controls will be

disabled and all mappings will show up with a dashed
110-17 103113
PN=312
Auxiliary Controls
PC17325CC —19—24OCT13
Auxiliary Controls—Disabled Functions
A—Status Selection C—Disabled E—Status Indicator—Dashed
B—Enabled D—Learn Mode
Auxiliary Controls—Disabled Functions: conflict, the status indicator (E) switches from green to
red color.
The status selection drop-down list (A) allows the operator
to enable (B) or disable (C) the Auxiliary Control functions Selecting the ”Learn Mode” allows the operator to map
and to enable the learn mode (D). the functions by selecting the respective input controls for
the referring assignment. See Auxiliary Controls—Learn
If Auxiliary Controls is ”Disabled” all assignments are Mode hereafter.
shown with a dashed status indicator (E). In case of a
110-18 103113
PN=313
Auxiliary Controls
PC17324CC —19—24OCT13
Auxiliary Controls—Learn Mode
A—Status Selection B—Enabled D—Learn Mode
C—Disabled
Auxiliary Controls—Learn Mode: • If Auxiliary Controls was in ”Enabled” status before

selecting the ”Learn Mode”, all additional assignments
The status selection drop-down list (A) allows the operator can be used as soon as they have been completed
to enable (B) or disable (C) the Auxiliary Control functions successfully. If Auxiliary Controls was in ”Disabled”
and to place the system under learn mode (D). status before selecting the ”Learn Mode”, the system
• If the ”Learn Mode” is selected and the operator leaves has to be enabled again before the new/additional
the Auxiliary Controls page without any action, the assignments can be used.
Auxiliary Controls status (enable/disable) will remain as Selecting the ”Learn Mode” allows the operator to map
set prior to entering the ”Learn Mode”. the functions semi-automatically. Therefore it is necessary
• If an assignment has been completed successfully to select the implement specific function on the Auxiliary
in the ”Learn Mode”, the cursor colored rectangle Controls page and set any input device function.
switches to the next possible assignment. During the
assignment process, the implement does NOT follow IMPORTANT: The preferred assignments which have
any functions which have been assigned before. As been requested automatically by an implement
long as the ”Learn Mode” is selected, Auxiliary Controls with an assignment lock icon cannot be
is in a pending status (neither enabled, nor disabled). changed manually in the ”Learn Mode”.
CZ76372,0000295 -19-24OCT13-5/5
110-19 103113
PN=314
COM Port Assignment
Why Assign the COM Port? Each Com Port can be assigned to a user profile and be
The RS232 (Serial COM Port) setup is necessary to automatically reloaded upon machine type selection. (See
connect different control unit or components to the GS3 Setup Com Port Section.)
display. IMPORTANT: Connect the component to the GS3
The GS3 Display features two serial COM ports to allow display before setting up a Com Port (see
connection to the following components: Setup Com Port section.)
• In cab printer. Once this component is disconnected

• N—Sensing from the GS3 display, the relevant Com
• Inoculant Dosing Port and Profile MUST be deactivated (see
• Field Doc Connect Deactivate Com Port section.)
• Serial Port on GPS Receiver
Go to www.StellarSupport.com to check for other
component compatibility.
CZ76372,0000051 -19-09JUL10-1/1
115-1 103113
PN=315
COM Port Assignment
Setup COM Port
PC12734CC —19—24OCT13
PC17903CC —19—24OCT13
To access the COM port setup page, select MENU button
> GREENSTAR 3 PRO button > EQUIPMENT softkey H
> MACHINE tab (A). Select the desired Machine Type,
Model, Name, and Connection Type, then press COM
port button (B).
COM port settings page appears (see COM Port Settings).
A—Machine Tab B—COM Port Button
CZ76372,0000145 -19-24OCT13-1/1
115-2 103113
PN=316
COM Port Assignment
Com Port Settings

Use this screen to select an existing or create a profile.
Two profiles can be stored per specific machine (that is,
Combine, Tractor, Forage Harvester, Sprayer, and more).
When a machine is selected in the Machine-Implement
Setup tab (GreenStar 3 Pro - Equipment screen), the
associated profile is automatically recalled and loaded.
IMPORTANT: Connect the component to the GS3
display before setting up a profile. Once setup
is finished, the system attempts to connect to
the relevant component. If component is not
connected, an error message (Communication
Error) is then displayed.
To create a profile (A) for a specific machine, proceed as
PC17904CC —19—24OCT13
follows:
1. Select NEW in the Profile (A) drop-down box then
enter the desired Profile name.
2. Assign a Com Port (B) number to this Profile (1 or 2).
3. Define the Port Type (C).
• In Cab Printer (see User Define Printer Layout PC8669CC —19—29OCT13
section 15)
• N-Sensing (YARA-N sensor)
• Inoculant Dosing
• Field Doc Connect (see Com Port Settings—3rd
Party Control Units section)
• Serial Port (that is, GPS reciever) or any other
compatible components to connect.
4. Define the Controller Protocol (D), if applicable.
5. The press ENTER button to save profile or CANCEL A—Profile D—Controller Protocol
button to cancel procedure. B—Com Port E—Enter Button
C—Port Type F— Abort Button
All COM PORT assignments for a specific machine can be
reviewed from the GreenStar 3 Pro - Diagnostic Reading
page.
The Diagnostic Readings page appears (see Com Port
To review the Com Port Settings, select MENU button > Setting Review).
GREENSTAR 3 PRO button > DIAGNOSTIC softkey C.
CZ76372,000019C -19-24OCT13-1/1
115-3 103113
PN=317
COM Port Assignment
COM Port Settings—3rd Party Control Units
PC17905CC —19—24OCT13
A—Profile E—Abort Button H—Operation L— Enter Button
B—Com Port F— Implement Type I— Control Manufacturer
C—Port Type G—Implement Name J— Model
D—Next Page Button K—Previous Page Button
IMPORTANT: When connecting with a Rawson control NOTE: Rawson control units are also capable of accepting
unit, turn main switch to OFF before leaving prescriptions from the GS3 display.
vehicle or performing maintenance.
In case of a 3rd-Party control unit Com Port Assignment
NOTE: 3rd-Party control units are control units using setup, enter the necessary information requested by the 3
RS232 connection (Field Doc Connect). steps procedure as follows:
NOTE: Please visit www.StellarSupport.com for list of • Select NEW in the Profile (A) drop-down box then enter
third party compatible control units. the desired Profile name.
• Assign a Com Port (B) number to this Profile (1 or 2)
Data from 3rd-Party control units can be recorded directly • Select Field Doc Connect as Port Type (C).
from the following control units:
1. Press Next Page button (D) to go to the next step or
NOTE: Go to www.StellarSupport.com to find the latest CANCEL button (E) to stop procedure.
information about approved platforms.
• Select the Implement Type (F).
• Rawson Accu-Rate and Accu-Plant • Select the Implement Name (G)
• Dickey-John Seed Manager • Select the associated Operation (H)
• Vanguard PIC Seed Monitor • Select the Control Manufacturer (I)
• Amazone • Select the Model (J)
• LH Technologies • Press the next page button (D) to go to next step
System will record Actual Rate, Implement Width, and • Press previous page button (K) to go to the previous
GPS Recording Status (implement switch not required) step
directly from Field Doc Connect control unit. • Press cancel button (E) to stop procedure
115-4 103113
PN=318
COM Port Assignment
2. Review Com Port assignment settings then press

enter button (L) to save profile or cancel button (E) to
stop procedure.
CZ76372,0000053 -19-24OCT13-2/3
PC8669CC —19—29OCT13
The Com Port assignment can be reviewed from the
GreenStar 3 Pro-Diagnostic Reading page.
To review the Com Port Settings, select MENU button >
GREENSTAR 3 PRO button > DIAGNOSTIC softkey C.
The Diagnostic Readings page appears (see Com Port
Setting Review).
Diagnostic Softkey
CZ76372,0000053 -19-24OCT13-3/3
115-5 103113
PN=319
COM Port Assignment
COM Port Setting Review
PC12735CC —19—24OCT13
A—View E—Profile H—Controller Protocol K—Communication Status
B—Information F— Port Type I— Model L— Operation
C—Port 1 G—Implement Name J— Baud Rate
D—Port 2
When a machine is selected in the Machine-Implement The information (B) column displays a summary of:
Setup tab (GreenStar 3 Pro - Equipment screen), the
associated profile is automatically recalled and loaded. • (E) Profile name relevant to each Com Port.
To display the relevant COM Port profile for a specific
• (F) Port Type
machine, proceed as follows:
• (G) Implement Name
• (H) Controller Protocol
1. Select MENU button > GREENSTAR 3 PRO button > • (I) Model of Control Unit
EQUIPMENT sofkey (H) > MACHINE tab then select • (J) Baud Rate (transmittion speed)
the desired Machine type. • (K) Communication Status (active-inactive)
• (L) Operation Type (Product Application)
2. To review the Com Port Settings for this specific
machine, press DIAGNOSTIC softkey (C).
3. Select COM PORT in the VIEW (A) drop-down box.
The information table (B) appears and displays the
Port 1 (C) and Port 2 (D) profile assignments.
CZ76372,0000146 -19-24OCT13-1/1
115-6 103113
PN=320
COM Port Assignment
Deactivate COM Port
PC12734CC —19—24OCT13
PC17903CC —19—24OCT13
IMPORTANT: Each time a component is disconnected
from the machine, it is necessary to
deactivate the relevant Profile and each
associated COM Port.
On Forage Harvester or Combine equipped
with an integrated printer, do not manually
deactivate the printer profile.
To deactivate a profile, access the COM port setup page.

COM Port settings page appears (see COM Port Settings).
Select MENU button > GREENSTAR 3 PRO button>
EQUIPMENT softkey (H) . Machine tab (A). Select the
desired machine type , model name, and connection.
Type then press COM Port button (B).
CZ76372,0000147 -19-24OCT13-1/1
115-7 103113
PN=321
COM Port Assignment
Com Port Settings

Use tnis screen to deactivate a profile for a specific
machine.
IMPORTANT: If two Com Port (B) are associated
to a profile, individually deactivate each
COM Port. The following procedure stands
for one COM Port deactivation. Repeat
procedure for each COM Port.
To deactivate a profile (A) for a specific machine, proceed

as follows:
1. Select MACHINE tab then the desired Machine Type.
2. Select - - - - - in the profile (A) drop-down box.
3. Select Com Port (B) number to deactivate.
PC17906CC —19—24OCT13
4. Then press ENTER button (C) to deactivate profile or
CANCEL button (D) to cancel procedure.
The COM Port Profile is now deactivated for a specific
machine. When the component is reconnected to the GS3
display, the Profile is automatically recalled and loaded.
A—Profile C—Enter button

B—Com Port D—Abort button
CZ76372,0000054 -19-24OCT13-1/1
115-8 103113
PN=322
YARA N-Sensor
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
YARA N-Sensor
NOTE: The YARA N-Sensor is for use in Europe.
NOTE: The GreenSeeker activation enables the

MENU button
YARA N-Sensor module. PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
IMPORTANT: FieldDoc Connect Cable must be wired

for COM Port 2 at the GreenStar 3 display.
If no implement controller is connected to
the GS3 Display, the YARA N-Sensor cannot
be selected as a prescription.
1. Connect the implement controller to the GS3 Display.

2. Attach YARA N-Sensor hardware according to the PC8676CC —19—24OCT13
YARA N-Sensor manual.

3. Connect the YARA N-Sensor display to the GreenStar
RS232 cab connector.
4. Calibrate—Setup YARA N-Sensor System according
to the YARA N-Sensor manual.
5. Select MENU button >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO
RESOURCE/CONDITION softkey
button >> RESOURCE/CONDITIONS softkey >>
RESOURCES tab
6. Fill in Client, Farm, Field, and Task information to
enable documentation.
CZ76372,000015F -19-24OCT13-1/6
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
7. Select MENU button >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO button
>> EQUIPMENT softkey >> MACHINE tab
Fill in the machine information.
8. Press COM Port button. MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13

PC8677CC —19—24OCT13
EQUIPMENT softkey
120-1 103113
PN=323
YARA N-Sensor
9. Select NEW in Profile drop-down box then enter

desired Profile name.
10. Assign Com Port to number 2.
11. Select N-Sensing in Port Type drop-down box.
12. Select N-Sensing (LH) in Controller Protocol
drop-down box.
13. Then press ACCEPT button to continue.
PC12921CC —19—24OCT13
COM Port Settings
CZ76372,000015F -19-24OCT13-3/6
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
button >> DOCUMENTATION softkey >> PRODUCT
APPLICATION tab
MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13

PC8678CC —19—24OCT13
120-2 103113
PN=324
YARA N-Sensor
PC12850CC —19—24OCT13
15. Select auto-generated product application tab. 16. Select Rx button to indicate prescription.
NOTE: The product application tab needs to be generated
manually in case of Field Doc Connect.
120-3 103113
PN=325
YARA N-Sensor
PC12922CC —19—24OCT13
Prescription
17. Select YARA N-Sensor from Prescription drop-down GreenStar 3 will read the rate provided by the YARA
list. N-Sensor and will send it as prescription rate to the
18. Select the ENTER button to accept the prescription. connected implement controller.
19. Setup is complete.

CZ76372,000015F -19-24OCT13-6/6
120-4 103113
PN=326
GreenSeeker®
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
GPS Settings
NOTE: GreenSeeker®is for use in North America and
YARA N-Sensor is for use in Europe.
MENU button
Press: MENU button >> StarFire 3000 button >> StarFire PC17341CC —19—24OCT13
3000 Main softkey >> Serial Port tab
StarFire 3000 button

PC17336 —UN—24OCT13
StarFire 3000 Main softkey
GreenSeeker is a trademark of NTech Industries, Inc.

CZ76372,0000185 -19-24OCT13-1/2
Reference the GreenSeeker manual to check for

GreenSeeker GPS settings. Set the Baud and Output
rates for the StarFire 3000 on the Serial Port tab page to
match the GreenSeeker settings. GGA and RMC must
be checked in the Messages section of the Serial Port
tab page.
PC9709CC —19—24OCT13
StarFire 3000 - Serial Port Tab

CZ76372,0000185 -19-24OCT13-2/2
125-1 103113
PN=327
GreenSeeker®
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
GreenSeeker
IMPORTANT: FieldDoc Connect Cable must be wired
for COM Port 2 at the GreenStar 3 display.
If no implement controller is connected to
MENU button
the GS3 Display, GreenSeeker cannot be PC17340 —UN—24OCT13
selected as a prescription.
1. Attach GreenSeeker hardware according to the

GreenSeeker manual.
2. Connect the GreenSeeker PDA to the GreenStar
RS-232 cab connector.
3. Calibrate the John Deere spray system according to
the spray system's manual. PC8676CC —19—24OCT13
4. Calibrate GreenSeeker System according to the

GreenSeeker manual. (Calibration may not be
needed).
5. Set Master Spray Switch (in cab) to AUX to enable
SprayStar to accept the prescription.
button >> RESOURCE/CONDITIONS softkey >> RESOURCE/CONDITION softkey
RESOURCES tab
7. Fill in Client, Farm, Field, and Task information to
enable documentation.
CZ76372,0000143 -19-24OCT13-1/6
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
8. Select MENU button >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO button
>> EQUIPMENT softkey >> MACHINE tab
Fill in machine information.
9. Press COM Port button. MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13

PC8677CC —19—24OCT13
EQUIPMENT softkey
125-2 103113
PN=328
GreenSeeker®
10. Select NEW in Profile drop-down box then enter

desired Profile name.
11. Assign Com Port to number 2.
12. Select N-Sensing in Port Type drop-down box.
13. Select Greenseeker (NA) in Controller Protocol
drop-down box.
14. Then press ACCEPT button to continue.
PC12920CC —19—24OCT13
COM Port Settings
CZ76372,0000143 -19-24OCT13-3/6
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
button >> DOCUMENTATION softkey >> PRODUCT
APPLICATION tab
MENU button
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13

PC8678CC —19—24OCT13
125-3 103113
PN=329
GreenSeeker®
PC12848CC —19—24OCT13
16. Select auto-generated product application tab. 17. Select Rx button to indicate prescription.
125-4 103113
PN=330
GreenSeeker®
PC12919CC —19—24OCT13
Prescription
18. Select GreenSeeker from Prescription drop-down list. The GS3 is now ready to receive target rates from
19. Select the ENTER button to accept the prescription. GreenSeeker.
20. Setup is complete.
CZ76372,0000143 -19-24OCT13-6/6
125-5 103113
PN=331
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Select: MENU >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO >> EQUIPMENT
Make sure that the Machine Type is set to Tractor. Then
press the COM Port button. MENU Softkey
PC17340 —UN—24OCT13

PC8677CC —19—24OCT13
EQUIPMENT softkey
CZ76372,000015E -19-24OCT13-1/6
IMPORTANT: Connect the CIS controller to the

GS3 display before setting up a profile. Once
setup is finished, the system attempts to
connect to the controller. If controller is not
connected, an error message (Communication
Error) is then displayed.
1. Select NEW in the Profile drop-down box then enter

the desired Profile name.
2. Assign the appropriate Com Port number to this Profile
(1 or 2).
3. Select Field Doc Connect in the Port Type drop-down
box.
4. Then press NEXT PAGE button to continue.
PC12915CC —19—24OCT13
COM Port Settings Page 1
130-1 103113
PN=332
1. Select the Implement Type and Implement Name from

the drop-downs.
2. Select Product App in the Operation drop-down.
3. Select John Deere in the Control Manufacturer
drop-down.
4. Select CIS in the Model drop-down.
5. Press the NEXT PAGE button to go to next step.
PC12916CC —19—24OCT13
CZ76372,000015E -19-24OCT13-3/6
A controller summary page is shown. Press accept button

to save settings and return to the Equipment Page.
After completing setup, the GS3 will attempt to connect
to the CIS controller.
PC12917CC —19—24OCT13
130-2 103113
PN=333
PC8678CC —19—24OCT13
Select: MENU >> GREENSTAR 3 PRO >>
DOCUMENTATION
CZ76372,000015E -19-24OCT13-5/6
PC12918CC —19—24OCT13
Documentation
A—Planting / Seeding Tab B—Product Application Tab
A Seeding tab (A) is auto generated when a John Deere with the CIS controller. Specify all required information
planter is on the CAN bus. A Product Application tab (B) for both tabs.
is also auto generated when connection is established
CZ76372,000015E -19-24OCT13-6/6
130-3 103113
PN=334
NOTE: AutoTrac requires CAN GPS messages • Parity none

from a StarFire receiver. • Stop 1
• Flow Control none
Non-John Deere GPS receivers that output correct NMEA • 1 or 5 Hz output rate (Recommend operation at 5 Hz.
0183 standard messages can be used for documentation Guidance requires 5 Hz.)
and manual guidance on GreenStar application. It is
critical that receiver is setup to output following messages: Without these messages, receiver will not function with
GreenStar application.
• GGA A harness and installation instructions are available to
• GSA connect DB9 port of receiver to correct pins of display
• RMC setup at 19200 baud (This is fixed and connector. See a John Deere dealer for more information.
Non-adjustable)
• Data Bits 8
OUO6050,0000CE1 -19-21JUL10-1/1
135-1 103113
PN=335
RS232 Harness kit
The RS232 Harness kit (PF90363) can be utilized to aid • Flow Control none
installation when connecting third party controllers or a • 1 or 5 Hz output rate (Recommend operation at 5 Hz.
GPS receiver to the GS3 display. This kit comes with Guidance requires 5 Hz.)
Instructions, Null Modem, Gender Changer and Harness.
The harness is approximately 1829 mm (6 ft) long and Without these messages, receiver will not function with
consists of a DB9 connector at one end and 5 wires with GreenStar application. From the receiver manufacturer's
female AMP pins attached at the other. These AMP pins wiring diagram, determine which wires from the receiver
will be inserted into the square 26 pin connector that are the signal transmit and signal ground. Verify that
attaches to the back of GS3 displays from harnesses Receiver Transmit connects to Pin 3 of the DB9 connector
PF80687 and PF80688. and receiver ground connects to pin 5 of the DB9. Look at
the front face of the connector to see the pinout number
If both a 3rd party controller and receiver will be connected designation.
to the GS3 simultaneously, two PF90363 kits may be
required. The Original GreenStar Field Doc Connect Pinout number are located on the back side of the
harness is only compatible with GS3 through the harness. connector (where the wires are inserted).
When using the original FDConnect harness, you must To Setup RS232 Serial Port 1 on a GS3 Display
choose Com port 1 in documentation setup. RS232 Wire Display Connector Pin #
Documentation with third party controllers Blue Pin 23 = Rx
Green Pin 22 = Tx
The list of GS3 supported controllers are the same as with
White Pin 25 = CTS
Original GreenStar Display and is available at your local
Red Pin 24 = RTS
John Deere dealer.
Black Pin 2 = Ground
Two serial ports are available in the GS3 display: Port
1 and Port 2. To Setup RS232 Serial Port 2 on a GS3 Display
RS232 Wire Display Connector Pin #
Connect DB9 connector to controller. Gender Changer
and Null Modem are required when connecting to Rawson Blue Pin 15 = Rx
and New Leader controllers. Properly configure the Green Pin 26 = Tx
controller to talk to GS3: White Pin 17= CTS
Red Pin 16 = RTS
Raven Controller: under the data menu key verify that
bAUD = 9600, triG = 1, Unit = sec, dLOG = ON. Black Pin 4 = Ground
Rawson or New Leader Controller: verify that the settings 1. Remove the square connector from the back of the
under the “Controller” button of the GS3 display match the GS3 display and from all power sources on the vehicle.
information on the controller (i.e. Mid Point on the GS3
Display should be the same value as on the Rawson or 2. The square AMP 26-pin display connector has a built
New Leader controller). GS3 will control only one channel in pin locking mechanism.
of Rawson controller for use with prescriptions. a. Locate the large single white locking tab.
NOTE: Set Rawson or New Leader controller to GPS b. Using a flat screwdriver, depress this tab. It will
Mode (under Mode Key) to enable serial port depress approximately 3 mm (1/8 in.).
communication with controller.
c. Two tabs on the opposing side will become exposed
Connecting a third party receiver once the single large tab is depressed.
AutoTrac requires CAN GPS messages from an original d. Once these two white tabs are exposed, the
StarFire receiver or StarFire iTC receiver. Non-John connector pins are unlocked.
Deere GPS receivers that output correct NMEA 0183
standard messages can be used for documentation and 3. Use the chart at the beginning of this instruction to
manual guidance with a GreenStar application. It is critical determine the pin locations for the desired Serial Port
that receiver is setup to output the following messages: you will utilize (for example: Serial Port 1 uses pin
locations 2, 22, 23, 24, & 25). Pin location numbers
• GGA are stamped into the black housing on the back of
• GSA the connector.
• RMC setup at 19200 baud (This is fixed and 4. Remove the white plugs for the correct pins you will
Non-adjustable)
add the RS232 wires to. The white plugs will pull out
• Data bits 8
easily with small needle-nosed pliers.
• Parity none
• Stop bits 1
Continued on next page CZ76372,0000142 -19-23AUG10-1/2
135-2 103113
PN=336
5. Insert harness wires into correct pin locations. You 1. Go to Menu | GS3 Pro | Letter F (GS3 Pro—Main) and
may need to utilize a needle-nosed pliers to push the select the Memory tab. Select Assign Serial Port.
connections forward through the orange seal in the
connector. 2. Select the Serial Port(s).
6. Once you have all 5 wires pushed up flush to the front 3. Select the option based on the device connected to
of the connector face, you need to lock the pins back the Serial Port(s).
in place by pushing down on the 2 white locking tabs 4. Arrow forward to complete.
until they are flush.
For additional information see the installation instruction
Configure GS3: needs to be configured to recognize the that came with the RS232 adapter.
device connected to the Serial Port. Assigned the Serial
Port
CZ76372,0000142 -19-23AUG10-2/2
135-3 103113
PN=337
Video
Video Application
CAUTION: Do not rely on a camera for

collision avoidance or bystander detection.
To avoid possible injury or death to operator
or others, always remain alert and aware of
surroundings when operating the machine.
Read and understand AVOID BACKOVER
PC13247CC —19—24OCT13
ACCIDENTS in the safety section.
IMPORTANT: Correctly understand whether the

camera is “mirrored” and whether the video
application is mirrored.
• Mount the camera in a sturdy and
secure location.
• Understand the camera’s field of view.
• Keep the camera properly serviced.
• Keep the camera lens clean.
The video function allows the operator to view video
from one camera at a time to observe areas around the
machine that are difficult to see.
CZ76372,00002D4 -19-24OCT13-1/1
Installing Video • Pin 14: Video 1 Ground

The display supports 3rd party cameras with the following
• Pin 20: Video 2 Signal
signal formats:
• Pin 21: Video 2 Ground
• NTSC (North America) • Pin 11: Video 3 Ground
• Pal (Europe) NOTE: These instructions do NOT cover camera and
An adapter harness is available from several camera harness installation. Please read the instructions
suppliers that connects to the 26 pin video connector on that come with your camera.
the back of the display.
NOTE: A quality ground is essential to picture clarity.
The video pins on the 26 pin video connector (V2) are:
CZ76372,0000280 -19-19APR11-1/1
PC12724CC —19—24OCT13
Video Settings
Select MENU > VIDEO > SETTINGS.
Video Menu Button

Continued on next page CZ76372,00002D7 -19-24OCT13-1/3
140-1 103113
PN=338
Video
Naming
Each of the three camera inputs can be given a unique
name so the operator can easily recognize each video
source. Select the text box corresponding with the video
input and enter the name. Each text box is limited to 7
characters.
PC13248CC —19—24OCT13
Naming Settings
CZ76372,00002D7 -19-24OCT13-2/3
Video Loop
Instead of manually changing the video source to see the
different camera views, the display can be configured to
loop though the different sources. Enter the amount of
time between changes of the camera view. Then select
which videos will be included in the loop by checking the
correct boxes.
Start the loop by pressing the Play softkey. Whenever
you want the loop to stop, press the same button, now
labeled Pause.
PC13249CC —19—24OCT13
Loop Settings
CZ76372,00002D7 -19-24OCT13-3/3
140-2 103113
PN=339
Video
Video Viewing
There are two locations to view video on the display.
Option 1: Select MENU > VIDEO.
Option 2: In the Layout Manager, setup a Home Page
to view video. Video is available in either full screen or
quarter screen.
PC13251CC —19—24OCT13
CZ76372,00002D5 -19-24OCT13-1/1
PC13250CC —19—24OCT13
Adjusting Video Image Quality
Increasing the contrast will brighten the video, while
decreasing contrast will darken the video.
Mirroring an image exchanges what is seen on the left and Adjust Video Settings
right sides of the image like a rear view mirror. The camera
or the display could mirror the image. Check whether the A—Mirror Image Toggle C—Increase Contrast
image is mirrored before using the Video feature. B—Decrease Contrast
IMPORTANT: Correctly understand whether the

camera is “mirrored” and whether the video
application is mirrored.
CZ76372,00002D6 -19-24OCT13-1/1
140-3 103113
PN=340
Data Management
Theory of Operation
Data and setup information can be transferred to and from

another GS3 2630 display or compatible desktop software
using a USB flash drive. It is also important to backup
your data to a USB flash drive periodically.
NOTE: Data can be transferred to Apex and several
3rd party desktop applications.
PC12690 —UN—16JUL10
Data and setup information are imported or exported as a
Data Profile. Only Global prescription maps and shapefile
prescriptions can be imported individually. Multiple
Profiles from one or more displays can be stored on one
USB flash drive IF they are given different names.
See the Data Type Details table to understand the types
of data included in setup information versus maps and
Documentation.
The internal memory is intended to have enough capacity 1. Menu >> GS3
to store all the data from a machine per season (e.g. 2. GS3 softkey
planting or harvest). A message will appear when 90% 3. Memory tab
of the memory is used. Data should be Exported and 4. Bar graph represents percent of total memory used,
deleted before memory used exceeds 90%. including system files.
To view the Memory space remaining, go to:

CZ76372,0000331 -19-25OCT13-1/1
Data Transfer Options

Export Data from the display
Data Profile is copied to the USB flash drive. Use this
option in the following examples:
• Backup Documentation data to a USB flash drive
• Transfer setup information and guidance lines to
another display
• Transfer setup information and guidance lines to
compatible desktop software
• Transfer screenshots and debug files to a USB flash
drive
Import Data to the display
PC13258CC —19—24OCT13
Data Profile is copied to the display. This option does
NOT import global prescriptions and shapefiles. Use this
option in the following examples:
• Import Field Names, boundaries, and guidance lines
from another GS3 2630 display or compatible desktop
software
• Import coverage and Section Control maps from Data Transfer Options
another GS3 2630 display
• Import field specific prescription (Rx) files from
Only Global Prescription (GRx) files and shape files are
compatible desktop software
imported into the display.
Import Global Prescriptions to the display
BA31779,00002E3 -19-24OCT13-1/1
145-1 103113
PN=341
Data Management
Exporting Data from the Display

1. Turn off all types of Recording and stop the vehicle.
2. Insert USB drive.
IMPORTANT: USB drive should have at least 1GB
of free memory. Large data sets may take
several minutes to transfer. Power loss
or removing the USB drive during data
transfer may cause data loss.
3. A Data Transfer page will appear within about 10

seconds.
4. Select Export Data.
PC13256CC —19—24OCT13
5. Select or create a Profile Name where the data will
be stored on the USB drive.
NOTE: Do not use of the following characters ( \ / : * ? "
< > | )when creating a Profile name. It will cause
the profile to fail to load to a display or Apex.
6. Select Begin Transfer. Export Data
7. When the data transfer is finished, a Data Transfer is

Complete message will appear. Export takes less time when exporting repeatedly to
the same Profile because the Documentation files (e.g.
IMPORTANT: Exporting to an existing Profile will As-applied and Yield map files) that are already in the
overwrite all setup information and data in Profile on the USB are not exported again. See the
that Profile except for Documentation files Data Type Details table to understand what data will be
used by desktop software. overwritten during Export and review the examples below.
CZ76372,0000289 -19-24OCT13-1/1
Importing Data to the Display

Import Data will replace the setup information in the
internal memory of the display with the setup information
in the Data Profile that is selected from the USB drive.
Only Prescription files can be imported individually to the
display. See the Data Type Details table to understand
what data will be overwritten during Import.
IMPORTANT: Large data sets may take several minutes
to transfer. Power loss or removing the USB
drive during data transfer may cause data loss.

PC13257CC —19—24OCT13

seconds.
4. Select Import Data.
5. Select the Profile Name on the USB drive to be
imported.
Import Data Alert
6. Select Begin Transfer.
7. When the data transfer is finished, a Data Transfer is
Complete message will appear.
BA31779,000035B -19-24OCT13-1/1
145-2 103113
PN=342
Data Management
PC14276CC —19—24OCT13
Importing Global or Shapefile Prescriptions
On a Desktop Computer
Insert a USB drive.
• Shapefile Prescriptions and Global Prescriptions (GRx) Import Global Prescriptions and Shapefile Data
files:
a. Create a folder named Rx in the root of the USB drive.
b. Copy the shapefiles and GRx files into this folder.
On the Display
NOTE: The GreenStar 3 2630 display has a limit
of 120 prescriptions.

seconds.
4. Select Import Global Prescriptions and Shapefile
PC14275CC —19—24OCT13
Data.
NOTE: The Import Global Prescriptions and Shapefile
Data softkey will be grayed out and unable to import
prescriptions, if USB has over 120 prescriptions.
5. Select either Import Rx (A) or Replace Rx (B).

• Selecting Import Rx (A) will add prescriptions from Import Data
the USB to the existing list of prescriptions on the
display. A—Import Rx C—Manage Rx List
B—Replace Rx
NOTE: Import Rx option will be grayed out and
unable to import prescriptions, if prescriptions
on USB plus prescriptions on the display is
greater than 120 prescriptions. 6. When the data transfer is finished, a Data Transfer is
Complete message will appear.
• Selecting Replace Rx (B) will delete all the
prescriptions on the display and replace them with
prescriptions in the USB.
IMPORTANT: If Replace Rx is selected all Global
and Shapefile Prescriptions on the display
will be deleted prior to importing.
BA31779,00003E1 -19-24OCT13-1/1
145-3 103113
PN=343
Data Management
Example 1 – Importing and Exporting 3. Operator 2 then Imports the Profile [2011.5.1 Planting].
Documentation Data He verifies the Machine and Implement settings for his
sprayer and sprays the flagged areas in the field.
Operator 1 records Flags in a field as he is planting, 4. Operator 2 then Exports the data to the same Profile
so those areas can be sprayed for weeds. Currently, name [2011.5.1 Planting]. This allows the Export to go
Operator 2 is spraying in a different field. Both machines faster and no data is lost.
have GS3 2630 displays. Below is one method to properly Question — At this point will the As-applied rate maps
manage the data on both displays: from the first fields that Operator 2 was spraying be in
Prior to the season: the Profile [2011.5.1 Planting] on the USB drive?
Answer — Yes, because when Operator 2 Imported
1. Using Apex the Farm Manager saved the Machine [2011.5.1 Planting], the As-applied maps on the display
and Implement settings for all of his equipment along were NOT overwritten. When he Exported in Step 4,
with field and product setup data to a USB drive with all of the As-applied maps in the display were saved to
the Profile name [2011.4.15 Setup]. the Profile [2011.5.1 Planting] on the USB drive.
2. Operators 1 and 2 both Imported this Profile into their See the Data Type Details table to understand what
displays. data is overwritten during Import and Export.
5. Operator 2 then Imports his previous Profile [2011.5.1
Current day: 4730 Sprayer] back into his display, so that he has the
1. Operator 1 finishes planting the field, Exports the data setup data and maps from the fields he was previously
from his display to the USB drive, naming the Profile spraying.
[2011.5.1 Planting]. 6. Later, the Farm Manager unloads the data from
2. The same day, Operator 2 receives the USB drive the USB drive to Apex. Apex automatically finds
from Operator 1 and first Exports the data from his setup information and data from all 3 Profiles. When
GS3 2630 on the sprayer, so that no data is lost when files have duplicate names, the files that were most
he Imports the planter data. He Exports to the same recently changed will be Unloaded to Apex.
USB drive, using a different Profile name [2011.5.1
4730 Sprayer]. Now there are now 3 Profiles in the
GS3_2630 folder on the USB drive.
CZ76372,00002DB -19-19APR11-1/1
Example 2 – Backup Documentation Data Yield map log files that are already in the Profile on
the USB drive are not exported again. In this case,
A farmer has purchased a GS3 2630 display to replace his the farmer is NOT importing data, so he is NOT
GS2 2600 display. He plans to use the GS3 2630 in both managing multiple Profiles and the risk of overwriting
his planter and combine. He wants to backup his data from setup information or data unintentionally is low.
the display frequently and plans to give the data to his crop
consultant at the end of planting and harvest. He does not After the Planting Season:
plan to Import any data to his display during the season.
Below is one method to properly manage the data: 1. The Farmer gives the USB drive to his crop consultant,
who copies the Profile [Planting 2011] and gives the
Prior to the season: USB drive back to the farmer.
1. The Farmer unloads the data from his GS2 2600 2. The Farmer deletes Documentation Data Only and
compact flash card to Apex. Clears Maps from the displays internal memory, so
2. He saves all necessary setup information and that Export times are faster during harvest. Setup
guidance lines for planting from Apex to a USB drive, information, guidance lines, and boundaries remain
naming the Profile [Planting 2011]. on the display.
3. He Imports the Profile [Planting 2011] into his new See the Data Type Details table to determine what data
GS3 2630. will be deleted for each option.
During to the Planting Season: During Harvest Season:
1. At the end of each day during planting, the farmer 1. At the end of each day during harvest, the farmer
Exports data to the same profile [Planting 2011]. Exports data to the same Profile, named [Harvest
NOTE: Export takes less time when exporting repeatedly 2011]. This way the [Planting 2011] Profile remains
to the same Profile because the As-applied and on the USB as a backup.
CZ76372,00002DC -19-19APR11-1/1
145-4 103113
PN=344
Data Management
Example 3 – Transferring Guidance Lines 4. Operator 2 then Imports the Profile [2011.5.3 Planter
12 row]. He needs to enter the Machine and
Operators 1 and 2 are both planting in the same field Implement settings for his planter because they were
with 12 and 24 row planters respectively and would like not entered previously into that Profile. He then
to operate on the same guidance tracks. Both machines selects the Guidance line [Planter N-S 2011] and any
have GS3 2630 displays. Below is one method to properly other necessary setup information.
manage the data on both displays: Question — At this point, are any of the guidance lines
1. Operator 1 enters the field first and creates a straight that Operator 2 created previously still on his display?
track, naming it [Planter N-S 2011]. Answer — No, those lines were overwritten when
2. After 1 pass, Operator 1 Exports the data from his he Imported the Profile from Operator 1, but they are
display to a USB drive, naming the Profile [2011.5.3 saved on the USB drive in Profile [2011.5.3 Planter
Planter 12 row]. 24 row].
3. Operator 2 is given the USB drive and first Exports 5. Two days later, Operator 2 wants to save a backup of
the data from his display, so that no data is lost when the data on his display. He Exports data to the same
he Imports the Profile from Operator 1. He Exports to USB, giving the Profile a different name that he can
the same USB drive, using a different Profile name remember [2011.5.5 Planter 24 row] to clearly indicate
[2011.5.3 Planter 24 row]. Now there are now 2 where the data is from and ensure that no data is
Profiles in the GS3_2630 folder on the USB drive. overwritten.
CZ76372,00002DD -19-19APR11-1/1
Example 4 – Importing Global Prescriptions 1. The farmer leaves a USB drive in the tractor for the
and Shapefiles consultants.
A farmer is using a GS3 2630 display for planting. He 2. He instructs the consultants to save the prescription
has 3 different crop consultants bringing him prescription Shapefiles to that USB drive. That way, the Shapefiles
Shapefiles at different dates throughout planting season. from all 3 consultants will be on the USB drive and
Below is one method to properly manage the data: they will all be Imported to the display.
3. The farmer imports the prescription files to the display.
NOTE: The Import Global Prescriptions and
Shapefile Data option only imports Global NOTE: Overwriting Shapefiles is optional, and
and Shapefile prescriptions. the displayed prescription Shapefile list can
be cleaned up by the farmer before being
imported from the USB drive.
BA31779,00003D5 -19-27MAR12-1/1
Example 5 – Modifying a Profile 2. The operator then saves the Rx map from Apex to the
same Profile [2011.5.3 Planter 24 row]. The coverage
An operator begins planting a field and then determines and Section Control maps remain in that Profile on
that he wants to use a different Prescription (Rx) map. the USB drive.
He has the new Rx map in Apex, but he is using Section 3. The operator then Imports the same Profile [2011.5.3
Control and wants to continue using the same coverage Planter 24 row] back into his display.
and Section Control maps to complete the field. Below is
one method to properly manage the data: IMPORTANT: The operator did NOT continue planting
during the time that he Exported and Imported
1. The operator Exports Data naming the Profile data. If he had, then the data he recorded during
[2011.5.3 Planter 24 row]. that time would have been lost during the Import.
BA31779,00002E4 -19-15NOV11-1/1
Transferring Data between Two Displays between different John Deere Display models (i.e.
Original GreenStar Display, GS2 1800, GS2 2600, and
Apex or a compatible 3rd party desktop software is GS3 2630). Due to different file versions, data will not
required for transferring data and setup information load when transferred directly between different models.
CZ76372,00002DF -19-19APR11-1/1
145-5 103113
PN=345
Data Management
Delete Data Options

There are five options for deleting data from the display:
1. Delete Coverage and Section Control Maps
• Delete at the end of the season or to create a new map
with the same Field Name.
• Go to Menu >> GS3 >> Mapping >> Map Settings >>
Clear
2. Delete Adaptive Curve Data
• If using Adaptive Curves, delete Curve Data when no
longer needed to repeat these guidance lines.
• To delete Adaptive Curves:
PC14277CC —19—24OCT13
a. Select current curve selection box.
b. Select “List Cleanup” on drop-down menu.
c. Use Data Cleanup to rename Adaptive Curves for a
field.
d. Delete Adaptive Curves on a field by field basis.
3. Delete Documentation Data Only
• This option may be used for the following reasons: Data Cleanup
a. You want to delete your planting rate maps after
planting season, so that there is less data on the
A—Select All C—Delete Selected Data
display and data transfers will take less time during B—Prescriptions D—Cancel
harvest.
b. The internal memory is full.
• Go to Menu >> GS3 >> GS3 softkey >> Memory tab >>
Erase Data >> Documentation Data • Delete selected prescriptions on the display to free up
memory.
4. Delete All Data • Insert USB >> Import Global Prescriptions and Shapefile
Data >> Manage Rx List >> Select Prescriptions Not
• All data and setup information will be deleted from the Needed (B) >> Delete Selected Data (C) >> Yes
display. This option is rarely used and may be used
for the following reasons: NOTE: If two prescriptions have the same name, only
a. You want to start over one prescription will show on the
b. You want to sell the display to someone else Manage Rx List. If the prescription shown
c. You think the setup data may be causing a problem to is selected to be deleted, both prescriptions
occur on the display. with the same name will be deleted.
• Go to Menu >> GS3 >> GS3 softkey >> Memory tab
>> Erase Data >> All Data
See the Data Type Details table to determine what data
will be deleted for each option.
5. Delete Selected Prescriptions on the Display
HC94949,0000323 -19-24OCT13-1/1
145-6 103113
PN=346
Data Management
Data Type Details

Deleted with Overwritten
Deleted When
Data Type File Type Created in Read by Documentation when Importing /
Maps are Cleared
Only Option Exporting a Profile
Client/Farm/Field
Tasks
Machine /
Implement. Setup.fds* Display and Apex Display and Apex No No Yes
Settings
Crop / Product
Settings
Guidance Lines JDShape Display and Apex Display and Apex No No Yes
Boundary JDShape Display and Apex Display and Apex No No Yes
Flags JDShape Display and Apex Display and Apex No No Yes
Section Control
Grid Display Display only No Yes Yes
Map
Coverage Map Grid Display Display only No Yes Yes
As-applied / Yield
Grid Display Display only No Yes Yes
Map
As-applied / Yield
Log Display Apex only Yes No No
Map
Totals Database Display Display and Apex No No Yes
ESRI Shapefiles ESRI® Shapefile 3rd Party Software Display and Apex No No No
Display (Shapefile
Global Rx Grid Display No No No
Converter)
Field Specific Rx JDShape Apex Display and Apex No No Yes**
Variety Locator Grid Apex Display and Apex No No Yes
Aerial Images Grid Apex Display and Apex No No Yes
SW Ditches /
JDShape Display Display and Apex No No Yes
Levees
SW Surveys Grid Display Display and Apex No No Yes
ISO File Server*** Anything Controllers Controllers No No No
* Incorrect Setup data version causes "Incompatible Setup *** Data is stored on USB drive and not imported to display.
Data" alarm on display.
** Option to replace or add to existing Rx or Shapefiles
when importing.
BA31779,00003CF -19-28MAR12-1/1
USB Troubleshooting Tips • Wait 10 seconds, because large USB drives may take
The USB connectors on the side of the display are time to be recognized
intended to only work with the USB drives, not smart • Use the other USB connector
phones or other devices. If a USB drive is inserted and • Format the USB drive (FAT or FAT32 format)
nothing happens: • Use a different USB drive
CZ76372,000028C -19-19APR11-1/1
145-7 PN=347
103113
Data Management
Alarm – GreenStar Setup Data Invalid

To Import data to the display from Apex desktop software,
the software versions on each must be compatible. The
compatible software versions are listed in the Software
Update release notes.
When the display software needs to be updated to be
compatible with the Apex software version, the following
alert will appear.
PC13253CC —19—25OCT13
Update Display Software
BA31779,000035C -19-24OCT13-1/2
When the Apex software needs to be updated to be

compatible with the display software version, the following
alert will appear.
PC13254CC —19—25OCT13
Update Desktop Software
BA31779,000035C -19-24OCT13-2/2
145-8 103113
PN=348
Data Management
Alarm - GreenStar Setup Information Corrupt

Every time the display loads setup data when it
successfully boots up, it also creates/updates a backup of
that setup data.
If the setup data in the internal memory becomes corrupt,
the display will try to load the backup setup data.
If the backup file is good, all the user needs to do is
acknowledge that the backup has been loaded.
NOTE: Any modifications since last successful
startup may have been lost.
PC13669CC —19—25OCT13
Backup File Loaded
145-9 103113
PN=349
Data Management
PC13670CC —19—25OCT13
PC13671CC —19—25OCT13
No Good Backup Available Recovery in Progress
If the backup file is missing or corrupt, the display will load

default setup data. The user will need to save setup data
to the USB drive and load it to the display.
PC13672CC —19—25OCT13
Default Setup Loaded
CZ76372,00003B0 -19-24OCT13-2/2
145-10 103113
PN=350
Updating Software
Downloading Software Updates Software updates for GreenStar system components such
Software updates are periodically released for GreenStar as StarFire Receivers, AutoTrac Universal, GreenStar
displays and other GreenStar system components to Rate Controller, etc. are also downloaded via LiveUpdate
provide enhancements and performance improvements. and copied to the USB drive along with the display update.
These updates are managed by a desktop application These components can be updated via the display, if
called GreenStar LiveUpdate, which can be downloaded they are connected to the display when the USB drive is
from www.StellarSupport.com. Once installed on your inserted.
computer, GreenStar LiveUpdate will download the most
recent update, copy that update to your USB drive, and
notify you when future updates are available.
CZ76372,000028D -19-12JAN11-1/1
Determining Software Version on Display

1. Menu
2. Display
3. Display Diagnostics
4. Readings Tab
5. Read the Application Software Build
PC12688CC —19—24OCT13
Software Version
CZ76372,00000CD -19-24OCT13-1/1
150-1 103113
PN=351
Updating Software
Updating Display and System Components

1. Download and copy the software update files to a USB
drive using GreenStar LiveUpdate.
NOTE: It is recommended to clean all files off the USB
drive before copying the software update files
to it. Do NOT have software update files for a
different display model on the USB drive.
2. Turn the machine ignition to the run position.

3. Insert the USB drive into the display.
4. A USB Device Detected message will appear if the
display recognizes the USB drive. Read and Accept it.
5. The display will check the software versions of the all
PC13092CC —19—24OCT13
the connected components against the versions on
the USB drive and a Software Update message will
appear listing all of the components that have new
versions available on the USB drive.
- Select the green arrow to Accept the software
update.
- Select the button with 3 lines to Cancel the update.
The Software Update message will be available Software Update
again the next time the USB drive is inserted.
IMPORTANT: Do not turn off power or remove NOTE: The display will reboot itself during the update.
USB drive while display is reprogramming.
Doing so can damage display and put 6. A message stating The Update Was Successfully
software in an irrecoverable state. Installed will appear when the update is complete.
7. Remove the USB drive.
NOTE: The display will not be available for use during
software updates. Updating the display and NOTE: The display update files will be copied to
other controllers may take an hour or more. the display, but the install files for the other
system components will not.
NOTE: If this message is not displayed, download and
copy the software update to the USB drive again.
CZ76372,000028E -19-24OCT13-1/1
150-2 103113
PN=352
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Message Center
Message Center is used to access detailed diagnostic
information and to manually initiate re-programming
sessions. Message Center can also display detailed
MENU button
diagnostic information such as Control Unit Information PC12868CC —19—24OCT13
and CAN Bus Information, used by your John Deere ™
Dealer for advanced troubleshooting.
Soft Keys are listed below:
• A-Message Center Reprogramming Page
• B-Transfer Debug Files
• C-Messages
• D-Diagnostic Addresses MESSAGE CENTER button (With Info Icon)
• E-Trouble Codes
• F-Control Unit Information
• G-Bus Information
Message Center screen can be reached by selecting the
MENU button then MESSAGE CENTER button (With Info
Icon).
Continued on next page CZ76372,00002F0 -19-24OCT13-1/8
155-1 103113
PN=353
PC8665CC —19—24OCT13 PC13266CC —19—24OCT13
COMPONENTS AND SOFTWARE VERSIONS button DATA CLEANUP button

PC8667CC —19—24OCT13 PC8668CC —19—24OCT13
MAIN button DIAGNOSTIC ADDRESSES button

PC8669CC —19—29OCT13 PC8670CC —19—24OCT13
TROUBLE CODES button Electronic CONTROL UNIT INFORMATION button

PC8671CC —19—24OCT13
BUS INFORMATION button
Message center will display all active alarms, alert

messages and icons.
155-2 103113
PN=354
PC8582 —UN—01NOV05 PC8648 —UN—01NOV05

Message Center Icons
These icons are used throughout Message Center.
CANCEL CLEAR
PC8649 —UN—01NOV05 PC8650 —UN—01NOV05
ENTER GOTO
PC8651 —UN—01NOV05 PC8652 —UN—01NOV05
NEXT CAL RETURN
CZ76372,00002F0 -19-24OCT13-3/8
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
COMPONENTS AND SOFTWARE VERSIONS button
will allow users to view all components on the network
and the software versions loaded to them. You may also
use the reprogram device button to reprogram a specific
controller if necessary. MENU button
PC12868CC —19—24OCT13
MESSAGE CENTER button (With Info Icon)

PC8665CC —19—24OCT13
COMPONENTS AND SOFTWARE VERSIONS button
155-3 103113
PN=355
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Diagnostic Addresses
NOTE: Diagnostic addresses are available to access
specific diagnostic information. This information
can assist the John Deere Dealer in diagnosing
problems. Different device controllers can be MENU button
PC12868CC —19—24OCT13
selected from drop-down box, as shown.
Select DIAGNOSTIC ADDRESSES button. The

number of devices available will depend upon machine
configuration. The list of addresses can be scrolled up or
down with rotary thumb wheel. Selecting an address will
show data for that address.

PC8668CC —19—24OCT13
DIAGNOSTIC ADDRESSES button
CZ76372,00002F0 -19-24OCT13-5/8
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Trouble Codes
Select TROUBLE CODES button, a list of controllers will
appear and controllers with diagnostic codes are indicated.
MENU button
PC12868CC —19—24OCT13
Individual controllers can be accessed by navigating with
rotary thumb wheel and selected by selecting ENTER
button, to view codes for that controller.
Codes can also be displayed for all controllers by selecting

SHOW ALL button with rotary thumb wheel and selecting
ENTER button. Codes can be relayed to a John Deere MESSAGE CENTER button (With Info Icon)
dealer to assist in diagnosing machine problems. PC8669CC —19—29OCT13
TROUBLE CODES button
155-4 103113
PN=356
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Device Info and Bus Status
When DEVICE INFO button is selected, controllers
communicating on CANBUS communication system
will be indicated. Message counts indicate quantity of
communications from controller. When BUS STATUS MENU button
PC12868CC —19—24OCT13
button is selected, status of various communication
networks will be indicated.

PC8670CC —19—24OCT13
Electronic CONTROL UNIT INFORMATION button

PC8671CC —19—24OCT13
BUS INFORMATION button
155-5 103113
PN=357
PC8663 —UN—05AUG05
Data Cleanup
DATA CLEANUP will only be available when an ISO
Implement is connected.
DATA CLEANUP is used to remove ISO Implement data MENU button
from the display. The information will be reloaded after the PC12868CC —19—24OCT13
display restarts. This is useful if there was a problem with a

controller loading on the display. See the ISO Implements
section of this Operator’s Manual for more information.

PC13266CC —19—24OCT13
DATA CLEANUP button
CZ76372,00002F0 -19-24OCT13-8/8
Viewing Basic Diagnostic Readings 1. Select Menu button.

Basic display diagnostics such as operating voltage, 2. Select Display .
and CAN bus status can be found on the Diagnostics
Readings Page. 3. Select Diagnostics soft key.
This information maybe requested by your John Deere 4. System diagnostics are located on Display Settings
™ dealer to aid diagnostics. Readings page.
OUO6050,000129B -19-19JUL10-1/1
Resetting Display
IMPORTANT: All setup data entered since power up
could be lost when using reset button.
Should display fail to respond to operator inputs, system

can be reset by selecting and holding the reset button
for 3 seconds (until the light on the front of the display
starts blinking). This will reboot system and restart
all applications on display. If resetting the display is
frequently required, contact a John Deere dealer. It
is recommended to turn power off before attaching or
removing implements and other electrical components on
CAN Bus communication system.
PC8705 —UN—17AUG05
A—DISPLAY RESET button
OUO6050,0002328 -19-13OCT09-1/1
155-6 103113
PN=358
Pre-Season Checklist for Seeding □ Save all data to your USB Flash Drive
In the Office In the Machine
□ Review all current Operator's Manuals, Quick Reference □ Make sure the display address is set to “primary”
Guides, Installation Instructions, and Product Updates □ Adjust backlighting and contrast on the GS3 display
□ Read and perform all implement calibration procedures □ Set record stop/delay height
for your machine(s)
□ Review Prescriptions for Map Based Prescriptions in In the Field
Apex or other compatible desktop software □ Check StarFire receiver for GPS Signal
In Apex □ Review Pre-Season Checklists for your specific
machine and implement
NOTE: When checking for GPS signal, move machine to
□ Ensure all farm and field names are entered and open view of sky and turn key to second position. If
accurate receiver has been stored for longer than six months,
□ Enter all seed varieties it may take the receiver one to two hours to lock
□ Enter all flags for tracking on to a GPS and/or differential signal.
CZ76372,000018C -19-04OCT10-1/1
Pre-Season Checklist for Guidance

□ Adjust backlighting and contrast on the GS3 display
In the Office □ Turn tracking to desired mode ) Straight, Curve Track,
RowFinder
□ Review all current Operator's Manuals, Quick Reference □ Unsure machine has latest SSU Software
Guides, Installation Instructions, and Product Updates □ Set offsets
□ Read and perform all implement calibration procedures □ Set steer sensitivity
for your machine(s)
In the Field
In Apex
□ Check StarFire receiver for GPS Signal
NOTE: When checking for GPS signal, move machine to
□ Ensure all farm and field names are entered and open view of sky and turn key to second position. If
accurate receiver has been stored for longer than six months,
□ Import A/B lines from Original GreenStar System or GS3 it may take the receiver one to two hours to lock
□ Tie Global A/B lines to client, farm and field on to a GPS and/or differential signal.
In the Machine
CZ76372,00000B3 -19-09JUL10-1/1
155-7 103113
PN=359
Pre-Season Section Control for Planters □ Machine setup

Checklist □ Section setup
□ Section Control setup
1—2 Weeks Prior to Planting □ Clear any preexisting coverage maps for field (if
NOTE: Apex is not available in all EAME countries. needed)
□ Define minimize skips, minimize overlap or percent
overlap for exterior, interior, and coverage areas
□ Become familiar with the product. □ Setturn on/off times
The following resources are available on
www.StellarSuport.com □ GS3 Documentation setup
□ Familiarize yourself with the GS3 by utilizing the □ Resources/Conditions—clent, farm, field, and task
online GS3 simulator
□ Equipment—machine and offsets
□ Read the Section Control section of the GS3 Basics □ Operation—seed type, brand, variety, rate, etc.
Operators Manual
□ Prescriptions—choose prescription (if needed)
□ Read the GreenStar Rate Controller Operators □ Verify sections
Manual
□ Verify offsets
□ Read the Section Control Settings Quick Sheet □ Enable Section Control (place check mark in box)
□ Make sure all software is updated to most recent □ Enable all sections through the GS3 or turn on section
switches using the switchbox
versions:
□ GS3 version 2.01222 or higher □ Turn on Master Switch (foot switch or switchbox)
□ GreenStar Rate Controller version 2.01k or higher □ Make a partial or complete pass
□ Apex 2.0 Production version or higher □ Verify seed placement by digging
□ Record exterior and interior boundaries (if needed) Additional Resources—available on www.StellarSup-
□ Apex Setup port.com
□ Input setup data into Apex (new varieties, crops, farm
names, etc.) • Section Control QRG
□ Save setup data to your USB drive • GreenStar Rate Controller QRG
□ Insert USB drive into GS3, import setup data, and • Section Control Settings Quick Sheet
verify import was successful • GS3 button (H) Setup Guide
• Tips for Operating iTEC Pro and Section Control
Day of Planting
□ GreenStar Rate Controller setup
BA31779,00002E7 -19-15NOV11-1/1
155-8 103113
PN=360
Frequently Asked Questions

A: Verify that both the display and desktop
• Q: When I try to record in GreenStar 3, I get the software have the latest software versions. Go to
message, Implement Recording Not Allowed. What do I StellarSupport.com to determine the latest versions
need to do to fix this? for the display and Apex. If using Apex, make sure to
have the proper items check marked (e.g. Enterprise,
A: Verify you have the correct Client, Farm, Field Products, Resources, etc.) when saving data to the
and Task set up under GS3 button (G). Then, make USB drive. Then select the correct drive letter for the
sure you have an operation setup in button (I). If you USB drive by the GS3 2630 display option.
have Tillage, Product Application, or Other operation
defined, verify you only have one operation set up. If
running a Planting or Seeding operation, it is possible
• Q: My AutoTrac Universal unit will not activate when I
get a StarFire signal in the mornings. Do I have to drive
to set up a Product Application operation as well. If around for a while before the resume switch engages
the error message remains, select button (C) and AutoTrac Universal?
select Recording from the drop-down menu. This is a
Recording Diagnostics page and will give you an idea A: ATU relies solely on the StarFire Receiver to obtain
of why the system will not allow recording. information about the direction you are traveling.
Therefore, if the signal has been acquired, but no
• Q: I'm attempting to dial-in my AutoTrac Universal vehicle movement has taken place, the Direction under
system and don't understand what each sensitivity is for. Info, AutoTrac will say unknown. Watch this Direction
while driving forward in a gentle curve. As soon as it
A: Refer to the AutoTrac Universal Quick Reference changes from Unknown to Forward the ATU unit will
Guide that came with your AutoTrac Universal System, operate properly when you activate AutoTrac.
or print it off from the www.StellarSupport.com website.
It defines these and other terms:
• Q: What is the proper way to cycle power on my
GreenStar 3 display?
Steer speed is how fast the ATU wheel turns.
A: Turn the key off, the screen will go dark and the
Acquire sensitivity is how aggressively the unit drives green LED light in the bottom right corner will go out.
to the line. After the LED light is off, the system may be powered
back on. If the GS3 has been powered off for less than
Line Sensitivity Tracking is used to keep the lateral 24 hours, it will power right up to the last screen used. If
error low. If your machine gets offline up to a foot, the it has been more than 24 hours, you will see the John
Tracking Sensitivity may be set too low. Deere logo as well as a progress indicator at startup.
Line Sensitivity Heading adjusts how much the unit
corrects for heading error. If you see a lot of left and right
• Q: I want to use a prescription in my new GreenStar 3
system and I want to be able to see the as-applied map
steering, the Heading Sensitivity may be set too high. over the top of my anhydrous prescription layer. How
do I set this up?
Each sensitivity has an optimum value that works best
for the specific vehicle platform you are using. Refer A: Save the prescription to your USB drive in Apex
to www.StellarSupport.com for recommended starting or other compatible desktop software. Select GS3
points for your vehicle platform. button (A), and select Map Settings at the bottom of the
page. Select the prescription as the background layer.
• Q: I would like to use the coverage map feature in Choose Product Rate 1 that comes from your approved
GreenStar 3. How do I properly set this up? controller as the foreground layer. Then configure your
homepage with the desired information.
A: Select GS3 button (A) and select Map Settings.
Then select the drop-down menu for Foreground and
select Coverage. This selection will paint the map a
• Q: What causes the StarFire receiver signal strength
bar on my GS3 homepage to turn orange and display
light blue color. If you are seeding or applying chemical, an alert symbol?
you can select either Seed Rate 1 or Product Rate 1
as Foreground. Either of these selections will color A: If the number of satellites in a solution drops to six or
the map based on a legend that corresponds with the below, you are receiving a marginal signal which results
amount of seed or product applied. in an orange bar and an alert sign. If there are less than
five satellites in a solution, the bar will be red, indicating
• Q: My GreenStar 3 does not recognize setup data no GPS signal. For the bar to be green, there must be
saved from Apex or other compatible desktop software. at least seven satellites in a solution.
What do I need to do to get this working properly?
NOTE: Apex is not available in all EAME countries. • Q: Why do I get message saying, Recording is Not
Allowed when I try to turn GS3 Recording on even
though my signal strength is good?
155-9 103113
PN=361
• Q: I used Section Control on my GS3 System on a field

A: This is a common error if multiple recording that I want to reapply, but the system shows the field as
operations have been selected. Go to the GS3 menu already covered and won't allow me to spray it again.
and select GreenStar 3 Pro. Select button (I) to enter
the GS3 Documentation screen, and make sure there A: You need to create a new task so that same field
are no duplicate operation tabs displayed at the top of will appear as a completely separate layer. The GS3
the screen. If there are duplicates, select the operation coverage map will then be blank, and you'll be allowed
that does not belong and select the “Remove” button. to spray the field again.
• Q: I get the error message Implement Recording not • Q: What is Shading?

allowed on my GreenStar 3 Display. What should I do
about it? A: Shading occurs when obstacles such as trees,
buildings or other solid objects block all or part of a
A: Check Diagnostics page (C) from the GreenStar 3 satellite(s) signal. GPS satellites emit two frequencies,
Pro Menu and change the view box from Deere GPS L1 and L2. The L2 frequency is weaker than L1, and
to Recording. This should tell you what recording was thin objects, like tree leaves, will block L2 easily where
stopped, and you can make the necessary adjustments. the L1 signal will go right through. To run AutoTrac,
the StarFire requires a 5 satellites solution with full
• Q: When I spray or plant using both the Original and communication with the both the L1 and L2 frequencies
GS3 Displays, I get error message "ID 234" or "Display from each satellite.
address claim conflict." What does this mean and what
should I do? • Q: What is Optimize Shading?
A: Both displays are trying to run as the primary A: The Optimize Shading feature, available with
display. If the GS3 is the actual primary display, power StarFire iTC software versions 3.01K and newer,
down and unplug it, then power up again with only the allows you to continue using AutoTrac when SF1/
Original GreenStar Display plugged in. Go to SETUP SF2 reception is degraded due to shading. Optimize
> ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR > DISPLAY Shading allows a minimum of 4 satellites in solution with
ADDRESS and set it as the primary. Now plug in the only L1 communication to maintain running AutoTrac.
GS3 Display with the power still running on the Original Optimize Shading is only available with SF1 and SF2
display. If you have two Original GreenStar displays, on iTC receivers, and will not function with RTK or Gen
hook them up to the primary connections and turn on 2 receivers. When using RTK, the Optimize Shading
the power. Go to SETUP > ORIGINAL GREENSTAR checkbox is still displayed, but it has no affect on the
MONITOR and select line D, so it shows as primary. receiver. Optimize Shading can be used with both
Turn off the power, unhook the primary processor Original and GS3 displays.
and display, and hookup the secondary display to the
auxiliary connections. Power up and go to SETUP > • Q: Does Optimize Shading Affect AutoTrac Accuracy?
ORIGINAL GREENSTAR MONITOR and select line
D to set to Aux 1. Now power down and hook up the A: Although Optimize Shading allows the user to
processor, primary display, and secondary display to continue using AutoTrac, it is operating on a degraded
the correct connections. Finally, power up once more. signal level and the operator can expect the system
You may have to run Standard Run Page Layout from to be less accurate. Line jumps and shifts may be
the Setup menu after you are set up. more prevalent. Optimize Shading does not affect GPS
accuracy when all of the L1 and L2 frequencies are
• Q: I lost the StarFire iTC button from the GS3 Main available to the receiver. It merely allows AutoTrac to
Menu. How can I get it back? stay activated when GPS signal is degraded. If the
receiver has full signal, Optimize Shading does not
A: Go to MENU > MESSAGE CENTER > button (A), affect accuracy.
highlight GPS Receiver, select Reprogram Device and
select current software (3.70E). Contact your dealer • Q: Should I Leave Optimize Shading on All the Time?
if problem persists.
A: Under most circumstances, Optimize Shading should
• Q: Why did my AutoTrac options disappear from my be turned off. It should only be used in situations where
GS3 Display? the operator would like to continue running AutoTrac if
a reduction in signal quality is expected and optimum
A: First, check the GPS status to see if you are receiving AutoTrac accuracy is crucial. Optimize Shading should
signal, and ensure the Terrain Compensation Module be turned off if during a critical operation whereby it
is on and calibrated. You can also check the button (F) would be preferable for AutoTrac to deactivate during
from the GreenStar 3 Pro Menu to see if the AutoTrac signal degradation than to continue running AutoTrac
line shows as active. If not, call 1-888-953-3373 to with reduced accuracy.
activate it.
155-10 103113
PN=362
• Q: Does Optimize Shading Affect Documentation,

Coverage Mapping or Section Control? A: Currently we cannot edit the names of sequences
after they have been accepted. If you make a mistake
A: Having Optimize Shading checked will have no in renaming the sequence, (e.g 1770 Exterior Raise vs.
effect on Documentation, Coverage or Section Control 1770 Extrior Raise), there are a few options:
if degraded signal due to shading is encountered.
Documentation, Coverage and Section Control require a. Continue to setup the sequence, ignoring the error.
a minimum of only 3D/ RTG to operate. b. Create a new sequence with the correct name.
c. Start over with a blank USB drive. In this instance, it
• Q: Can I run over my previously recorded adaptive will be necessary to get all desired setup data from at
curve lines? least Apex version 2.6 back on the USB drive.
• Q: With multiple iTEC Pro sequences, how should I
A: Yes, with a feature within adaptive curves called keep these organized?
Repeat Mode which allows you to repeat over previously
recorded adaptive curve lines. This is located by going A: It is important to properly name the sequences.
to GS3 Pro, Guidance (B), Guidance Settings Tab, and “Raise” and “lower” will likely be different for the interior
selecting the Change button (next to the label Curve passable and headland boundaries, as well as for
Track Settings). In here, there will a check box to turn different implements and tasks.
on Repeat Mode.
• Q: Why does my AutoTrac Universal (ATU) deactivate
• Q: How do I remove unused iTEC Pro sequences? for no apparent reason?
A: Sequences are stored in the internal memory and A: When the ATU deactivates, a Stop Code is generated
cannot be deleted. Individual sequences cannot be and indicates why AutoTrac deactivated. On an Original
removed, but sequences can have the functions edited GreenStar Display, you will find the Stop Code by going
or removed. to INFO > AUTOTRAC. On a GS3, the stop code will be
displayed in the top left corner of the GS3 Pro Guidance
NOTE: If contents of the display are deleted, iTEC Screen or in GS3 Pro AutoTrac Universal Diagnostics.
sequences will also be deleted. Explanation of the stop code can be found in ATU Quick
Reference Guide.
• Q: What if I make a mistake naming an iTEC sequence,
or don’t have my sequences properly named?
BA31779,00002E8 -19-15NOV11-3/3
155-11 103113
PN=363
Reprogramming Error Codes

Error
Number Meaning What to Do
Reprogramming could not create a directory on the internal file system. User should try again, but
8 Directory creation error the session may fail again.
Check that all update files have been correctly saved to the USB flash drive (all files listed in
12 Missing update file ManifestFile.sdm should be on the drive in their proper path).
Reprogramming was not able to read one of the update files. Check for file corruption when the
14 File read error files were saved to the drive.
15 USB error USB removed during reprogramming.
Reprogramming was not able to write one of the update files to internal flash. File system cleanup
16 File write error problem, reboot the display and try again.
Reprogramming calculated a checksum that did not match the expected checksum. Check that all
44 Checksum failed files match the original image.
47 Incompatible hardware Unplug any 3rd party hardware and attempt to reprogram.
Customer is using an incorrect hardware revision version as the reprogramming image for the
48 Incompatible hardware display. Make sure you have the correct image for the display hardware.
The reprogramming ManifestFile.sdm file has been corrupted. Make sure the file matches the
49 Update file invalid original image.
User removed the USB flash drive during a reprogramming session. Repeat the reprogramming
52 User aborted process with the drive inserted the entire session.
56 Controller flash erase failed A PF controller could not erase its flash memory.
A PF controller received a record that was missing a colon. Customer could try reprogramming the
57 Message missing colon controller again in case of a bus error.
A PF controller received a record that was too long. Customer could try reprogramming the controller
58 Record too long again in case of a bus error.
A PF controller received a record that was not the expected length. Customer could try
59 Invalid record length reprogramming the controller again in case of a bus error.
A PF controller received a record that was out of the expected sequence. Customer could try
60 Sequence error reprogramming the controller again in case of a bus error.
Controller received odd A PF controller received a record that had an invalid address. Customer could try reprogramming the
61 address controller again in case of a bus error.
A PF controller stopped responding to the display during a reprogramming session. Check
connection to the controller, may require a power cycle. If communication is resumed, repeat the
62 Controller timed out reprogramming session.
NOR flash reprogramming There was an error with trying to reprogram the NOR flash boot application image.
63 problem
Unknown controller A PF controller returned a response that the display did not know how to interpret.
64 response
Reprogramming session Generic notification that some part of the reprogramming session failed. Another error will be
82 failed reported in addition to this one to indicate the specific failure mode.
This table contains the error codes that GS3 reprogramming software could report if a reprogramming session fails. In the case of an error,
reprogramming will post an alarm indicating the failure, and an error code, and text of the problem will be placed in the message center.
BA31779,00003F2 -19-11APR12-1/1
155-12 103113
PN=364
Alarm Screens
SPN.FMI Applicable Failure Mode Recommended Solutions
The voltage level of the switched power is greater than the nominal. Turn off the
158.3 VTI Switched Supply Voltage Too High ignition key, then turn it back on. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check power
supply wiring. Please contact your John Deere dealer.
The switched power voltage is below the nominal. Turn off the ignition key and turn it
158.4 VTI Switched Supply Voltage Too Low back on. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check the battery. Please contact
your John Deere dealer.
The voltage level of from the battery power supply is greater than the nominal. Cycle
168.3 Unswitched Supply Voltage Too High power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check wiring. Please
contact your John Deere dealer.
The voltage level from the battery is lower than the nominal. Cycle power on the
168.4 Unswitched Supply Voltage Too Low display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check battery power and recharge
it as needed. Please contact your John Deere dealer.
The LCD backlight was not turned off when the temperature was above the highest
1386 Display Unit Temperature Too High
limit. Please contact your John Deere dealer.
The LCD backlight was not turned off when the unit temperature was below the lowest
1386.1 Display Unit Temperature Too Low
limit. Contact you John Deere Dealer.
The 5.0 v regulated power is out of range. Click Cancel if it occurs occasionally. If
3597.2 Regulate Voltage 5.0 v Abnormal
it occurs continually, contact your John Deere Dealer.
3598.2 Regulated Voltage 1.5 v Abnormal
3599.2 Regulated Voltage 3.3 v Abnormal
Non-Volatile Memory Read/Write
523310.12 Failed to read/write from/to the NOR flash. See your John Deere dealer.
Failure
The voltage on the CCD_HIGH line of the CCD network is above the nominal. Cycle
523771.3 CCD+ Line Voltage Too High
power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check the harness wiring.
The voltage level on the CCD_HIGH line of the CCD network is below the nominal.
523771.3 CCD+ Line Voltage Too Low Cycle power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check the battery
and harness wiring.
The voltage on the CCD_Low line of the CCD network is above the nominal. Cycle
523772.4 CCD- Line Voltage Too High
power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check the harness wiring.
The voltage level on the CCD_Low line of the CCD network is below the nominal.
523772.4 CCD- Line Voltage Too Low Cycle power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check the battery
and harness wiring.
The voltage on the CAN_HIGH line of the Vehicle Bus (Tractor Bus) is above the
523773.3 Vehicle CAN+ Line Voltage Too High nominal. Cycle power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check
the harness wiring.
The voltage level on the CAN_HIGH line of the Vehicle CAN Bus (Tractor CAN Bus)
523773.4 Vehicle CAN+ Line Voltage Too Low is below the nominal. Cycle power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up
again, check the battery and harness wiring.
The voltage on the CAN_LOW line of the Vehicle Bus (Tractor Bus) is above the
523774.3 Vehicle CAN- Line Voltage Too High nominal. Cycle power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check
the wiring.
The voltage level on the CAN_LOW line of the Vehicle CAN Bus (Tractor CAN Bus)
523774.4 Vehicle CAN- Line Voltage Too Low is below the nominal. Cycle power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up
again, check the battery and harness wiring.
Real Time Clock malfunctioned. It may be caused by the damage on the RTC chip or
524050.12 Real Time Clock Malfunction
no power applied to the chip.
Implement CAN+ Line Voltage Too The voltage on the CAN_HIGH line of the Implement Bus is above the nominal. Cycle
524215.3
High power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check the harness wiring.
The voltage on the CAN_HIGH line of the Implement Bus is below 0.5 v Cycle power
Implement CAN+ Line Voltage Too
524215.4 on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check the battery power and
Low
recharge the battery as needed.
Implement CAN+ Line Voltage Too The voltage on the CAN_HIGH line of the Implement Bus is above nominal. Cycle
524217.3
High power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check wiring.
The voltage on the CAN_LOW line of the Implement Bus is below the nominal. Cycle
Implement CAN+ Line Voltage Too
524217.4 power on the display. If this diagnostic code shows up again, check the battery power
Low
and recharge the battery as needed.
OUO6050,000232A -19-13OCT09-1/1
155-13 PN=365
103113
Task Controller Alarms

Alarm, Task Controller, Device Configuration Error, The
device configuration block of the connected implement
isn't valid. The following error was detected: Manufacturer
Code:, Industry Group:, Identity Number:, Device Class:,
ISO Error Code:, Faulty Object ID:
This alarm screen will be displayed whenever an error in
the received Device Configuration Description of the ISO
implement was detected. Please contact your John Deere
Dealer or the manufacturer of the implement.
PC9745CC —19—24OCT13
Device Configuration Error
CZ76372,00002B6 -19-24OCT13-1/6
Alarm, Task Controller, Too Many Implements Connected,

The Task Controller has detected more than one
supported ISO implements. Please select the desired
implement below.
This alarm screen will be displayed whenever the ISO
Task Controller unit detects more then one compatible
ISO implement on the ISOBUS. The pull down list will
contain all found ISO implements which can be used for
documentation purposes. Each ISO Implement is listed
in the following format: 10 chars of manufacturer name +
10 chars of the implement type + ISO network address in
PC9746CC —19—24OCT13
the hex format.
Example: John Deere Sprayer with ISO Network Address
0x81: John Deere-Sprayer-81x
Too Many Implements Connected
155-14 103113
PN=366
Alarm, Task Controller, Invalid Implement Configuration,

The task controller detected an unsupported electronics
configuration on this implement. It will be ignored for this
operation.
This alarm screen will be displayed whenever an ISO
implement is detected, which has member controllers.
The John Deere Task controller does only support ISO
implements with a master controller and no member
controllers.
PC9747CC —19—24OCT13
Invalid Implement Configuration
CZ76372,00002B6 -19-24OCT13-3/6
Alarm, Task Controller, Invalid System Configuration, The

John Deere task controller detected an other conflicting
task controller in the system. Disconnect the other device
for further operation.
This alarm screen will be displayed whenever another ISO
Task Controller is found on the ISOBUS. Disconnecting
of the other Task Controllers is required because an
ISO implement can only work with one Task Controller,
which is in most cases the first one. When this alarm
screen is displayed the John Deere Task Controller is
not the first one, and cannot use the ISO implements for
PC9748CC —19—29OCT13
documentation purposes.
Invalid System Configuration
155-15 103113
PN=367
Alarm, Task Controller, Invalid Implement Configuration,

The type of implement connected isn't supported by this
version of the John Deere task controller. Disconnect the
not supported implement for further operation.
This alarm screen will be displayed whenever an ISO
implement is detected which is not supported by the John
Deere Task Controller. All non-supported ISO implements
are ignored by the John Deere Task Controller and cannot
be used for documentation purposes.
PC9749CC —19—29OCT13
Invalid Implement Configuration
CZ76372,00002B6 -19-24OCT13-5/6
Task Controller, Configuration of the connected implement

not compatible, The configuration of the connected
implement isn't compatible for the documentation
purposes, because the following information isn't
available:
This alarm screen will be displayed whenever an
implement is detected which is not compatible with Field
Doc, because some information is missing from the ISO
implement which is required for automatically setup of
Field Doc for documentation purposes. The missed
information is displayed in the message box of the alarm
PC9750CC —19—29OCT13
screen. Please contact your John Deere Dealer or the
manufacturer of the implement.
Configuration of Connected Implement Not Compatible
CZ76372,00002B6 -19-24OCT13-6/6
155-16 103113
PN=368
Diagnostic Addresses
PC12868CC —19—24OCT13
MESSAGE CENTER button > DIAGNOSTIC
ADDRESSES button > DEVICE drop down box > “VT;.001
Implement”
MESSAGE CENTER button

PC8668CC —19—24OCT13
DIAGNOSTIC ADDRESSES button
Address Number Address Name

000 Initial Address
001 Recall Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTCs)
002 System Beep 1
003 System Beep 2
008 Unswitched Power Supply Voltage
009 Switched Power Supply Voltage
010 Unit Internal Temperature
011 Vehicle CAN - Bus Status
012 Vehicle CAN - CAN HIGH Voltage
013 Vehicle CAN - CAN LOW Voltage
015 Implement CAN - Bus Status
016 Implement CAN - CAN HIGH Voltage
017 Implement CAN - CAN LOW Voltage
018 Flash Wear Count
019 Hours of Operation
023 Radar Input Status
024 Implement Switch Status
028 CCD Bus - Bus Status
029 CCD Bus - Positive Voltage
030 CCD Bus - Negative Voltage
031 Bezel Key Status
032 Real Time Clock (RTC)
033 Maximum Sleep Time
034 Boot Hold Switch
035 USB Flash Drive Status
036 Max Warm Boots Allowed
038 Synchronize Brightness
039 Daytime Luminance
040 Daytime Luminance Balance Ratio
041 Nighttime Luminance
042 Nighttime Luminance Balance Ratio
043 Internal Speaker Volume
045 Settings - Country Code
Continued on next page MM97743,0000289 -19-24OCT13-1/2
155-17 103113
PN=369
Address Number Address Name

046 Settings - Language Code
047 Settings - Numeric Format
048 Settings - Date Format
049 Settings - Time Format
050 Settings - Units of Distance
051 Settings - Units of Area
052 Settings - Units of Volume
053 Settings - Units of Mass
054 Settings - Units of Temperature
055 Settings - Units of Pressure
056 Settings - Units of Force
057 Settings - GPS Time Sync
058 Settings - Current Date
059 Settings - Current Time
060 Radar Calibration Constant
061 UIM Accept Global Messages
062 Access Manager Password
72 Configurable Vehicle Bus Function Instance
227 Boot Block Program Part Number (Software)
228 Boot Block Program Version Number (Software)
231 Board Service Package Part Number (Software)
232 Board Service Package Version Number (Software)
233 Platform Virtual Terminal Part Number (Software)
234 Platform Virtual Terminal Version Number (Software)
235 Device Part Number (Hardware)
236 Device Serial Number (Hardware)
237 Software Assembly Part Number
238 Software Assembly Version Number
MM97743,0000289 -19-24OCT13-2/2
155-18 103113
PN=370
Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Name DTC Description
158.03—VTI Switched Supply Voltage High The voltage level of the switched power is greater than 32.0V.
158.04—VTI Switched Supply Voltage Low The voltage level of the switched power is less than 8.5V.
168.03—VTI Unswitched Supply Voltage High The voltage level of the unswitched power supply is greater than 32.0V.
168.04—VTI Unswitched Supply Voltage Low The voltage level of the unswitched power supply is less than 8.5v.
609.12—CAN Micro communications failure Permanent channel down condition detected on SPI comm lines
442.00—Display Unit Temperature High The unit temperature read from the internal analog digital convertor is
greater than 80° C, at which the LCD backlight shall be turned off.
442.01—Display Unit Temperature Low The unit temperature read from the internal analog digital convertor is
less than -30° C, at which the LCD backlight shall be turned off.
523310.12—NOR Flash Memory Read/Write Failure Possible sources of this error: 1) The Manufacturing Info Block in NOR
flash has an invalid CRC and thus cannot be read. 2) The Manufacturing
Info Block in NOR flash could not be written to successfully. Currently,
only the Current Vehicle Model / Serial Number number fields can be
modified by the user (through the VTi OBD interface).
523771.03—CCD High Line Voltage High The voltage level on the CCD+ line of the CCD Bus is greater than 3.2V.
523771.04—CCD High Line Voltage Low The voltage level on the CCD+ line of the CCD Bus is less than 1.4V. (If
both the CCD+ and CCD- lines are reporting less than 0.5V, it is assumed
the CCD bus is not in use on this vehicle and this DTC will be disabled)
523772.03—CCD Low Line Voltage High The voltage level on the CCD- line of the CCD Bus is greater than 3.2V.
523772.04—CCD Low Line Voltage Low The voltage level on the CCD- line of the CCD Bus is less than 1.4V. (If
both the CCD+ and CCD- lines are reporting less than 0.5V, it is assumed
the CCD bus is not in use on this vehicle and this DTC will be disabled)
524050.12—Real Time Clock (RTC) Communications channel failure with RTC or power to RTC is lost.
MM97743,0000288 -19-21JUL10-1/1
155-19 103113
PN=371
Trouble Code Pop-Up Boxes—Platform Core

Software
FAULT CONDITION FAULT DESCRIPTION ALARM TEXT
CAN bus communications overload. Reset the display or turn the power off and then
CAN bus inbound communications overload. back on.
There is a technical problem preventing proper operation of the display with the following
When an implement's object pool is rejected by the VT implement. Please contact implement manufacturer with this information:
A valid USB drive is inserted that contains bad setup The setup data on the USB drive is invalid. Please resave the setup data to the drive
data. from your computer.
A valid USB drive is inserted that contains bad setup
data that cannot be read by this version of the display The setup data on the USB drive cannot be read by the display. Please update your
software. display software.
A USB drive is inserted that cannot be used by the
display The USB drive is not compatible with the display. Please use a different drive.
If the user is in the middle of setting up a new
operation and they switch to the homepage, the apps
on the homepage would be disabled in that case.
Similarly, if the user was changing the status of a job,
the apps on the homepage would be disabled. In both
of these cases there is no error There is an alarm or pop-up within the GreenStar 3 application that requires your attention.
Memory 90% Full Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data.
Memory Full Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data.
Communication lost with ISO implement. If implement was not disconnected, check
VI Implement is removed connections and cycle power.
Internal memory dedicated to ISO implements is full. Remove implements to free memory
Internal Memory Full--From VI Object Pools space.
Internal Memory Full-From Documentation and
Curved Track data Internal memory is full.
New software found for display. (This alarm will re-appear at every power cycle or if USB
New software found for display drive is re-inserted.)
The following VI(s) are no longer communicating with
the display. Check the indicated device(s) and CAN
bus wiring. Some device(s) are no longer communicating with the display. Check the CAN Bus wiring.
CAN Bus communications overload. Reset the display or turn the power off and then
CAN bus inbound communications overload. back on.
A failure has been detected in the display’s internal An error occurred during reprogramming. Perform reprogramming process again. If
memory. (Reprogramming) problem reoccurs contact your John Deere dealer.
Legacy device reprogramming error. Device not An error occurred during reprogramming. Perform reprogramming process again. If
reporting version info problem reoccurs contact your John Deere dealer.
Legacy device not found while programming product Device not found while programming product. Check wiring and connectors.
Prior setup data found on USB drive. Select CONTINUE button to overwrite this data.
Attempt to copy the setup data to a “new” USB drive Select CANCEL button to abort the operation. (If the user decides to continue, there will
that already has setup data on it be a second popup)"Are you sure you want to overwrite?"
Wrong activation code Invalid activation code. Please reenter activation code.
Customer attempts to record boundary when one
already exists Are you sure you want to redefine the boundary?
All New/Edit Screens: User attempts to create a
duplicate name in any of the New/Edit screens This entry is already being used. Please select a new entry or cancel to modify the entry.
The touchscreen is malfunctioning. Try to reboot the device, utilize an external display
This alarm will be shown after we have received a control, or the bezel keys on the backside of this display for screen response. If problem
touch event for 60 seconds. persists, please contact your John Deere Dealer.
This alarm will be shown after we have received a A button is malfunctioning. Try to reboot the display. If the problem persists, please contact
touch event for 60 seconds. your John Deere Dealer.
GPS Alarms For GreenStar Basic/Deluxe
200 GPS communications failure No communication with GPS receiver. Check connections at GPS receiver.
No GPS. Tracking Disabled No GPS position available. Verify GPS receiver has clear view of sky.
No Diff. Tracking Disabled. No GPS differential correction available. Verify GPS receiver has clear view of sky.
2D GPS in use. 2D GPS in use. Verify GPS receiver has clear view of sky.
Continued on next page CZ76372,0000296 -19-12JAN11-1/2
155-20 PN=372
103113

The GPS receiver must be set to report at the 5Hz message output rate. Confirm settings
on GPS receiver and change output to 5Hz. (For 3rd-Party Controllers)
Tracking Inaccurate The GPS receiver must be set to NOTE: 3rd-Party controllers are controllers using RS232 connection (Field Doc Connect)
report at the 5Hz. Rate. Confirm settings on receiver. and ISOBUS compliant controllers supporting Task Controller functionality.
Language Loading Errors:
CRC bad, missing a colon, bad prep header, etc. Language load detected corrupt file. Reload software to USB drive.
Hardware compat. version mismatch. Invalid hardware for language file. Reload software to USB drive.
Software version mismatch. Language file incompatible with application. Reload software to USB drive.
Timeout waiting for CAN62 Response To Request Device failed to start programming language. Reload software to USB drive.
Target sent FAIL in CAN62 Response To Request Device failed to continue programming language. Reload software to USB drive.
Timeout waiting for CAN62 Response To Checksum Device failed to report a language checksum. Reload software to USB drive.
Target sent FAIL in CAN62 Response To Checksum Device reported an invalid language checksum. Reload software to USB drive.
Timeout waiting for CAN62 Response To Remove Device didn't respond to the request to remove language. Reload software to USB drive.
Target sent FAIL in CAN62 Response To Remove Device failed to remove a language. Reload software to USB drive.
Flash Write Failure. Device failed while writing language to memory. Reload software to USB drive.
Timeout waiting for CAN62 Response To New Data Device stopped programming language prematurely. Reload software to USB drive.
Product ID mismatch Language is incompatible with loaded product. Reload software to USB drive.
Platform Core Software
CZ76372,0000296 -19-12JAN11-2/2
155-21 103113
PN=373
Trouble Code Pop-Up

Boxes—Documentation Software
Task selected, recording is on, the operation mandatory details are not No operation details defined. Go to GreenStar setup and enter operation
defined. info.
Invalid prescription Prescription file is invalid. -Verify rate units on prescription are correct.
Totals: Client Undefined Alarm issued stating that the user must select a Client to view totals.
Totals: Client and Farm defined, Field undefined. Alarm issued stating that the user must select a Field to view Field, Task,
or Load Totals.
Totals: CFF, Task, and Operation defined, Crop/Product Type undefined. No Alarm. Operation defaulted to ““ and Task Totals are listed.
Totals: CFF and Crop/Product Type defined, Task and/or Operation Alarm issued stating that the user must select a Task and Operation to
undefined. view Field or Load Totals.
Totals: Client, Crop and Task defined, Farm and Field undefined. No Alarm. Task and Operation defaulted to ““ and Crop Totals are listed.
Reset totals to zero Are you sure you want to zero the totals listed below?
In order to record a product application, you must choose a product type
and product name on one of the ADD PRODUCT boxes. Choices will
be CHANGE, which takes the user to the product summary screen, or
REMOVE OPERATION which will flash up the "Are you sure you want to In order to record a product application, you must choose a product type
delete this operation" message. and product name on one of the Add Product boxes.
When no products are specified in an application No products are specified, please select a product.
An alarm shall be issued if there is a prescription selected in Field Doc Prescription available but not selected. Go to implement setup to select
but not selected in the planter/sprayer setup. the prescription as the rate.
An alarm will be issued if Field Doc has a prescription selected, but the
planter/sprayer is outside the field boundary for the prescription. "Default Machine outside the field boundary for the prescription. Default
Rx Rate Used. Prescription rate being used.
At power-up, An alarm will be issued if a prescription is being used and
the prescription multiplier for an operation is not set to 100%. Prescription Multiplier not 100%.
Implement width set to zero. Implement width is set to zero. Implement width is required to record data.
Anywhere: User selects the DOCUMENTATION button before filling
out CFFT You must choose a Client, Farm, Field, Task from the Resources button
Communication lost with controller. If controller was not disconnected,
check connections and cycle power. If controller was disconnected
Communication lost with a connected controller. please review operations selected.
Communication lost with controller. If controller was not disconnected,
check connections and cycle power. If controller was disconnected
Field Doc didn't get some periodic messages please review operations selected.
Prescription available but not selected. Check setup on the implement
to ensure prescription is selected as the rate.
Air Cart Setup: Air cart is on the bus, 1st tank has been defined with You are creating another seeding (application) operation. Would you
an operation, Second tank is created with the same operation type as like this to be the same as the Front (Middle)(Rear) Tank seeding
the first tank. (application) operation?
Air Cart Setup: User selects enter for the previous message Please enter the tank ratios for each tank. (if applicable)
Air Cart Setup: User enters tank ratios that do not add to 100 Tank ratios must add to 100
No prescription file for selected field. -Verify field and operation
are correct. -Verify prescription was saved on USB drive. -Resave
SeedStar selects Rx but Documentation doesn't have Rx selected. prescription to drive if necessary.
Tank Mix Screen: User attempts to add a second ingredient in a tank
mix without a carrier or base solution rate You must enter a carrier and base solution rate before building a tank mix
The RS232 controller model selected is incorrect. Please verify and
Incorrect model is possibly selected reenter manufacturer and model number.
Recording is not currently allowed Recording is not currently allowed. Verify settings on RS232 controller.
Alarm for manual controller when target rate changes Target rate has changed. Alarm for manual controller.
Raven controller not communicating actual rate. Verify Raven controller
Alarm when Raven is communicating everything but an actual rate settings and connections to the display.
Special handling will be needed for each controller to monitor the health
of the connection Communication problem with controller. Check connections to controller.
CZ76372,00001B8 -19-04OCT10-1/1
155-22 PN=374
103113
GreenStar Diagnostics
Required Items for Documentation ISOBUS compliant controllers supporting Task

The following items are required for documentation to
function: Required Items for Guidance
• Client, Farm and Field The following items are required for guidance to function:
• Task
• Operation • Tracking mode set to Straight Track, Curve Track, Circle
• Operation Details Track (only available with optional PivotPro module)
• Product Type/Name or Row Finder
• Target Rate/Rate Units • Track spacing (See equipment section of GreenStar
• Recording Source Basics/Pro General Setup)
• Implement Width/Offsets • Track 0 (Except for Curve Track and Row Finder)
• Controller Setup (when using 3rd-Party controllers) • GPS signal (StarFire signal required)
NOTE: 3rd-Party controllers are controllers using
CZ76372,0000144 -19-26AUG10-1/1
Repeat Mode • No—Suppress subsequent alerts until power

cycle (cold or warm boot) or enter a new field.
Repeat mode defaulting off if curves are not present in
field. d. Check field selection has changed
1. Repeat Mode ON • Yes—Check that there are curve segments in this
field.
a. Manual Record—Alert - Yes—No Action.
• Yes—Turn repeat mode off; begin recording. - No—Default Repeat Off; no alert.
• No—Don't suppress subsequent alerts. 2. Repeat Mode OFF—Check field selection has
b. Recording tied to AutoTrac—Alert changed.
• Yes—Turn repeat mode off; begin recording. a. Yes/Correct—Check that curve segments.
• No—Suppress subsequent alerts until power • Yes—Alert
cycle (cold or warm boot) or enter a new field. • No—No Action
c. Recording tied to Documentation—Alert b. No—No Action.
• Yes—Turn repeat mode off; begin recording.
NS43404,0000161 -19-20JUL10-1/1
155-23 103113
PN=375
Guidance Alarms
Message Description
SSU Communication Error No communication with vehicle steering controller (SSU). Check vehicle for diagnostic codes and contact
your John Deere Dealer.
Turn Predictor Turned On Turn predictor is turned ON. Use the check box to turn it OFF
AutoTrac Deactivated AutoTrac system deactivates when operator is out of seat for more than 5 seconds
AutoTrac The operator is responsible for collision avoidance. Turn AutoTrac OFF before entering roadways.
No Setup Data! Please import a new data Profile. Export data to a USB drive first if you want to keep old data.
AutoTrac SSU Software See your John Deere Dealer for SSU update.
Incompatible
Communication Error Communication problem with controller. Check connections to controller.
Mobile Processor Detected Mobile Processor Detected on CAN Bus. GreenStar Application is disabled. Remove mobile processor
and cycle power to enable GreenStar application.
GPS Communication Problem No communication with GPS receiver. Check connections at GPS receiver.
Tracking Inaccurate The GPS receiver must be set to report at the 5Hz message output rate. Confirm settings on GPS receiver
and change output to 5Hz,
Invalid Boundary An invalid boundary has been recorded. You may continue recording or clear the current boundary and start
recording again.
Activation Error Invalid activation code. Please reenter activation code.
Invalid Filter All the fields that are required to be filled out based on the Totals Type Selected have not been filled out.
Flags of Same Selection Selected the Flags of same name and mode.
Name Already Exists The name you have entered already exists in this list. Please enter a new name.
GPS Communication Problem No communication with GPS receiver. Check connection at GPS receiver and perform operation again.
Curve Track Memory Full Internal memory available for Curve Track is full. Data must be cleared to continue Curve Track Operation.
Clear curved track data from system
AutoTrac Disabled AutoTrac SF1 license cannot operate with current StarFire software. Update StarFire software to operate
AutoTrac.
AutoTrac Disabled AutoTrac SF1 license cannot operate while SF2 corrections are turned on. Turn SF2 corrections off to
operate AutoTrac.
License Problem No license available for the selected tracking mode. Previous tracking mode will be selected.
Duplicate Name Name already exists. Select another name.
Curve Track Recording Curve Track recording in progress. Cannot perform operation until recording is turned off.
Circle Definition Problem There was an internal error during Circle definition. Redefine the circle.
Circle Definition Problem Communication with GPS receiver was lost during circle definition. Redefine the circle once communication
has been re-established.
Circle Definition Problem Center point is too far. Select another center point.
A-B Line Definition Problem There was an internal error during A-B line definition. Redefine the A-B line.
A-B Line Definition Problem A timeout occurred during A-B line definition. Redefine the A-B line.
A-B Line Definition Problem A and B points of the A-B line are too close. Perform operation again.
Loss of GPS While Recording GPS has been lost while recording the boundary. Point logging will resume when the GPS signal returns. This
Boundary may result in an inaccurate boundary.
Memory Full Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data.
Memory 90% Full Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation data.
No Memory No Memory available for Curve Track. Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation
data.
Low Memory Low Memory available for Curve Track. Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete
Documentation data.
No Memory No Memory available for Straight Track. Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete
Documentation data.
No Memory No Memory available for Circle Track. Clear maps or export data to USB drive and then delete Documentation
data.
Circle Definition Problem The distance from the vehicle to the center point is greater than 1 mile. Select another center point or drive
another circle.
Zero All Totals You have decided to zero all totals for the selected filter.
Incorrect RS232 Controller Model The RS232 controller model selected is incorrect. Please verify and reenter manufacturer and model number.
Selected
Prescription Error Controller is not setup to accept prescriptions.
155-24 103113
PN=376
Message Description
Prescription Error Controller is setup to accept prescriptions. No controller prescription has been selected.
Prescription Error Prescription rate is out of controller range.
Controller Unit of Measure Error Controller will only operate when using metric units.
Controller Unit of Measure Error Controller will only operate when using English (US) units.
Controller Unit of Measure Error Controller will only operate when using metric or English (US) units.
Controller Operation Error Invalid operation selected for controller.
Prescription Warning Out of field prescription rate is now being applied.
Prescription Warning Loss of GPS signal has occurred. Loss of GPS prescription rate is now being applied.
Prescription Warning Controller does not support selected prescription.
Alarms
CZ76372,00001B9 -19-04OCT10-2/2
Trouble Code Pop-Up Boxes—Guidance

Software
Issued once (at power up) the first time an SSU is detected, when
an AutoTrac key is activated. (Any guidance mode with AutoTrac The operator is responsible for collision avoidance. Turn AutoTrac OFF before
key and AT capable SSU.) entering roadways.
No communication with vehicle steering controller (SSU). Check vehicle for
Loss of SSU Communication for more than 1 second diagnostic codes and contact your John Deere Dealer.
Within 5 seconds away of a gap in Curved Track data Gap in Guidance Path
Within 5 seconds away from a curve of more than 30° between
consecutive segments Approaching Sharp Curve
The operator leaves the seat for more than 7 seconds while in a
tracking mode that supports Turn Predictor and TP is off (valid
SSU, AT licence, and seat switch Turn predictor is turned ON. Uncheck the box to turn it OFF.
AutoTrac SF1 license cannot operate while SF2 corrections are turned on.
SF1 AT Key with SF2 corrections turned on. Turn SF2 corrections off to operate AutoTrac.
AutoTrac SF1 license cannot operate with current StarFire software. Update
SF1 AT Key with old SF1 StarFire software. StarFire software to operate AutoTrac.
The user attempts to switch to a tracking mode for which there is No License available for the selected tracking mode. Defaulting to previous
no valid license available. tracking mode.
The user attempts to perform an operation that requires a GPS
signal (presses SetA, SetB, Curve Track recording, or Circle Track No communication with GPS receiver. Check connection at GPS receiver
recording buttons). and perform operation again.
The GPS signal is lost during definition of a circle using the driving Communication with GPS receiver was lost during circle definition. Redefine
method. the circle once GPS communication has been re-established.
The user inputs an A or B point that is too close to the other while A and B points of the AB Line are too close. Must have 10 m (30 ft) between
defining an AB Line (can occur using A+B and Lat/Long methods). point A and B. Perform operation again.
The user defines a circle with the center point at a distance greater
than 1 mile from the vehicle location. This alarm can also occur if The distance from the vehicle to the center point is greater than 1 mile. Select
the user selects a circle with a center point that is far away. another center point or drive another circle.
A timeout (user has not reached the minimum AutoB distance within
45 sec) occurs during AB Line definition using the AutoB method. A timeout occurred during AB Line definition. Redefine the AB Line.
The user attempts to change the tracking mode while recording Curve Track recording in progress. Cannot perform operation until Curve
in Curve Track. Track recording is turned off.
Clearing all shifts will restore original guidance track locations for the current
Press clear all shifts button field. Are you sure you want to proceed?
AutoTrac has detected an compatible SSU(Vehicle Controller) version.
Incompatible AutoTrac SSU Software. AutoTrac Deactivated (SSU Contact your John Deere Dealer to obtain the latest software updates for your
exit code) SSU in order to operate AutoTrac.
NS43404,000015F -19-20JUL10-1/1
155-25 PN=377
103113
AutoTrac Deactivation Messages the reason for deactivation. Messages are also displayed
indicating why AutoTrac did not activate. The deactivation
Each time AutoTrac is deactivated, a message is displayed messages displays for 3 seconds then disappears.
in the upper left corner of the perspective view indicating
Deactivation Message Description
Steering wheel moved Operator turned steering wheel
Speed too slow Vehicle speed is below minimum required speed
Speed too fast Vehicle speed is above maximum allowed speed
Invalid gear Vehicle operating in an invalid gear
Track number changed Track number changed
Invalid GPS signal SF1, SF2, or RTK signal was lost
SSU fault See John Deere dealer
Invalid display messages Check display settings
Invalid display settings Check guidance settings and Track 0 setup
No AutoTrac Activation No AutoTrac Activation on GS3
Heading error too large Vehicle is at an angle greater than 45 degrees from track
Off-track error too large Vehicle not within 40% of track spacing
Out of seat Out of seat too long
Oil temp too cold Hydraulic oil not above minimum required temperature
No TCM corrections Make sure TCM is turned on
Invalid SSU activation Need SSU activation code. See John Deere dealer.
SSU in diagnostic mode Fuse is in diagnostic slot in vehicle fuse box – remove fuse.
Header off Header was turned off
Road mode In transport gear
Invalid SSU voltage See John Deere dealer
Reverse timeout In reverse gear for more than 45 seconds
Vehicle too slow AutoTrac below minimum speed
Curve too sharp Maximum curvature has been exceeded
Vehicle not moving in a forward Vehicle must be in forward gear to activate
direction
Vehicle shutting down Vehicle is shutting down
Gear data error See John Deere dealer
Resume switch error See John Deere dealer
Keyswitch error See John Deere dealer
SPFH AutoTrac switch is not on Make sure SPFH AutoTrac switch is turned on
SPFH Quick Stop switch is on Make sure SPFH Quick Stop switch is turned off
AutoTrac Deactivation Messages
CZ76372,00000B9 -19-09JUL10-1/1
155-26 103113
PN=378
Specifications
Device Name, Source Address, and File
Directory
File Directory—GS3 claims multiple CAN addresses,
some of which are inherited from legacy system to be
more compatible with legacy controllers.
Device Name Source Address
GS3 0x18
Basic Perf Monitor (PrF)
GS3 0x26
Virtual Terminal on Implement Bus
(VTi)
GS3 0x26
Virtual Terminal on Vehicle Bus
(VTv)
GS3 0x2a
Guidance (NAV)
GS3 0x2b
Mobile Processor App (MPD)
GS3 0x80
Original GreenStar Display
Emulator (OGM)
GS3 0xd2
Documentation (TSK)
GS3 0xfc
KeyCard App (KCA)
Mobile Processor 0xD2
Original GreenStar Display 0x80
StarFire Receiver 0x1C, 0x?1C, 0x9C
TCM 0x92
Harvest Monitor for Combines 0xD3
(Gen II Moisture Sensor)
Combine Yield Monitor (Gen I 0xD3
Moisture Sensor)
Harvest Monitor for Cotton 0xD3
Cotton Mass Flow Sensor 0xB1—0xB8
SPFH Monitor 0xB0
AirCart Controller 0xC4
Planter Controller - SMVR 0xC0
Planter Controller - VRF 0xCE
Sprayer Controller - Liquid 0xE1
Sprayer Controller - Dry 0xCE
SSU 0x13
CZ76372,0000131 -19-13AUG10-1/1
160-1 103113
PN=379
Specifications
GreenStar Sytem Component Pinout

Circuit ID Function Wire Color
070 Ground Black
182 Constant Power Red
(+12vdc)
209 Any White
211 Any Brown
904 Implement Can Hi Yellow
905 Implement Can Lo Dk Green
914 Vehicle Can Hi Yellow
915 Vehicle Can Lo Dk Green
922 Switched Power Red
(+12vdc)
924 CCD + Yellow
925 CCD - Dk Green
998 Audio Mute Gray
999 Support Wire White
(dustcaps)
992 Constant Power Red
(+12vdc)
OUO6050,0000E50 -19-01SEP09-1/1
26 pin Display (V1) Pinout

Pin Circuit ID Function Wire Color Cornerpost Display
Connector
Pin
1 922 Switched Power (+12vdc) Red U
2 070 RS232 Gnd Black
3 209 Implement Switch White M
4 Analog Signal Ground
5 Analog Signal Input
6 925 CCD+ Drk. Green J
7 924 CCD- Yellow K
8 182 Constant Power (+12vdc) Red R
9 998 Audio Mute (Output) Gray H
10 Unused
11 211 Radar Input Brown L
12 915 Vehicle CAN LO Drk. Green S
13 914 Vehicle CAN HI Yellow T
14 070 Ground Black V
15 RS232 Port1 Rx
16 RS232 Port1 RTS
17 RS232 Port1 CTS
18 904 Implement CAN HI P
19 905 Implement CAN LO N
20 Digital Output
21 Digital Input
22 907 RS232 Port0 Tx
23 909 RS232 Port0 Rx
24 906 RS232 Port0 RTS
25 908 RS232 Port0 CTS
26 RS232 Port1 Tx
CZ76372,00000BB -19-16JUL10-1/1
160-2 103113
PN=380
Specifications
EC Declaration of Conformity
Deere & Company
Moline, Illinois U.S.A.
The person named below declares that
Product: GreenStar 3 Display 2630
Fulfills all relevant provisions and essential requirements of the following directives:
Directive Number Certification Method

Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC Self certified, per Annex II of the Directive
Name and address of the person in the European Community authorized to compile the technical construction file:
Brigitte Birk
Deere & Company European Office
John Deere Strasse 70
Mannheim, Germany D68163
EUConformity@johndeere.com
Place of declaration: Kaiserslautern, Germany Name: Hans Juergen Nissen
Date of declaration: 19 July 2010 Title: Engineering Manager
Manufacturing unit: John Deere Intelligent Solutions Group Ag Management Solutions
DXCE01 —UN—28APR09
BA31779,00002F9 -19-30NOV11-1/1
160-3 103113
PN=381
Specifications
Toxic or Hazardous Substances or Elements Disclosure

The Environment Friendly Use Period (EFUP) marked on this product PC15290 —UN—31OCT12
refers to the safety period of time in which the product is used under
the conditions specified in the product instructions without leakage of
noxious and harmful substances.
The EFUP relates only to the environmental impact of the product in
normal use, it does not imply product life.
In accordance with the requirements specified in SJ/T11364-2006, all
GreenStar 3 2630 Displays sold in the People's Republic of China are
marked with the following pollution control logo.
Toxic or hazardous substances and elements

Polybrominated
Hexavalent Polybrominated dephenyl ethers
Part Name Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Chromium (Cr (VI)) biphenyls (PBB) (PBDE)
TS/LCD Assembly X O O O O O
PCBA (Base) X O O O O O
PCBA (CPU) X O O O O O
CPU Housing O O O O O O
Rear Enclosure O O O O O O
Speaker Assembly X O O O O O
Cap O O O O O O
Hardware O O O X O O
Plug O O O O O O
Screw, Wing Head O O O X O O
O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in
SJ/T11363-2006.
X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials for this part is above the limit
requirement in SJ/T11363-2006.
CZ76372,0000535 -19-01NOV12-1/1
Identify Date Code

Use the date code (A) on the product label to identify
the date of manufacture. “YY" (B) identifies the last two
numbers of the year of manufacture; “WW” (C) identifies
the week number of calendar year of manufacture.
PC17568 —UN—16AUG13
NOTE: The week number of manufacture ranges
between 01-53.
Date Code
YY Last Two Numbers of Example:
Year of Manufacture 11 = 2011
12 = 2012
13 = 2013 Product Label Example
WW Week Number of Example: PC17574 —UN—16AUG13
Calendar Year of 01, 02, 03...53
Manufacture
A—Date Code (Date of C—Week Number of Calendar

Manufacture) Year of Manufacture
B—Last Two Numbers of Year
of Manufacture Date Code Example
HC94949,0000342 -19-23AUG13-1/1
160-4 103113
PN=382
Specifications
Customs Union–EAC
Information for products that bear conformity mark of the Customs Union member states
Manufacturer: Deere & Company
Moline, Illinois U.S.A.
Model: GreenStar 3 2630 Display
Made in Mexico
Made in U.S.A.
Name and address of the authorized representative in the Customs Union of Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan:
Limited Liability Company
"John Deere Rus”
Address:
142050, Russia, Moscow region, Domodedovo district, Domodedovo, Beliye Stolbi micro district, vladenye "Warehouse 104," Building 2.
For technical support, please contact your dealer.

PC17575 —UN—16AUG13
HC94949,00003CD -19-26AUG13-1/1
160-5 103113
PN=383
Glossary
Glossary of Terms
Glossary of Terms
Term Meaning
AB Curves Uses a manually driven curved path with two end points (beginning and end) to generate parallel passes.
Accuracy Bar Step Size Used to set the value of offtrack distance each arrow on the Path Accuracy Indicator represents.
Activated (4/4 Status of pie with “A”)—Resume switch has been selected and AutoTrac is steering the vehicle.
Adaptive Curves Uses a manually driven initial pass, then guides off of previous pass.
The abbreviation for agriculture.
Ag
The agricultural equipment division of John Deere.
AGC Automatic Gain Control.
AMS Ag Management Solutions.
Apex Desktop software for field mapping. The successor to JD Office.
Adjustable Seed Rate Controller. Legacy variable rate seeding controller for planters. One of the SeedStar
ASRC generation 1 controllers. Also known as Variable Rate/Variable Drive, VRD, or VR. Companion to the
Seed Monitor.
AT AutoTrac.
ATU Universal AutoTrac. A guidance system for vehicles that do not support AutoTrac directly.
AutoTrac Assisted steering system based on satellite guidance that automatically steers the tractor through the field.
AutoTrac Deactivation Message Shows operator why AutoTrac deactivated.
C&CE The consumer and commercial equipment division of John Deere.
C&F The construction and forestry division of John Deere.
CAN Controller Area Network.
CCC Customer Contact Center.
CCD Chrysler Collision Detection. Later named SBI when it became a commercially available system.
CE Conformité Européne (European mark signifying compliance of directives).
(Only available with optional PivotPro module.) Uses a center pivot center point location to define concentric
Circle Track
circles (tracks).
(2/4 Status of pie)—Valid AutoTrac Activation, Tracking Mode has been determined and a valid Track 0 has
Configured
been established. Correct StarFire signal level for AutoTrac Activation is selected. Vehicle conditions met.
DGPS Differential GPS. A system of increasing the accuracy of GPS using a separately broadcast correction signal.
Display General term which refers to both Original GreenStar Display and GreenStar 3 Display.
DOP Dilution of Precision. A term used to quantify the accuracy of a GPS fix.
DRC Dry Rate Controller.
DTAC Dealer Technical Assistance Center.
DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code.
Electronic Control Unit—A CPU-based device that monitors and/or controls a vehicle function. ECUs are
ECU
typically networked together using the CAN.
EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service. The European DGPS signal.
Enabled (3/4 Status of pie)—Steer Icon has been selected and “Steer On” is displayed.
FD Field Doc.
FD-MBA Field Doc Map-Based Application.
A suite of applications on the MP and RCD that record the inputs on a field. The Field Doc applications are
Field Doc
capable of recording map-based variable rate inputs.
FlexBox One of a family of next generation controller systems used throughout the Ag division.
GAI GPS Accuracy Indicator.
GPS Global Positioning System.
GSD GreenStar Display.
GSD2630 One of the RCD GreenStar displays. A 10.4" VGA color touchscreen in a metallic silver housing.
Guidance Off For use when only documentation is needed.
GVC Global Vehicle Communications.
A suite of applications on the MP and RCD that record the crop yield on a field. The Harvest Doc applications
Harvest Doc
are capable of recording map-based crop yields.
HDOP Horizontal Dilution Of Precision.
Installed (1/4 of Status pie)—AutoTrac SSU and all other hardware necessary for use are installed.
165-1 PN=384
103113
Glossary
Glossary of Terms
Term Meaning
ISO International Standards Organization.
KeyCard PCMCIA card that holds and activates all AMS software on the Mobile Processor.
L-Band Frequency band containing the StarFire correction signals transmitted from the Inmarsat satellites.
L1 One of the frequencies used by the GPS satellites.
L2 One of the frequencies used by the GPS satellites.
L5 A new frequency available in Block III GPS satellites for additional accuracy.
LCD Liquid Crystal Display - a low power, flat panel display.
Lead Compensation Shows how far down current track guidance looks to for such things as turns. Used with Parallel Tracking only.
LED Light Emitting Diode.
MP Mobile Processor.
NA North America.
NMEA National Marine Electronics Association.
NMEA-0183 The standard for GPS data transmission between the receiver and any downstream processor.
PDOP Position Dilution of Precision.
Means of displaying status information gathered from the cab of John Deere equipment. This includes fuel
Performance Monitor
consumption and equipment performance.
PF Precision Farming.
PLD Programmable Logic Device.
RCD Reconfigurable Display (successor to the GreenStar Display).
RS232 A serial communication interface specification with bandwidth up to 115k bits per second at up to 50 feet.
Real Time Kinematic. A local, ground based differential correction technique involving a fixed receiver
RTK
calculating position offset vectors.
Row Finder Used in standing row crop applications to mark end of a pass and guide operator to next pass.
SF StarFire.
SF1 StarFire differential GPS with standard accuracy, ~14 inches pass-to-pass at 2σ.
SF2 StarFire differential GPS with enhanced accuracy, ~4 inches pass-to-pass at 2σ.
Set Track 0 Allows the operator to set initial track which all subsequent tracks are created from.
Seed Monitor. Legacy seeding monitor controller. One of the SeedStar Generation 1 controllers. Companion
SM
to the ASRC.
SNR Signal-to-Noise Ratio.
SPFH Self Propelled Forage Harvester—A machine to harvest crops such as hay or corn for use as animal forage.
Steering System Unit. The controller on the vehicle that transforms errors in position or heading to
SSU
commands for the steering actors.
The AMS GPS receiver system. This consists of a multichannel receiver that operates on the L1 and L2
bands, an antenna, a sealed housing, and a terrain compensation unit (on later versions). All versions of
the StarFire receiver can receive the GPS L1 & L2 signals, the WAAS differential correction signal, and the
SF1 and SF2 correction signals. All versions produce a 5Hz CAN bus output and a NMEA 0182 standard
StarFire output on the RS-232 interface.
The Navcom differential satellite correction signal. Navcom tracks the GPS satellites using a global
network of base stations. The data from these stations is processed and correction terms are generated to
compensate for satellite position and clock errors. There are two classes of StarFire correction service: SF1
provides a two-sigma pass-to-pass accuracy of fourteen inches, and SF2 provides four-inch accuracy.
Used to adjust position of machine left, center or right of set track. Shift track can be used to compensate for
Shift Track
GPS drift. Drift is inherent to any satellitebased, differentially corrected GPS system.
Straight Track Uses straight line parallel passes.
Terrain Compensation Module (formerly known as the IMU)—Corrects GPS data for Roll angle and yaw
TCM
angle errors.
TECU Tractor ECU. This is defined in ISO 11783 Part 9.
Tracking Tones Can be set to alert operator at a specified offtrack distance.
Alerts operator by predicting the end of pass. This feature can be turned on or off by selecting or deselecting
Turn Predictor
Turn Predictor check box.
Turning View Can assist operators to guide vehicle from one pass to the next by showing an overhead view of the field.
USB Universal Serial Bus.
VDOP Vertical Dilution Of Precision.
VR Variable Rate Controller. Another term for the ASRC. One of the SeedStar Generation 1 controllers.
165-2 103113
PN=385
Glossary
Glossary of Terms
Term Meaning
VRF Variable Rate Fertilizer Controller. Planter controller used to control the variable application of liquid fertilizer.
VT Virtual Terminal.
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation Service.
Wedge Box One of a family of general and special purpose controllers used throughout the Ag division.
WW Worldwide.
CZ76372,00001BB -19-04OCT10-3/3
165-3 PN=386
103113
Index
Page
Page
A
Area
AB Curve Track Mode Units...................................................................... 65-34
Creating an AB Curve ........................................... 50-42 Area Flags ................................................................ 45-30
Pause Recording .................................................. 50-43 Area Units
Saving Data .......................................................... 50-44 Cotton ................................................................... 65-45
Accuracy AutoTrac ................................................. 35-1, 50-1, 50-57
Accuracy Bar Step Size .......................................... 50-9 Activation .............................................................. 50-57
Acquire Sensitivity .................................................... 50-71 Advanced Settings ................................................ 50-61
Activating AutoTrac .................................................. 50-57 Combines
Combines................................................... 50-79, 50-81 Activating System................................... 50-79, 50-81
Sprayers................................................................ 50-78 Deactivating System............................... 50-79, 50-81
Sugar Cane Harvester .......................................... 50-83 Deactivation Message....................... 50-4, 50-9, 155-26
Tractors................................................................. 50-76 Non-Deere Receiver ............................................. 135-2
Activation Off-track Error ......................................................... 50-3
Activations Tab Self-Propelled Forage Harvester
GreenStar 3 (GS3) .............................................. 45-1 Activating System.............................................. 50-82
Code ....................................................................... 35-1 Deactivating System.......................................... 50-82
Software.................................................................. 35-1 Enabling System ............................................... 50-82
Adaptive Curve Track Mode Setup..................................................................... 50-57
Operation .............................................................. 50-33 Sprayers
Pause Recording .................................................. 50-36 Activating System.............................................. 50-78
Setup..................................................................... 50-33 Deactivating System.......................................... 50-78
Smooth Tight Turns............................................... 50-31 Status Pie..................................................... 50-5, 50-57
Track 0 Setup........................................................ 50-27 Steering
Adaptive curves Sensitivity .......................................................... 50-60
Repeat mode Sugar Cane Harvester
Diagnostics...................................................... 155-23 Activating System.............................................. 50-83
Troubleshooting............................................... 155-23 Deactivating System.......................................... 50-83
Addresses Enabling System ............................................... 50-83
Diagnostics ......................................................... 155-17 Tractors
Advanced Performance Monitor Activating System.............................................. 50-76
Engine Coolant Temperature ................................ 60-17 Deactivating System.......................................... 50-77
Engine Oil Pressure .............................................. 60-17 Enabling System ............................................... 50-76
Engine Speed ....................................................... 60-17 Turn Predictor ....................................................... 50-10
Rear Hitch Position ............................................... 60-17 Universal ............................................................... 50-83
System Voltage ..................................................... 60-17 AutoTrac Combines
Transmission Oil Temperature .............................. 60-17 Enabling System ........................................ 50-79, 50-81
Advanced Performance Monitor AutoTrac Controller
(APM)............................................................. 60-1, 60-15 Performance
Additional Functions.............................................. 60-17 Optimizing ......................................................... 50-69
Recording................................................................ 60-6 AutoTrac Sprayers
Advanced Settings Enabling System ................................................... 50-78
Acquire Sensitivity................................................. 50-71 Auxiliary Controls
Curve Sensitivity ................................................... 50-71 Alerts......................................................................110-2
Line Sensitivity Heading........................................ 50-69 Assignment Error Messages................................110-12
Line Sensitivity Tracking ....................................... 50-68 Conflicts ...............................................................110-15
Steer Play ............................................................. 50-70 Disabled Functions ..............................................110-15
Steering Wheel Speed .......................................... 50-70 Implement Function Mapping.................................110-8
Air Carts.................................................................... 65-15 Preferred Assignments ........................................110-14
Alarm Screens ........................................................ 155-13 Softkey ...................................................................110-7
Alarms Average Fuel Economy
Task Controller .................................................... 155-14 Performance Monitor ............................................ 60-13
Alert Average Fuel Per Area
Headland................................................................. 50-4 Performance Monitor ............................................ 60-13
Alerts Average Operating Speed
Auxiliary Controls ...................................................110-2 Performance Monitor ............................................ 60-13
Resetting Display .................................................. 155-6
Index-1 103113
PN=1
Index
Page Page
Average Productivity Circle Track Mode ...................................................... 50-5

Performance Monitor ............................................ 60-13 Lat/Lon .................................................................. 50-49
Operation .............................................................. 50-49
B Track 0 Setup
Center Point ...................................................... 50-49
Boot-up .............................................................. 15-2, 20-2 Drive Circle........................................................ 50-48
Boundaries ............................................................... 45-21 Cleaning Display......................................................... 15-2
Boundary Type Description................................... 45-22 Client ........................................................................ 45-14
Exterior Boundary ................................................. 45-22 Color Test ................................................................... 35-7
Exterior Headland ................................................. 45-22 COM Port assignment
Headland Boundary .............................................. 45-22 Deactivate ..............................................................115-7
Headland Group.................................................... 45-22 Definition ................................................................115-1
Impassable Interior Boundary ............................... 45-22 Setting review ........................................................115-6
Interior Headland .................................................. 45-22 Setup...........................................................115-2, 115-4
Mapping Softkey ................................................... 45-21 Comar Order Number................................................. 35-1
Offsets Combines
Constant ............................................................ 45-29 Activating AutoTrac.................................... 50-79, 50-81
Creating ......................................................... 45-29 Deactivating AutoTrac................................ 50-79, 50-81
Driven ................................................................ 45-24 Enabling AutoTrac ..................................... 50-79, 50-81
Creating ......................................................... 45-24 Constant Offset Boundaries ..................................... 45-29
Headland ........................................................... 45-29 Creating ................................................................ 45-29
Creating ......................................................... 45-29 Controller
Top and Bottom ................................................. 45-26 Alarms................................................................. 155-14
Creating ......................................................... 45-27 Task Controller ........................................................ 85-3
Passable Interior Boundary................................... 45-22 Controllers .................................................................. 65-6
Setup..................................................................... 45-21 Non-Deere ................................................... 15-1, 65-58
Brightness................................................................... 35-4 RS-232 Receivers ............................................. 135-2
Control .................................................................... 35-5 Corn Head ................................................................ 65-33
Bus Status ................................................................ 155-5 Cotton
Button Calibration............................................................. 65-49
Resources/Conditions........................................... 45-14 Gin Turnout Percent.............................................. 65-31
Volume .................................................................... 35-4 Manual Calibration ................................................ 65-52
Quick Calibration................................................... 65-50
C Recording.............................................................. 65-48
Standard Calibration ............................................. 65-51
Calibration Country Setting........................................................... 35-6
Adjust Manually..................................................... 65-42 Coverage Maps .......................................................... 50-9
Cotton................................................................ 65-52 Creating an AB Curve............................................... 50-42
Cotton ................................................................... 65-49 Crop Growth Stage................................................... 45-14
Quick Calibration ............................................... 65-50 Crop Season............................................................. 45-14
Row Compensation ........................................... 65-50 Curve Sensitivity....................................................... 50-71
Standard Calibration.......................................... 65-51 Curve Track .............................................................. 50-41
Dual Beam Radar Sensor ....................................... 60-9 Curve Track Mode
Harvest.................................................................. 65-39 AB ........................................................................... 50-6
Performance Monitor .............................................. 60-8 Adaptive .................................................................. 50-5
Radar Calibration .................................................... 60-8
Cancel Button ............................................................. 30-2 D
Secondary Navigation............................................. 30-2
Capturing Screenshots ............................................... 15-4 Data Management .................................................... 145-1
Central Injection System........................................... 130-1 Date
Challenge Code.......................................................... 35-1 Setting Format ........................................................ 35-6
Checkbox Deactivating AutoTrac
Focus Color............................................................. 35-5 Combines................................................... 50-79, 50-81
Highlight Color ........................................................ 35-5 Sprayers................................................................ 50-78
Sync with Cab ......................................................... 35-4 Sugar Cane Harvester .......................................... 50-83
Circle Track .............................................................. 50-49 Tractors................................................................. 50-77
Setup..................................................................... 50-47 Deactivation Message
AutoTrac .................................................... 50-4, 155-26
Index-2 103113
PN=2
Index
Page Page
Desktop Software ..................................................... 65-30 Non-Deere......................................................... 135-2

Device Info................................................................ 155-5 Dry Box ................................................................. 65-21
Device Source Addresses ........................................ 160-1 GreenSeeker......................................................... 125-2
Diagnostic Addresses............................................... 155-4 Harvest.................................................................. 65-28
Diagnostic Readings................................................. 50-72 No GPS Mode......................................................... 65-1
Diagnostics On/Off .......................................................... 65-1, 65-28
Addresses ........................................................... 155-17 Operations .............................................................. 65-5
AutoTrac ............................................................. 155-24 Planters................................................................... 65-7
Bus Status............................................................. 155-5 Requirements...................................................... 155-23
Device Info ............................................................ 155-5 SpreadStar............................................................ 65-21
Display .................................................................... 15-2 Documentation softkeys ............................................. 65-3
Documentation.................................................... 155-23 Documentation Software
Documentation Software Trouble Codes .................................................... 155-22
Trouble Codes................................................. 155-22 Drive Circle
GPS .................................................................... 155-24 Track 0 Setup
GreenStar ........................................................... 155-23 Circle Track ....................................................... 50-47
GreenStar 3 (GS3).............................................. 155-23 Driven Boundary....................................................... 45-24
Guidance............................................................. 155-23 Creating ................................................................ 45-24
Message Center.................................................... 155-1 Dry Box..................................................................... 65-21
Platform Core Software Dual Beam Radar Sensor........................................... 60-9
Trouble Codes................................................. 155-20
Repeat mode ...................................................... 155-23 E
Softkey .................................................................... 35-7
SSU..................................................................... 155-24 Enable Operation........................................................ 65-6
Task Controller .................................................... 155-14 Enabling AutoTrac
Touchscreen............................................................ 35-7 Sugar Cane Harvester .......................................... 50-83
Trouble Codes ...................................................... 155-4 Tractors................................................................. 50-76
Dickey-John.............................................................. 65-58 Enabling System
Direct GPS AutoTrac Combines ................................... 50-79, 50-81
Tractor..................................................................... 60-9 AutoTrac Sprayers ................................................ 50-78
Disable Operation....................................................... 65-6 Engine Coolant Temperature
Display........................................................................ 15-2 Advanced Performance Monitor ........................... 60-17
Brightness ............................................................... 35-5 Engine Oil Pressure
Cleaning.................................................................. 15-2 Advanced Performance Monitor ........................... 60-17
Color Test................................................................ 35-7 Engine Speed
Control Advanced Performance Monitor ........................... 60-17
Cancel Button...................................................... 30-2 Enter Button................................................................ 30-2
Enter Button ........................................................ 30-2 Secondary Navigation............................................. 30-2
Menu Button ........................................................ 30-2 Equipment
Shortcut Buttons.................................................. 30-2 Softkey .................................................................... 45-3
Thumb Wheel ...................................................... 30-2 Hitch Type ........................................................... 45-4
Installation............................................................... 20-2 Machine............................................................... 45-4
Mounting ................................................................. 30-2 Model................................................................... 45-4
Navigation ............................................................... 15-3 Recording Source................................................ 45-4
Operation ................................................................ 15-2 Error Codes
Power Light ............................................................. 15-2 Reprogramming .................................................. 155-12
Reset..................................................................... 155-6 Exterior
Secondary Navigation.................................... 15-4, 30-2 Boundary............................................................... 45-22
Serial Number ......................................................... 35-1 Headland............................................................... 45-22
Softkey .................................................................... 35-3
Software F
Activation............................................................. 35-1
Storage ................................................................... 15-2 Farm ......................................................................... 45-14
Display Connector ...................................................... 15-3 Field.......................................................................... 45-14
Display Reset Button ......................................... 15-4, 30-2 Notes....................................................................... 65-4
Documentation File Directory ............................................................ 160-1
Air Carts ................................................................ 65-15
Controllers............................................................. 65-59
Index-3 103113
PN=3
Index
Page Page
Flags Guidance
Area Flags............................................................. 45-30 Adaptive curves
Line Flags ............................................................. 45-30 Repeat mode
Point Flags ............................................................ 45-30 Diagnostics .................................................. 155-23
FLAGS tab................................................................ 45-30 Troubleshooting ........................................... 155-23
Flow Chart Alarms................................................................. 155-24
Harvest Monitor Guidance Icon......................................................... 50-4
Cotton................................................................ 65-45 Guidance Mode....................................................... 50-9
Focus Color ................................................................ 35-5 Pre-Season Checklist ........................................... 155-7
Formatting Requirements...................................................... 155-23
Date ........................................................................ 35-6 Settings
Measurements ........................................................ 35-6 Accuracy Bar Step Size....................................... 50-9
Time ........................................................................ 35-6 Adaptive Curve Track Mode.............................. 50-27
Frequently Asked Questions .................................... 155-9 AutoTrac Deactivation Message ......................... 50-9
Full Screen ................................................................. 40-1 Guidance Mode ................................................... 50-9
Full Screen Mapping................................................... 50-8 Lead Compensation ................................. 50-9, 50-13
Set Track 0 .......................................................... 50-3
G Shift Track ......................................................... 50-15
softkey ........................................................ 50-2, 50-9
GGA.......................................................................... 135-1 Tracking Tones .................................................... 50-9
Glossary ................................................................... 165-1 Turn Predictor........................................... 50-9, 50-10
Glossary of Terms..................................................... 165-1 Turning View........................................................ 50-9
GPS Vehicle Heading Arrow.......................................... 50-13
Documentation........................................................ 65-1 GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab
Indicator .................................................................. 50-4 Turning View ......................................................... 50-10
RS-232 Receivers................................................. 135-1 GUIDANCE softkey
Harness ............................................................. 135-2 GUIDANCE SETTINGS tab
Settings ................................................................. 125-1 Turning View...................................................... 50-10
Tractor
Direct GPS .......................................................... 60-9 H
GreenSeeker ............................................................ 125-2
Documentation...................................................... 125-2 Half Screen................................................................. 40-1
Prescriptions .............................................. 120-4, 125-5 Harvest
Setup..................................................................... 125-2 Calibration............................................................. 65-39
GreenStar Cut Width .............................................................. 65-37
Component Pinout ................................................ 160-2 Documentation...................................................... 65-28
Diagnostics ......................................................... 155-23 Harvest Screen ..................................................... 65-29
Software.................................................................. 15-1 Header
GreenStar 3 (GS3) Setup ................................................................. 65-33
Activations Tab........................................................ 45-1 Low Flow Compensation....................................... 65-41
Advanced Setup...................................................... 45-2 Settings ................................................................. 65-29
Cut Width .............................................................. 65-37 Setup..................................................................... 65-29
Diagnostics ......................................................... 155-23 Header............................................................... 65-33
GreenSeeker Setup .............................................. 125-2 Totals....................................................................... 70-2
Implement Setup..................................................... 45-8 Harvest Monitor
Machine Setup ........................................................ 45-5 Documentation...................................................... 65-32
Memory Tab ............................................................ 45-1 Flow Chart
Pro .......................................................................... 45-1 Cotton................................................................ 65-45
Softkey ................................................................ 45-1 Moisture
Rate Controller...................................................... 75-10 Correction.......................................................... 65-43
Section Control Original GreenStar Monitor ................................... 65-45
Metric Quick Sheet ............................................ 75-15 Row Compensation
SAE Quick Sheet............................................... 75-17 Cotton................................................................ 65-50
Setup Setup..................................................................... 65-34
RS232 Receivers .............................................. 135-2 Header
VIEW tab................................................................. 45-1 Corn ...................................................................... 65-33
GSA .......................................................................... 135-1 Offset .................................................................... 65-36
GSD (RCD) Pinout ................................................... 160-2 Platform, Belt Pickup............................................. 65-33
Index-4 103113
PN=4
Index
Page Page
Row Crop .............................................................. 65-33 Options.................................................................... 40-3

Setup..................................................................... 65-33 Lead Compensation ........................................ 50-9, 50-13
Width..................................................................... 65-36 License ..................................................................... 45-14
Heading Error Meter ................................................. 50-65 Line Flags ................................................................. 45-30
Headland Line Sensitivity Heading ........................................... 50-69
Boundary Line Sensitivity Tracking........................................... 50-68
Constant Offset Boundary ................................. 45-29 Load Type................................................................. 65-31
Creating ......................................................... 45-29 Low Flow Compensation .......................................... 65-41
Group .................................................................... 45-22
Headland Boundary .............................................. 45-22 M
Headland Alert............................................................ 50-4
Highlight Machine ...................................................................... 45-4
Color ....................................................................... 35-5 Machine Model........................................................ 45-6
Focus ...................................................................... 35-5 Machine Name........................................................ 45-6
Hitch Type................................................................... 45-4 Machine Tab............................................................ 45-4
Home .......................................................................... 15-5 Machine Turn Radius.............................................. 45-7
Hours Since Last Service ........................................... 60-7 Machine Type.......................................................... 45-6
Humidity.................................................................... 45-14 Offsets..................................................................... 45-7
Setup....................................................................... 45-5
I Turning Sensitivity................................................... 45-7
Machine Settings
Impassable Interior Boundary................................... 45-22 Implement Detection ............................................... 90-2
Implement Map
Implement Widths ..................................................45-11 Prescriptions ......................................................... 65-53
Operating ................................................................ 85-1 Softkey
Setup....................................................................... 45-8 Area Flags ......................................................... 45-30
Offsets ............................................................... 45-10 Line Flags.......................................................... 45-30
Physical Width....................................................45-11 Point Flags ........................................................ 45-30
Physical Width Table ..........................................45-11 Mapping Softkey....................................................... 45-21
Track Spacing ....................................................45-11 Maps
Implement Detection................................................... 90-1 Coverage Maps....................................................... 50-9
Implement Offsets................................................... 90-6 Full Screen Mapping ............................................... 50-8
Implement Settings ................................................. 90-3 Measurements
Implement Offsets ............................................... 90-3 Setting Units of Measure......................................... 35-6
Machine Settings .................................................... 90-2 Memory Space ......................................................... 45-14
Theory of Operation ................................................ 90-1 Memory Tab
Implement Offsets GreenStar 3 (GS3).................................................. 45-1
Implement Detection ............................................... 90-6 Menu........................................................................... 15-5
Implement Settings Menu Button............................................................ 30-2
Implement Detection ............................................... 90-3 Message Center .............................................. 15-5, 155-1
Implement Offsets ............................................... 90-3 Icons ..................................................................... 155-3
Input Fields ................................................................. 30-1 Metric
Interior Headland ...................................................... 45-22 Setting Units of Measure......................................... 35-6
ISO Model.......................................................................... 45-4
Compliant Moisture
Auxiliary Controls ...............................................110-7 Alarm Setup .......................................................... 65-44
Implement Functions ..........................................110-7 Correction ............................................................. 65-43
Implements .................................................... 10-1, 85-1 Correction Setup ................................................... 65-42
ISO 11783 ............................................................... 15-1 Curve
Setup ................................................................. 65-44
L
N
Language
Setting..................................................................... 35-6 Navigation
Layout Manager.......................................................... 40-1 Display ........................................................... 15-3, 20-2
Configure New Leader .............................................................. 65-58
Multiple Run Pages ............................................. 40-5 Non-Deere Controllers..................................... 15-1, 65-58
Index-5 103113
PN=5
Index
Page Page
Numeric Format.......................................................... 35-6 Universal Performance Monitor

(UPM)........................................................... 60-1, 60-2
O Physical Width ...........................................................45-11
Table ......................................................................45-11
Off-track Error............................................................. 50-3 Pinout
Offsets GreenStar Component.......................................... 160-2
Boundaries GSD (RCD) ........................................................... 160-2
Constant ............................................................ 45-29 Planters ...................................................................... 65-7
Creating ......................................................... 45-29 Platform Core Software
Driven ................................................................ 45-24 Trouble Codes .................................................... 155-20
Creating ......................................................... 45-24 Platform, Belt Pickup ................................................ 65-33
Headland ........................................................... 45-29 Point Flags................................................................ 45-30
Creating ......................................................... 45-29 Power Light
Top and Bottom ................................................. 45-26 Display .................................................................... 15-2
Creating ......................................................... 45-27 Power-up .................................................................... 20-2
Header .................................................................. 65-36 Pre-Season Checklist
Implement ............................................................. 45-10 Guidance............................................................... 155-7
Machine .................................................................. 45-7 Seeding................................................................. 155-7
Operational Summary................................................. 45-1 Prescription
Operator ................................................................... 45-14 Multiplier................................................................ 65-54
Original GreenStar Override ................................................................ 65-54
Harvest.................................................................. 65-32 Prescriptions............................................................. 65-53
Original GreenStar Monitor......................................... 55-1 Background Layer................................................. 65-54
Combine................................................................ 65-32 Controllers............................................................. 65-59
Harvest Monitor..................................................... 65-45 GreenSeeker.............................................. 120-4, 125-5
Setup..................................................................... 65-53
P
Q
Page Layout ............................................................... 40-1
Parallel Tracking......................................................... 50-1 Quarter Screens ......................................................... 40-1
Passable Interior Boundary ...................................... 45-22 Quick Calibration
Path Accuracy Indicator.............................................. 50-3 Cotton ................................................................... 65-50
Pause Recording
AB Curve Track Mode........................................... 50-43 R
Adaptive Curve Track Mode ................................. 50-36
Performance Manager Radar
Advanced Performance Monitor (APM) ................ 60-15 Calibration............................................................... 60-8
Performance Monitor ......................................... 60-1, 60-7 Validation .............................................................. 60-10
Advanced Performance Monitor (APM) .................. 60-1 Raven ....................................................................... 65-58
Additional Functions .......................................... 60-17 Rawson..................................................................... 65-58
Averaage Fuel Per Area ....................................... 60-13 RCM setup................................................................ 135-1
Average Fuel Economy......................................... 60-13 Rear Hitch Position
Average Operating Speed .................................... 60-13 Advanced Performance Monitor ........................... 60-17
Average Productivity ............................................. 60-13 Recording ................................................................. 65-34
Calibration............................................................... 60-8 Advanced Performance Monitor (APM) .................. 60-6
Radar Validation.................................................... 60-10 Cotton ................................................................... 65-48
Recording................................................................ 60-5 Performance Monitor .............................................. 60-5
Resetting Totals .................................................... 60-14 Source..................................................................... 45-4
Settings ................................................................... 60-4 Recording Turning Points ......................................... 50-10
Setup....................................................................... 60-2 Region ........................................................................ 35-6
Total Area.............................................................. 60-13 Remote Display Access
Total Distance ....................................................... 60-14 Requirements.......................................................... 95-1
Total Engine Hours................................................ 60-14 Theory of Operation ................................................ 95-1
Total Fuel Used ..................................................... 60-13 Remove Operation ..................................................... 65-6
Total Idle Time....................................................... 60-14 Repeat mode
Totals..................................................................... 60-12 Diagnostics ......................................................... 155-23
Troubleshooting .................................................. 155-23
Index-6 103113
PN=6
Index
Page Page
Reprogramming Error Codes ................................. 155-12 Section Control

Reset Button...................................................... 15-4, 30-2 Enabling ................................................................ 75-10
Resetting Metric Quick Sheet................................................ 75-15
Display SAE Quick Sheet .................................................. 75-17
Alerts ................................................................. 155-6 Settings ..................................................................75-11
Totals..................................................................... 60-14 Seeding
Resetting Display...................................................... 155-6 Pre-Season Checklist ........................................... 155-7
Resetting Totals Self-Propelled Forage Harvester
Performance Monitor ............................................ 60-14 AutoTrac
Residue Management .............................................. 65-31 Activating System.............................................. 50-82
Resources/Conditions Deactivating System.......................................... 50-82
Button.................................................................... 45-14 Enabling System ............................................... 50-82
Softkey Serial Number
Client ................................................................. 45-14 Display .................................................................... 35-1
Crop Growth Stage............................................ 45-14 Service ADVISOR Remote
Farm .................................................................. 45-14 Download Updates................................................ 105-2
Field................................................................... 45-14 Install Updates ...................................................... 105-3
Humidity ............................................................ 45-14 Overview ............................................................... 105-1
License .............................................................. 45-14 Reprogramming ......................................... 105-1, 105-5
Operator ............................................................ 45-14 Theory of Operation .............................................. 105-1
Sky Condition .................................................... 45-14 Troubleshooting .................................................... 105-5
Soil Moisture...................................................... 45-14 Vehicle Compatibility............................................. 105-1
Soil Temperature ............................................... 45-14 Settings
Task ................................................................... 45-14 GPS ...................................................................... 125-1
Temperature ...................................................... 45-14 Harvest.................................................................. 65-29
Wind Direction ................................................... 45-14 Performance Monitor .............................................. 60-4
Wind Speed....................................................... 45-14 Section Control ......................................................75-11
Resume Switch......................................................... 50-59 Softkey .................................................................... 35-6
Row Setup
Compensation Adaptive Curve Track Mode ................................. 50-33
Cotton................................................................ 65-50 AutoTrac ............................................................... 50-57
Crop Head............................................................. 65-33 Boundaries............................................................ 45-21
Row Finder Mode ....................................................... 50-6 Circle Track........................................................... 50-47
Track 0 Setup........................................................ 50-18 Corn Head............................................................. 65-33
Row Spacing Documentation
Cotton ................................................................... 65-46 Client, Farm, Field, Task...................................... 65-4
RS-232 Receivers .................................................... 135-1 Machine, Implement ............................................ 65-4
Harness................................................................. 135-2 GreenSeeker......................................................... 125-2
Setup..................................................................... 135-2 GreenStar 3 (GS3).................................................. 45-2
Run Pages.................................................................. 40-5 RS232 Receivers .............................................. 135-2
Harvest.................................................................. 65-29
S Harvest Monitor.......................................... 65-32, 65-34
Moisture............................................................. 65-43
Safety, Steps and Handholds With Harvest Documentation............................. 65-32
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly....................... 05-2 Header .................................................................. 65-33
Saving Data Implement ............................................................... 45-8
AB Curve Track Mode........................................... 50-44 Machine .................................................................. 45-5
Scale Weight Moisture
Calibration Alarm ................................................................. 65-44
Combine ............................................................ 65-39 Moisture Correction............................................... 65-42
Screen Capture .......................................................... 15-4 Moisture Curve...................................................... 65-44
Screen Layout ................................................... 15-5, 40-1 Multiple Run Pages................................................. 40-5
Screenshot ................................................................. 15-4 Performance Monitor .............................................. 60-2
Secondary Navigation ................................................ 15-3 Platform................................................................. 65-33
Cancel Button ......................................................... 30-2 Prescriptions ......................................................... 65-53
Enter Button ............................................................ 30-2 RCM...................................................................... 135-1
Up/Down Arrows ..................................................... 30-2 Row Crop Header ................................................. 65-33
RS-232 Receivers................................................. 135-2
Index-7 103113
PN=7
Index
Page Page
Straight Track Mode.............................................. 50-20 StarFire..................................................................... 50-17

Typical Disk........................................................... 45-10 StarFire iTC .............................................................. 125-1
Typical Planter ...................................................... 45-10 Start-up....................................................................... 20-2
Yield Calibration Starting
Low Flow Compensation ................................... 65-41 Harvest Monitor..................................................... 65-32
Yield Calibration Factor Status Pie
Adjust Manually ................................................. 65-42 AutoTrac ...................................................... 50-5, 50-57
Yield Monitor Steer Play ................................................................. 50-70
Area Units.......................................................... 65-34 Steering
Yield Units ......................................................... 65-35 On/Off .......................................................... 50-4, 50-58
SETUP - YIELD CALIBRATION Sensitivity.............................................................. 50-60
Calibration Factor Adjusting............................................................ 50-60
Adjust Manually Steering Wheel Speed.............................................. 50-70
Cotton ............................................................ 65-52 Straight Track Mode ................................................... 50-5
Shift Track .................................................................. 50-4 Setup..................................................................... 50-20
Settings ................................................................. 50-15 Track Spacing ....................................................... 50-20
Shortcut Buttons ......................................................... 30-2 Sugar Cane Harvester
Sky Condition ........................................................... 45-14 Activating AutoTrac............................................... 50-83
Smooth Tight Turns Deactivating AutoTrac........................................... 50-83
Adaptive Curve Track Mode ................................. 50-31 Enabling AutoTrac ................................................ 50-83
Softkey Summary .................................................................... 45-1
Auxiliary Controls ...................................................110-7 Swap Track Mode....................................................... 50-6
Diagnostics ............................................................. 35-7 Sync With Cab............................................................ 35-4
Display .................................................................... 35-3 System Voltage
Documentation........................................................ 65-3 Advanced Performance Monitor ........................... 60-17
Equipment............................................................... 45-3
Hitch Type ........................................................... 45-4 T
Machine............................................................... 45-4
Model................................................................... 45-4 Tank Mixes................................................................ 65-24
Recording Source................................................ 45-4 Task .......................................................................... 45-14
GreenStar 3 (GS3) Pro ........................................... 45-1 Notes....................................................................... 65-4
Mapping ................................................................ 45-21 Task Controller............................................................ 85-3
Settings Softkey ...................................................... 35-6 Alarms................................................................. 155-14
Totals....................................................................... 70-1 Temperature ............................................................. 45-14
Software Theory of Operation
Activations............................................................... 35-1 Implement Detection ............................................... 90-1
Challenge Code ...................................................... 35-1 Thumb Wheel ............................................................. 30-2
Compatibility ......................................................... 75-10 Time
Desktop Software.................................................. 65-30 Setting Format ........................................................ 35-6
Documentation Software Toatal Area
Trouble Codes................................................. 155-22 Performance Monitor ............................................ 60-13
GreenStar ............................................................... 15-1 Top and Bottom Boundaries ..................................... 45-26
Platform Core Software Creating ................................................................ 45-27
Trouble Codes................................................. 155-20 Total Distance
Serial Number ......................................................... 35-1 Performance Monitor ............................................ 60-14
Update .................................................................... 15-1 Total Engine Hours
Soil Performance Monitor ............................................ 60-14
Moisture ................................................................ 45-14 Total Fuel Used
Temperature.......................................................... 45-14 Performance Monitor ............................................ 60-13
Soil Moisture............................................................. 45-14 Total Idle Time
Soil Temperature ...................................................... 45-14 Performance Monitor ............................................ 60-14
Sprayers Totals .......................................................................... 70-1
Activating AutoTrac............................................... 50-78 Harvest.................................................................... 70-2
Deactivating AutoTrac........................................... 50-78 Performance Monitor ............................................ 60-12
Enabling AutoTrac ................................................ 50-78 Resetting............................................................... 60-14
Section Control ......................................................75-11 Softkey .................................................................... 70-1
SprayStar.................................................................. 75-10 Touchscreen
SpreadStar ............................................................... 65-21 Calibration............................................................... 35-7
Index-8 103113
PN=8
Index
Page Page
Test ......................................................................... 35-7 Turn Predictor............................................................. 50-4

Track AutoTrac ............................................................... 50-10
Spacing ................................................................. 50-20 Turning
Track 0 Machine Turn Radius.............................................. 45-7
Adaptive curves Sensitivity................................................................ 45-7
Repeat mode Smooth Tight Turns
Diagnostics .................................................. 155-23 Adaptive Curve Track Mode.............................. 50-31
Troubleshooting ........................................... 155-23 Turn Predictor .............................................. 50-9, 50-10
Repeat mode Turning Points......................................................... 50-9
Diagnostics...................................................... 155-23 Recording .......................................................... 50-10
Troubleshooting............................................... 155-23 Turning View ........................................................... 50-9
Set B Later ............................................................ 50-22 Turning View............................................................. 50-10
Track 0 Setup
Adaptive Curve Track Mode ................................. 50-27 U
Circle Track Mode
Center Point ...................................................... 50-49 Universal Performance Monitor (UPM)....................... 60-1
Drive Circle........................................................ 50-48 USB Drive
Row Finder Mode.................................................. 50-18 Best Practices ......................................................... 15-3
Straight Track Mode.............................................. 50-19 Connector ............................................................... 15-3
Track Spacing............................................................45-11 Requirements.......................................................... 15-3
Tracking USB Drive Connector ................................................. 15-3
Tones ...................................................................... 50-9
Tracking mode V
Adaptive curves
Repeat mode Vanguard .................................................................. 65-58
Diagnostics .................................................. 155-23 Variety Locator.......................................................... 65-30
Troubleshooting ........................................... 155-23 Vehicle Heading Arrow ............................................. 50-13
Tractor View Tab ..................................................................... 50-3
Direct GPS .............................................................. 60-9 Volume Button ............................................................ 35-4
Tractors
Activating AutoTrac............................................... 50-76
Deactivating AutoTrac........................................... 50-77 W
Enabling AutoTrac ................................................ 50-76
Tram Lines................................................................ 50-54 Wind ......................................................................... 45-14
Setup..................................................................... 50-54 Direction................................................................ 45-14
Transmission Oil Temperature Speed.................................................................... 45-14
Advanced Performance Monitor ........................... 60-17
Trouble Codes .......................................................... 155-4 Y
Pop-Up Boxes
Documentation Software ................................. 155-22 YARA N-Sensor........................................................ 120-1
Platform Core Software ................................... 155-20 Yield Units ................................................................ 65-35
Troubleshooting Cotton ................................................................... 65-45
AutoTrac ............................................................. 155-24
Bus Status............................................................. 155-5
Device Info ............................................................ 155-5
Diagnostic Addresses ......................................... 155-17
Display .................................................................... 15-2
Documentation.................................................... 155-23
Documentation Software
Trouble Codes................................................. 155-22
GPS .................................................................... 155-24
Message Center.................................................... 155-1
Platform Core Software
Trouble Codes................................................. 155-20
Repeat mode ...................................................... 155-23
SSU..................................................................... 155-24
Task Controller .................................................... 155-14
Touchscreen............................................................ 35-7
Trouble Codes ...................................................... 155-4
Tuning Recommendations........................................ 50-61
Index-9 103113
PN=9
Index
Index-10 103113
PN=10
John Deere Service Literature Available
Technical Information
Technical information can be purchased from John Deere.
Some of this information is available in electronic media,
such as CD-ROM disks, and in printed form. Search
online from http://www.JohnDeere.com. Please have
available the model number, serial number, and name of
TS189 —UN—17JAN89
the product.
Available information includes:
• PARTS CATALOGS list service parts available for your
machine with exploded view illustrations to help you
identify the correct parts. It is also useful in assembling
and disassembling.
• OPERATOR’S MANUALS providing safety, operating,
maintenance, and service information. These manuals
and safety signs on your machine may also be available
in other languages.
• OPERATOR’S VIDEO TAPES showing highlights of
safety, operating, maintenance, and service information.
TS191 —UN—02DEC88
These tapes may be available in multiple languages
and formats.
• TECHNICAL MANUALS outlining service information
for your machine. Included are specifications, illustrated
assembly and disassembly procedures, hydraulic oil
flow diagrams, and wiring diagrams. Some products
have separate manuals for repair and diagnostic
information. Some components, such as engines, are
available in separate component technical manuals
• FUNDAMENTAL MANUALS detailing basic information
regardless of manufacturer:
- Agricultural Primer series covers technology in farming
and ranching, featuring subjects like computers, the
Internet, and precision farming.
TS224 —UN—17JAN89
- Farm Business Management series examines
“real-world” problems and offers practical solutions
in the areas of marketing, financing, equipment
selection, and compliance.
- Fundamentals of Services manuals show you how to
repair and maintain off-road equipment.
- Fundamentals of Machine Operation manuals
explain machine capacities and adjustments, how to
improve machine performance, and how to eliminate
unnecessary field operations.
TS1663 —UN—10OCT97
JS56696,00004D6 -19-07OCT08-1/1
170-1 103113
PN=397
John Deere Service Literature Available
170-2 103113
PN=398
John Deere Service Keeps You On The Job
John Deere Parts
We help minimize downtime by putting genuine John
Deere parts in your hands in a hurry.
That’s why we maintain a large and varied inventory—to
stay a jump ahead of your needs.
DX,IBC,A -19-04JUN90-1/1
The Right Tools

Precision tools and testing equipment enable our Service
Department to locate and correct troubles quickly . . . to
save you time and money.
DX,IBC,B -19-04JUN90-1/1
Well-Trained Technicians
School is never out for John Deere service technicians.
Training schools are held regularly to be sure our
personnel know your equipment and how to maintain it.
Result?
Experience you can count on!
DX,IBC,C -19-04JUN90-1/1
Prompt Service
Our goal is to provide prompt, efficient care when you
want it and where you want it.
We can make repairs at your place or at ours, depending
on the circumstances: see us, depend on us.
JOHN DEERE SERVICE SUPERIORITY: We'll be around

when you need us.
DX,IBC,D -19-04JUN90-1/1
103113
IBC-1 PN=399
103113
IBC-2 PN=400
103113
IBC-3 PN=401

Manual GS3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual GS3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual GS3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main components of the display?

What are the main components of the display?

What are some safety considerations when using the display?

What are some safety considerations when using the display?

*DCY*

GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents

If this product contains a gasoline engine:

The engine exhaust from this product contains

The State of California requires the above two warnings.

John Deere Ag Management Solutions

Read This Manual on vehicles equipped with a cab. Improper

Safety Signs Layout Manager

Continued on next page

Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this

Turning View.....................................................50-10 DOCUMENTATION softkey................................65-3

Continued on next page

Section Status Bar..............................................75-4 Auxiliary Control Softkey .............................. 110-7

Continued on next page

USB Troubleshooting Tips................................145-7

Troubleshooting and Diagnostics

Understand Signal Words

Follow Safety Instructions

Practice Safe Maintenance

Use Steps and Handholds Correctly

Handle Electronic Components and Brackets

Operate Guidance Systems Safely • Never get on or off a moving vehicle.

Use Seat Belt Properly

Read Operator Manuals for ISOBUS Implements

Avoid Backover Accidents

Automatic Guidance System Detected

Auxiliary Control Safety Signs

Continued on next page RN38933,0000136 -19-21SEP11-1/4

Auxiliary Control Configuration Changed

Auxiliary Control Enabled

Auxiliary Control Enabled

have been completed successfully, however,

Operating Temperature Range

• Ethernet Connector—With an adapter, an Ethernet

USB Drive • Connectivity - USB 2.0

Display Secondary Navigation

C—Vehicle Display Connector IMPORTANT: Display must be connected to

During power up of display, a start-up screen will show a

Display Power Up/Power Down

View Multiple Display Settings

PC8649 —UN—01NOV05 PC8650 —UN—01NOV05

Display Secondary Navigation

Display Secondary Navigation

CAUTION: Do not mount display control on

The display control is the secondary navigational point

A—Thumb Wheel C—CANCEL button

The Display Software Activation Process is completed.

NOTE: Sync with Cab feature only functions on

Continued on next page CZ76372,0000059 -19-24OCT13-5/6

Highlight/Focus Color can be changed by selecting

Display Brightness Control

There are three modes that the display backlighting can

Display - Main Page - Standalone Mode (No Network)

Continued on next page CZ76372,00001B0 -19-24OCT13-1/2

The Advance Display Settings button, found on Display

DCY